1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74 1974 Field Service Technical Manual Dec74

1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74 manual pdf -FilePursuit

1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74 1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74

User Manual: 1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 900

Download1974_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_Dec74 1974 Field Service Technical Manual Dec74
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
1974
FIELD SERVICE
TECHNICAL MANUAL

CONFIDENTIAL

1st Edition December 1974

Copyright © 1974 by Digital Equipment Corporation
The matenal in this manual IS for informatlonal
purposes and is subject to change without notIce.
DIgital Equipment Corporation assume~ no responsibility for any errors which may appe.u m thIS
manual.

Printed III U.S.A.

CONFIDENTIAL
This manual is printed for the express use ofField
Service Engineers employed by Digital Equipment,
is proprietary in nature and is not to be used or disclosed outside of Digitai Equipment Corporation.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts:

DEC
FLIP CHIP

PDP

DIGITAL

COMPUTER LAB

FOCAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FIELD SERVICE TECH TIP PROCEDURE
CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2

ORIGINATION, REVIEW, & APPROVAL

CHAPTER

TECH TIPS FORMS AND FORMAT

12 BIT AND CROSS PRODUCT LINE TECP TIPS

FIELD SERVICE TECH TIP PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1

PURPOSF

The purpose of this nrocedure is to ensure that all field
service technical manuals (tech tins) conform to one
format \oTit.h complete and accurate inforrnation. This
procedure is divided into three chapters desiqned to
generate, proc~ss, and implement tech tips with the
workload being distributed at all levels of involvement.
1. 2

CRITFRIA

Types of information to be included in a tech tip:

Nice to know information
Helpful troubleshooting techniques
Safety precautions
Possible oroblem areas and solution
Information not releasable ~o customers
Preliminary p~IS
Significant ECO errors
Unique product information
Pertinent vendor information

Page 1

CHAPTER 2
ORIGINATION, REVIEW, AND APPROVAL

2.1

2.2

ORIGINATOR

1.

Anyone in Field Service can generate a tech tip.
to Chapter 3 for Tech Tip Forms and Format.

2.

Field - Tech Tips generated in the field will be
submitted to the Regional Product Supoort Supervisor
for review.

3.

In-House, Depot, & Product Sunnort--Tech Tips generated
at the corporate level ,-till be sent to Product. Suonort
for review. CPL Tech Tips presently will be coordinated by
B Product Support.

Refer

REVIEW AND COORDINATION

1.

The review cycle for a Tech Tip will be as described in
figure 1. The author should receive notification of
approval or disapproval within 30 days of the date of
submission. Complete cycle equals 60 days.

?IyTO~
"
F.S. DISTRlBU(TI,"'

\

REGION

/)REVIEW (3

'PRELIMINARY
topy WITHIN
D/,YS

ro
\

PUBLISHING
(5 DAYS)

'..........

I

"
I

V.,,/

PRI)D SUPPORT, DEPO'i'
IN HOUSE FS

CORPORATE PROD. SUPPORT
REV!E~l (3 DAYS)

EDITING
TECH TIP COORDINATOR
(2 DAYS)
Fiqure 1. Tech Tip Reviewinq Cycle
Paqe 3

D~.YS)

2.

3.

The Regional Product Su~port Supervisor will be the
reviewing authority for Tech Tins generated in the
field.
It will be his responsibility to:

a

Assign each Tech Tin to an individual familiar
with the option for checking its authenticity
and format~

h

If disapproved notify the author in writing
within 3 \-lorking days of date it was received.

c.

If approved, forward the Tech Tip master to
corporate product support within 3 working days.
Tech Tips received from each reqion will be
considered ready for publication although they
will still be reviewed at the corporate level.

At the corporate level there will be assigned a Tech
Tip coordinator for the 12, 16, 18, or 36 bit processors.
He or she will be responsible:
a.

TO assign the Tech Tip to the ~roduct sup~ort
representative most familiar ~.,ith the option for
review.

~

To maintain a suspense file when the review on
each Tech Tip is to be completed.
(3 days after
receipt) •

c. To noti fv the author and each region when a Tech Ti p
has &een approved or disapnroved within 30 days of the
date originated. Anoroval!'; ...1ill be a copy of thz
Tech Tip marked "PRELIMINARY" ..

d. To assign aporoved Tech Tips a sequencial number
and arrange the Tech Tips in 'an econo!nical nroduction MASTER to be published. Blank Text
Headers can be obtained for this purpose on
DEC FOR"1 l2-(74N')-ll91-~T374.
Specifv "Crack and
Peel" in paper block on printing requisition.
e. To see to it that the Tech Tip is published ..

f.o To maintain a log of each 'Tech Tip by job number
to know
4.

'to1

here that Tech Tip is at all times.

CPL Tech Tips Dres~ntly \-,1'111 be coordinated by 8 product
Support. Upon receipt of a cpr, Tech Tip, the 12 bit_
Tech Tip Ccordinatoc ~"ili distri,but~ a CODY to e~"h
Product ~tnrket Supnort ~1aTlacrer (or th~ir 'T'ech 'J'io
Represel1tat.ive} ·",ho is cortcerned 'Iilith tna.t o?tion.o
It
will in turn be their rest<-'lls.i.b;.litv to have erIe of their
pcr'sonnel review tho Tech Ti.p as o.?r~aining to their
groc;,p and return the copy to the 12 Bit Co-ordiflator r-v th~
Suspense date of 3 da:i5.o· Notification by telephone ~·d.l:i..
be sufficient.: fer apprcval; if :10 reply is recai'led..O"l,:· tlfe
Pa~e 4

suspense date the Tech Tip Coordinator ,\:.,i11 initiate action
to obtain approval or disannroval.
CPL Tech Tios will then be as~iCfned a number bv the 12 Bit
Coordinator ~Then all cooies have been returned· apnroved.
Notification will then be provided to the author and the Tech
Tip sent to publicPI

120 usee

pulse)

I

wa,l 3000

,n.. ,

O.

Read EOa

sse

05

lIP1

W.,-lte lOOP.
200 BPI

RE,
STlllO
RD. 1 3000

"''''
RE,
STa10Q
GO,

Write one
word record

(2nd

1M21<

1M"

1M55

200 BPI

WllIl 30no

.JM,'
1>6

Read EOR
200 BPI

D7<1oA

write :trOll!
load polnt

Write frOtll.

1OiiJ'"i'iO'Iii
ea.d Porvard
top

DO

010

Read revers

RX<
STIIOO

Rea.d one

l.N7I<

word record

"",'

ROil 3000

200 BPI

(2nd
pu.be)

GO,
WRll 3000

Write one

"",'

R.,
GO,
Wltll 3000

012

Read frco
load point
Read Start
and NOP

Wr1t", one
word recard

1M,.

120 msec

!lM6V

10.4 msec;:

IN16R

'GO

:i°!~;I~1
lN16R

'GO

qoinq to
~ on·LJ

RE,

IM65

1M'.

RD.l 3(100

"",1

RB.l 3000

... ,

RO.l 3000

..

,

RO.l 3000

"''''

1_"1"_

point

"''''

Stop

Dll·A

word record
from load

6.5 msfIC

Read b/:lckwards on..
word record
Read from
load poInt
Read one
WQrd record

lMlOP

1>16.

90 lIIsee

(lOT
6104)

lMIOl"

4.3I1u.ee

(lOT

6704)

1~: 1~=r~ I - I""" [15 u~,

..",...

To chee1t timing f"rOlll load point reviJ'ld tbe tape in local. tmn ground
IM3f and cheal\: write timing. For read tillling. unground IH3Y. revino:l.
reground and. read the tape just written.
For the sKew ~"la~' write a J.ungt.h of ta~ and then reacl this portloa
ot! tape.

Llp~A~G~E~1~3~-AII~PA~G=E~R~E~v~ls=,~oN~____~np~u~B~L~IC~A~T~IO~N~D~A~T~E~~De=C~7~4~_:::::J

Title

Processor Applicability
All

ITech Tip
INumber

6S0/PDPS MEMORY ALTERATIONS

I I I I I I I

II-,A_U_tho_r-.::W.;.. .;.F.:.r.::e.::e:::m::.an::..-_ _ _ _R_ev_.::g_--j1
1Approval

WF r

Date

"I

680 TT # 1

Cross Reference

",I

Several incidents of -_intermittent PDPB/6BO program alterations have
been caused by multiple skips which occurred during the "TT SERVICE
SUBROUTINES ".
The intermittent, but erroneous, skips were traced to
the 8603 in the processor at PB2l which generates COUNT PC ENABLE.
To demonstrate the problem. the following program may be run while
varying the -15 volt margins on racks FB and PC.

0200
0201
0202
0203

I 6402
I 0000
I 7402
I JMP20.0

0204
0205
0206
0207
0210

TTl
LSW
CAW
JMP to TTl

I
I
I
I
I

7402
7402
7402
7402
7402

HLT
HLT
HLT
HLT
HLT!

The instruction 6402 generates the required skips as well as the occasional extra skips_ The contents of the LSW are normal for TTl
but the contents of CAW (74%2) and the halts in )62%4 and ~2~5 are to
demonstrate that the extra skips do occur.. The jump fJ2¢¢ is to make
the routine repetitive until the extra skip does occur. To watch the
extra skip pulses on the scope. connect a scope probe to PB21, pin T.

Remove the halts from the program and substitute JMP 9JZ¢¢1 s _
-15 volt processor wing margins on racks Band C.

Vary the

If the 680 has an 8603 which is causing the problem the following general
wave shapes may be seen:

PB21S

PB21R

PO:.!I T

-=rJ

I

n

IiEl

~
A

~~"'t--~

:

I

,

•

1*".

wtrith .ill wary in .hap. and
amplilud . . . a function of ·15 YOft mor;in.

'-../

An engineering evaluation of this problem has resulted in the
following :formalized solution which vill be incorporated in an
RCO which will be released soon.

DELETE.

Paqe 14

PC/64D to PB21T
PB2l T to PD22V

ADD.

PCIJ4D to PD22V
PB2l T to PD22U
PC28P to PC28M

Option or Designator

680 to 708
Title

680 T#
Cross Reference

All

W750 TT#1

E. Cummins Date
Title

Cross Reference

All

Date

681TT#1

ITech Tip
INumber

Title ERRORS WITH Maindec-,0'8-D72A
All

IAuthor Bill Freeman
I I , IApproval W. Cwnmins

'8'

,

,

PROBLEM:

I
12/05/73 I
g

Rev

Processor Applicability

Date

6B.(}-TT4f4

Cross

Ref~

Encountering false errors with 680 DCS Data & Control
Test MainDEC -08-D72A when running program in a 685
and 683 configuration of a 680 system in the error
check. mode.

SOLUTION: Eliminate error checking and scope each input and output for proper operation. 'I'he 683 can also be disconnected
and the W7SD I S in 685 jumpered input to output. This

will allow checking of 685 with program in error check
made. The false errors are from the program not taking
into account delays of the relays switching.
Tide

ITech Tip
INum~

681 Jumpers

"'7'*",

AU '8 IP

APP1Iicab,ilitv,

L i

w_....

IAuthor W. Freeman
IApproval W. Cummins

R..,

I

0

Date 11/15/73

1

681-TT-l
CrossRof....nce

r a 681 Data Line Xntarfac:. is installed without Ii. 189 AID

opl:1aI1. verity/iIl.tall the foll...,in',JI
PElSM (R60 3) to ground
PES R (R123) to ground
PES S (RI23) to ground
~1.~1aI1

__

of

t~e

jumper. will el1minate the possibility of

~J4B 8hift Bnable levels or spurious Restart Sync: pulses
I~_"
~.I••mdt..s_

, PAGE

15

l:>y ayat. . or . .viro_ental noi •••

II PAGE REVISION

DEC 12-(74N).l1B9-N374

0

I PUBLICATION DATE Dec:

74

Title

ITech Tip
INumber

689 DATA SET CABLE

All

Processor Applicability

18 18II10l

I IJ

IAuthor

Larry Lawlor

I Approva! W. Cwmnins

Rev
Date

J§

7-31 72

I

689-TT-1

Cross Reference

I

RS232C E/A standards define pin 25 of the modem plug as unassigned

The Bell l03E uses pin 25 to provide capabilites to the Data
Communications equipment to control the busy status of the modem.
In data set cable 7406139, used by the 689 pin 25 is tied to pin 4
(~ata terminal. ready).
This connection should be made by a violet

w~re

between pl.n 25 of the modem plug and pin L on the W023.

However, in some cables this connection is made by a jumper
between pins 4 and 5 within the modem plug.
If the customer I s modem uses pin 25 for some other purpose and
it' 5 necessary to break this connection, be on the look out for
cables that are jumpered within the modem plug.
~:

Title

This same cable is used in the OCIO (with the W023 cut off).

I

689 AG DATA LINE CONFIGURATION/TESTING
Processor Applicability

All ISII

I

I

I

I

I

Tach TiP689AG/TT-1
Number
Cross Reference

J

) Author

Bill Cummins

I Approval

Bill Cwmnin,pate 07l}1/72

Rev

0

I

Any communication system which has a 689AG option is del.ivered with

its data lines connected to line g up through line 32. In that
configuration the 689AG diagnostics (maindecs 8I-DBCA and 8I-DSDA)
shOUld run satisfactorily. However the customer may, at his own
discretion, rearrange options such that the 689AG line _ is not
connected to line II of the communication system. When this happens
the two diagnostics will not function at all. To make them function
the data cables from the 689AG must temporarily be placed in the
corresponding slots of the DC08A (, to _, 1 to 1, etc.). The
diagnostics may then be run; the cables must be reconnected in the
customer's configuration after completion of these diagnostic
procedures.

Title

708/708A POWER SUPPLIES
Processor Applicability

~I I I I I I I

IAuthor

ITech Tip 708-TT-1
Number
Ray Turcotte

J!!!...

A

J

Cross Reference

IAPproval Frank PurcellD~l/72 I
Reference schematic diagrams and parts lists for the 708 and
708A power supplies. No information is listed with respect

to resonating capacitor C17. The following information applies
to C17 in both supplies.
Power Supply
Component Value
DEC Part No.
70S

6 MFD

660 VAC 60 cycle
708A

29-19376

7 MFD

660 VAC 50 cycle

29-15902

Dec Part Numbers for the transformer Tl are:
Power SupplY
708
708A

~

~

T570S4
T57121

1602755
1602763

momooma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit [)

I

f) I

18Bit ~

I

36Bit

724 to
5409728

Gill

I

Tech Tip
Number 724-TT-1

50 CYCLE SYSTEM JUMPERS

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

I

0

Rev

Cross Reference

Ii-:A'-pp-ro-va-IH-.-Lo-n-q-O-ate-8-/.17~/72--l1

I nI 1 J I I I

AlISO cycle PDP12 systems shipped prior to October, 1971 do
not have the proper taps selected on the main power transformer. Although the primary tap selection chart is correct,
the secondary taps also have to be changed.

If they are not,

all of the output voltaqes will be low and may have up to ~
vac of ripple. This will cause erratic and unreliable operation, expecially if the input AC is low.
Reference print D-CS-724-0-1
Wire Color

To Tap

BRN
BRN
ORN
BLU
YEL
YEL
RED
Title

Move to Tape

7
6

14

15
16
17
18
19
20

5

4
3
2

1

I

Tech Tip

860 Power Control Relay Welding Closed
Processor Applicability
Author Art Zins

I I I I I I

I

Number 860-TT-l

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

If-A
::-ppro--v-.I-'A"r'"'t'-"Z""i!!.n"-s---o-.-te--9-/::-2-"0::";-n-ii]

The 860 power control used in the 11/45 and some option cabinets
may have the problem of not being able to shut off AC power by
turning off the switch. The reason is because it is possible to
draw in rush current in excess of the relay spec. This is generally
evident in heavi ly loaded systems and causes the contacts to
weld closed.
A new vendor has been selected to provide a better relay. The ECO
was written against the purchase spec only. Hence, the new relay
has the same part number as the original (12-10903). These new
relays are presently available in F. S. stock. 'Order these relays
on an "as needed" basis - supply is limited.
The new relay is manufactured by Struthers-Dunn Inc. and is physically
and electrically compatible with the older version.

IPAGE 17

II PAGE REVISION

HpUBLICATION DATE.

August 1972

I

T' I
Ito 54-9728 P.S. REGULATOR BOARD COMPATIBILITY
All

Processor Applicability

IBM I 8FI

I I I I

Tech Tip
Number 54-9728-TT-l

.lL."-I1

II-A_"th_O_r-J...Jl••..l.JJ
'CD..d"-.L.L
, _ _ _ _R_OV
__
I Approval

F. Purcell

Date

Cross Reference

1/14/74l

The new (15 11 ) PDP8M/8F chassis requires longer leads on the
54-9728 thermostat than any other equipment using this board.

It is very possible therefore that regulator boards from the
F.S. module repair depot will have "normal" length lead (Le.S")
that are too short to make it in the 8M.
There are three things you can do to avoid getting caught.
1.

2.
3.

Order a spare thermostat assembly (70-09452) and keep it
with the swap kit.
Specify to the depot that you need long (approx.l0") leads
when you request the new regulator board.
If you did not make with steps 1 and 2~ then the 5" leads
can be extended, since the terminating plug is the same on all
boards.

Remember, unless requested to do otherwise the depot will always
ship short leads.
Boards that have been broken in two, had corners cut ofC or had
etch damaged by levering components off with a screwdriver without
unsoldering are not repairable and have to be scrapped.
This
reduces the depot float, and has resulted in delays in turnaround.
Please help the depot (and yourselves) by returning defect modules
promptly and carefully.

(ALSO SEE POWER SUPPLY SECTION)

Paqe 18

mamaoma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit ~

I

16Bit

00 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

ITech Tip

I

I

I

I

INumber

1t-A:-U_th_O_'--:-_R_._Ad_a_ms
_____
R_OV_...:0_--11

Processor Applicability

,.Illls

ADO 1

0 I

ADO 1 MULTIPLEXER F. E. T. Leakage

All

CPL
Option or Designator

I

AD01-TT-l
Cross Reference

rAppro.al J. Blundell Date 12/07/721

The F. E. T. multiplexers that switch the analogue inputs to the
ADOl will float in an undetermined state when power is not
supplied to them.
This will result in cross-talk between the inputs and possibly
even damage to the F.E.T. 's or the customers equipment in
extreme cases.
There is no possibility of a field change to influence the F.E.T.
characteristics, (extensive re-design would be necessary), so
warn the customers who migh~ be affected directly to keep the
ADOl power on when the system is in use.

Title

I

Tech Tip AD01-TT- 2
Number

ADO 1 Source Impedance Problems

;~I Illsl

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

I

I

I

I

I

A. Thompson

rApproval G. Chaisson

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

Date 12/08/72 I

When using an ADOl A/D converter with more than one channel, the
customer will experience bad readings when switching between
channels if his source impedance is too high. Only the first
readings on the newly selected channel will be in error.-----This problem is inherent in A/D converters using the ADOl
technique of multiplexing and sampling.
It is caused by impedance
and capacitance in the cables, wires and components slowing down
the system charge time if the source impedance is too high. The
error may be as high as 4 or 5 counts on the first conversion and
varies with configuration, customer cable length, source impedance,
etc.
There are two ways to circumvent this characteristic-.
1.

Keep source impedance down around 1,000 ohms (lK,n..).

2.

If a high source impedance is a customer necessity, have his
program select the new channel and/or gain and take two or
more conversions I using only the last conversion. The last
conversion will be accurate.

IPAGE 19

II PAGE REVISION

RpUBLICATION DATE

December 1972

-- NOTES --

20

mamaDII I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

[::!II

0 I

18Bit

188it

0 I

388it

IAu"-

~I~J I I I I I I IApproval
Problem:

Option or Designator

ADOIA

0 I

ITech Tip ADOlA-TT-l
INumber

Title ADOlA POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

I

G. Chaisson
W.

CUnmins

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/721

ADOlA AID converters that have AH04 and AH05
(Sample/Hold and Sign bit bipolar) options
installed have been exhibiting a power supply
problem. The problem is seen when more than
three (3) Al24 modules (12 channels) are installed.
The symptoms are that the positive 15 volt drops
to 8 - 10 volts. This drop in the +15 volt line
also causes the +5 to drop and the -15 likewise.

Cause:

The cause of this problem is the use of the
Deltron pIN 12-03185-3 Power Supply, which during
power up, becomes overloaded and due to its inherent
characteristics cannot recover from the overload
condition.

correction:

An ECO A708-0003 adds a 47 ufd cap. 20V 10% and a
97.r,L ~w resistor from collector of 02 a DEC 2219
transistor to GND, AC.

+l5V, AE

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTION
TAKEN

I!l ECO

02
DEC
2219

f+ 70~ -:- 003

oo M
CN----TECH
_ _- TI~

OO~~~~~~

____~~~--~

Correction:

This problem is also corrected with the installation
of a Power Mate power supply pIN 12-03185-3.

NOTE:

This is not a problem on ADOI-D used with PDP-ll's.

IPAGE 21

HPAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

NlR~d~Q~TION -

Title

::Isl

ITechTip

INumber

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

Adams/Goelz

I 1 1 1 1 I

IApproval

W. CUIJl!I\ins

Rev

0

Oa.. 07/31/72

I
I

ADOIA-TT-2
C..,.. Reference

The following arc corrections to the ADOI-A Calibration Procedures
A-SP-ADOI-A-06:
Section 4.2.1
Should read:
Section 4.2.7
Should read;

connect the E.D.C. to the A40S input pin
A1352 and A13SZ (ground).
remove A220 module then restart program at 202;
adjust the offset coarse pot (Figure 4.2) so that
the AC switches from 1776-1777 or as close to
this state as possible.

Section 6.2
Add:
Remove A220 module.
Section 7
Line 2 should read:

(slot A14) . . Connect the EDe between pins
A14P2 and A13F2

Title

(ground).

Line 13 should read:

If gross errors are experienced in the
last test~ remove the A124 from B14.

Line 16 should read:

If this test passes but the preceding
does not, the problem is probably in the
A124 (814).

AD01A - CAUTmoN NOTES

ITech Tip
INumber

ADOIA-TT-3
Cross Reference

The Maintenance Manual for the AD01-A analog to digital converter subnotes be added to the calibration procedure
in the appendix.
These caution notes are to prevent possible da'mage
to equipment.

system requires caution

ADOI-A Calibration Procedure, Section 3. Basic ADOI-A. before
Section 3.1 add note:
CAUTION:

Turn off the AC power to the computer and remove
the *A405 and A220 modules.
If they are not
removed damage may result.

Before Section 3.3 Range Adjustment,
CAUTION:

Page

22

Make certain the *A405 and A220 modules have
been removed before setting the EDe voltage to
-9.9853 volts.

mamaam. I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

S's

GIl

16Bit

0 I

l8Bit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Oasignator

AD01A

0 I

to AD08-B

ITochTip

Title
All

l2Bit

I

INumber

AD01A - CAUTION NOTES (COntinued)

I

IAuthor G.
I I I I I I IApproval w.
Processor Applicability

Chaisson
CUmmins

Rev

0

Date 07/31172

I
I

AD01A-T'I'-3
Cross Reference

Before Section 4 Adjustment of the A40S,
NOTE:

·~40S

Title

At this time turn AC power off and replace the A40S
in slot AB13.
The A220 should remain out at this
time.

is the Sample and Hold module which is optional in this unit.

IAuthor G~
I 8 I 8 II sd SEIII I I IApproval W
Processor Applicability

All

ITech Tip AD01A-TT-4

ADOlA - INITIAL CONVERSION IN ACCURACY

INumber
Rev

Chaisson
CUmmins

Date n? ,.,

0

I

n,

I

Cross R _

Problem - recently two ADOI IS have exhibited a peculiar problem when
attempting to take conversions and change either gain and/or channel.
The symptoms appear as a non~stable input causing conversion readings
to start at an incorrect value. Successive conversions approach a
value near what it should be when only one channel is used.
Use of more
than one channel will disguise these symptoms into hash that may appear
meaningless.
Solution - this problem can be observed on a scope at the output of the
A220* switch gain amplifier Al4 pin V2.
The output .w:aveform should be a very distinctive step (either positive
or negative, depending on input) of less than I usec rise time as the
gain is changed or a different input channel is selected.
Good Wave Form:

___......Ir'"""

__F

Bad Wave Form:

x=

values actually converted

Solution - this problem is totally corrected by replacing the A124* used
for switching the gain in 814.

*

ADOI-D

A220 Location A16
Al24 Location 816

IPAGE

.23

UPAGE REVISION

IPUBLICATIONDATE

July 1972

Title

~EST

Processor Applicability
All

ITech Tip

ROUTINE FOR ADOB-B MULTIPLEXER

I BIBII II I I

IAuthor

G. Chaisson

IApproval

w.

Cummins

INumber ADOB-B-TT-1

Rev

I

0

Date 07/31/72

Cross Reference

1

The AD~8-B maintenance manual, ana other sources# suggest ,short main_
tenance programs which are incorrect and give indications of problems
which do not actually exist.
The following program does work and can be used for most maintenance
purposes.
20/7604
21/6542
22/6531
23/5022
24/6534
25/7200
26/6532
27/6531
30/5027
31/6534
32/2100
33/5032
34/5020

Load Channel from SR

Select Channel and Convert
Skip on AID Done
Not done
Read AID Buffer
Clear AC

AID

Convert
Skip on AID Done
Not done
Read AID Buffer
Stall Loop

JMP .-1
JMP and do again

** The rOT 6542 (ADSe) must be followed by an lOT 6531 (ADSF) before
attempting to select another channel (6542) or before an AID convert
(6532) can be issued.
George Chaisson

IPAGE

24

June 1970

I PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

JUly 1972

mamaola I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I.

rtf

II

A

1 12Bi'

~

1 16Bi' 01

18Bi'

0 I

36Bi'

h2 1

1 1

Option or Designator

0 1

AD12

ITech Tip
INumber

FAST SAMPLE DISABLE/ENABLE
Processor Applicability

I

IAuthor

I

Rev n

I I II-:IA-ppro-"I:--H--TT.~-'n~--D-a'.~08:...JL/17-1'7---l21

AD12-TT-l
Cross Reference

This will not work 1n a PDP-12 without a KW12 clock. ECO
EM12-00009 was generated to rectify this malfunction.
The last section of ECO EM12-00009 is a jumper card (W023)
to ground the signal 'CLR Mode !6!6 (1) H.

If this ECO is not installed, for unknown reasons, a jumper
and C35C2 will suffice. Therefore, if a KW12

~etween C~6T2

18 later 1nstalled, the removal of the jumper is necessary.

/mt

Title

processor Applicability
All

!

TechTiP
Number AD12-TT-2

ALTERNATE ADl2 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

112 1 1 1

I I I

Author
Rev 0
1
1~~~
__~B~ob~J~ohn~s~o~n______~~~~

IApproval

"G.

sirois

Date

2/12/74

Cross Reference

--I

Problem: JW12 adjustment procedure specified in A-SP-AD12-C-l and PDP-l2 Maintenance
Manual Vol. II (paragraph 3.8.7, pages 3-2) linearly calibrates the ADl2 input
range for.:t .987 volts full scale. Specifications call for J;. 1 voLt which is 13 mv.
greater tha.Jl the procedure achieves.
Solution: If absolute range of ± 1 volt is required by customer, recalibra.te with
this procedure. It has the benefit of a more accurate calibration. Calibration
occurs at state switching points instead of in the middl.e of a state.
NOTE: This procedure required only if absolute AD12 accuracy is necessary for
customer's application. Both procedures are linear and the difference between
the two would be of significance only to those users who require an absolute value
of measurement based on the specified *" 1 volt scale. Most laboratory applications
use external standards in which range and linearity are a factor, but not absolute
value. In research or other applications where absolute value is of interest,
the user shou1.d be aware of these facts:
1.

This alternate procedure could make it difficult to correlate old
data with new data acquired after adjustment: with this procedure, i f
absolute voltages are being read or if the software is not easily recalibrated.

2.

There will be NO significant effect on applications that use any reference or standard to self calibrate, e.g. Clinilab 12s.

IPAGE

25

II PAGE REVISION

A

nPUBLICATION DATE

March 1974

Titkt

All

ITech Tip
INumber
IJ-A,...u_tho_r-,-R",,-.-"J"Ohn=s"'on"'-_ _ _ _R_w--'o'-_;11

AD12-TT-2

ALTERNATE AD12 ADJUSTKENT PROCEDURE

Processor APPlicabilitv,

I~21 I I I '

IApproval G Sirois

Cross Refore....

Da.. 21J2174

EQUIPMENT NEEDED

Precision IX: mv. standard I EDC Model MV-1005 or equivalent and shielded pair inPllt cable wi th 3 conductor phone pl Ilg •

1..

Load the AID test as outlined in steps 1 t:hrollgb 9 of the setup procedure
pa,rll.g:r;iJ.Ph 3.8.5.

2.

AHow five minlltes waIlll up time.

3.

Connect cable from standard voltage sOllroe terminals to channel 10 input.

4.

Set voltage sotzree to zero.

5.

Monitoring channel 1.0 1 adjust the right OFFSET potentiometer. module A2l4,
slot E30 I Ear
equal switching bet:wean +000 and -000. TUrning the trimpot (Shown in figure 3-21) CCN increases the number.

(Polarity switch to 0).

an

(Polarity switch to +).

6.

Set voltage sOlIIee to +0.99805 volts.

7.

Adjust the GAIN potentiometer for an equal swit;ching bet;ween +777 and
+776.

8 •

GAIN and OFFSET may interact making it necessary to repeat steps 4
t:hxu 7.

9.

9.

Set voltage source to -0.99707.

Reading should be -776.

10.

Set voltage source to -0.99902.

Reading should be -777.

11.

Repeat the above procedure for the remaining channels.
LEFtr POTENTIOMETERS

RIGHT POTENTIOMETERS

E30

Channel 11

E3~

Channel. 1.3

Channe~

E32

Channel 15

Channel 14

E33

Channel 17

Channe~

Channel 10
l2

l6

12.

For a detailed check of accuracy and l.inearity, a ohart is g";ven.

13.

Keep in mind, that OFFSET will change all voltages equallg in a positive or
negative direction and "that GAIN will change the absolute value proportionately,

The
indicated diEEerences «) need only be taken for one channel since the
differential linearity is primarily a fWlction of the ADC and is common
to all channels.

pag'e 26

mamBO!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

.I

(i]

I

16Bit

0 I

0 I

18Bit

36Bit

0 I

112 IProC8S1O
1'1 AppIlicablililYl IAutho,

IApproval

G. sirois

~><

+777

MINIMUM
+0.997
....

Number AD12-TT-2

Rev

R. Johnson

Date

ANALOG INPUT LIMITS

DISPLAY

SWITCHING
POINT

+0.999

070

I

Cross Reference

I

ACTUAL
ANALOG INPUT

(VDC)

MAXIMUM

(VDe)

023

-------,,-_.- -t---o
+0.995

117

+0.997

'+77'

+775

+0.993

16.

+0.995

117

+773

+774

+0.991

211"

+0.993

16'

~~.~.o

+771

+0.985

352

+0.987

305

+767

+770

+0.983

398

+0.985

352

.<+760

070

._------

..

+761

+0.969

727

+0.971

680

+757

+760

+0.967

773

+0.969

727

E-

+741

+0.938

477

+0.940

430

+740

+0.936

523

+0.875

977

+737

a

2/14/74

+776

~+700 ___ ~~_

--"--

-~--"-~---~-

<

----

+0.938

477

+0.877

930

+700

+0.874

023

+0.875

977

/ +600

+601

+0.750

977

+0.752

930

" +577

+600

+0.749

023

+0.750

977

~o

+401

+0.500

977

+0.502

930

+377

+400

+0.499

023

+0.500

977

1/ +000

+001

+0. 000

977

+0.002

930

-000

+000

-0.000

977

+0.000

977

-377

-400

-0.499

023

-0.500

977

-776

-777

-0.997

070

-0.999

023

Indicates that the difference between "these points
shall be O.OOO977V to o .OO2930V

IPAGE

27

I PAGE REVISION

IPUBLICATION DATE

_.-

- - _...-

--------~.-

+677

<.

lID12 to lIDMIN

i

ALTERNATE AD12 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)

21

,

Option or Designator

Tech Tip

Title
All

12Bit

I

MI£ch 12ZS

Title

All

I!':!:

ALTERNATE AD12 ADJUSTMENT PROCEWRE

1121

Processor Applicability

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor

R_

.7...

I

Rev 0

AD12-TT-2
to ADMIN
Cross Reference

'i-,A=-ppr-O-V-.=-I-'G"'--"'s,"'·:ro-1:S""------:o:-a-te-2-/1...!2L/-7-4--l'

affecting primarily the extreme positive and negative values.
14.

One bit represents 1/512 voLts or approximately 1.95 mv so the deviation
which is the difference between t;h.e actual and desired voltages should
be within !.l mv to meet the specs of!. 1/2 bit resolution.

Title

REPORTING CP/OPTION SERIAL NUMBERS

All

Processor Applicability

I 8 II

I

I

I

IAuthor

I I ,Approval

Al Kimmel

ITech Tip Administration
Rev

INumber TT-l
0
Cross Reference

B. Cummins Date 07/3l/72

I
I

Field Service Reports are filed, in Maynard, by System
Serial Number. Field Service personnel are requested to
aSs1st us In maintaininq accurate filesby accurately
reporting identification numbers.

There are two (2) labels associated with the 8/1 CPo
indicates the LOGIC SERIAL NUMBER:
Dig1tal Equ1pment
Corporation
Maynard, Mass.

One

LOGIC
1234

or
D1g1tal Equ2pment
Corporation
Maynard, Mass.

M26
L1234

The other indicates the SYSTEM SERIAL NUMBER:

I.

D2gl.tal Equipment
Corporation
Maynard, Mass.

M26
5678

This number should
be reported on the
FIELD SERVICE REPORT

The 26 indicates the PDP-S/I product line charge number ..

Page 28

mBmBamo IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bi'

1!9 I

16Bi'

0 I

188i'

0 I

36Bi'

ITech Tip
INumber AFC-TT-l
'I-.A,.-u_tho_r-,.--oI.L.
T._=
("~ ......''''-' _ - ,_ _R-:ev-:::-:-:-::-,,0c:-:l'

Processor Applicability

I I I I J I

B'sl

AFC

0 I

AFC DIAGNOSTIC

All I

Option or Designator

IApproval

G. Chaisson

Date

Cross Reference

07/27/72[

AFe diagnostic does not recognize ASR35/KSR35 or LA3.0'
altmode codes.
When using the AFC-8 diagnostic MAINDEC-08-D6VA on a
system that has an ASR35 or KSR35, it is necessary to
change a location in the program. This is necessary
since the code for the ALTMODE key is different on the 35
(376) than the 33 (375). The change is

Location:

6404 - change from 7403 to 7402

When using an LA30 make the following change (altmode
code = 233):
Location:
Title

All
8'5

6404 - change from 7403 to 7545
ITech Tip

INumber

AFC-8 TIMING ADJUSTMENTS

I

Processor Applicability

I

I I I I I

IAuthor
JApproval

A. Thompson
•

C'h.·

Rev 0
Date

I?/nO

I

AFC-TT-2

Cross Reference

P.:<.J.L...-[ _ _ _ _ _....

The AFC-8 Diagnostic write-up (Maindec-08-D6VA-DL) contains a
Timing Adjustment Procedure (paragraph 5.5.2.1).
It present~y
calls for a 2 ms wide pulse from the M3~2 at AM~4-F~2T2 (lower
pot) •
This pulse being adjusted for only
ms will cause the AFC
Readings to drift on high gain and will make calibration of the
difficult.

AFe

Change the procedure to read as follows:
.Adjust lower potentiometer on M302 (located at AM04-F02) for
a ~ wide pulse.
This is a correction to the AFC-8 Diagnostic Write-up only. The
AFC-8 Engineering Specifications calls out a 3 ms wide pulse.

IPAGE

29

II PAGE REVISION

B

DpUBLICATIDN DATE

May 1974

I

Title

A219 PROGRAMMABLE GAIN AMPLIFIER
Processor Applicability
Author Larry Goelz

I

All

I BI I I I I I IApprovol

ITech Tip
INumber
Rev

~

Bill Freeman Dote 12/05/73

I

APe -TT-3
Cross Reference

I

A219 Programmable Gain Amplifier
7he input to this amplifier is fused with a 10 milli-amp fUse.
If it becomes necessary to check the fuse for continuity, follow
the steps below:

1.

Get a high value resistor 10K or greater.

2.

Place resistance scale to R x IK.

3.

Put the resistor in series with the fuse then place the meter
probes on the fuse and the resistor.

4.

If the fuse is good, a movement on the meter should be
noticed.

If the fuse needs to be replaced, remove the defective fuse and

replace it with a new fuse taking care NOT TO BEND THE FUSE LEADS
at any time.

Page 30

mamaama I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I l2Bit
Title

~

I

l6Bit

0 I

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

I 8 IBIlsLI I I I

IAuthor G.
IApproval W.

Option or Designator

0 I

AGO 1

To AMOS

I

Tech Tip
Num~

AGOl or AG02 PRESTON AMPLIFIERS

All

I

Chaisson

Cununins

Rev

0

Date 07/31/72

I
I

AGOI-TT-l

Cross Reference

Suggested PM service of Preston Amplifiers on contract:
The maintenance manual describes three tests for the Preston
Amplifiers:

Gain Accuracy
Linearity
Common Mode Rejection
These tests should be made periodically (every 1500 hours of
operation) as a part of the PM routine.
In addition two other
things can be done:

1.

A check of the chopper circuit with a scope,
checking for naisey signals _(noise 50 mv P-p)
indicating necessity of replacing the chopper.

2.

On a customer requested basis· and at a $60 fix cost
replacement of the chopper on a yearly periodic
basis. (PIN DEC 29-1S313)

These suggestions are an attempt t~ improve customer satisfaction
with service of these units on contract.
Corrective maintenance is normally accomplished by returning the
amplifiers to Preston for repair and recalibration.

Title
All

ITech Tip

AGOl and AG02 PRESTON AMPLIFIERS
Processor Applicability

IAuthor

G. Chaisson

I 8 ISIlsLI I I I IApproval W.

IpAGE 31

II PAGE REVISION

Cummins

INumbk
Rev

0

Date 07/31/72

nPUBLICATlDN DATE

AG02-TT-l

I

Cross Ref......,.,

I

AGOI-TT-l

July 1972

ITech Tip
INumber AM03-TT-l

AM08-AM03 TIMING

Title

Processor Applicability

l Author

G ~ Chaisson

I 8119 115 1121 I I ]Approval w.

All

Cummins

Rev

0

J

Cross Reference

I

Date

Low Level Multiplexer
The AlII multiplexer relay modules have been found to bounce and
interfere with reliable AID conversions. This problem appears in
two different types of operation. First, if a single channel is
selected and reselected the problem can show up. Typically, what
a programmer may do is select a channel and allow the channel
selection to cause an AID conversion from the AMOS.
If another
conversion is desired on the already selected channel, a reselection
of that channel will cause the AID conversion but will probably
cause that relay to bounce and produce unreliable data. Second
case would be if an attempt is made to select channels at a rate
greater than 180 channels per second.
The problem stems from the fact that the relays used on the AlII
module are specified such that the relay must be opened or closed
for a minimum of 2.5 milliseconds. This plus AM08-AM03 timing yields
a maximum of 180 selectable channels per second with the stipulation
that no channel is reselected.
(Reselection of the same channel
operates the relay faster than specified.)
An Beo has been written for AMOS timing. If a program cannot be
changed, ECO 99~96, AM08 cDuld be accomplished to reduce the likelihood of unreliable AID conversion results.

Title
AU

ITech

AMOS AM03 - TIMING
Processor Applicability

I arI 9

115

k2 I I I

!i§£iL_J

IAuthor

G. Chaisson

Rev

Tip AM08-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
0

I

II-:,Approv-a-:-I-W.- - - , -Date
- -07/31/721
--1
Cwmnins

AM03-TT-1

mllla!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

r 12 Bit
Title

1:" I

IX)

I

16 Bit

Gil

18 Bit

ILl I

36 Bit

I I I I I I

CPL
Option or Designator

AMPLIFIERS

ILl I

I

TechTiP

PRESTION AMPLIFIER IDENTIFICATION
Processor Applicability

I

Number AMP-TT-l

II-A_U_tho_r_G_._C_h_a_is_s_o_n_ _ _ _
R_
..
_--'-~_
I Approvalw. Cununins

_I1

Cross Reference

Oat. 08/15/72 I

DEC has sold a number of various models of Preston Amplifiers.
In ordering replacements from loqistics it is imperative to
be specific with the following information:
MODEL:

(Example;

H83~~,

HR83~~,

HRC83~~,

WXB83~~,

etc)

serial Number on the amplifier (3 letters and 3 digits)

All gain settings Xl, X2, XS •••••
All band width settings - 10, 100, lK, ••••
proqrammable gain control or not.
There are a few Preston Amplifiers that are special in that
they have only one gain and one bandwidth. These must be
identified as such to get the proper replacement.

JPAGE

33

II PAGE REVISION

0

DPUBLICATION DATE

August 1972

-- NOTES --

34

mamaala I
I
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

IJj

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

1 8 181 1 I

Problem:

Answers:

I

Option or Designator

AX08

0 I
ITech Tip

8I-AX08 INCORRECT PRINTS

INumber AX08-TT-l

II-A_U_tho_r_~J~L
..:.a""'Ce=-V_ _ _ _R_fN_O,,-_~1

Processor Applicability
All

I

I

I I

IApproval

w.

Cummins

Date 07/31/72

I

Cross Reference

Logic Prints do not reflect the following:

1.
2.
3.

How RCLK is cleared by the lOT CLRK.
How CLYK is cleared by the lOT CLXK.
The origin of the signal external.

1.

The lOT RCLK is decoded as RCLK (~). (refer to
D-I3S-AXOB-O-l sheet 1 at coordinates B 1/2, 6)
at pin F of the Rl13 in slot A14.
This signal
collector clears the RCLK flip-flop at pin M of
the R203 in slot C12 (D-8S-AXOS-O-2 at coordinates
0, 5).

2.

The lOT CLXK is decoded as XTAL CLK(¢),

(D-BS-AX08-0-1

sheet 1 at coordinates B 1/2, 7) at pin K of the Rl13
in slot A14.
This signal collector clears the XTAL eLK
flip-flop at pin F of the R203 in slot e12 (D-BS-AXOB-O-2
at coordinates D, 2 1/2).
3.

Refer to D-BS-AXOB-O-2 coordinates D, 6 and make the
following additions .

....-

... eXcK

EX TE RD.C+~bI

clock BNG connector

IPAGE

35

II PAGE REVISION

0

npUBLICATION DATlO

July 1972

Title
All

ITech Tip

AX08 - RANGE CAPACITOR PROBLEM

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

18 18118LI I I I lAppro•••

R,

INumber AX08-TT-2

N

ln~ ~I1

w. Cummins

Rev

I

0

Date 07/31/72

Cross Reference

I

Some Ax08's have been shipped to the field ~ith some of
the range capacitors for the RC clock reversed.
If any
capacitors are reversed, there will be no output from
the He clock for that position of the range switch. The
capacitors are electrolgtic and all should have their
positive ends connected to the top waffer or the range
switch.
This warIer may be identified by measuring
continuity from the center tap (white wire) to terminal
3 of R4 (fine aontrol below the range swi tch.

/mt

ITech TiPAX08_TT_3

LAB 8/AX08 Wiring Error

Title

Processor Applicability

All

181 I I I I II

INumber

IAuthor

Frank Purcell

1Approva.

D. Dubay

Oat.

Rev

II

J

Cross Reference

07/31/721

It has been discovered that all AX08's shipped prior to April
1969 have an error in the wiring of the X display register.
The AX08 diagnostic and the Lab-8 software package both run
normally. Any customer program which is displaying a base
line may have one or two points displayed at random above or
below the base line.
The following wiring changes must be made:
Delete
Delete
Add
Add

B21M
B17V
B17V
B18M

to
to
to
to

B21V
B16K
B16J
B16H

Markup the X and Y register print to show that On all X register
R20S's, the pulse inputs at Pin M are labeled "Load tl"~ the pin
V inputs should be labeled "Load X2". An ECO is being prepared
and will be issued shortly.

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTION
TAKEN
B]ECO BnY ? 0/3
MCN _ _ _ __

o
o

TECH TlP_ _ _ __

o OBSOLETE _ _ __

Page

36

mamaola T

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bit

10 I

laBit

0 I

36Bit

1141

I I I I

Option or Designator

BAH

0 I

ITech Tip
INumber

OPTION LIST

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

All

0 I

16Bit

I

I IApproval

C. Gamage

I
I

Rev

G. Chaisson Date

BA14-TT-l
Cross Reference

The following options are used in the BA14 (Basic Accessory Box) :

Option

Description

BC14-A

Cable
Storage Card
Retentive Memory, Single, Mercury wetted
Retentive Memory, Dual, Reed
Timer

BK022
BK272
BK274
BK302
Title

All

IITech
Tip
Number

Documentation List
Processor Applicabifity

IAuthor

c. Gamage

Rev

I

1141 I I I I I It-:-A-ppr-ov'-:-I.:..:.G.-C:Ch=a=:i!is.=..so-n-D-ate"':":':"'~......jl

BA14-TT-2
Cross Reference

The following documentation, describing the technical characteristics
of the BA14, may be ordered through the Field Service Information
Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC Field Service
personnel only.

Designation

DeA:cription

BA14-,-,

K1.35-,-l

Physical Layout print
Block Diagram print
Kl6l Schematic
K2,7 Schematic
Kl35 Schematic

PDP14 Engineering Note #8
ECO/FCO Copies

11ie:~~ra_~oae§o.:~~~e~d ~~sU~~:ed

BA14-,-?l
Kl6l-?-l
K2,7-,-l

in the

BAl4 DEC-ECO-LOG and the ECO/FCO list of
this BAH manual.

IPAGE

37

II PAGE REVISION 0

DPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

T;t1.

Processor ApplicabU;.y
All

ITech Tip
INum~

ECO/l'CO List

1141 I I I I I

IAuthor

c.

Gamaae

Rev

I

I~.A:--",--va-:-I""G"'-C""'hl;d"";"'""
~~n-n-D-.te-----'"-----ll

BA14-TT-3
Cross Reference

The following ECO/FCO listing is provided to insure
that the ECD status of this equipment may be swiftly
and accurately determined on site. Note that the
n Indication of Accomplishment n column normally lists
only a part of the total ECO, the ECO and FCO documents must be consulted if further information is

needed.

Indication of
Accomplisrunent

priority
Optional

Connects
GNDs and

+5V to
form runs
BA14-f1f1f1f12

Page 38

None

Optional

Unit is serial #74
or higher, or a wire
is installed from A02V
to A03C.

Allows use A wire is installed
of BE274 • from A04R to B04R.
BE022
options.

malill
I
Tid.
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Gi I

12Bit

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

1141 I I I I I

Option or Designator

BB7l4

0 I
ITech Tip

DOCUMENTATION LIST
P......." Applicability

I

I Numba,

IAuthor

I

C. Gamage
Rev
0
If-,Approv-."-I-=w.'-'C=umm=i=-ns-Data---=----t

BB714-TT-l
Cross Reference

l

The following documentation, describinq the technical characteristics
of the BB714, may be ordered through the Field Service Information
Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC Field Service
Personnel only.
DESIGNATION

DESCRIPTION

714 Schematics

All 714 power supplies are provided with
a schematic printed on the exposed faceplate, with the exception of the ElascoEastern unit. The Elasco-Eastern Schematic
is provided in this tech manual.

PDP-I4 User's Manual

Provides equipment description.

ITech Tip

Title ECO/FCO List
Processo, Applicability
All

IAuthor

1141 I I I I I IApproval

INumbar

C. Ga."!...,,

Rev

Chaisson Data

"

0

I
I

BB714-TT-2
Cross Ref'nI""

The following ECO/FCO listing is provided to insure that the ECO
status of this equipment may be swiftly and accurately determined
on site. Note that the nIndication of Accomplishment n column
normally lists only a part of the total ECO; the ECO and Fca
documents must be consulted if further information is needed.
Equipment

ECO

Priority

714 (Digital)
(PDP-14 Power
Supply)

None

Any revision DEC 714 power
suitable for field use and
nized by the -Diqital"Name
the side of the H frame in
components are mounted.

714 (Armor)
(PDP-14 Power
Supply)

None

Any ArmOr 714 power supply is sui table for
field use and may be recognized by the
name DArmor" printed on the side of the B
fram in which the components are mounted.

714 (North
Electric)
(PDP-14P.S. )

IpAGE

39

Mandatory

II PAGE REVISION

supply is
may be recogprinted on
which the

NO North Electric 714 power supplies are
considered suitable for field use in PDP-Us.
They may be recognized by the "North Electric, Co. n name printed on the side of the H
fsame in which the components are mounted
(directly below the schematic).

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title ECO/FCO

AU

-ITech Tip BB714-TT-2

List (Continued)

Processor Applicability

INumbe<

IAuthor

C. Gamage

1141 I I I I I IApprova'
Equipment

14

NOTE:

P.S.)

ECO
Change

Priority

Change 1

Mandatop:

Except 1.n
cases
where
Change 2,
below, was
field
installed,

Mandatory
l..n cases
where the
above
change 1
was not
installed
by vendor.

40

Cross Reference

1

The E1asco-Eastern 714 power supply
required the following changes under the
conditions described:
units
Affected

purpose

ElascoEastern

Filters
line
noise

714 Power
SUpplies
shipped

Indications of
Accomplishment

I.OK OHM resistor installed
to right of 01 as shown in
Figure 1-714-A.

after
12/1/69.

This is a
manufacturer
l.nstaiied
change only.
E~asco-

Eastern
714 power

Filters
line
noise

I.OK OHM resistor installed
in series with C3 as shown
in Figure 1-714-B.

supplies
shipped

before
12/1/69.
This is
a fieldinstalled
change ..

Purpose

Indication of
Aecomplishment

Phase-in

Product

Power Supply is part

(to be
implemented
on an "asfails" basis
after June
30, 1972)

Improvement

number 121g98g.

ECO

Page

I

0

Date

Priority

ECO

714 (ElascoEastern) (PDP-

G. Chaisson

Rev

mamaDla I
I
Title

All

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Cii

12Bit

I

16Bi.

OJ

18Bi.

0 I

36Bit

IAuthor c.
1141 I I I I I IApproval G.

Gamage

Chaisson

BB7l4

0 I

I

TechTiP

PARALLEL OPERATION OF 714 POWER SUPPLIES

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Number

I
I

Rev 0

Date

BB7l4-TT-3
Cross Reference

The need for dual 714 power supply operation may be determined by
adding the current drains of each load fed by the +5V source, and
installing another 714 when the total reaches more than 7.0 amps
(this an absolute high limit).
See Table BB714-A.
TABLE BB7l4-A

UNIT

IDC

AMPS @ 5

14 Control Unit
Memory, 1 K
I Box
a Box

2.50
0.50
0.05
0.60

A Box
S Module
Computer Interface

0.60
0.10
0.40

VDC

Installation of a second 714 power supply requires the installation
of the wires shown in Figure BB714-B.

REI>

I

2

r--------!R!£~~----------~IJ:;:::::~+~Y»<
WHIT&'
WHI ..

11.1) VAC

~O-60 H~

TEAMlNAL

TEkMIW,.L.

STltl' of
~UPPL'( 1.

S1'RIP 0,.

suPPL'r' 2.

FIGURE BB714-B

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Tide

All

PARALLEL OPERATION OF 714 POWER SUPPLIES

IAuthor
1141 I I I I I IApproval
Processor'Applicability

(CON'T)J~:'~~BB714-TT-3

C. Gamaqe

G.

Chaisson

Rev

Oat.

0

I

Cross Reference

I

ELASCO-EASTERN POWER SUPPLY
WITH FACTORY-INSTALLED CHANGE
- FIGURE 1-714-A

INSTALL 1. 0 K..n..

,n-·---C--41
Oat

Investigations prove that many dual power supply PDP-14 units prior
to serial #5044 have insufficient current-carrying capabilities
between the power supplies and the PDP-l4 wire wrap panel. This
results in voltage drops of .2 VDC and higher, depending on power
supply loading through the program sequence. Visual examination
should reveal two size 18 red wires connected in the following
manner:
Left-hand 714
Power Supply
Terminal 1

t<>

C32A2

Left-hand 714
Power Supply
Terminal 1

to

C25A2

If the above two wires are not installed, you should correct
this production-oversiqht by completinq their installation.

IpAGE 43

\I PAGE REVISION

-0-

nPUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

T~I.
All

I~':;':~

BC01V WIRING ERROR

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

10,,1 I I I I I

Bill Freeman

IApproval W_E.

Rev

0

cummins Date 06/06/72

BC01-TT-l

I

Cross Reference

J

Some BCOlV cables have made their way to the field which have
the black wire that should be attached to pin vv on the Berg
cable terminator connected to the unlabeled slot below pin VV.
To correct this problem move the wire fram the incorrect
position to the proper one.

The BCOIV cables can be used on KL8E/A-G, KL8PA-K, DP8EA •

A
C
E

••

••

J
L
N
R
T
V
X

8

K
S
U
W

Y

Z

BB
DO

AA

HH

KK
MM

PP

SS
UU

Title

B

0

F

M
P

CC
EE

.

••

••
•••

FF
JJ
LL
NN

RR
TT
VV.....-cORRECT LOCATION
'~INCORRECT LOCATION

NO POWER LOW FROM 8E ENABLE BOX BAO-A or BAO-B

Processor Applicability

:11 I I I I I I I

IAuthor

J. Blundell

IApproval F. Purcell

Rev

ITech Tip

INum~

0

I

BCOOH-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 09/20/72 I

BC08H omnibus expander cables using a Rev. C M936 may fail to
bring power low up to the processor from the expan~er box
because the jumper from the cable to pin BV2 of the M936 is
missing_
Check for this jumper on any systems using the Be08n cable,
especially if you have power low problems.

/mt
P"ge 44

I

I

~Dm.!D RELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
I 12Bit. 00 I 16Bit I!ll 'BBit 0 I 3&Bit 00 I
Title
All

X

STRAIN RELEASE FOR BERG CONNECTOR
Processor Applicability

I I

I

PROBLEM,

I

I

I

IAuthor

I IApproval

J. Blundell

Rev

c.PL.
Option or Designator
BC08J

ITech Tip
I Number

B008J-TT-l

0

Cross Ref.......

G. Chaisson Date 9-1-72

I
I

40 conductor cable coming out of Berg connector in
cl!lble assemblies such as BC08J, X, and L.

Tends to

get damaged with excessive handling.
SOLUTION:

Berg make a cable clamp with four plastic fingers that
lock into the unused pin holes at each end of the plug,
and two adhesive bars that grip the cable
(See drawing below)

DEC part number is 12-11166 for the complete assembly.
Berg part numbers are 65-33100 and 65-332001.
They may be ordered from tbe Ii'. S stockroom under the DEC part n ....r
IPAGE

45

II PAGE REVISION

o

DPUBLICATION DATE

Oqt;gbar

Ina

-- NOTES --

46

mlllUID I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

r 12Bit

Title

[]

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bi!

Processor Applicability
I

I

I I \

Option or Designator

0 I

BCDSM
to 8Cl4A

!Tech Tip BCOSM TT-l

BCOSM-OM CONNECTOR

All ISE I

I

I Number

IAuthor

Ralph Boehm

Rev

0

I Approval W.E. Cummins Date 07/31/72

I
I

Cross Reference

Some BC08M-OM over the top connectors have been manufactured with

1.0 OHM resistors on pins A2, B2, Ul and V2.. The use of the connectors with the resistors can cause signal problems.
These resistors should be removed and jumpers installed.

/mt

\PAGE

47

II PAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

July 19 72

Title

Documentation List

All

Processor Applicability

JHI I I I I I

I

Tech Tip
Number BC14A -TT-l

IAuthor

C. Gamage

Rev

I

0

Cross Reference

"-'-,.=.=n-no:-at.----=--I

II-:-Appro-v.-::-==I

The following documentation, describing the technical characteristics
of the BC14-A, may be ordered through the Field Service Infor.mation
Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC Field Service

personnel only.

Title

Designation

Description

BC14A-I1-!1

Cable Assembly Print

B-CS-G782-!1-l

G782 Connector Print

ECO Copies

All Field-coded ECOs and FCOs cited in
the BC14A DEC-ECO-LOG and the ECO/FCO
list of this BC14A Manual.

INumber

Tech Tip

ECO/FCO LIST
Processor Applicability

All

IAuthor

C. Gamage

1141 I I I I I IApproval G.

Chaisson

Rev

11

Oate

I
I

BCl41<-TT-2
Cross Reference

The following ECO/FCO listing is provided to insure that the ECO
status of this equipment may be swiftly and accurately determined
on site. Note that the "Indication of Accomplishment II column
normally lists only a part of the total ECO; the ECO and FCD
documents must be consulted if further information is needed.
~

!£2.

BC14A-

Priority

Purpose
Eliminates
+SV line
loss.

iJiJiJiJI

None

Low

G78200001

None

MANDATORY
Note: Few

Indication of AccOtnE:lishment

Cable is 29 conductor ribbon
(multi-colored) •

Eliminates All diodes are 0672.
effect of
G782 Cards weak diodes
needing
this ECO
still remain in
Field use.

COMPANYCONRIDRUl
IpAGE 48

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaala I
,I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit []

16Bit

0 I

ISBit

0 I

3GBit

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

I 1J I I I I I IApproval

Option or Designator
BC14C

0 I

I

BC14C-I0 USES AND RESTRICTIONS

Title

All

I

I

Tech Tip BC14C-TT-l
Number

0

I

W.E. Cummins Oate 8-15-'12

I

C. GAMAGE

Rev

Cross Reference

There have been no ECO's issued against the BC14C option.
There
have been no publications released describing the BC14C and/or its

use.
The 8C14C-10 test unit and its substitute, the handwired harness
shown in Figure 3-1, are special purpose items.
Their use is
restricted
to testing BX14DA and BY14DA
options upon installationin conjunction with Maindec Test 14 and Test 14L;

they must not be used after the I/O boxes are connected to their
respected machineries or on any I/O boxes using DC I/O modules.
Input/Output tests are performed with Maindec Test 14 (Test l4L),
and test unit 8C14C-10 or its handwired substitute:
Designating a BY14DA box as ha1f-S box during the interrogation
portion of Maindec Test 14 (or Test 14L). will test the performance
of an output box with the exception of the K614 modules.
To
satisfactorily test all of the hardware in (1) I-Box and (1) O-Box
the connections shown in Figure 3-1 must be made to an output box
assigned to PDP-14 mainframe slot C32 (PDP-14L slot E03) and
to an input box assigned to PDP-14 mainframe slot A32
(PDP-14L slot C04),
The BCI4C-lO test unit provides the connections shown in Figure
3-1 by the use of a 17 (10) conductor ribbon and (2) connector

assemblies.
Figure 3-2.

The BCI4C-IO is mounted on the 1{0 boxes as shown in

Installation I/O testing is performed b~ connecting each I/O
box (in turn) to its slot in the 14 or l~L. providing the test
connections shown in Figure 3-1 or 3-2, and running Maindec
Test 14 (or Test 14L) while declaring with a type-in
that the system has (1) I-box and (1) O-box.

IPAGE

49

RPAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

Title

BC14C-IO USES AND RESTRICTIONS (Continued)

TOChTiP

Numbr BC14C-TT-l

OUTPUT

INPUT 80X

X/o ."x TEST

80)(

CONNE.CTIONS

CONNECTIONS
(FRONT VIEW)

F It.UR~

!

(FRONT

VIEW)

Page 51

CONNECT,,,,,..S

3-1

,0/60 He

IffllA.

mBmBDma I FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

lZBit ~

I

16Bit

0 I

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

ntle

BCHC-10 USES AND RESTRICTIONS (Continued)

All I ,

~ I I I

Processor Applicability

I

I

1+

ITechTip
INumber BC14C-TT-1

IAuthor

C. Gamaae

G. Chaisson Date 08.18.72

70

Rev

0

CAS\.';

I
I

Cross Reference

TO

PI>P ,+ C3;!
(PDP .4 L £. O~)

A 30>.

(PbPI+L C 04)

z,b 'Bo)(

BC14C
to BK272

IApproval

CA~LE

Pl>~

0 I

Option or Designator

~S7C£ - J'fI/)VtYTfO

-':;eiIJre....- ..3-2.
IPAGE S1

II PAGE REVISION

o

DpUBLlCATION DATE

Auqust 1972

Titl.

A"

iTech Tip

DOCUMENTATION LIST

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

1141 I I I I I IApproval

INumber

w.

Cmmnins

Rev

0

G. Chaisson Date

I
I

BK022-TT-l

Cross Reference

The fo11owing documentation, describing the technical characteristics
of the BK022, may be ordered through the Field Service Information
Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC Field Service

Personnel only.
Designation

Description

CS-K022-0-1

R022 Schematic

PDP-14 Engineering Note #8 AcceSSory Box Components and Uses

NOTE:

Tech Tip
IiNumber

Documentation List

Title

I
1141 L I I I I IrA::-pprov--.::-1G-.-Ch-a-i-'s'-s-o-n--=O::-.-t.-----i1
Processor Applicability

A"

This option consists of the K022 module
only, and is normally used in the BAl4
assembly.

IAuthor

C. Gamage

Rev

0

BK272-TT-l

Cross Reference

The following docmnentation, describing the technical charact.eristics

of the BK272, may be ordered through the Field Service Information
Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC Field Service
personnel only.
Designation

Description

B-CS-K272-0-1

K272 schematic

PDP-l4 Engineering Note #8 Accessory Box Components and Uses
PDP-14 User's Manual
NOTE:

Provides equipment description
This option consists of the K272

module only, and is normally used
in the BA14 assembly.

Page 52

mOIDD!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

, 128it
Title

All

[N'

168it

0'

188it

0'

368it

0'
l

Documentation List

1141

IAuthor

Processor Applicability
I

I

I

I

C•

Gamage

I

Rey

Option or Designator
BK274

to BK302

Tech Tip
Number BK2 7 4 -TT-l

I

I~A-'-ppro--va-:-I-G::":"o-C"':h:::a:::i::::s::;sC:o:"n-D-a-te---~--I1

I

Cross Reference

The following documentation, describing the technical characteristics
of the BK274, may be ordered through the Field Service Information

Center, Maynard.

This service is available to DEC Field service

personnel only.

Designation

Description

CS-K274-0-1

K2 7 4 Schematic

NOTE: This option consists of the K274 module only,
and is normally used in the BA14
Title

All

assembly.

ITech Tip
INumber

DOCUMENTATION LIST

Processor APPlicabilityl

1141 I I I I

'j-Au..-:..tho_r__
C_o_G_am_a...:g:.e_ _ _ _ _R_fN_ _O_-l1
'Approval Go Chaisson

Date

BK302-TT-l
Cross Reference

1

The following documentation, describing the Technical Characteristics
of the BK302, may be ordered throuqh the Field Service Information
Center, Maynard. This serviqe is available to DEC Field Service
Personnel only.

Designation

Description

B-CS-K302-0-1

K302 Schematic

PDP-l4 Enqineering Note #8 AccesSOry Box Components and Uses
Provides equipment description

PDP-14 User I s Manual

NOTE:

JpAGE

53

This option consists of the K302 module
only, and is normally used in the BA14
assembly.

RPAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

-- NOTES --

54

Option or Designator

BW406
Title
Cross Reference

Author

All

Approval

Date

W406-'/'T-1

This module is the latest signal conditioning module for the UDe 8,
11, 15.
It has been released to ultimately replace the W400, W402,
W403.
In order to test the W406, the UDe tester is used just as
the procedures state without any modifications.

The module appears to be identical to the W400. In order for the
customer to have the capability that the W402 J W403 provided, he
must wire his screw terminals in a certain way.
This information
will be contained in the UDe manuals.

IPAGE 55

UPAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION OATE

May 1974

-- NOTES --

56

I

mBIDDmD1

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

l2Bit

!ill

l6Bit

0 I

l8Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

1.. 1 I I I I ,

BX14-DA

0 I

ITechTip
INumber BX14-DA-TT-l

DOCUMENTATION LIST

All

Option or Designator

. [.~Au=tIKw=_=L!.
• ...:G::o:::e::l=z____-=_...:o~__ll

lA_I"

,....

Date 09/20/72

Cross Roferenc:e

I

The following is a list of documentation available for the BX14-DA.
Designation

Description

UA-BX14-DA-0
BS-BX14-DA-l
PL-BX14-DA-0
CS-K136-0-l
CS-K16l-0-l
CS-K578-0-l

unit Assembly Drawing
Block Schematic
Parts List
Circuit Schematic K136
Circui t Schematic Kl6l
Circuit Schematic K578

/mt
Title
All

ITech Tip BX14-DA-TT-2
I Number

ECO/FCO LIST

114 1- ',AppI,icab,ilityl lj.:Au=tIKw=-~L:::.~Goe~l::=z~_ _ _Rew_--"o_-I1

rA_1 r..

EgyJ:PMEN'l
BX14-DA
(Input
Box)

K578
(AC Input
Module)

JPAGE 57

ECO
~

~

BX14
DA-OOO
06

MANDA-

BX14DA
-00007

Optional

K57800002

'EeRY

Optional
uAle.. "

input At:
signals

II

. PAGE REVISION

Chaisson

UNITS
~
BX14DA

Dzte 091'20/72

Connects
GNDS&
+5V pine
to form
runs

See
"k136"

Slows ckt

response

Cross Rofere_

INDICATIONS
OF ACCOMPLJ:SlIIIENT

~

& prior

sIN 377

I

Presence of wire from
A04C to B01C in BX14.

Input box containa K136
in slotB02

Etch Rev. Decreases Board is et ... Rev. B
A boards response
or higher.
receiving time
signals
producUon
leas than costs &
500 me in repair tine.
duration
(CUI awi tCMS,
etc.)

0

I PUBLICATION DATE

Sept........r 1972

Title
All

ITech Tip
INumber

KCO/FCO LIST (Continued)

IAuthor
141 1 1 1 1 I lA_I
Procosror Applicability

KCO
KQUIPMEJi'r

~

K136

None

(Inverter)

T.

Rev

elM"

G. Chaisson Date

Sept.

~~

Installation

Controll- Replace
ers
K136 to
experienc- proing "False hibit
Inputs
passage

Optional

BX14-DA-TT-2
Cross Reference

INDICATIONS
OF ACCOMPLISHMENT

UNITS
~

I
20 I

Input box contains K136
in slot B02. KCO BX14-DA
00007 completed.

II

due to
of high
high rnag- speed

nitude
high
short
magnitude
duration pulses
pulses
which pass
onto the

sample
return
line while
either inputs being
tested ..

NOTE:

These pulses are developed between the hot

or cammon inputs and the input box shassis.
Prior to inst~llation of a Kl36, an attempt
should be made to operate" the system with a
qround connection installed between the
input box ¢hassis and the machine chassis
(lathe, etc.). This should be 16 wire or
heavier.. Care should be taken on all installed grounds to insure metal-to-metal
contact; use good solid lugs and star washers;
avoid the use of split lock-washers as substitutes since they do not break through the
paint layer until the secaring machine screw
is backed out. Do not ~eplace a K136 with a
K135 except in an emergency••
K161
(Decoder) K16100001

K16100001

MANDI'fORY

Optional

All etch Provides
referen ....
Rev. A
K161
ce for

boards

Q7 & Q8

Etch
K161

Defeats
noise on
address

Modules

lines.

Rev. C

DIGITAL

Board is etch Rev. "B·
or higher, or R8 and
R9 have been removed
from Rev .. A board.
Module is etch Rev. D

or higher.

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Page 58

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mlmlDla ,
Title

lUit

!il'

16 Bit

0'

lB Bit

0'

36 Bit

1141

Applicability

I J I I I

'Author

Option or Designator

BX14-DD

0 ,

ITech Tip
INumber

DOCUMENTATION LIST

All

I

L. Goelz

'Approval r..

Rev

<"h.i~~nn

0'

Date 9-21-72

BX14-DD-TT-l

er- Reference

I

The following is a list of . documentation available for the BX14-0D
DESIGNATION
UA-BXl4- DD- 0
BS-BXl4-DD-0
PL-BXl4-DD-O
CS-K136-0-1
CS-Kl61-0-1
CS-K564-0-1
Title

DESCRIPTION

Unit Assembly Drawing
Block Schematic
Parts List
Circuit Schematic K136

Circuit Schematic K161
Cireui t Schematic K564
Tech Tip
NumberBXl4-DD-TT-2

LIST
Author L. Goelz

All

Approval

ECO
Equipment Change
K136
None
(Inverter)

Rev

Crou R _

G. Chaisson Date 9-21-72

Units
Priori ty Affected

Install- Controllers Replace
experineced Kl36 to
ation
optional "False
prohibit
Inputs"
passage
due to high

magnitude
short
duration

Indications of ACcomplishment
Input box contains K136
in slot B02. ECO BX14-DA-00007
completed.

of high
speed

pulses which
pass onto the

sample return
line while other

inputs are being
tested

Note: The pulses are developed between the hot or common
inputs and the input box chas~is. Prior to installation of a K136, an attempt should be made to operate
the system with a ground connection installed between
the input box ,chassis and the machine chassis (lathe
etc). This should be #6 wire or heavier. Care should
be taken on all installed grounds to insure metalto-metal contact, use good solid lugs and star
washers, avoid the use of split lock-washers as
substi tutes since they do not break through the
paint layer until the securing machine screw is
backed out. Do not replace a K136 with a Kl35 except

in an emergency.

IPAGE 59

I PAGE REVISION

o

'PUBLICATION DATE

Opt

1972

T;tle

ECO/FCO LIST

All

K161
00002

Author

L. Goelz

Approval

G. CHaisson

Optional Etch Rev
K161 MdIs

Defeats

noise on

Module is etch revision D

or higher

address
lines

Title
INSTALLATION TESTS OF DC I/O BOXES

Processor Applicability

All

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

J_

l
Rev II

Tech Tip
Numbe<

J

I~A~ppro-V--L.I--G<~---::D-ate-8/-ILl/-73---j1

>V

_

TT

Cross Reference

INSTALLATION TESTS OF DC I/O BOXES

DC I/O tests are performed with SIM-14 after confirming proper operation

of the PDP-14 (or 14L) mainframe with MAINDEC TEST (or Test 14L),
A
voltage source providing +10 to +55 VDC (for I-Box Tests), or +10 to
250 VDC (for O-Box t.ests), is required, and is normally customer supplied.
NOTE:

These tests must NOT be performed on AC I/O boxes, or on any

DC I/O boxes already connected to their respective machineries.
The BC14C test unit m·ust NOT be used in testing any DC I/O box.
DC I-Box Tests:
1)

Load SIM-14 using Binary Loader.

2)

Turn off power.
Connect the I-Box cable~ BCI4A. to PDP'-14
slot A32 (PDP-14L slot C04).

3)

Connect the neutral (earth grounded) side of the +10 to +55 VDe
pow_er supply (provided by customer) to terminal 9 (GND) of
each K564 input module (4 modules per box).
See Figure 3-4.
If the DCpower source provides +10 to +24 VDC. all K564 modules
must have ground connected to terminal 9 only; if the DC
power source provides +24 to +55 VDC. all KS64 modUles ,must
have an additional jumper between terminals 9 and 10.
If the
DC power source exceeds +55 voe. an external resistor must
be installed in series with each input.

4)

Turn power on.

5)

Type "Q!1" and "RETURN" on the TTY.

6)

Place the plus side of the power supply on the ,iirst input, X9J
See Figure 3-4.

7)

Type "IX~-377n and "RETURN" on the TTY,
The program will then
tell you every input---riiatindicates "on" by typing:

Page 60

Load and start 2200.

mamaola I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

.I

12Bit ~

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I I I I I I I
~~~

0 I

Option or Designator
BXI4~00-Tl'-3

I

I

Tech Tip
Number BXI4-DD-TT 3
Cross Reference
Rev.

Title INST LATION TESTS OF DC I/O BOXES
Processor Applicability
Author
c
All

I

I

I

I

II-A-ppro-y-,al...L.----E'c. nil. ""

29 - 16 a 9.3)

-t~c -abo-lie. bsseWl1r

Page 92

'.1,.

0

1··.
e·

C:oN1'Je'oc..

PNL.

;tjll,S-6""

ROll.

F.'EItvr
F.F.
'XIt,,,,:5'"A
C olYlPoCt$ ,7::...c.£!R3"-;,7,,,1I,-_-<;C::'-

/ERfloR.. ;

I

0101,')8.5

RPI'Z

11oJZ.7~

__ THIS CVllf:flV'
CHnN9' WILL.
~EVSlvr "'t:lIV)' .s/~1V1'I1- OClTPu7":_.~O"" .7H6. ."~t;:IN!:3"
I (CI'J~l" IN
......J?en06R.
Sl.~NA"-) WHeN
"" .......'-.
.Is
r".eN&1:>
'ON.
CICB. P~O";'06':; ...JH~ .. R6:ssT 7<> .TilEr RSW)l
__ r.F._ .FRo""" .TI'-E ... P1DToJf/! I':.BLn;l . IJND. ISCl.I'fT&:j . ....THe. :s~p ..:su"T<.Ji.__ .__ .G.ff...CJ__ .P~DV.Il:J6~_ .. _TH£i" c.r..€'.3~~

_ _C£IIm.f'.~Lo"" ._.. ,OU"""'"
_

_

WIL."-__.. JI.'OJ~."j..IN. . L..o"" .t.!.IV7i.j.... TIIE" .. In.ToJl!
IS .s'l1e7i5l7._
.Ii:G,,_.se-:.. 15M'" .. CR e;c.e"? ....w'/~.]H_LWJ.P~ 1!6/J4
<>Pti/!!,J'l"/7$S • ...

PDUJ«._,(J'Y ..... flNO

R."L_.MOV'';S"$... _II_.''p'''U._lU?-._.TD

• .. •"-HI.:>

CIJIlN§/T .. ~tTQ\I,tr!6.$ .. f'/1V .. /lpf}i7i()Nl1<'.

.. __elll~."I.... ..T.()-.:mr..

WI.e1T .'FIi'o..... TIIS"" .. C ONTPo c... __._
... .<:",IZO , ...FILE. ~_~~"'N.~(.T()/.f!. ..xIl'l_.,_ ...I'/I>!!2o 8 .. Inn)'_fl~__ .~m()flej,.~o~~';"

_.J)SSD._AS_/l-: ..TiIif.__&~."'L.F.q~ ....7"IIe::.""!IZ!if.,,9?,B,.r;.g!L/tI:'!.P_(?7../-: ... ___
.· _' . .._c/le~.J."'-~~lgC";;-' '"

.,

.

.',.

::;.~tiii'~';;3-;;;';:'

.

~

:.

J

.amaDla l

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

m
Title

I

12Bit

IX]

I

16Bit

0 I

0 I

ISBit

36Bit

~l

Processor Applicability

IBd/~
IV.

(Author

Bob Nunley

J J I I IApproval w.

Cwmnins

CRSI

Tip CRBI-T'I'.A
iiTech
Number

GDI MOD 100 CARD READER CHANGES (Con t i nued)

All

CPL
Option or Designator

Ray

0

J

Cross Reference

I

Date

Control and Error Detectors

(AS)

lO-18-68/EN-4006B/C & E DET
indications.

(A3)/Eliminate false "Stacker Fail"

1)
2)

(continued)

Short C2 with a jumper wire on back side of P.C. board.
Cut printed Circuit on front of board between C2 and
A3Ail-6.

4-18-68/EN-C-4006/C

&E

bET (A3)/Provide stacker jam detection

after one card.
(If A3 number is 4008-101. this mod has
already been made.)
On the A3 module:

1)

IPAGE 99

Open all printed circuits attached to All
pins 4. 5. & 6.

2)

Jumper A3All-4 to A3-22A.

3)

Jumper ASAll-S to A3-21A.

4)

Jumper A3All-6 to A3 20A.

5)

Drill P.C. Board for 6.8K 1/4 W resistor (DEC #13-00463).

6)

Solder one lead to A3AII-4.
+5 volt and from A3-31A.

The other end solder to

7)

Add 101 after ass emb ly.

8)

This redesigns the stacker fail circuit and creates
an extra "and'! gate in A3All.

II PAGE REVISION

DpUBLICATIONDATE

July 1972

J

Title

I

Tech Tip

GDI MOD 100 CARD READER CHANGES (Continued)

All

Processo. Applicability

1 B~ 1.11

1 1 1 1

TAuthot"
IApproval

Numbe. CR8 I -TT-4

Rev

Bob Nunley

I

0

Cross Reference

Date 07/3l/nl

W. Cummins

GDI MOD 100 CARD READER CHANGES (continued)
V.

One Shots

(A-4)

4-18-69/EN-C-4009/cne shots

(A-4) /Provide faster recovery for

S.D. one shots.
(This mod has already been made if assembly
number is 4010-101.)
1)

Drill P.C. board for

I.OK resistor (DEC #13-0036-5).

Solder leads to A4-22A and +S land from A4-31A.
Add 101 after assembly number;

2)

i.e., 4010-10l.

2-13-69/EN-4009/D/One Shots (A4) I On rare occasions a "light
check'! is indicated as the last card is read.
By pass

switching transients in Mod 100 and Mod sao readers.
On A4:

1)

Add a 2500 PF lOY cap between A4-28A and ground.

2)

Show cap on drawing C-4009, designation as C17.

Robert Nunley/February 1971

Title

GDI MODEL 100 CARD READER TECHNICAL MANUAL
UNDOCUMENTED WIRING VARIATIONS
Processor Applicability

~II I I

I I I

1

Num~

John Brever

W. Cununins

Date

All

Processor Applicability

I

IAuthor

1PAGE

1:00

nPAGE REVISION

0

W. CUmmins

CR03-TT-4

02120/73l

l
Rev

John Breyer

I 1 I 1 I 1 IAppt'oval

CR8I-TT-S
Cross Reference

I

Rev 0

GDI MODEL 100 CARD READER TECHNICAL MANUAL
UNOOClJMENTED WIRING VARIATIONS

Title

'J....

I

IAuthor
IApproval

iTech Tip

Da..

(CP

TechTiP
Numbe. CRBL-TT-l

0

I

Cross Reference

02/l6/7~ CR03-TT-4 (CPL

DpUBLICATION DATE July 31, 1972

momoomo IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
r

Title

A~I

36 Bit

ol

MISSING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR PUNCH MAGNET.

I

12 Bit

IX]

Processor Applicability
III I

I

I

I

I I

I

16 Bit

liU I

18 Bit

0 I

CPL
Option or Designator

CTS

Tech Tip
Number CTS-TT-l

If-A_U_th_Or~s,",.,-,L"A",M",O..!.T..!.T",E_ _ _ _R_ev_O_ _-l1
IApprovals.

LAMOTTE

Date 5/10/74

l

Cross Reference

Adjust when necessary, or after any punch magnet has been replaced.
1.
Loosen the acutator coT 1 locking screw ( long screw thru center of
all punch magnets).
This will allow the magnets C cores a little play
in their position.
2.
Rotate crank shaft knob until timing dial is set to 130 degress.
All amartures should be flush against their respective C cores.

3.
Turn machine power on, and push each armature coil so they are tight
against the punch armature.
4.

Tighten the acutator coil

locking screw.

To check adjustment. place a card in the punch stat ion. and
shaft thru a cycle, no hole should be punched.

rotate crank-

Decision data is in final checkout of the new adjustment procedure,
which corrects this deficiency.

IPAGE

101

II PAGE REVISION

I

PUBLICATION DATE

August 1974

-- NOTES --

102

momoamD I FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUALJ
I
Title

12Bit

iii I

0 I

ISBit

0 I

36Bit

IAuthor

Bill Freeman

I sl S~ 8J d I I IApproval W, ~ummins

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

0 I

ITech Tip
INurn"'" DATA.COM.

COMMUNICATION CABLE INTERFACE INFORMATION
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

Rev

0

J

TT-1

Cross Reference

I

Date

Cables interfacing DEC terminals (conununication interfaces) to
data sets come in several varieties depending upon the terminal
to be utilized. The following are cable types issued by DEC and
the terminal interface that the cable may be used with:

~

Interface

BC.0'1A
BC.0'1B
BC.0'1C
BC.0'1E
BC.0'1J
BC01V
7.0'-5717

8/1, 8/L, DC.0'2
DC.0'SF
S, DC.0'SB, PT.0'BB, PT.0'BC
DC.0'8B
8/1, S/L, 12, DC.0'2*

74-6139

7.0'-5639
74-6136
74-7226

BC.0'5C

KL8E, KL8F, KLBM, DPBEA

PT.0'8F, PT.0'BFX, 639 MQ, 689 MA
6S9AF, 6B9AG
DP.0'lA
6B9 ADF

DC.0'BH
DPB6A

Fol.lowing is a table giving the standard signals assigned by EIA

Standard RS232. Eaoh data cable is listed giving the pins utilized
on the data set connector (TYPE DB25P - The hood is Type DB51226-1).
Of the several data sets available below are listed the most common
along- with any differences they have in relation to the EIA Standard.
The data sets are also noted on the following table in relation to
the signals they used.

Utilizes Type DBM255 Female Data set connector.
~

Differences from Standard

* Bell 1.0'3 A,E,
G,H
Bell 10JF

+ Bell 2.0'2,C,D

Pin 11 and 12 are originate moQe and
local mode respectively
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin

19
20
21
22
23

remote release
remote control
Ready
Ring indicator 1
Ring indicator 2

** Bell 2.0'1
Synchronous
modem

IPAGE

103

" PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

~ta
et
)in t

1

I
•

EIA-RS2)2
Pin Assignments

.

••

u

~

Protect! ve GND

, no

+

x

x

X

X

Data Carr1er Detect

+
+

Reserve
or test1n
Not to e use
n term na

+

N

e

g. Element

CAD

BCOle
GBS7
X

BC01E

G'

E TYPE
Beo J

M,

Tied to
7

X

,

Be01V
BERG

70-5717

x

Tied to
7

x

X

X
X

X

X

.

,

74-6139
W

X

T1e~

X

T.e, to T.e

co T1e~ co

6

to

X

BeOSe
BERG

X

X

X

X

X

x

X

X

70-563
W023

x
X

X

.

x
X
x

X

X

x

X
X

+

X

,

X

X

X

X

X

Da a

ment
Timing
Secon ar Rece1ve Da •
ReCG1Ve 51.g. EJ.ement
Timinq

Timing

W

X

+
+
+

~II!£
NOTE:

+

Be01B

+

~

I"

i

,

COlA
MBSO

.

X

X

X

X
X

notel

X

X

+
+
+
+
+

X

(note)

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Shielded conductor tied to ground pins on both ends.

X

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

.

"1"1U"D
I
W
~

~

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bi'

lit]

I

16Bi'

0 I

18Bi'O

I

Title COMMUNICATION CABLE IN~ERFACE INFORMATION
All
Processor Applicability
AuthorSill Freeman

I

I a laI I ad 121 I I

0

Option or Designator

ATA COMMUNICATIONS
TO DC02F

r

I

Tech Tip
NumberDATA COM-TT-l

Rev

0

I

I~A-~--o-v~al~w=.~cumm~~,=·n=s~--D-a-te----~--~I

Data

Set
Pint

36Bit

l

8Jf1 Automatic Calling Unit
Pin AssiCf11DlADt

Cross Reference

Cab e !'V1e
74-6 6
W 23

74-72 26
W8! 3

1

Frame Ground

X

2

Diqit Present

X

X

3

Abondon Call

X

X

4

Call Reauest

X

X

5

Present Next Di,tit

X

X

6

Power Indication

X

X

7

Signal Ground

X

X

&

Retrv

8

X

X

9

Reserved

10

Reserved

11
12
13

Data Set Status

14

Digit 1

X

X

15

Digit 2

X

X

X

16

Digit 3

X

X

17

Digit 4

X

x

18

Reserved

19

Reserved

20

Reserved

21

Reserved

22

Data Line Occu1>ied

23
24

Reserved

25

Reserved

X

X

X

Page 105

Title

Processor Applicability

Title

Rev

W. Freeman

w. cummins

Date

IHI I I I I I

¢

J

07/3l/721

Cross Reference
M453-TT-1

l~echTi
Numbe~C 02F -TT-l

REMOVAL OF REAOER RUN

Processor Applicability

All

1 Author

I 181 I
I I I I IApproval

All

I~ech
Tip DC02-TT-1
Number

SPEED SELECTION OF M453 CLOCK

IAuthor
._I_Approval

Rev
H.

0

Date 8-17-72

Long

I

Cross Reference

1

When clearing TTY Keyboard flag~Reader run is set causing tape
to advance this is undesirable in some programming situations.
CORRECTION:
Clear Flag with IOP4 (Read Buffer) and set Reader run with IOP2.
TT
AC clear L.
Sets Reader run instead of KCeL.
TT I Strobe H on input of KeeL, instead of grd.
Wiring to be done on each in DC02, AB09,
Delete:

Add

(KLCL)
(GNO)
(GNO)

A09V2
B0901
-B0901

ABIO~

etc.

A09E2
B09C2

B09TI (if present)

(TT AC clear L)
B09E2
A09V2
(TT I Strobe H). B0901
A09VI

Note: Pins 80901, B10Dl. etc. are bussed to gnd.

IPAGE

106

II PAGE REVISION

o

Bus must be cut.

HpUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL J
I
Title

All

lZBit

00 I

16Bit

0 I

18Bi'

0 I

36Bit

6801 (DC08) JUMPER CONFIGURATION

I

1'1

IProcesso APPIlicablilitvl

I RT

Option or Designator

DC08A

0 I
ITech Tip
INumber

J

It-A,-"_tho_'__________R_OV__O_--i
IApproval W. Curmilins Oat·07/31/72 I

DC08A-TT-l
Cross Reference

The following is a list of possible jumper configurations for the

M750 module in the DC08A:
OUTPUT JUMPERS
rES IRED OUTPUT CONDITION
Mark = Low
MarK, = H19"!
INPU~'

JUMPER FOR EVEN LINE
E2 to U
F, to U,

JUMPER FOR ODD LINE
R' to T2
P2 to T

JUMPER FOR EVEN LINE

JUMPER FOR ODD LINE
K~ to N~
E1 to L2
N2 to VL
Kl to U1
E1 to L2
E to ~
N2 to VL
El to U1

JUMPERS

DESIRED INPUT CONDITION
Marl< & Low

~i ~~

MarK - Low
Filtered

0,
A1
C1
C
0,
A1

Mar = H1
MarK = H1gn
Filtered

to
to
to
to
to
to

:f
M.
Jl
Hl
M
M.
Cl

The input, and output conditions required for the DC08 optiona-are listed
below. The required conditions for the particular option can be
obtained by M750 jumper installation as detailed in the table above.
DCO~B

OPTION
unng WO/bD

OUTPUT
moa-

= Low

ules

Mark

~O~B us "!l BCOJ Ca.DJ es
DC?8F, FE, and. FF
sing BCOlB cables

Marx - Low

~~;~G~~ :;;~Ym:~~~s
OC08C U~i!,g G~~b. or
G860 modules (Polar or
ositive Battery)
~~~C USing G~:>,b or
~860 modules (Negative
Battery)
DCo ~Cs unng G.~bZ ana
G86l modules

**

IPAGE 107

INPUT
Mark == Low Filtered
Mark = Low"
MarK

1:

Low

Mark - Low

Mark

= Low
= High

Mark

= Low

Mark = Low

Mark

= Hiqh
= Low

Mark - Low

Mark

Mark

II PAGE REVISION

Mark =- High

Mark - Hiqh

'PUBLICATION DATE July 197 2

r

ITech Tip

I

Ite

6801 (DC08) JUMPER CONFIGURATION

All

Processor Applicability

lSI

I I I I I I

IAuthor

INumber DC08A-TT-l

Rev

I

0

II-A-PP-ro-V-.I-w-.-c-unun--1-·n-s--D-.t-•....:..:7~/:...3-l/-7-2--Il

Cross Reference

Low and Hiqh refer to polarities as seen at the input (Pin El, el)
and Output (Pin 52, 51) of the M750 line I/O control module for
each line.. Low - 0 volts DC and High ='= +3 volts DC.

**

Jumpers on GaG1 parallel for POSITIVE Battery
"XII

for negative battery

G862 no change

* All iQPut jumpers for DC08B options are factory wired as
Mark = Low. If noise problems develop with DCOSB/W076D (Teletype
lines) the jumpers should be changed to Mark = Low Filtered.

The ultimate method by which the input jumpers can be determined is
to work back from the signal LINE MOX 001' }J through the M750 logic
to the input to the module. The polarity at fUNE Max OOi )6 must .be
+3 volts DC when at mark condition.
--

Title

IAuthor
181 I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

All

ITech Tip

M410-REED CLOCK

~08

II PAGE REVISION

DEC 12-(74N)-1l89-N374-

INumber DC08A-TT-2

Bill Freeman

Rev

0

Bill Cummins Date 07/31/72

~ PUBLICATION DATE

f

I

Cross Reference
M41O-TT-l

mamaDID I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bit ~

I

16Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator

OC08C

0 I

Handling and Testing Boards with Mercury
Wetted Relavs

All

I

ITech Tip
INumber

processo,I APPIlicab1ilitv
__w_._C_umm
__i_n_s_ _ _ _
R_ev__o_--j1
i IIf-A_U_tho_'
.lSI I l
Approval W. Cummins
Date 07 I 31 172 I

DC08C-TT-1
Cross Reference

The following modules use mercury wetted relays in communication
systems:

G852

GB55

GB56

GB60

The manufacturer of the relays state there are two (2) general

causes of relay
a.

£ailure~

High voltage transients may exceed the contact

ratings,

overheat the contacts and cause them to weld together.
b.

Improper handling of the module on which the relays are

mounted.
To eliminate the failure "an the following should be noted;
The output from each module may be a high DC voltage taken
from the switched contact of the relay. In the DCOSe,. the
GB56 is used when the battery is less than 80 volts while
the G860 is used for a battery of greater than SO volts.
The difference between the two modules is the arc suppression
across the switches output contact.
The input is a 100 ohm relay coil and cannot withstand a
current greater than 100 rna. With this limitation the input
cannot he connected directly to the output without a series
current limiting resistor.
Since the coil current cannot exceed lOOma, and the coil
resistance is fixed at 100 ohms, the value of the resistor
will be a function of the battery voltage used with DeaSe or
DC080 interface. A typical resistor value would be 2.2K ohms,
2 watts for a 60 volt battery. The coil will operate at a
minimum of about B rna, however optimum current range is 35-55ma.
A tester is available which includes a power supply which may be

utilized if the customer's DC power (battery) is not available to
supply voltage to the G856's or GaGO's. If the tester supply is
used, it will probably be necessary to adjust the receive relay
bias setting both when the tester is connected into the DCOSC and when
the system is returned to normal operation using customer battery
(see Installation Manual, Section· 9). It is therefore advisable to
use the customer1s battery whenever it is available.

IPAGE 109

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title ~~~!!n~,..~nd Te~;fng Boards with Mercury Wetted
Processor Applicebility

All

IAuthor

lSI I I I I I I IApproval

W. CUmmins

w.

ITech Tip

J
07/31/72 I

Rev

Cummins

Date

DCOBC-TT-1

INumber

Cross Reference

0

A simplified by typical representation of the input/output lines

for test or installation would be:
ccoa c

DCOB-A

OCOB-D

I ~BO"~"'I!X.+t=)~..l-~I·~I~
~ineXOut
•
~
,...
Une X In

DEC Power
Supply

I~

----

... ~::~~~:t~:;~~t;8Smo de

,. /

r--'I
.7.
~

,..-.

,maxImum

.........

~'\.

\

:r~

",750

~~~-~.J.IX.J)!!l~~~

'--

100 Ohms DC
resistance

TERMiNAlS

~
---~'\
Line X In
\
Resistor m'ay be installed

in either position

WARNING: Damaging overheating will result jf the Dco8~c tester is connected into a
circuit and power' is applied for a period exceeding six hours.

WARNING:

Damaging overheating will result if the DC08-C tester

is connected into a circuit and power is applied for a
period exceeding six (6) hours.
According to the manufacturer, "b" (preceeding page) failures are
essentially a result of operating the relay before the mercury has
a chance to settle. When the board is in other than the normal
operating position the contacts are immersed in mercury. When the
board is inserted into the system and the relay is actuated, it is
possible that the contacts, bridged by mercury, will allow a high
current to flow, causing them to overheat and weld together. To
help eliminate these "handling" failures, the following procedures
are recommended by the manufacturer;

1.

Let the board remain stationary, plugged into the system, for
a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours, or

2.

run the transmit relay without applying power to the contacts
for several minutes or

3.

after inserting the boards, but before operating them, vibrate
them ge¥tlY by tapping them in the direction of the arrows with
a penc1 or module vibrator stick, etc., or

Page

11n

mDmDama1FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
AU

128it

Gill

Processor Applicability

laI I I I I I I
4.

168it

IAuthor

0 I

188it

0 I

368it

01

Option or Designator

DC08C
to DC14

ITech Tip DCOaC-TT-l
INumber
W. Cummins

IApproval w.

Cummins

Rev

I

J1

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/721

vibrate as in part "3", but prior to insertion.

After

tapping them, handle them very carefully to eliminate

splashing excess mercury back onto the contacts.
Part "4" is recommended as out standard Field Service procedure.
It is understood that many times these G series modules must be
inserted or removed with power on. When this is done the module
must remain in an orientation indicated by the arrows on the
relays.

IN NO CASE should ,the module be subjected to vibration

since mercury splashing around inside the relay may cause direct
shorts of hiqh voltage DC to ground, ruining the module.
In some DCoSe systems using G856 and G860 modules the relays are
isolated from the battery by a separate fuse for each line in an
893 fuse panel. with such a panel, the four fuses associated with
the l.ine in question (remember, 2 lines to a module) should be
removed prior to insertion or removal of the module.

IPAGE 111

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

.:zuly J272

Title

IAuthor

Processor Applicability
All

I

Tech Tip DC14-TT-l
Number

DC14 OPTION LIST

1,.1 1 1 1 1 I

Larry Goelz

Rev

I

0

Cross Reference

IApproval George Chaiss&ate 03/28/73 I

The following options are used in the DC14

Description
DC14-A

PDP14 Serial Interface Modules - These
modules plug into the PDPl4, one per
POP14 that is connected to a PDP8E or
PDPll.
(M746-2, M748, M749, M589, M921)

DCl4-LA

Same as DCl4-A but for a PDPl4-L.
Modules are M748, M749, M589 a

DC14-B

Master Control - plugs into the POPS,
one master control will handle up to is
15 channels of serial line. (M8332,
1 Channel Connector Panel.)

DCl4-C

Channel Logic, plugs into the PDPS or
D014-A, one channel logic per every
PDPl4 or PDP14-L connected to a POPS or
POPll.
(M8333, 1 HBSI Connector, 1 6-pin
Mate:"N-Lock)

Title
All

DC14-D

Master Control - plugs into DDl4-A, one
master control will handle up to 15
channels of serial line.
(M8334, 1
Channel Connector Panel.

DD14-A

Serial Interface System Unit, provides
slots to accomodate DC14D and DCl4C.
Used on PDPll.

I

Tech Tip
Number

DOCUMENTATION LIST
Processor Applicability

IAuthor

I, 1 1 1 I I 1 IApproval

Larry Goelz

Rev 0

I
I

DC14-TT-2
Cross Reference

Date 03/28/73
The following documentation, describing the tecnn~caL cnaracteristics of the DCl4, may be ordered through the Field Service
Information Center, Maynard. This service is available to DEC
Field Service personnel only.
G. Chaisson

DESIGNATION

DESCRIPTION

B-DD-DC14-fI

DCl4 Print Set
Engineering Note f5

MAINDEC-l4-DBQAA-A

Diagnostic Tape & Writer

1PAGE

112

II PAGE REVISION

(PDP8)

f14

DpUBLICATION DATE March 1973

(PDPll)

Option or Designator
DC14

Processor Applicability

I 1141 I I I I

All

IT""h Tip

DC14 ECO/FCD List

Title

IAuthor

DC14-TT- 3

INumber
Larry Goelz

1Approval G. Chaisson

1

Rev 0

Date 03/28/73

Cross Reference

l

The following ECO/FCO listing is provided to insure that the
ECD status of this equipment may be swiftly and accurately
determined on site. Note that the "Indication of Accomplishment"
column normally lists only a psrt of the total ECO and FCO documents must· be consulted if further information is needed.
Equipment

ECO Change

Priority

M748
(DC14A)

M74S-00001

Mandatory All Units
shipped prior
to 3/15/72

Units/Affected

All

Processor Applicability

I 1141 I I I I

Ind. of ACCOmp.

ITech Tip DCI4-TT-4

DCl4 IMPLEMENTATION

Tide

PUrpose

To
Module is Rev.
Allow
D
MAX Baud
Rate to
operate
w/o error

IAuthor

Larry Goelz

1Approval

G. Chaisson

Rev

INumber
0
1

Cross Reference

Date 03/28(73l

In order to install DCI4, Serial Line Interface, in the field the
following requirements must be met.
Have PDP14
Have POPS or PDPII
Have DC14-A, DC14-C, DC14-B (PDP8) or DC14-D (PDP11)
Must have DCl4-D cable for each PDPl4 to run between processor
and PDP14.
PDPl4 must have ECD PDP14-00043 installed
M742 module must be Rev. F or higher with ECD M742-0S accomplished.
M741 module must be Rev. C or higher or have ECO M741-03 accomplished

l.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
Title

All

l

BAUD RATE FOR DC14

"I

Processor Applicability
1

I

1

1

1141

IAuthor
[Approval

G.

TechTiP
Numbe< DCI4-TT-5

Rev"

I

Chaisson Date 7 11 73

1

Larrv Go e I z

Cross Reference

Due to an engineering oversite all baud rates other than 211.2KHz
cannot be used on the DCl4 option.
This applies to all units
shipped to date and all future units.

page

113

-- NOTES --

114

mamalla I

RELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

l2Bit (!J

All 1

Processor Applicability

8'sl

I I I I I I

All

l6Bit

01

l8Bit

01

36Bit

IAuthor

. '"' _. ~..
Date

Rev

Don Herbener

I I I I I I I IApprovalFrank

I

n

Ol/24/73l

DEC/X8-TT-l
Cross Reference

SFTWRE-TT-9

I

SYNOPSASD8EE~NFORMATION ON DEC-X8 SOFTWARE

IAuthor

DEC/X8

lTech Tip
Number

rApprovalF. Purcell

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

01

DEC/X8 PATCH TO RANDOMIZE ROTATION

Title

T;tle

I

I

Tech Tip DEC/X8-TT-2
Number

Rev

0

J

Cross Reference

Purcell OBte 02/14/73l

This Tech Tip is a synopsis of all building and running information needed for the DEC·X8 SYstems Exerciser
Software Modules. Its purpose is to provide in concise form all information needed to run a software module.
Each module will contain most of the following subdivisions:

A.

Module Description

G.

B.

Requiremen~

H.

c.
E.

Restrictions
Operating Information
Special Considerations

F.

Building

O.

Initializing
Device Setup
,Running

J.
K.

Error Information
Error Symbol Definitions.

Below is a fist of current modules listed in this Tech Tip.

r. DC02

14.

2.
3.

15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.

I PAGE

115

DF32DS
EAEALL
EAEDP
FPP-12
HSRHSP
MRIOBA
MULTTY
NOTFUN
OPRATE
PLOTER
PRNTER

24.

25.

RF08DS
RK8DS
RK8EDS
TA8ECS
TC01DT
TC12LT
TC58MT
TD8EDT
TIMERA
TM8EMT
VCAD8E
VTSE

RANMRI

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

January 1973

Title

All

THE DEe/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE INDEX CONTAINS A

UST OF CURRENT DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
WITH INFORMATION PERTAINING TO THE FOLLOW·
ING:

1. MODULE NAME
2. PRODUCT coDe INDICATING THE LATEST RE.

VISION ("MAINDEC-Xa-" ASSUMED).
3. DEVICECSI TO WHICH THE MODULE APPLIES. A

OEVICECSI WHICH APPEARS ON THE SAME LINE
AS AN ASTERISK (-, IS BETTER TESTED BY

ANOTHER MODULE WITHIN THE INDEX.
4. INTERRUPT

DRIVEN

OR

BACKGROUND

MODULE
5. NUMBER OF MEMORY PAGES' REQUIRED BY
THE MODULE

6. RECOMMENDED RELATIVE DEC/X8 SOFTWARE
PRIORITY LEVEL. Tl;IE RECOMMENDED LEVEL
IS INDICATED BY THE "PRIORITY CODE" "A"

THROUGH ·"Z". WHERE "A" REPRESENTS THE
HIGHEST PRIORITY GROUPING (STARTING AT

LEVEL DOl SEQUENTIALLY TO

"z" REPRESENT-

ING THE
LOWEST PRIORITY GROUPING
(GENERALLY BACKGROUND). ANY MODULES
BELONGING TO THE SAME PRIORITY GROUP.
ING MAY BE PLACED IN ANY PRIORITY ORDER
WITHIN THAT GROUP.

7. ALLOWABLE OMISSIONS ~ROM INCLUSION
BECAUSE OF MEMORY LIMITATIONS. IF OMISSIONS ARE NECESSARY. IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THOSE ITEMS WITH "OMISSION CODE"
"A BE OMITTED FIRST, THEN "S", ETC •.
H

B. RECOMMENDED DEVIATIONS FROM AN EIGHT
'HOUR RUNTIME PEf\IOD. THE RECOMMENDED
RUNTIME RESTRICTIONS NOTED IN THE INDEX
ARE BASED UPON EITHER DEVICE WEAR OR
OPERATOR COVERAGE CONSIDERATIONS. REMARKS APPLY ONLY TO THOSE DEVICES ON
THE SAME LINE.
THIS INDEX WILL BE UPDATED AS PART OF EVERY
FUTIJRE DEC/X8 SOFTWARE RELEASE.

...

~~

:co

....
....
'"'

MODULE
NAME

~

til

~

-::p
~INDEC

-x..

MFUOBA

OIKAA·A

APf'LlCABLE DEVICeS

INT

BACK
PROCESSOR

BACK

MEMORY
PAGES

PRIOR

OMISS

CODE

CODe

RECOMMENDED RUNTIME RESTRICTIO

NONE

W

NONE

AANMRI

OIKAB·A

PROCESSOR

BACK

OPRATE

DIKAC-8

PROCESSOR

BACK

NONE

NOTFUN

DIKAD-8

PROCESSOR

BACK

NONE

EAEALL

OIKEA-S

ALL EAE'S

BACK

NONE

EAEeP

DHKEA-A

EAE TYPE KE8-E

BACK

NONE

HSRHSP

DlpCA-A

STANDARD HIGH SPEED
READER!PUNCH

INT

PRNTER

-I

01 LPA-S

5 CYCLeS DURING B HOUR RUN

w

LP08; LE-B
LSB-E; LSoa

"VT05; ·VT06; *TTY
·LA30
INT

NONE

TC12LT

ODTCA·A

TCt2 LINCTAPE

INT

NONE

TC58MT

OITca-c

TC:,58 aECMAGTAPE

INT

NONE

RF08DS

DIAFA-A

RF08 DECDISK

INT

NONE

RKBOS

DIRKA-A

RKa DECDtSK

INT

NONE

OIDFA·A

DF32/DF32·D OECDISK

INT

NONE

DC02

DIDCA-A

ALL DC02'S

INT

FPP12

DIFPA-A

FPP-12

INT

NONE

TIMERA

OIDKA-C

DKB-EA,EC,EP
KW12
1

....

i

=

MEMORY
PAGES

PRIOR
CODE

OMISS
CODE

MAiNDEC

APPLICABLE DEVICES

INT
BACK

RKSEOS

DHRKA-A

RKS-E DECDISK

INT

NONE

TA8ECS

DHTAA-A

T AS-E DECCASSETTE

INT

NONE

TMBEMT

DHTMA-A

TM8-E DECMAGTAPE

INT

NONE

VT8E

DHVTA-A

VT8-E DECOrSPLAY

INT

NONE

VCAD8E

DHVCA-A

VC8-E DECOISPLAY
AD8-E/AMS-E ADC

BACK

NONE

TD8EDT

DHTDA-A

T08-E OECTAPE

BACK

NONE

PLOTER

DIXYA-A

XY8-E,XY12,VP81 [Bl]

INT

1 HOUR DURING 8 HOUR RUN
WITH PLOTTER IN REMOTE

-xs-

rI

RECOMMENDED RUNTIME RESTRICTIONS

MODULE
NAME

;

S~

~

> >

~!!.

t

~

~

go
"CD

....
.... "
~

~

~
til

S.

[:l
:.:
0

c

E

~

o

~

:II

I

.....
..,

n

~

-

z ....
~

c

3".

W

.

0

g

a,..'" a'0:~ :to0~
~

i........

0

:g '"

f::!
n

0"
t>l

f

~

a
~
:xl ..
i ~

mamaama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

[31

16Bit

01

lSBit

01

36Bit

Option or Designator

DEC!X8

01

. ITech Tip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC!X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont)INum~ DEC!XS-TT-2
Processor Applicability
All

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

I

Rev 0

IApproval Frank Purcell Date 02/14173

Cross ReferanCII

1

2. PRIORITY: NON-CR1TICAL; HOWEVER INTER·
RUPTS MAY OCCUR AT A HIGH FREQUENCY.

1, OC02 MODULE DESCRIPTION
"DC02" .S A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES ANY DC02 SERIES TELETYPE CON·
TROL. THE ACTUAL OUTPUT DEVICE MAY BE A
TTY OR A CRT ASCII QISPLA Y fVTOS.VT06).
EXERCISING IS ACCOMPLISHED VIA OUTPUTTING
ONTO THE TTY PRINTER THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
"DEC/X8 EXERCISING DC02 UNE X"
"X" eQUALS THE LINE NUMBER IN THE DC02
CONTROL.

3. JOB SLOT: ANY EXISTENT JOB SLOT; 2 PAGES
REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES:
0110 STA"NOARD FOR RECEIVER
0120 STANDARD FOR TRANSMITTER.

4.3 INITIALIZING
AFTER "DC02" IS PRINTED TYPE THE fOLLQWING:

2. REQUIREMENTS

"0"

1. PROCESSORS:

PDP-B. 811, all, BIE, 81M AND

PDP·12
2. OPTIONS: ANY HARDCOPY OR CRT ASCII DEVICE WHICH IS TTY COMPATIBLE.
3. SPECIAL:

4.5 RUNNING

NONE

1. CNTR: UPDATED UPON EACH DC02INTERRUPT
2. SA10: NO EfFECT
3. SR'1: NO EFFECT

4. oPERATING INFORMATION

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE MUST BE
RUNNING.

INITIALIZED BEFORE

INTERRUPT DRIVEN

1/ PAGE REVISION

5. ERROR INFORMATION
THE ONLY DETECTABLE ERROR IN THIS MODULE
IS THE SETTING OF A KEYBOARD RECEIVER
FLAG. WHEN THIS FLAG IS SENSED A "STAT ERR"
IS REPORTED AND THE VALUE OF "CODe" CON·
TAINS THE DC02 LINE THE KEYBOARD FLAG acCURREDON.

4.2 BUILDING

IPAGE 119

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
THE OUTPUT DEVICES MUST BE POWERED UP AND
ON LINE. THE INPUT DEVICES MUST BE DISABLED
FROM CAUSING AN INTERRUPT.

NONE

3. RESTRICTIONS

L JOB TYPE:

IF A DC02A, OC02D, OC02E OR
1 DC02F COt-lTROL.
"1"-"3" INDICATING THE NUMBER OF
ADDITIONAL OC02F CONTROLLERS.

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

·

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
All

ITech Tip
(Cent) INumber DEC/X8-TT-2

IAuthor Don Herbener
Rev 0
I
I I I I I I I IApproval Frank Purcell Date 02/14/73 I
Processor Applicability

1. m=320S MODULE DESCRIPTION

Cross Reference

4.1 SPECIALCONSJDERATIONS

"DF32DS" IS A DEC!XBSOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES A DF32JDF32-D DECDISK SYSTEM WITH
UP TO FOUR DISKS. THE MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
OF THIS MODULE ARE:

THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.
4.2 BUILDING

1. JOB TYPE:
,. AEAD/WRITE TRANSFERS VARY RANDOMLY
FROM 1 TO 100018) WORDS:
2. DISK ADDRESSES ARE SELECTED AANOOML Y
BETWEEN ADDRESS 00000 OF THE LOWEST
NUMBERED DISK SPECIFIED AND ADDRESS
77777 OF THE HIGHEST DISK SPECIFIED.
3. TRANSFERS WILL OCCUR ACROSS DISK BOUNDARIES AND IN THE CASE OF 4 DISK SYSTEMS
WILL WRAP AROUND TO DISK O.

4. EACH PASS OF THE EXERCISER LOOP
EXECUTES WRITE/READIDATA CHECK START·
ING AT A RANDOMLY SELECTED DISK ADDRESS.
Ii. THREE READS ARE DONE IN THE CASE OF A
PARITY ERROR.

2. REQUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS: PDP.s, 8/1, Sll, 8fE, 81M ANO

INTERRUPT DRIVEN

2. PRIORITY: NON-CRITICAL BUT SHOULD BE
PLACED HIGH ON THE LIST TO PROVIDE
GREATER INTERACTION.
3. JOB SLOTS; JFl
REQUIRED.

OR JF2 ONLY:

4

PAGES

4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: 0600,0610,0620
5. STANDARD VIIORD COUNT: 7750

6. STANDARD CURRENT ADDRESS: 7751
4.3 INITIALIZING

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESf'OND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.
IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCATldNS MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED RESULTS,

PDP-12.
2, OPTIONS: DF32 OR DF32-D DECDISK CONTROL
WITH UP TO .... DISKS.
3. SPECIAL: NONE

1. "REPORT" (0424) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 0007
TO OCIOX WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS ARE NOT
REPORTED AS ERRORS. B-'T ASSIGNMENT IS
THE SAME AS FOR THE DF321DF32·D STATUS
REGISTER.
2, "PARITY" (0721) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 0006
TO 0007 TO INHIBIT DATA CHECKING AFTER
PARITY ERRVRS.

3. RESTRICTIONS
THERE MUST BE AN EXISTENT DISK O.

4. OPERATING INFORMATION

DEFINITION

RESPONSE

LIMITS

PRESET

A

LOWEST DISK

N

0"

0

B

HIGHEST OISK

N

0"

0

C

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM'
1 NNNN FOR
CONSTANT

ANY DATA
WORD

RANDOM

DISK ADDRESS
AT WHICH
TRANSFER
BEGINS

Of OR RANDOM
1 NNOO NNNN
(EDA) (DMA)

LEGAL
ADDRESS

RANDOM

E

TRANSFER
LENGTH

o FOR

0001-1000

RANDOM

F

BUFFER TO
USE

o FOR

LEGAL
DESIGNATOR

RANDOM

JcOOE

0

RANDOM
1 NNNN
RANDOM
1 NNNN

Page 120

mamaDla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

L12 Bit

Gi I

16 Bit

0

I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

I

Option or Designator

DEC/X8

1

0

. [ T e c hTip
TItle SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (ContlNumber DEC/X8-TT-2
All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

Rev

I

0

Cross Reference

IApproval Frank PurcellDate 02/14/73 I

003X TRANSFER INCOMPLETE (WORD
COUNT NON-ZERO BUT NO
STATUS REGISTER ERROR BIT IS
SEn

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
WRITE ENABLE ALL DISKS TO BE EXERCISED.
4.5 RUNNING

0042
1. CNTR:

UPDATED AFTER A WRITE/READ/DATA
CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.

2. SR10: WHEN SET TO A 1. THE BUFFER CURRENTL Y ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.

THIS ERROR MAY FOLLOW CODE
0032 REPORTS AND INDICATES
THAT ALTHOUGH A TRANSFER
WAS INCOMPLETE THE DATA
THAT WAS TRANSFERRED WAS
GOOD.

01XX INDICATES NXD/WLS BIT IS NXD

3. SAll: WHEN seT TO A " THE CURRENT DISK
STARTING ADDRESS IS RETAINED.

02XX INDICATES NXDiWLS BIT IS WLS

5. ERROR INFORMATION
SA:

FINAL CONTENTS OF THE STATUS
REGISTER (ALL 12 BITS FROM
DIEF)

SB:

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR

SC:

INITIAL WORD COUNT

ALL STATUS REGISTER INDICATED ERRORS ARE
REPORTED AS STATUS ERRORS. DATA ERRORS IN
THE DATAEAAOR FORMAT.
5.1

ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

CODE:

IPAGE

0002
0004

READ
WRITE

0012

FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFT·
WARE CHECKSUM BUT DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON A WORD BY
WORD CHECK). THIS TYPE OF
ERROR MAY BE REPORTED
AFTER A PARITY ERROR AND
INDICATES THE FOLLOWING: 11
THE PARITY ERROR STOPPED
THE TRANSFER PRIOR TO COMPLETION AND THEREBY CAUSED
A SOFTWARE SUMCHECK
ERROR:
21 THE DATA TRANSFERRED wAS GOOD.

121

1/ PAGE REVISION

o

so:

FINAL WORD COUNT

SE:

INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SF:

FINAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SG:

INITIAL EDA {INCLUDING FIELD
BITSI

SH:

INITIAL DMA

51:

FINAL EDA (ALL 12 BITS FROM
DIEF)

SJ:

FINAL DMA

DA:

BUFFER ADDRESS

DB:

GOOD DATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORD

nPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

·
.ITech Tip
TotJ. SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (ContI INumbe, DEC/X8-TT-2
All,

I Autho,

,processo,,, AppI,icab,ijjty,

Rev 0

Don Herbener

,c,oss Reference

'Approval Frank Purcell Date 02/14173 ,

1. EAEALL MODULE DESCRIPTION

4.3 INITIALIZING

"EAEALL" IS A DEC/xe SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES THE MUY. OVI. SHL. ASA, LSR
AND NMI INSTRUCTIONS IN ALL FAMIL Y·OF-8
EAE'S. IN THE KE8-e EAE BOTH MODES "A" AND
"8" ARE UTILIZED. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.3

AFTER "EAEALL" IS PRINTED THE USER SHOULD
TYPE THE NUMERICAL CODE NN INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED RESULTS.

FOR INITIALIZING INFORMATION.

COOE

RESULTS

00

SPECIFIES A POP-S, 811 OR PDP·12
EAE,OR "A" MODE ONLYINAKE8-E
EAE. SHIFT AND NORMALIZE TESTS
ARE BYPASSED.

Ot

SAME AS "00" EXCEPT ALL TESTS
ARE RUN.

to

"B" MODE ONLY IN A KE&E EAE.
SHIFT AND NORMALIZE TESTS ARE
BYPASSED.

"EAEALL" IS DIVIDED INTO FIVE TESTSECTfONS,
TEST XOOO THROUGH XOO4. TEST XOOO EXERCISES

MUY AND DVI BY SOLVING THE PROBLEM:
A·B/B"'B/A-A!B"'BJA=B

TESTS XOOl THROUGH XOO3 eXERCISE SHL, LSR,
AND ASR ReSPECTIVELY. THE NUMBER OF SHIFTS
RANGE FROM 1 TO 40 {37 IN A KE8-E EAE MODE
"B"~.
THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHtFTS
ALLOWED MAY BE CHANGED BY THE USER.
TEST XOO4 EXERCISES THE NMI INSTRUCTION.
THE RESULT OF THE NORMALIZE IS CHECKED BY
THE USE OF THE ASR INSTFtUCTION.
SINCE TESTS XOOl THROUGH XOO4 MAY CAUSE
"OATA REQUEST LATE" OR "OATA RATE"
ERRORS ON SOME HIGH SPEEO DIRECT MEMORY
ACCESS (DATA BREAK) DEVICES, THE USER HAS
THE ABILITY TO BYPASS THESE TESTS AND RUN
JUST TEST XOOO. HOWEVER, TEST XOOOMAY ALSO
CAUSE SIMILAR ERRORS TO OCCUR.

11

SAME AS "10" EXCEPT ALL TESTS
ARE RUN.

20

BOTH "A" AND "B" MODES ARE
UTILIZED IN A KE8-E EAE. SHIFT
AND NORMALIZE TESTS ARE BY·
PASSED.

2t

SAME p,s "20" EXCEPT All TESTS
ARE RUN.
NOTE
THE PRESET CONDITION IS "21".

2. REQUIREMENTS

A. PROCESSORS: pop·a, 8/1, 8/E, 81M OR PDp·12.
B. OPTIONS:
(EAE)

IN ADDITION, mE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHIFTS
CAN BE CONTROLLED BY SETTING LOCATION
"KXXXX" (0364) TO THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
SHIFTS VIA THE to COMMAND. WHEN IN K-E&E
EAE "A" MODE OR IF A PDP-8.8-1 OR PQP·12EAE,
THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHIFTS WilL BE THE
SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED IN KXXXX. HOWEVER,
IN KE8-E "8" MODE THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
SHIFTS WILL BE ONE lESS THAN SPECIFIED .IN
KXXXX. THIS LOCATION IS PRESET TO 0040.

EXTENDED ARITHMETIC ELE:MENT

C. SPECIAL: NONE
3. RESTRICTIONS

NONE
4. OPERATING INFORMATION

4.4 DEVICE SETUP

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

NONE

THIS MODULE REQUIRES A NON·VOLATILE STEP
COUNTER AND GT FLAG. SR5 SHOULD BE SET TO 0
WHEN THIS MODULE IS RUNNING SINCE THE MQ IS
UTILIZED.

4.5 RUNNING
A. CNTR:
UPDATED
THROUGH ALL TESTS.

"DATA REQUEST LATE" OR "DATA RATE"
ERRORS MAY OCCUR IF THIS MODULE IS RUN
WHILE EXERCISING A HIGH SPEED DIRECT
MEMORY ACCESS (DATA BREAK) DEVICE.

B.

SR10:

NO EFFECT.

C.

SRtt:

NO EFFECT.

AFTER

ONE

PASS

4.2 BUILDING
A. J08 TYPE:
8. PRIORITY:

5.

BACKGROUND

MUST HAVE
THAN ALL INTERRUPT
UNIMPORTANT.

LOWER PRIORITY
JOBS; OTHERWISE

C. Joe SLOTS: Joe SLOTS JFl AND JF2 ONLY;
PAGES REQUIRED.

Page

lz::r

4

ERROR INFORMATION
ALL ERRORS RESULT IN A "STAT ERR" REPORT.
THE MEANINGS OF THE VARIOUS STATUS
WORDS, SA. S8, ETC. VARY ACCORDING TO THE
CONTENlS OF "CODE".

mamaomD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12 Bit []

I

1& Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

0 I

Option or Designator
DEC/X8

.ITech Tip

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE (Cont}r INumber DEC/X8-TT-2
All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

6.1

IAuthor Don Herbener
Rev
0
I
IApproval Frank PurcellDate 02/14/73 I

"CODE"DEFINITlQNS
BIT 0 OF THE "CODE" WORD INDICATES THE EA-e
MODE WHILE BITS g.1' INDICATE THE FAILING
TEST (0-41.
CODe WORD ooox INDICATES A FAILURE IN TEST
X WITH THE EAE IN MODE "A" OR IN A PDP-B, a/l
OR POP-12.
CODe WORD400X INDICATES A FAILURE IN TEST
X WITH THE EAE IN MODE "B" IKEB-E EAE ONL VI.

5.2 STATUS WORD DEFINITIONS
IF CODE=XOOO (MUY, DVI ERRORI, THEN:
SA: OPERAND A
S8: OPERAND B
FINAL AC (REMAINDER AFTER FINAL
DVII
so: FINAL MQ (QUOTIENT)
SE: FINAL LINK {BIT 01. GT FLAG (BIT 11
AND STEP COUNTER CBITS 7-11)
SF: FINAL AC SHOULD BE (SIMULATED)
SG: FINAL MQ SHOULD BE (SIMULATEDI
SH: FINAL LINK, GT FLAG AND STEP
COUNTER SHOULD BE (SIMULATEDI

se;

B.

IF COoe"XOO1 (SHL) ERROR, XOO2 (LSR
ERROR), OR XOO3 (ASR ERROR), THEN:

l§C123

II PAGE REVISION

Cross Reference

SA: STARTING AC
SB: STARTING MO
SC: FINALAC
so: FINAL MQ
Sf: FINAL LINK (BIT 01, GT FLAG (BIT 1) AND
STEP COUNTER (BITS 7·11 I.
SF: FINAL ACSHOULO BE (SIMULATED)
00: FINAL MOSJ-IOULD BE (SIMULATED)
SH; FINAL LINK, GT FLAG AND STEP
COUNTER SHOULD BE (SIMULATED)
51: NUMBER OF SHIFlS IN BITS 7-11

NOTE
THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF SHIFlS IN A
PDP~, 8/1 OR PDP-12 OR IN "A" MODE IS
ONE GREATER THAN INDICATED.

C. IF COoe~XOO4 (NMI ERROR), THEN:
SA: STARTING AC
SB: STARTING MQ
SC: CONTENTS OF AC AFTER NMI
so: CONTENTS OF MQ AFTER NMI
SE; CONTENTS OF LINK (BIT 01, GT FLAG (BIT
11 AND STEP COUNTER (BITS 7-1U AFTER NMI.
SF: CONTENlS OF AC AFTER ASR CHECK
(MAY BE SIMULATED)
00: CONTENTS Of MQ AFTER ASR CHECK
(MAY BE SIMULATEDI

npUBLICATIONDATE

Februaq 1973

Title
All

(COn~rTNech
Tip DEC/X8-TT-2
't:.fl umber

SYNOPSIS OF rNFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
Processor Applicability

I I I i I

I

I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

IAPproval Fr.""

"EAEOP" IS A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH

EXERCISES THE DPSZ, oeM, ePIC, DAD, OST. and
SAM INSTRUCTIONS IN THE KEB-E EAE. ALL
OPERATIONS ARE IN MOCE "S".

"EAEDP" IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR TEST SECTIONS.
TEST 400D THROUGH 4003. TEST 4000 VERIFIES
THAT DPSZSKIPS WITH AC.MQ~O.
TEST 4001 VERIFIES THAT OPSZ DOES NOT SKIP
WHEN AC,Ma ARE NON-2:EAO.

Rev 0

I

n'/1417~

I

Cross Reference

NONE
4.5 RUNNING
A. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER ONE PASS THROUGH
ALL TESTS.
B. SR10:

NO EFFECT

C. SR11:

NO EFFECT

5. ERROR INFORMATION

TEST 4002 EXERCISES THE DAD, DST, DPIC, OCM
AND DPSZ INSTRUCTIONS BY SOLVING THE
FOLLOWING PROBLEM:
'A+A+1-1=O

REFER TO ADDRESS "PROB" 10250) FOR THE
INSTRUCTION SEQUENCE USED.

TEST 4003 EXERCiSeS THE SAM INSTRUCTION.
AEFER TO ADDRESS "SAMTST" (0300) FOR

DETAILS.

ALL ERRORS RESULT IN A "STAT ERR" REPORT.
THE MEANINGS OF THE VARIOUS STATUS WORDS,
SA, S8, ETC. VARY ACCORDING TO THE CONTENTS
Of "CODE".

5.1 "CODE" DEFINITIONS
"CODE" INDICATES THE FAILING TEST:
THROUGH 4003.

4000

5.2 STATUS WORD DEFINITIONS
1. IF CODE=4000 (DPSZ SKIP ON ZERO ERROR! OR
4001 (DPSZ NO SKIP ON NON·ZERO ERROR).
THEN:

2. REQUIREMENTS
A. PROceSSORS: POP·S/E OR PDP-B/M

SA: STARTING MQ BEFORE DPSZ
SB:. STARTING AC BEFORE DPSZ
SC: MQ AFTER OPSZ (SHOULD BE THE SAME
ASSAI
so: AC AFTER DPSZ (SHOULD BE THE SAME AS

KE8-E EAE

C. SPECIAL: NONE
3. RESTRICTIONS

SBI

NONE

2. IF CODE=4002 (DAD. OST. DPIC, DCM, OR DPSZ
ERROR). THEN:

4. OPERATING INFORMATION

SA:

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

LEAST SIGNIFICANT 12 BITS OF OPERAND

A.

THIS MODULE REQUIRES A NON-VOLATILE GT
FLAG. SRS SHOULD BE SET TO 0 WHEN THIS
MODULE IS RUNNING SINCE THE MQ IS UTILIZED.

SB:
A.
SC;

MOST SIGNIFICANT 12 BITS OF OPERAND

FINAL MQ ISHOULD BE 0000)
FINAL AC (SHOULD BE OOOO)
FINAL LINK/GT WITH LINK IN BIT 0 (LINK
SHOULD BE 11.

so:
&E:

4.2 BUILDING
A. JOBlYPE: BACKGROUND

3. IF COOE=4003 (SAM ERROR). THEN:

B. PRIORITY: MUST HAVE LOWER PRIORITY
THAN ALL INTERRUPT JOBS; OTHERWISE UNIMPORTANT
C. JOB SLOTS; ANY EXISTENT JOB SLOT;
PAGES REQUIRED.

Date

4.4 DEVICE SETUP

1. EAEDP MODULE DESCRIPTION

B. OPTIONS:

""r~,

2

\.3 INITIALIZING
NONE REQUIRED. "IJFX" RESULTS IN "EAEDP"
BEING PRINTED AND A RETURN TO MONITOR.

SA: STARTING MQ
SB: STARTING AC
sc: FINAL MQ
FINAL AC
$E: FINAL LINK AND GT FLAG (BIT tFliNK.
BIT1"'GT!
SF: FINAL MQ SHOULD BE (SIMULATED)
SG: FINAL AC SHOULD BE (SIMULATED!
SH: FINAL LINK AND GT FLAG SHOULD BE
(SIMULATED)

so:

Paqe 124

mamaa!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bit (]

16Bi'

0 I

18Bi'

0 I

36Bit

S¥NOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE
Processor Applicability

All

I

I I I I I I I

I

Option or Designator

01
.1Tech Tip

(Cont'Num~r

DEC/xB

DEC/x8-TT-2

I Author Don Herbener
Rev 0
I
IApproval Frank Purcell Date 02/14/73 I

1. fPP·12 MODULE DESCRIPTION
"FPP12" IS A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES THE FLOATING POINT PROCESSOR
OPTION. THE FPP12 IS A SUBPROCESSOR WITH
SINGLE CYCLE DATA BREAK DIRECT MEMORY
ACCESS.
THIS MODULE OPERATES IN THE FOLLOWING
WAY:

Cross Reference

4.2 BUI LDING
1. JOB TYPE:

INTERRUPT DRIVEN

2. PRlo.RITV:

NON-CRITICAL

3. JOB SLOT: JFt OR JF2 ONLY,
QUIRED.

4 PAGES RE·

4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0550

ASSIGN A RANOOM BUfFER THEN MODIFY THE
FPP12 INSTRUCTION SET AS TO THE MEMORY
FIELD AND ADDRESS OF THE BUFFER, THEN
LOAD THE "APT" TABLE INTO MEMORY AND
LOAD THE FPP BUFFER FIELD AND STARTING
ADDRESS POINTER REGISTERS AND START THE
FPP12. WHEN AN INTERRUPT OCCURS (NORMALLY

AFTER FIVE SECONDS) CHECK THE FPP ANSWER,
INCREMENT THE MODULE COUNTER AND THEN
RELEASE THE BUFFER JUST TESTED. THEN
ASSIGN A NEW BUFFER AND REPEAT THIS CYCLE.
THIS RESULTS IN TESTING THE FPP12 COOE IN
ALL EXISTING MEMORY FIELDS.

2. REQUIREMENTS

2. OPTIONS: FPP12
3. SPECIAL: NONE
RESTRICTIONS

FOR RANDOM BUFFER USAGE (NORMAL):
FPP12 (01
FOR A SPECIFIC BUFFER ONLY:
FPP12 [1) {NNNN]
WHERE NNNN IS A LEGAL BUFFER DESIGNATOR
4.4 DEVICE seTUP

4.5 RUNNING

1. CNoTR: UPDATED UPON EACH FPP12 INTER·
RUl'T
2. SR10: WHEN SET TO. A " THE BUFFER CUR·
RENTL V ASSIGNEO IS RETAINED.
3. SRtt: NO EFFECT
5. ERROR INFORMATION

NONE

4. OPERATING INFORMATION
4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.

tPAGE 125

AFTER "FPP12"IS PRINTED TYPE THE FOLLOWING
PARAMETER:

NONE

,.. PROCESSORS: PDP-8, 8/1, BIL, B/E. 81M AND
PDP·12

1

4.3 INITIALIZING

\I PAGE REVISION

ERRSA
ERRSB
ERRSC
EARSD
ERRSE:
ERRSF
CODE

=
~

=
0:

INCORRECT EXPONENT
INCORRECTMQSTSIGNIFICANTWORD
INCORRECT LEAST SIGN·IFICANT WORD
CORRECT EXPONENT
CORRECT MOSTSIGNIFICANT WORD
CORRECT LEAST SIGNIFICANT WORD
BUFFER DESIGNATOR

U'PUBLICATION DATE February 1973

I

Tech Tip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE (Cant) INumbe. DEC/X8-TT-2

IAuthor
I I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

All

Rev«

02/14/73l

IS

A

DEc/xe SOFTWARE

Cross Reference

4.2 BUILDING

1. HSRHSP MODULE DESCRIPTION
"HSRHSP"

I

Don Herbener
Frank pureeUPa"

MODULE

WHICH EXERCISES THE STANDARD DEC HIGH
SPEED READER AND/OR PUNCH OPTIONS. THE

READER AND PUNCH MAY BE RUN SEPARATELY
OR SIMULTANEOUSLY DEPENDENT ON MODULE
INITIALIZATION. THE ONLY PATTERN USED IS
THE "SPECIAL BINARY COUNT PATTEAN" WHICH
CONSISTS OF A BINARY COUNT PATTERN WITH
EVERY SECOND FRAME eQUAL TO THE L.OGICAL
COMPLEMENT OF THE PRECEDING FRAME; E.G.

1,376,2,375,3,374, ETC.
THE PUNCH PORTION PUNCHES ABOUT A 3/4 INCH
THICKNESS OF TAPE INCLUDING LEADER AND
TRAILER. WHEN THE PUNCH IS DONE AND THE
READER 15 NOT BUSY THE JOB IS AUTOMATICALLY KILLED AND SO INDICATED BY A STATUS
ERROR REPORT (CODE:OOOO).
THE READER PORTION READS A TAPE PRE VIOUSL Y PUNCHED BY THE PUNCH ROUTINE OR THE
"SPECIAL BINARY COUNT PATTERN" TEST TAPE
(MAINDEC-OO-02G4-PTI •. THE READER ROUTINE
WILL ACCEPT NO MORE THAN 1000181 FRAMES OF
LEADER. END OF TAPE IS DETECTED BY AN UNEXPECTED "OOCY' FRAME OF TAPE. AT THAT TIME
IF THE PUNCH IS NOT BUSY, THE JOB WILL BE
KILLED AND so REPORTED AS A STATUS ERROR
ICODE 00001_ ANY OTHER ERRORS ARE REPORTED
AS DESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH 5 BELOW.
NOTE
BOTH THE READER AND PUNCH ARE
oPERATED AT THE HIGHEST SPEED POSSIBLE. NO INTENTIONAL STALLS ARE
GENERATED. IT IS IMpOSSIBLE TO FEED
THE TAPE FROM THE PUNCH DIRECTLY
INTO THE READER.

2. REQUIREMENlS
1. PROCESSORS: pop-a, 8/1, 8/L, 8/E, aIM AND

,. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: NOT CRITICAL, HOWEVER THE
READER WILL CAUSE FAIRLY FREQUENT INTERRUPTS IABOUT ONCE EVERY 3.3 MILLISECONDS FOR A 300 CPS READERI.
3. JOB SLOTS: ANY EXISTENT JOB SLOT; 2
PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: READER"OfUo,
PUNCH=OO2O.

4.3 INITIALIZING
1. PRESET CONDITION: IF THE JOB IS NEVER INITIALIZED IT WILL RUN BOTH THE READER
AND THE PUNCH.
2. PARAMETER INPUT: AFTER "HSRHSP'" IS
PRINTED THE USER SHOULD TYPE THE NUMER·
ICAL CODE INDICATED TO ACHIEVE rnE DE·
SIRED RESULTS_
COOE

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
1. THE READER MUST BE ON LINE WITH A
SPECIAL BINARY COUNT PATTERN TAPE INSERTED ON LEADER CODE BUT NEAR THE
START OF THE PATTERN.
2. THE PUNCH MUST BE ON (IF APPLICABLE).

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPOATED WHENEVER AN INTERRUPT
IS ACKNOWLEDGED.

2. SR10: NO EFFECT
3. SR11: NO EFFECT
5. ERROR INfORMATION

PDP-12.

ALL ERRORS ARE REPORTED IN THE STANDARD
STATUS ERROR FORMAT_

2. OPTIONS:

STANDARD DEC HIGH SPEED
READER AND/OR PUNCH TYPES "PR", "PP",
AND "PC".
3. SPECIAL: IF NO PUNCH IS AVAILABLE. USE
THE "SPECIAL. BINARY COUNT PATTERN" TEST
TAPE (MAINDEC-OO-D2G4-I"T).
3. RESTRICTIONS
THE PAPER TAPE BEING PUNCHED MUST NOT BE
FtD DIRECTLY TO THE READER. TO RUN BOTH
THE READER AND PUNCH SIMULTANEOUSLY IT
WILL BE NECESSARY TO USE THE PUNCH ALONE
TO PRE-PUNCH THE FIRST READER TAPE.
4. oPERATING INFORMATION
4_' SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
IT IS LEGAL TO BUILD TWO OF THESE MODULES
INTO THE EXERCISER. ONE SHOULD BE SET UP
FOR PUNCH ONLY, THE OTHER FOR READER
ONLY. THIS WILL ALLOW THE READER TO BE
USED MORE FREQUENTLY.

RESULTS
READER AND PUNCH ARE RUN SIMUL·
TANEOUSLY
PUNCH ALONE
READER ALONE

5.1

ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
1. CODE:

0000 iNDICATES END OF JOB. NO SX:
WORDS WILL BE REPORTED

7777 INDICATES A READER ERROR
OTHER THAN END OF JOB. SX:
WORDS ARE REPORTED AS
SHOWN BELOW.
2_ SA: CHARACTER eXPECTED IN BITS 4-11.
3. SB: CHARACTER READ IN BITS 4-11.
5.2 RECOVERY PROCEDURE
THE JOB MAY BE RESTARTED AFTER A CODe 0000
ERROR. CODE 7777 ERRORS IMPLY A READER
AND/OR PRIOR PUNCH FAILURE. IN THIS CASE
THE JOB WILL CONTINUE RUNNING.

Page 126

mamaama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

O! I

12Bit

16Bi.

0 I

lSBi.

0 I

36Bi.

Option or Designator

DEC/XB

0 I

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont) I~:~~ DEC/XB-TT-2

All

Processor Applicability

lAuthor

Don Herbener

I I I I I I I IApproval Frank

1. MRIOBA MODULE DESCRIPTION
"MRIOBA" IS A DECIX8SOFlWARE MODULE WHICH
TESTS THE AND, TAD, ISZ AND JMS INSTRUCTIONS. THE METHODS USED ARE OBVIOUS, HENCE
ALL SPECIFICS MAY BE GAINED FROM THE PROGRAM LISTING.

2. OPTIONS:

0

I
I

Cross Reference

2. PRIORITY: MUST HAVE L.OWER PRIORITY
THAN ALL INTERRUPT DRIVEN JOBS; OTHER.
WISE UNIMPORTANT.

3. ~~~ESS~~ti~/RE~~Y EXISTENT JOB SLOT; 2
4.3 INITIALIZING

NONE

2. REQUIREMENTS

1. PROCESSORS:
POP·12.

Rev

Purcell Date 02/14/73

pop·a,

8/1, S/L., 8/E, 81M AND

4,4 DEVICE seTUP
NONE

NONE

3. SPECIAL NONE
4.5 RUNNING

3. RESTRICTIONS

1. CNTR: UPDATED AT THE COMPLETION OF ONE
P-ASS THROUGH THE ENTIRE MODULE.
2. SR10: NO EFFECT
3. SRll: NO EFFECT

NONE

4. OPERATING INFORMATION
4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

5. ERROR INFORMA nON

NONE

ALL ERRORS ARE CONSIDERED FATAL AND RESULT IN A PROGRAM HALT. ANY RECOVERY IS
QUESTIONABLt;:.

4.2 BUILDING
1. JOB TYPE:

IPAGE

127

BACKGROUND

II PAGE REVISION

0

DPUBLICATION DATE February

1973

ITech Tip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont) 1Number DEC/X8-TT-2
AU

LAuthor

Processor Applicability

I I I1 J 11

Don Herbener

1. MUL TTY MODULE DESCRlPTION
"MULTTY" IS A OEC!X8 SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES UP TO FOUR TELETYPES OR
EQUIVALENT DEVICES WHICH ARE JNDIVIDUALL Y
CONTROLLED THROUGH INTERfACES TYPES KL8,
PrOS OR EQU1VALENT~

TELEPRINTEFl 'EXERCISING lS ACCOMPLISHED VIA
AN OUTPUT PATTERN WHICH DISPLAYS ONE FULl
LINE OF EACH EXISTENT CHARACTER STARTING
WITH CODe 040, THEN 041, ETC.
THE TTY LEVEL (()'3) FOLLOWED BY A COLON IS
PRINTED AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH UNE.

N,
N: III I
N.: "'W~

J

Cross Reference

J

4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: NONE. ALL DE.
VICE CODES ARE INPUT VIA INITIALIZATION.

4.3 INITIALIZING
AFTER THE TTY LEVEL (0-3) IS PRINTED. TYPE
mE FOLLOWING:
MULTTY
o [AA1
1
[AAj
[AA]
2

[BB]
[BBJ
[BB]

3

[BB]

[AA]

WHERE "AA'· IS THE KEYBOARD DEVICE CODE
AND "BB" THE TELEPRINTER DEVICE CODE FOR
THE TTY AT THE INDICATED LEVEL TYPE "00"
FOR ANY KEYBOARD OR TELEPRINTER LEVEL
WHICH DOES NOT HAVE A DEVICE. LEVELS 0-3
MUST BE INITIALIZED.

II !!

N: ####
N:
.• _
N, _

n

Rev

jApproval Frank Purcell Date 02/14/73

#;t#.

ETC.
ANY CHARACTER INPUT VIA THE KEYBOARD OR
READER ,IMMEDIATELY REPLACES THE CURRENT
PATTERN CHARACTER, AND THE PATTERN CONTINUES THE SEQUENCE WITH THE NEW CHARACTER.

2_ REQUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS: PDP·S, &/1, .aIL, 8/E, 81M AND
POP·12
2. OPTIONS: FROM ONE TO FOUR TELETYPES
WITH INTERFACES TYpes KUI, PT080R EQUIVALENT.

IN ADDITION, THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS MAY
BE CHANGED AS IN'OICATED USING RELATIVE to.
ANY CHANGES MADE APPLY to ALL TE LETYPES
EXERCISED BY THIS MODULE.

1. CHANGE "FILLER" (0342) TO THE ONE'S COM·
PLEMENT OF THE NUMBER OF NULL FILLER
CHARACTERS AFTER CR-LF. PRESET FOR 1
FILLER.
2. CHANGE "LENGTH" (0343) TO THE ONE'S COMPLEMENT OF THE NUMBER OF COLUMNS MINUS
2. PRESET FOR 72(10) COLUMNS.
3. age 133

PRESET

NN 1(1).77)

00

0= NORMAL
1" ELONGATED
(AVAIlABLE ON LS8-E OR eQUAL PRINTE'RSl
-(NOTE. ADJUST PARAMETER B FOR ELONGATED CHARACTERS.)

I~~

n

, e SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont)INumber DEC/X8 TT-2
Processor Applicability

All

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

nnn H'"",..h"...,,,,,.,..

Rev

n

I

Cross Reference

IApprovalFrank Purcell Date 02/14/73 I

2. SR10; NO EFFECT

4.4 DEVICE SETUP

3. SRl1: NO EFFECT
THE PAINTER TO BE EXERCISED
POWERED UP AND PUT ON LINE.

MUST

BE

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPDATED UPON EACH PRINTER INTER·
RUPT.

5. ERROR INFORMATION

THe ONI. Y DETECTABLE ERROR IN THIS MODULE
IS THE SETTING OF THE I.P08/LE8 ERROR FLAG.
WHEN THIS FLAG IS SENSED IN THE ONE STATE A
CODE 7n1 "STAT ERR" IS REPORTED AND THE
JOB IS AUTOMATICALLY KilLED.

Paqe 134

I

mD~DDmD FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

[In

16Bit

01

18Bit

0I

3GBit

Processor Applicability

I I

I

I

I

I

I

Option or Designator

0I

(cont~T"'h Tip

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
All

I

"'rNumber

IAuthor Don Herbener
Rev 0
I
IApproval Frank PurceUDate 02/14/73 I

DEC/X8

DEC/X8-TT-2
Cross Reference

•

1. RANMRI MODULE DESCRIPTION
"RANMRI" IS A OEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH TESTS RANDOMLY GENERATED AND, TAD,
rsz. DCA, JMS AND JMP INSTRUCTIONS WHICH DO
CURRENT PAGE DIRECT AND INDIRECT MEMORY

3. JOB SLOTS: JFl OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES RE.
QUIRED.

4.3 INITIALIZING
NONE

REFERENCES.
4.4 DEVICE SETUP

FIRST A RANDOM INSTRUCTION IS GENERATED
AND CHECKED FOR VALIDITV, THEN RANDOM
DATA IS GENERATED. FINALLY THE INSTRUCTION IS EXECUTeD IN A RANDOMLY SELECTED
ADDRESS AND CHECKED S00(81 TIMES, THEN THE
PAOCESSSTARTS AGAIN.
2. REQUIREMENTS

NONE
4.5 RUNNING

1. CNTA: UPDATED AFTER 4096(10) INSTRUCTIONS HAVE BEEN GENERATED AND TESTED.
2. SRtO: NO EFFECT
3. Stitl: NO EFFECT

1. PROCESSORS: POP-8, 811, all, 8/E, 81M AND
PDP-12.
2. OPTIONS:
3. OPTIONS:

5. ERROR INFORMATION
NONE
NONE

3. RESTRICTIONS
NONE
4. OPERATING INFORMATION

ALL ERRORS ARE CONSIDERED FATAL AND
RESULT IN A PROGRAM HALT. ANY RECOVERY IS
QUESTIONABLE. HOWEVER, THE FOLLOWING
LOCATIONS MAY BE EXAMINED TO DISCOVER THE
NATURE OF A FAILURE.

ADDRSS

SYMBOL

RELATIVE
0355

INSTR
INSAOD

0356
0360

DATATH
DATAHR

0362
0363

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
NONE

4.2 BUILDING
1. JOB TYPE: BACKGROUND
2. PRIORITY: MUST HAVE LOWER PRIORITY
THAN ALL INTERRUPT JOBS; OTHERWISE UN·
IMPORTANT.

IPAGE 135

II PAGE REVISION

CONTENTS SPECifY THE;
ABSOLUTE LOCATION IN
WHICH THE INSTRUCTION IS
EXECUTED.
INSTRUCTION WHICH FAILED.
ABSOLUTEADQRESS FINALLY
REFERENCED BYTHE
INSTRUCTION.
OPERAND
CONTENTS OF AC PRIOR TO
EXECUTION OF THE INSTRUCTION.

DpUBLICATION DATE February 1973

I

jTechTip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (CantYINumber DEC/X9-TT-2

Processor Applicability

All

tAuthor

I I I I I I I IApproval

Don Herbener

Rev

a

Frank PurcellOate 02/14/73

1. RF08DS MODULE DESCRIPTfON

I
I

Cross Reference

4.2 BUILDING

"RFOBDS"rs A OEC!XBSOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES AN RF08 015K SYSTEM WITH UP TO
FOUR DISKS. THE MAI·N CHARACTERISTICS OF
THIS MODULE ARE;

1. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: NON-CRITICAL BUT SHOULD BE
PLACED HIGH ON THE LIST TO PROVIDE
GREATER INTERACTION.
3. ~~~"~TS: JF1 OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES RE·

1. READ/WRITE TRANSFERS VARY RANDOMLY
FROM 1 TO-1000(S) WORDS.

4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: 0600, 0610, 0620,

00'0
5. STAND'ARD WORD COUNT: 7750
6. STANDARD CURRENT ADDRESS: 7751

2 DISK ADDRESSES ARE SELECTED RANDOMLY
BETWEEN ADDRESS 00000o OF THE LOWEST

NUMBERED DISK SPECIFIED AND ADDRESS
777777 Of THE HIGHEST DISK SPECIFIED.

4.3 INITIALIZING

3. TRANSFERS WI LL OCCUR ACROSS DISK BOUNDARIES AND IN THE CASE OF 4 DISK SYSTEMS

WILL WRAP AROUND TO DISK O.
4. EACH PASS OF THE EXERCISER LOOP EXEw
CUTES WRITE/REAO/DATA CHECK STARTING
AT A RANDOMLY SELECTED 0151( ADDRESS.

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAME'TER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.
IN, ADDITION' THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCATIONS MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE DES1RED RESULTS.

1.
5. THREE READS· ARE DONE IN THE CASE OF A
PARITV ERROR.

2. REQUIREMENTS

1. PflOCESSORS: PDP-8, 8/1, SlL, 8/E, 81M AND
PDP-f2.
2. OPTIONS: RFOB DISK CONTROL WITH UP TO 4
DISKS.
3. SPECIAL: NONE

a

"RECOVR" 403661 MAY BE CHANGED FROM
1007 TO 1003 IN SYSTEMS WHICH HAVE HARDWARE RECOVERY FROM DATA REQUEST LATE
ERRORS. THIS CHANGE ENSURES THAT THE
MODULE NEVER CONSIDERS TIlE, CRl BIT AS
AN ERROR. NO SOFTWARE RECOVERY IS MADE'
AND NO ERRD'R REPORT OCCURS. DATA IS
CHECKED AS, USUAL.

2. "REPORT" 10416) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 1007
TO XOOX WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS ARE NOT
REPORTED AS ERRORS. _BIT ASSIGNMENT IS
THE SAME AS FOR THE AFOB STATUS REGISTER.

RESTR,ICTIONS

NONE.
3. "PARITY" (0711J MAY BE CHANGED FROM 1006
TO 1007 TO INHIBIT DATA CHECKING AFTER
PARITY ERRORS,

4. OPERATING INFORMATION
4.1

SPECIAL CONSlDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.

COO.

.
A

C

DEFINITION

PRESET

N

0-3

0

HIGHEST DISK

N

0-3

0

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM
ANY DATA WORD

F.iANOOM

LEGAL ADDRESS

RANDOM

0001·1000

RANDOM

LEGAL OESIGNATOR

RANDOM

1 NNNN FOR
CONSTANT
OISK ADDRESS AT
WHICH TRANSFER BEGINS

o FOR

E

TRANSFER LENGTH

o FOR

F

BUFFER TO USE

o FOR

0

LIMITS

RESPONSE

lOWEST DISK

RANDOM
1 ONNN NNNN
(EMA) (DMA)
RANDOM
1 NNNN
RANDOM
1 NNNN

mamIlla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

r

12 Bit

09 I

16Bit

0 I

laBit

01

3GBit

I

Option or Designator

0 I

DEC/XB

.
,ITem Tip
Totle SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont) Number DEC/X8-TT-2

I

IAuthor Don Herbener
Rev
0
I
I I I I I I I IApproval Frank Purcell Date 02114/73 I
Processor Applicability'

All

4.4 DEVICE SETUP

003X TRANSFER INCOMPLETE (WORD
COUNT NON-ZERO BUT NO STATUS
REGISTER ERROR BIT IS SET).

WRITE ENABLE ALL DISKS TO BE EXERCISED.
4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTA:

Cross Reference

0042 THIS ERROR MAY FOLLOW CODE
0032 REPORTS AND INDICATES

UPDATED AFTER AWRtTE/READ/OATA

THAT ALTHOUGH A TRANSFER
WAS INCOMPLETE THE DATA THAT
WAS TRANSFERRED WAS GOOD.

CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.
2. SRm WHEN SET TO A 1, THE BUFFER CURRENTLY ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.
3. SR11: WHEN seT TO A 1, THE CURRENT DISK
STARTING ADDRESS IS RETAINED.
5. ERROR INFORMATION
ALL STATUS REGISTER INDICATED ERRORS. ARE
REPORTED AS STATUS ERRORS, DATA ERRORS IN
THE DATA ERROR FORMAT.

SA:

FINAL CONTENTS OF THE STATUS REGIS·
TER

SB:

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR

SC,

INITIAL WORD COUNT

SO:

FINAL WORD COUNT
INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS

5.1 ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
CODE:

0002 READ
0004 WAITE

SF:

FINAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SG:
0012 FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFT·

WARE
CHECKSUM
BUT
DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON A WORD BY
WORD CHECK). THIS TYPE OF
ERROR MAY BE REPORTED AFTER
A PARITY ERROR AND INDICATES
THE FOLLOWING: 1) THE PARITY
ERROR STOPPED THE TRANSFER
PRIOR
TO COMPLETION
AND
THEREBY CAUSED A SOFTWARE
SUMCHECK ERROR; 2) THE DATA
TRANSFERRED WAS GOOD.

IPAGE 137

:1 PAGE REVISION

SH:

INITIAL DMA
FINAL EMA

SJ,

FINAL DMA

DB'

GOOD DATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORD

BUFFE R ADDRESS

UPUBLICATION DATE February 1973

.I Tech Tip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (ContlLNumbe< DEC/X8-TT-2
All

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

Don Herbener

Rev

I I I I I I I IApprovalprank Purcell Da..
1. RK8DS MODULE DESCRIPTION

0

J

02/14/73

Cross Reference

I

4. OPERATING INFORMATION

"RKBDS" IS A OEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES AN AK8 DISK SYSTEM WITH UP TO
FOUR DRIVES. THE MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF
THIS MODULE ARE:

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.
4.2 BUILDING

1. WRITE/READ TRANSfERS VARY RANDOMLY
FROM 1 TO 1000(8) WOROS.
2. DISK ADDRESSES ARE SELECTED RANDOML V
BETWEEN ADDRESSES OOOD AND 6177 ON ALL
DISKS BElWEEN THE SPECIFIED LOW AND HIGH
DISK LIMITS.
3. TO
ACHIEVE
GREATER
DATA
BREAK
THROUGHPUT, RANDOMLY FADM 1 TO 200(8)
EXERCISER LOOP PASSES ARE MADE USING
TWO ADJACENT TRACKS WITH RANDOM
CHANGES

TO THE

SECTOR, SURFACE

AND

1. JOB TYPE:

INTERAUPTORIVEN

2. PRIORITY:

NON-CRITICAl, BUT SHOULD BE
PLACED HIGH ON THE LIST TO PROVIDE
GREATER INTERACTION

3. JOB SLOTS: JF1 OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED,
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: 0130. 0740, 0760.
4.3 INITIALIZING

DRIVE SELECTION ENABLED.
4. THREE READS ARI;: DONE IN THE CASE OF A
PARITY ERROR.
2. REaUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS:
PDP-12.

POP-B. 811. all, 8/E, 81M AND

2. OPTIONS: RKa DISK SYSTEM WITH UP TO
FOUR RK01 DRIVES.
3. SPECIAL:

NONE

3. RESTRICTIONS

A

IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCATIONS MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED FOR THE
DESIRED RESULT_
1. "REPORT" 10362} MAY BE CHANGED FROM 5116
TO XXXX WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS INHIBIT AN
ERROR REPORT FOR THAT CONDITION. BIT
ASSIGNMENT IS THE SAME AS THE RKB STATUS
REGISTER.
2. "PARITY" (0130) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 1576
TO 5116 TO INHIBIT DATA CHECKING AFTER A
PARITY ERROR.

NONE

CODE

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.

DEFINITION

RESPONSE

LOWEST DISK

LIMITS

PRI":SET

0-3

HIGHEST DISK

""

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN FOR CONSTA~

DISK ADDRESS AT
WHICH TRANSFER
8EGlNS

o FOR RANDOM
1 OOON NNNN
t (TRK.$UR.sEC)
(DSK # IN BITS 9 AND 10)

TRANSFER LENGTH

BUFFER TO USE

ANY DATA WORD

RANDOM

LEGAL ADDRESS

RANDOM

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN

0001-1000

RANDOM

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN

LEGAL DI":SIGNATOR

RANDOM

Page 138

ma!aDma I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title
All

12Bit []

I

16Bit

0 I

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator
DEC/X8

0 I

LlTech Tip
SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (COntrNumber DEC/X8-TT-2
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

1A_oval

Frank Purcell Oate

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

02/13/731

003X TRANSFER INCOMPLETE (WORD
COUNT NON-ZERO BUT NO STATUS
REG. ERROR BIT IS SET.)

4A DEVICE SETUP
MAKE READY AND WRITE ENABLE ALL DISKS TO

BE EXERCISED.
0042 THIS MAY FOLLOW COOE 0032
REPORTS AND INDICATES THAT
ALTHOUGH Ii. TRANSFER WAS IN·
COMPLETE. THE DATA THAT WAS
TRANSFE RRED WAS GOOD.

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTA:

UPDATED AFTER A WRITE!READ!DATA

CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.
2. SA10: WHEN A 1, THE BUFFER CURRENTLY
ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.
3. SRll: WHEN A 1, THE CURRENT DISK STARTING ADDRESS IS RETAINED.

5. ERROR INFORMATION
ALL STATUS REGISTER ERRORS ARE REPORTED
AS STATUS ERRORS, DATA ERROAS IN THE DATA

SA:

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR

se:

INITIAL WORD COUNT

so:

FINAL WORD COUNT

SE:

INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SG:

INITIAL COMMAND REGISTER

SH:

INITIAL TRK,SUR,SEC

ERROR fORMAT.

FINAL CURRENT ADDRESS

ERROA SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
CODE:
0002 READ

0004 WRITE

FINAL COMMAND REGISTER

0012 FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFT·
WARE
CHECKSUM
BUT
DATA

lOOKED GOOD ON WORD BY WORD
CHECKI. IN THE CASE OF A PARITY
ERROR, THIS CODE INDICATES 11
THE PARITY ERROR STOPPED THE
TRANSFER PRIOR TO COMPLETION;
AND 21 THE DATA TRANSFERRED
WAS GOOD.

IPAGE 139

FINAL STATUS REGISTER

SB:

II PAGE REVISION

0

SJ,

FINAL TRK.SUR,SEC

DB:

GOOD DATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORD

BUFFER ADDRESS

UPUBLICATION DATE

Febl:l1ary 1973

·

Totle SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/x8 SOFTWARE MODULES

All

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

ITech Tip
(Cont) INumber DEC!X8-TT-2

Don Herbener

I I I I I I I IApproval Frank

Rev

0

Purcell Date 02/13/73

1. flK8EDSMODULE DESCRIPTION

I

Cross Reference

I

4. OPERATING INFORMATION

"'RKSEOS" rs A OEC/XS SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES AN RK8-€ DISK SYSTEM WITH
UP TO FOUR DISK DRIVES. THE MAIN CHARAC-

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.

TERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:

4.2 BUILDING
1. WRITE/READ TRANSFER L.ENGTH IS RANDOML Y SELECTED FOR 128,256 OR 51;2WOROS.
THE 512 WORD TRANSFERS ARE ACCOMPLISHED BY FIRST TRANSFERRING ONE
SECTOR IN WRITE OR READ DATA MODE, THEN
TRANSFERRING THE NEXT SECTOR IN WAITE
OR READ ALL MODe THEREBY ATTEMPTING
TO START THE SECOND SECTOR TRANSFER
IMMEDIATELY AFTER COMPLETION OF THE
FIRST WITHOUT AN INTERVENING DISK
REVOLUTION, OF COURSE THE SUCCESS OF
THE ABOVE METHOD IS DEPENDENT ON PROCESSOR SPEED AND SYSTEM LOAD.

1. JOB TYPE:

INTERRUPT DRiVEN

2. PRIORITY: NON-CRITICAL, aUT SHOULD BE
PLACED HIGH ON THE LIST TO PROVIDE
GREATER INTERACTION

3. JOB SLOTS: JFl OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0740

4.3 INITIALIZING

2. DISK ADDRESSES ARE SELECTED RANDOMLY
BETWEEN ADDRESSES OOOOOAND 145J7 ON ALL
DISKS BETWEEN THE SPECIFIED LOW AND HIGH
DISK LIMITS.

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
"MANNER SHOWN BELOW.

3. THREE READS ARE DONE IN THE CASE OF A
CRC ERROR.

IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCATIONS MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED FOR THE
DESIRED RESULT.

2. REQUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS: POP..S, 8/1. 8fL, 8/E, 81M AND
PDP-12.

2. OPTIONS: RK8-E DISK SYSTEM WITH UP TO
FOUR AK05 DRIVES.

1. "REPORT" (0534) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 3777
TO XXXX WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS INHIBIT AN
ERROR REPORT FOR THAT CONDITION. BIT
ASSJGNMENT IS THE SAME. AS THE RK8-E
STATUS REGISTER.
2. "PARITY" (O724} MAY BE CHANGED FROM 3767

TO 3777 TO INHIBIT DATA CHECKING AFTER A
CAe ERROR.

3. SPECIAL: NONE
3. RESTRICTIONS

NONE

CODE

DEFINITION

RESPONSE

LIMITS

PRESET

LOWEST DISK
HIGHEST DISK

0-3

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN fOR CONSTANT

DISK ADDRESS AT
WHICH TRANSFER
BEGINS

o FOR RANDOM
1 OOON NNNN
t ITRK.SUR,8EC)
lOOK # IN BITS9 AND 10,
TRKO IN BIT 111

TRANSFER LENGTH

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN

BUFFER TO USE

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN

"~MAXIMUM

ANY DATA WORD

RANDOM

RANDOM

0200.0400
OR 1000 ONLY

RANDOM

LEGAL DESIGNATOR

RANDOM

ADDRESS (TRK/SURISEC) ACCEPTABLE is 14536.

Page 140

mamaoma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
r 12Bit

[l!ll

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

1

1

1

1

1

1

I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

Rev

iTech Tip DECjX8-TT-2

!Number
0

I

Cross Reference

1Approv81 Frank Purce1J)ate 02/14/731

4.4 DEVICE SETUP

0012 FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFT·
WARE

MAKE READY AND WRITE ENABLE ALL DISKS TO

RUNNING

1. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER A WRITE/READ/DATA
CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.
2. SA10: WHEN A " THE BUFFER CURRENTLY
ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.

CHECKSUM

BUT

DATA

LOOKED GOOD ON WORD BY WORD
CHECK), IN THE CASE OF A CRC
ERROR, THIS CODE INDICATES 11
THE CRC ERROR STOPPED THE
TRANSFER PRIOR TO COMPLETION;
AND 2) THE DATA TRANSFERRED
WAS GOOD.

BE EXERCISED.
4.5

DEC/X8

0 I

SYNOPSIS OF INFORMATION ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MOD

Title

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

SA:

FINAL STATUS REGISTER

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR
3, SRn: WHEN A " THE CURRENT DISK STARTING ADDRESS IS RETAINED.
5. ERROR INFORMATION

All STATUS REGISTER ERRORS ARE REPORTED
AS STATUS ERRORS, DATA ERRORS IN THE DATA
ERROR FORMAT.

5.' ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
CODE:
0002 READ
0004 WAITE

IPAGE 141

II PAGE REVISION

SC;

INITIAL SOFTWARE WORD COUNT

so:

FINAL SOFTWARE WORD COUNT

SE:

INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SF:

INITIAL COMMAND REGISTER

SG:

INITIAL DISK ADDRESS REGISTER

DA:

BUFFER ADDRESS

DB:

GOOD DATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORD

"PUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Title
All

ITech Tip
SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont) iNumber DEC!XB-TT-2
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

1. TA8ECS MODULE DESCRIPTION

"TASECS"IS A DEC/XBSOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES A TA8-E CASSETTE SYSTEM WITH UP
TO EIGHT TU6O'S (SIXTEEN DRIVES). THE MAIN
CHARACTERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:

1. NORMALLY

BLOCK

Rev

0

!Approva. Frank Purcell Date 02/13/73

LENGTH

IS

RANDOM.

BLOCK LENGTH VARIES RANDOMLY FROM 1
TO 776 OCTAL WORDS. FOR CONSTANT BLOCK

LENGTH REFER TO BLOCK LENGTH PARA·
GRAPH 4.3.2.
2. DATA IS NORMALLY RANDOM. FOR CONSTANT
DATA REFER TO DATA PATTERN PARAGRAPH

4.3.3.
3. NORMALLY THE TWO DRIVES WITH DEVICE
CODE 0700 WILL BE EXERCISED RANDOMLY.
FOR MORE DRIVES OR CONSTANT DRIVE CAPA·
BILITIES REFER TO DRIVE SELECTION PARA·
GRAPH 4.3.1.

4. TAPE OPERATIONS PERFORMED ARE: WRITE
A FILE GAP 10NLY AT 80Tl; WRITE; BACKSPACE A 8LOCK GAP; READ; COMPARE. REWIND
IS USED ONLY WHEN EOT IS SENSED.

5. TAPE IS EXERCISED AT THE CURRENT TAPE
POSITION. TAPE IS FORCED TO BOT ONLY
WHEN EaT IS SENSED.

6. THE MOOULE WILL HANG IF A DEVICE CODE IS
USED WHICH IS NOT ON THE SYSTEM.

2. REQUIREMENTS

t. PROCESSORS: PDP-8E,8F,SM
2. OPTIONS: TAS-E CASSETIE INTERFACE 11-8);
TU60 SYSTEM 11-8) WITH UP TO SIXTEEN
DRIVES.

3. SPECIAL: TVI/O TO SIXTEEN CERTIFIED CAS·
SETTES.
3. RESTRICTIONS
THIS MODUl.E IS NOT OPERATIONAl. UNDER REVISION A OF THE DEC/X8 MONITOR/8UILDER.
4. OPERATING INFORMATION

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS

4.2 BUILDING
1. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: CRITICAL, MUST BE ONE OF THE
HIGHEST PRIORI"'rV MODULES.

I

Cross Reference

1

3. JOB SLOTS: JFl OR JF2 ONLY;
QUIRED
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0700

4 PAGES RE-

4.3 INITIALIZING
THIS MODULE IS SETUP NORMALLY TO RUN A
TAS-e CASSETTE SYSTEM WITH A DEVICE CODE OF
0700 UNLESS CHANGED AT BUILDING TIME. THE
NORMAL OPERATION WILL BE RANDOM DRIVE
SELECTION ON DRIVES AlB. RANDOM BLOCK
LENGTH FROM 1 TO 776 (8) WORDS AND RANDOM
DATA PATTERNS. TO RUN MORE DRIVES, OR
CHANGE DRIVES, OR TO RUN CONSTANT BLOCK
LENGTH. OR TO RUN CONSTANT DATA, REFER TO
TABLES BELOW FOR CHANGES IN THE MODULE
PROGRAM.

4.3.1 DRIVESELECTION
BELOW IS A TABLE OF 8 LOCATIONS WHICH CON·
TAIN THE DEVICE CODES OF A TAB-E CASSETTE
SYSTEM. INITIALLY ALL EIGHT LOCATIONS ARE
SETUP TO A DEVICE COOE OF 0700 UNLESS
CHANGED AT BUILD TIME. THIS TABLE IS AC·
CESSEQ RANDOMLY TO CHANGE THE DEVICE
lors TO THE SAME DRIVES OR RANOOM DRIVES
DEPENDING ON THE CONTENTS OF THIS TABLE.
TO RUN UP TO 8 TAS-E'S (16 DRIVES) CHANGE THE
CONTENTS OF THIS TABLE TO CONTAIN DEVICE
CODES FROM 0700 TO 0070. TO RUN TWO TAB-E'S
EQUALLY CHANGE 4 LOCATIONS IN THIS TABLE
TO THE NEW DEVICE CODE. IF IT IS DESIRED TO
RUN ONE TAS-E MORE THAN ANOTHER, JUST
ENTER THE DEVICE CODE OF THf: ONE TO BE
EXERCISED LESS, FEWER TIMES IN THE TABLE.
LOCATION
OS2.
OS27

0530
0631

0532
0633

053'
0535

CONTENTS

0700
0700
0700
0700
0700
0700
0700
0700

IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCA·
TION MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED RESULTS.
"REPORT" (0307) MA v BE CHANGED FROM 0376
TO OXXX WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS IN STATUS B
ARE NOT REPORTED AS ERRORS.

4.3.2 BLOCK LENGTH
TO CHANGE FROM RANDOM TO CONSTANT BLOCK
LENGTH OR FROM CONSTANT BLOCK LENGTH TO
RANDOM BLOCK LENGTH USE THE TABLE BELOW
FOR CHANGES TO THE MODULE PROGRAM USING
DDT.

Page 142

mamaamD lFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

Gill

0 I

16Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

1 1 1 1

IApproval Frank

All

_I

I I

Rev 0

I

Purcell Oate 02114/73

MODULE LOCATION

DEC/XB-TT-2

Cross Reference

I

CONTENTS

1160

4516
XXXX

CONSTANT

0741
1160

4562
ooo2-077T"

RANDOM

0741
1160

5516

CONSTANT

0741

5562

1160

0002"()777-

RANDOM

JF2

DEC/XB

0 I

(Contl~'::'!.!!"

Don Herbener

TYPE

JOB NUMBER

Option or Designator

xxxx

·CONSTANT BLOCK LENGTH = NUMBER OF WORDS +1.

6.1

4.3.3 DATA PATTERN
TO CHANGE FROM RANDOM DATA TO CONSTANT
DATA OR FROM CONSTANT DATA BACK TO RAN·
DOM DATA USE THE TABLE BELOW FOR CHANGES
TO MODULE PROGRAM USING DDT.

4.4 DEVICE seTUP
ALL DRIVES MUST BE LOADED WITH CASSETTES
WRITE ENABLED. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.3.1

FOR DRIVE SELECTION.
4.5

'

RUNNING

1. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER A WRITE/BACKSPACE
BLOCK GAP/READ/COMPARE OPERATION IS
COMPLETED.
2. SR1(): NO EFFECT
3. SR11: NO EFFECT

ALL STATUS 8 ERRORS ARE REPORTED IN THE
STANDARD STATUS ERROR REPORT FORMAT,
DATA ERRORS IN THE DATA ERROR FORMAT. IF
A CRe ERROR OCCURRED THE PROGRAM WILL
TRY TO REREAD THE BLOCK UP TO 2 RETRIES.
THE FIRST ERROR AFTER ROTATION OR t C IS
NOT REPORTED SINCE A TIMING ERROR IS EXPECTED IDUE TO THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM BEING
OFF FOR A PROLONGEO TIMEI.

II PAGE REVISION

CODE:
0000 SOME KIND OF A STATUS 8 ERROR
0001 STATUS B EQUALLED 0 BUT KSOR
FAILEDTOSKIP.
0010 FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFT·
WARE
CHECKSUM
BUT
DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON A WORD BY
WORD CHECKI. THIS TYPE OF
ERROR MAY BE REPORTED AFTER
A CRC ERROR AND INDICATES THE
FOLLOWING: 11 THE CRe ERROR
STOPPED DATA TRANSFER PRIOR
TO COMPLETION AND THEREBY
CAUSED A SOFTWARE SUMCHECK
ERROR; 21 THE DATA THAT WAS
TRANSFERRED WAS GOOD.
SA:
S8:

SH:

CONTENTS OF STATUS A REGISTER
STATUS A REGISTER READ BACK AFTER
KLSA COMMAND (1'S COMPLEMENT!
EXPECTEO$TATUSB
RECEIVEDSTATUSB
BUFFER OESIGNATOR
INITIAL
WORD
COUNT
(Posmve
NUMBER)
FINAL WORO COUNT (THE POSITIVE
NUMBER OF WOROSACTUALLY READ)
lOT DEVICE CODE

DA:
DB:
DC:

BUFFER ADDRESS
GOOD DATA WORD
~AD DATA WORD

SC·
SO:

5. ERROR INFORMATION

1PAGE 143

ERROR SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

0

SE:
SF:
SG:

UPUBLICATION DATE

Feb:r:uary 1973

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES

All

Processor Applicability

LAuthor

Don Herbener

ITech Tip
(Cont) tN"mbar DEC/X8-TT-2

Rev

0

I

I I I I I I I 1Approval Frank Purcell Date 02/14/73 I
JOB NUMBER

JF1

"2

TYPE

MODULE LOCATION

Cross Reference.

CONTENTS

l161
0252

4516
4516
XXXX

CONSTANT

0742
1161
0252

3710
3710
ONNN!B BIT DATA WORD)

RANDOM

0742

5516

1161
0252

5516

0742
1161
0252

4710
4170

RANDOM

CONSTANT

0742

xxxx

ON.NN (BBLT DATA WOAD]

Page .144

Illi0mBI RELD
I
Title
All

1ZBit

SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

QlI

16Bit

0 I

1SBit

0 I

I IProcesso
1'1 Appllicmlilitvl IAutho.

DEC/XB

JTechTi
(ContrNumbe: DEC/X8-TT-2

Don Herbener

IApproval Frank

Option or Designator

0 I

36Bit

SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES

I

Rev

0

Purcell Date 0211.4/73

I
I

Cross Refe.ence

3. RESTRICTIONS

1. TC01DT MODULE DESCRIPTION

WHEN OPERATING UNDER REVISION A OF THE
DEC{Xa MONITOR/BUILDER, CHANGE TC01DT
LOCATIONS 0417 AND 0420 FROM 7000 INOP} TO
7240 AND 3456 RESPECTIVELY.

"TCOlOT"'5 A OEC/X8SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES A TC01/TC08 DECTAPE SYSTEM WITH
UP TO EIGHT TRANSPORTS. THE MAIN CHARAC·
TERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:

1. All READ/WAITE TRANSFERS CONSIST OF
777(6) WORDS AND UTILIZE EXTERNAL BUF·
FERS. THE fiRST LOCATION IN THE ASSIGNED
BUFfER IS RESERVED FDA CURRENT BLOCK
BREAK IN DURING SEARCH.

4.. OPERATING INFORMATION
4.1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES AND USES EXTERNAL
BUFFERS.

2. SEARCH OPERATIONS ARE IN NORMAL MODE,

BOTH DIRECTIONS.
3. READ(WR1TE OPERATIONS ARE
TlNUOUS MODE, BOTH DIRECTIONS.

4..2 BUILDING

IN

CON.

4. ALL DRIVES WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE
LOWEST AND HIGHEST NUMBERED DRIVES
(DRiVe "8" ;:. -0" IS LOWI SPECI,FIEO ARE RANDOMLYUTILfZEO.
5. ALL BLOCKS WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE LOWEST-3 AND HIGHEST+3 BLOCKS SPECIFIED ARE
SEOUENTIALL Y USED.

1. JOB TYPE;

INTERRUPT DRIVEN

2. PRIORITY: CRITICAL, MUST BE THE HIGHEST

3.
4.
5.
6.

OR ONE OF THE HIGHEST PRIORITY MODULES
DUE TO INHERENT HARDWARE DESIGN
FEATURES.
JOB SL01S: JFl OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
STANDARD DEVICE CODES: 0760,0770
STANDARD WORD COUNT: 7754
STANDARD CURRENT ADDRESS: 7755

4.3 INITIALIZING
6. THE OPERATIONS AT EACH BLOCK CONSIST OF
WRITE{REAOICHECK FORWARD, THEN WRITe!
AEAOICHECK REVERSE.
7. THREE READS ARE DONE IN THE CASE OF A
PARITY ERROR.
2_ REQWREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS:
PDP-12111.

PDP-8, 811, aIL, alE, aIM AND

2_ OPTIONS: TCOT OR TCoa DECTAPE CONTROL
WHH UP TO EIGHT DRIVES (TUSS OR TUS61.
3. SPECIAL: STANDARD PDP-8 FORMAT DECTAPES ARE RECOMMENDED 12702 BLOCKS, 201
WORDS EACH). NO GUARANTEE IS MADE FOR
DECTAPES WITH ANY OTHER FORMAT.

II PAGE REVISION

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.
IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING MODULE lOCATIONS MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE OESIREo.RESUL TS.
1. "REPORT" 104251 MAY BE CHANGED FROM 7700
TO XXOO WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS ARE NOT
REPORTED AS ERRORS. BIT ASSIGNMENT IS
THE SAME AS IN TC01rrC08 OECTAPE'SSTATUS
B REGISTER.
2. "PARITY" (0734) MAY BE CHANGED FROM 3500
TO 7700'TO INHIBIT CHECKING DATA AFTER A
DECTAPEPARITY ERROR.

KpUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

-

ITech Tip
TideSYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cant) I Number DEC/X8-TT-2
All
Processor Applicability
LAuthor Don Herbener
Rev 0
I Cross Reference

1 J I I I I I IApproval

CODe

Frank PurcellOato 02/14173

DEFINITION

RESpoNSE

PRESET

LIMITS

D·'

LOWEST DRIVE

D·'

HIGHEST DRIVE

LOWEST BLOCK

I

o FOR NO CHANGE
1 NNNN FOR NEW

0003-2675

2600

HIGHEST BLOCK

o FOR

NO CHANGE
1 NNNN FOR NEW

()()()4.2676

2676

TYPE OF DATA

OFDR RANDOM
1 NNNN FOR CONSl ANT

ANY DATA WORD

RANDOM

OFOR RANDOM
1 NNNN

LEGAL DESIGNATOR

RANDOM

BUFFER TO USE

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

Page 146

mBmBlla l

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

Title
All

12Bit

IJj

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

COn Herbener

DRIVES

TO

BE

eXERCISED

MUST

SWITCHED TO REMOTE AND WRITE ENABLED
WITH TAPE IN PLACE.

AFTER

A

SA:

2. 5R10: WHEN SET TO A " THE BUFFER CURRENTLY ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.
3. SA1': WHEN SET TO A " THE DRIVE CURRENTL V IN USE IS RETAINED.

SB:
SC:
SO:

SE:
SF:

SG:

5. eRROR INFORMATION

SH:

ALL STATUS B ERRORS ARE REPORTED IN THE
STANDARD STATUS ERROR FOAMAT, OATA

SI:

ERRORS IN THE DATA eRROR FORMAT. THE
FIRST STATUS eRROR AFl"eR ROTATION OR t C IS

NOT REPORTED SINCE A TIMING ERROR IS EXPECTED IQUE TO THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM BEING OFf
FOR A PROLONGED TIMEI.

CODE:

I
I

Cross Reference

DA:
08:
DC:

FINAL CONTENTS Of STATUS B REGISTER.
CURRENT BUffER DESIGNATOR
INITIAL WORD COUNT
fiNAL WORD COUNT
INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS
fiNAL CURRENT ADDRESS
CURRENT DRIVE IN BIlS 0-2CURRENT BLOCK NUMBER AT WHICH
TRANSFERS START.
FINAL CONTENTS OF STATUS A REGIS·
TER
BUFFER ADDRESS
GOOD DATA WORD
BAD DATA WORD

THE RECURRENCC OF SELECT ERRORS IS A
PROBLEM wHICH MAY BE DIFFICULT TO DIAG·
NOSE. THE fOLLOWING STEPS MAY LEAD TO A
SOLUTION.

DODO SEARCH OPERAT10N
00D2 READ OPERATION
0004 WRITE OPERATION
0012 FALSE DATA ERROR IBAD SOFT·
WARE CHECKSUM BUT DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON A WORD BY
WORD CHECK.) THIS TYPE OF
ERROR MAY BE REPORTED AfTER
A PARITY ERROR AND INDICATES
THE FOLLOWING: 1} THE PARITY
ERROR SToPPED THE TRANSFER
PRIOR TO COMPLETION AND
THEREBY CAUSED A SOFTWARE
SUMCHECK ERROR; 2} THE DATA
THAT WAS TRANSFERRED WM
GOOD.

II PAGE REVISION

n2"4 '73

5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING HINT

5.1 ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

IPAGE'147

(cont~~:.!:." DEC/X8-TT-2

0042 THIS ERROR MAY FOLLOW CODE
0032 REPORTS AND INDICATES
THAT ALTHOUGH A TRANSFER
WAS INCOMPLETE THE DATA THAT
WAS TRANSFERRED WAS GOOD.

WRITE/READI

CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.

DEC/X8

003X TRANSFER INCOMPLETE IWORD
COUNT NON..zERO BUT NO STATUS
B ERROR BIT IS SET}.

BE

4.5 RUNNING

1. eNTR: UPDATED

Option or Oeoignator

0 I

Rev 0

IApproval " .."nl< D""~All Data

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
ALL

I

o

1. KILL THE JOB.
2. CHANGE MODULE LOCATIONS 1030 TO 7ODO
AND 1031 TO 6766.
3. RUN THE JOB.

4. IF THE PROBLEM "DISAPPEARS" CHECK OUT
THE XSA OY TIME USING THE ORIGINAL CODE.

I PUBLICATION OATE

Feb~uY

1973

T;'le SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES
Processor Applicability
Don Herbener
All

I I I I I I I

lAu:thor

r

A-",vol

~.

n.

•

"TC12LT" IS A QEC/X8 SOFTWARE: MODULE WHICH
-eXERCISES A TC12 UNCTAPE SYSTEM WITH UP TO

TRANSPORTS.

THE

Rev

0

.oate

I Cross Reference
I

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

1. Tel2L T MODULE DESCRIPTION

EIGHT

ITech Tip
(ConqNumber DEC/X8-TT-2

MAIN

CHARAC·

THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.
4.2 BUILDING

TERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:

,. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: NON-CRITICAL

1. ALl. READ/WRITE TRANSFERS CONSIST OF
400(81 WORDS AND UTILIZE EXTERNAL BUF·

3. JOB SLOTS: JFl OR JF2 ONLY, 4 PAGES REQUIRED

FERS.
2. ALL OPERATIONS PERFORMED ARE IN exTENDED OPERATIONS MODE AND UTILIZE THE

4.3 INITIALIZING
AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.

EXTENDED ADDRESSfNG MODE.

3. ALL DRIVES WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE
LOWEST AND HIGHEST NUMBERED DRIVES
SPECIFIED ARE RANOQML Y UTltIZED.

IN ADDITION LOCATION "PARITY" 107171 MAY BE
CHANGED FROM 0000 TO 7n7 TO INHIBIT DATA
CHECKING AFTER A TRANSFER CHECK ERROR.

4. ALL BLOCKS WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE
LOWEST AND HIGHEST BLOCKS SPECI FlED ARE
SEQUENTIALLY USED.

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
ALL DRIVES TO BE EXERCISED MUST B"SWITCHED TO REMOTE AND WRITE ENABLED
WITH TAPE IN PLACE.

5. THE OPERATIONS AT EACH BLOCK CONSIST OF
WRITE/READ/CHECK.

6. THREE READS ARE DONE IN THE CASE OF A
TRANSFER CHECK ERROR.

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER
A WRITE/READI
CHECK OPERATION IS COMPLETED.

7. ALL OPERATIONS IN UNC MODE ARE DONE
WITH THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM OFf'.

2. SR10: WHEN SET TO A 1, THE BUFFER CUR-

2. REQUIREMENTS

RENTl Y ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.

1. PROCESSORS: PDP-12

UP TO EIGHT DRIVES (TU55 OR TU56).

5. ERROR INFORMATION

3. SPECIAL: STANDARD PDP-12 FORMAT LlNC-

TRANSFER CHECK ERRORS ARE REPORTED IN
THE STANDARD STATUS ERROR FORMAT, DATA
ERRORS IN THE DATA ERROR FORMAT.

TAPES ARE REQUIRED (1000 OR 1600 BLOCKS,
400 WORDS PER BLOCK).
3. RESTRICTIONS

6.1 ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

NONE.

CODE:
0002 READ OPERATION

4.. OPERATING INFORMATION

CODE
A

DEFINITION

LIMITS

RESPONSE

PRESET

0·7

L.OWEST DRIVE

0-7

HIGHEST DRIVE
LOWEST BLOCK

o FOR NO CHANGE
1 NNNN FOR NEW

ODQO.1576

0770

HIGHEST BLOCK

o FOR NO CHANGE
1 NNNN FOR NEW

0001-1577

0777

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM
1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

ANY DATA WORD

RANDQM

BUFFER TO USE

.

3. SAll: WHEN seT TO -A " THE DRIVE CURRENTl Y IN USE IS RETAINED.

2. OPTIONS: TC12 LlNCTAPE PROCESSOR WITH

o FOR RANDOM
1NNNN

LEGAL DESIGNATOR

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

Page

148

RANDOM

CORPORATION

~DmDIIIII AELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I 1ZBit
.
TItle

(]

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator

DEC/X8

0 I

.lTech Tip
SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES {contrNumbe< DEC/X8-TT-2

Processor Applicability

AlIl I I

J I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

IApproval Frallk

Rev

PurcellDate

0

I

Cross Reference

02/14/73 1

0004 WRITE OPERATION

so:

INITIAL XOB

0012 FALSE DATA ERROR IBAD SOFTBUT
DATA
CHECKSUM
WARE
LOOKED GOOD ON WORD BY WORD
CHECK.)

SE:

TAPE INSTRUCTION (WRr OR ROEI

SF:

CURRENT alOCK NUMBER

5G:

FINAL XOS

DA:

BUFFER ADDRESS

08:

GOOD DATA WORD

DC,

BAD DATA WOAD

FINAL CONTENTS OF TAC

SB:
SC,

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR
CURRENT DRIVE IN BITS 9-11

lPAGE 149

"PAGE REVISION

DPlJ8l.1CATION DATE

February 1973

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES

IAuthor
I I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

All

DEC/X8-TT-2

I

Cross Reference

Rev

0

02/14 ,;~

Frank PurcellOate

2. OPTIONS: TC58 DECMAGTAPE CONTROL WITH

1. TC58MTMODULE DESCRIPTION
"TC58MT" IS A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES A TC58 DECMAGTAPE SYSTEM
WITH

(Contll~::~

Don Herbener

UP TO EIGHT TRANSPORTS. THE MAIN

CHARACTERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:
1. RECORD LENGTH VARIES RANDOMLY FROM 30

TO 1000WOROSQCTAl.
2. FILE LENGTH VARIES RANDOMLY FROM 1 TO

200 RECORDS OCTAL. (EOF IS NOT WRITTEN.)
J. THE

TAPE Of'EAATIONS PERFORMED ARE
WRITE!READ-COMPARE/READ
FOR
EACH
"FILE", SPACE REVERSE IS USED TO MOVE
FROM THE END TO THE BEGINNING OF THE
FILE. REWIND IS USED ONLY WHEN EOT IS
SENSED.

4. ALL OPERATIONS ARE DONE AT 800 BPI,
NORMAL GAP IN CORE DUMP MODE (9 TRACK
TREATED AS 7 TRACK). GAP AND DENSITY
MAY BE CHANGED BY THE USER AS INDICATED
LATER; HOWEVER, NO PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN
INCLUDED TO OPERATE IN STANDARD 9
TRACK COMPATIBLE MODE.

5. ALL DRIVES WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE LOWEST AND HIGHEST DRIVES SPECIFIED ARE
RANDOMLY UTILIZED.

6. UNLIKE MANY OTHER DECMAGTAPE EXER·
CISERS, THIS MODULE STARTS AT THE CURRENT TAPE POSITION. TAPE IS FORCED TO BOT
ONLY WHEN EOT IS SENSED.
7. CONTINUE MODE ISNEVER UTILIZED.
8. THE MODULE WILL HANG IF A SELECTED
DRIVE IS OFF LINE OR OTHERWISE NOT
READY.
2. REQUIREMENTS

UP TO ElGHT 7 AND/OR 9 TRACK TRANSPORTS
(TU20. TU30. TU10QR EQUIVALENTS).
3. SPECIAL: INDUSTRY
MAGNETIC TAPE.

CERTIFIED STANDARD

3. RESTR1CTIONS

9 TRACK COMPATIBLE MODE MAY NOT BE USED,
ALL 9 TRACK TRANSPORTS WILL BE OPERATED IN
CORE DUMP MODE.

4. OPERATING INfORMATION
4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.

4.2 BUILDING

1. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: SHOULD BE ASSIGNED THE LOWEST INTERRUPT PRIORITY.
3. JOB SLOTS: JF1 OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES: 0700,0110,0120
5. STANDARD WORD COUNT: 7152
6. STANDARD CURRENT ADDRESS: 1153
4.3 INITIALIZING

AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW,
IN ADDITION LOCATION "K606A" (0325) MAY 8E
CHANGED TO SPECIFY ANY LEGAL GAP OR DENSITY SELECTION EXCEPT 9 TRACK COMPATIBLE,
CORE DUMP MODE MUST ALWAYS BE USED. BIT
ASSIGNMENT IS THE SAME AS THE COMMAND
REGISTER. CONTINUE MODE MAY BE FORCED BY
CHANGING TC58MT LOCATION 0265 FROM 5263 TO

4111.

1. PROCESSORS: PDP-8, SlI, BtL, SlE, 81M AND
PDP·'2.

CODE

LIMITS

RESPONSE

DEfINITION

PRESET

A

LOWEST DAIVE

N

0·'

0

B

HIGHEST DRIVE

N

0·'

0

C

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM
ANY DATA WORD

RANDOM

0

RECORD LENGTH

o FOR RANDOM
0030-1000

RANDOM

E

FILE LENGTH

o FOR RANDOM

F

BUFFER TO USE

o FOR RANDOM

1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

0001·0200

RANDOM

LEGAL DESIGNATOR

RANDOM

Page 150

mlmla!a'
I

RELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAl ,
12Bit

K11

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

TAuthor

, , , , , , , rApproval

!

TechTiP
Number DEC/XB-T'1'-2

Rev

Don Herbener

0

,

Cross Roference

Frank PurcellD.... 02/l3/731

0021 FALSE DATA ERROR IBAD SOFTWARE
CHECKSUM BUT
DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON WORD BV WORD
CHECK).

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
ALL DRIVES TO BE UTILIZED MUST BE ON LINE
WITH TAPE POSITIONED AT OR AFTER BOT. THE
WRITE PERMISS RING MUST BE IN PLACE.

OOX3 TRANSFER INCOMPLETE (WORD
COUNT NON-ZERO BUT NO ERROR
BITWASSET).

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER A COMPLETE FILE
HAS BEEN WRITTEN, REAI).COMPARED, READ
AND DATA CHECKED.

2. SR1D: WHEN seT TO A 1. l'HE BUFFER CUR-

RENTLY ASSIGNED IS RETAINED.
3. SRl1: WHEN seT TO A " THE DRIVE CURRENTL V IN USE IS RETAINED.
~ ERROR INFORMATION

ALL STATUS REGISTER INDICATED ERRORS ARE
REPORTED fJB STAnJS ERRORS, ALL DATA
ERRORS M DATA ERRORS.
5.1

DEC/XB

0 I

Titl. SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB Software Modules
All

Option or Designator

ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

SA:

FINAL CONTENTS..QF STATUS REGISTER

58:

CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR

SC:

INITIAL WOAO COUNT

SD:

FINAL WORD COUNT

SE:

INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SF:

FINAL CURRENT ADDRESS

SG:

INITIAL COMMAND REGISTER

SH:

FINAL COMMAND REGISTER

51:

RECORD TALLY lTHE LAST RECORD IN A
FILE "IS 7777. THIS WORD MAY BE USED
TO COMPARE READ-COMPARE ERRORS
.WITH DATA ERRORS FOUND DURING
READ.)

CODE:

0010 REWIND

0020 READ
D030 READ-COMPARE
0040 WRITE

DA:

BUFFER AODRESS

08:

GOOD DATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORD

0070 SPACE REVERSE

'PAGE 151

UPAGE REVISION

o

DPUBLICATION DATE

I!'ebruary 1973

T~e SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES

Processor Applicability

Alii

I I II I I

,I Author

_ITech Tip

(Cont)INumber DEC/XB-TT-2

Don Herbener

Rev

0

IApprovalFrank PurcellDat. 02/14/73

': ToBEDT MOOULE DESCRIPTION
"TDBEDT" ·IS A DEC/Xa SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES A TD8-E DECTAPE SYSTEM
WITH A ONE OR TWO UNIT TRANSPORT, THE MAIN

CHARACTERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:

1. ALL READ/WRITE TRANSFERS CONSIST OF
1000 (8) WORDS 14 DECTAPE BLOCKS) AND
UTIUZE 'EXTERNAL BUFFERS_

2. SEARCH, READ, AND WRITE OPERATIONS ARE
DONE WITH THE INTERRUPTTURNED OFF.
3. R6AO AND WRITE OPERATIONS ARE DONE IN
THE FORWARD DIRECTION ONLY.

4. NORMALLY UNITS 0 AND 1 ARE EXERCISED

B. AFTER A T08-E SERVICE CYCLE IS COMP.LETE,
"TD8EDT" SETS A MONITOR SOFlWARE FLAG
liOFMSKI WHICH INDICATES TO ANY LATENT
INTERRUPT DEViCE MODULES IN THE SYSTEM
THAT LATENCY ERRORS MAY BE EXPECTED.
C. BECAUSE OF THE ABOVE, "T08EDT" CONTAINS
A SERVICE DELAY COUNTER SaTHE USER CAN
REGULATE THE FREQUENCY AT WHICH THE
TOM IS SERVICED. IF THE TDB;E IS SERVICED
TOO FREQUENTLY, THE VALUE 'OF INTER~
ACTIVE TESTING IS DIMINISHED. A RECOMMENDEO DELAY BETWEEN SERVICE CYCLES IS
15 TO 3OSECONDS.

AANDOMLY. FOR CONSTANT UNIT CAPABI'UTIES REFER TO UNIT SELECTION PARA·

REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.3.4 FOR INSTAUC:flONS RELATING TO SETTING THIS DELAY,

D. PROBLEMS MAY SE ENCOUNTERED DUE TO
TIMING CONSIDERATIONS IF A DEVICE SUCH
AS THE FPP-12 OR VT8-E IS CONSlANTL Y
UTILIZING THE PROCESSOR DMA FUNCTION..I'N
THIS CASE A LARGE NUMBER OF T08-E TIMING
ERRORS MAY OCCUR. REFER TO PARAGRAPH
4~.3 TO MASK SUCH ERRORS FROM REPORTING.

6. NORMALLY ALL BLOCKS FROM 0 TO 2701 ARE
SEQUENTIALLY USED (0 TO 3, 1 TO 4..... ETC .•
2676 TO 27011. TO CHANGE LOW AND/OR HIGH
BLOCK PARAMETERS REFER TO LOW AND
HIGH BLOCK SELECTION PARAGRAPH 4.3.3.

7. THE OPERATIONS AT EACH BLOCK CONSIST OF

Cross Reference

I

A. THE INTERRUPT IS TURNED OFF AND ALL
OTHER DEVICE SERVICES ARE IGNORED WHEN·
EVER THE TOS.E IS BEING SERViCED.

GRAPH 4.3.1.
5. DATA ,IS NORMALLY RANDOM. FOR CONSTANT
DATA CAPABILITIES REFER TO DATA PATTERN
PARAGRAPH 4.3.2.

J

4. OPEAATlNG INFORMATION

WRITE/READ/CHECK DATA.
4.1 SPECIAL CQNSIOERATlfllIlS

8. THREE READS ARE DONE IN CASE OF A PARITY
ERROR.

THIS MODULE REQUIRES AND USES EXTERNAL
BUFFERS.

Z. REQUIREMENTS
4.2 BUILDING

1. PROCESSORS: POP·SE. SF, 8M

2. OPTIONS: TDSE SIMPLE DECTAPE CONTROL
WITH A TU66 WITH A ONE OR TWO DRTVE
TRANSPORT.

1. JOB TYPE: BACKGROUND
1. PRIORITY: NON-GRITICAL
3. JOB SLOTS: JF1 OR JF1 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0770

3. SPECIAL: STANDARD

PDP-S FORMAT DEC·
TAPES ARE RECOMMENDED (2702 BLOCKS, 201
WORDS EACH). NO GUARANTEE IS 'MADE FOR
DECTAPES WITH ANY OTHER FORMAT.

a

RESTRrcTIONS
SET THE UNIT SELECTS IN ACCORDAroccE WITH
THE 'NORMAL TD8-E PROCEDURES, AND USE THE
APPROPRIATE DEVICE CODE WHEN 8UILDtNG A
SYSTEM.
WARNING
THE TDS.E SYSTEM IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE rN A
STAND ALONE FASHtON ONLY. TO INCLUDE THfS
DEVICE IN THE DEC/X8 ·ll:ET OF DEVICE MODULES,
CERTAIN ACTIONS HAVE BEEN TAKEN WHICH
MAY MINUTELY DEGRADE THE OVERALL EFFECTIVENESS OF INTERACTIVE EXERCISING OVER A
GIVEN PERIOD OF TIME. THE USER SHOULD KEEP
THE FOLLOWING POINl'S IN MIND WHEN USING
"TOBEDT"

4.3 lNITIALIZING
THIS MODULE IS SETUP NORMALLY TO RUN A
TOM DECTAPE SYSTEM WITH A DEViCE CODE OF
ono. THE DEVICE CODE IS SPECIFIED ONLY AT
BUILDING TIME. UNIT SELECTION AND DATA ARE
RANDOM. FOUR DECTAPE BLOCKS ARE SEQUEN·
TIAlLY EXE'ACISED FROM OTO 2701.

t.a 1

UNIT SELECTION

MAKE THE FOLLOWING CHANGES TO THE
MODULE PROGRAM 'FOR THE DESIRED RESULTS.

MODULE
LOCATION

RANDOM
UNITS

0413

4773

Page 152

UNIT
0

UNIT
1

m• •

It

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

1112Bit

IJ!II

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

3&Bit

I

O~

Option or Designator

DEC/XB

"ITechTip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Con:tNumber DEC/XB-TT-2
All

Pro........ Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

4.3.2 OATAPATTERN

RANDOM
DATA

CONSTANT
DATA

0422

4713

1273

0515

Cross Reference

I

4773

1273

1. CNTR: UPDATED
AFTER
A SUCCESSFUL
WRITE/READ COMPARE OPERATION.
2. 5R10: NO EFFECT
3. SR11, NO EFFECT

CONSTANT
DATA
PATTERN

5. ERROR INFORMATION
ALL COMMAND REGISTER ERRORS (SELECT,
TIMING OR WRITE LOCKOUTl ARE REPORTED IN
THE STANDARD STATUS ERROR FORMAT, DATA
ERRORS IN THE DATA ERROR FORMAT.

xxxx

0473

5.1

ERROR SYMBOL DEFU41TIQNS
CODE:
OODO NOSIGNIFICANCE

4.3.3 LOW AND HIGH BLOCK SELECTION
1. LOW BLOCK: DEPOSIT LOW BLOCK NUMBER
CLIMITS: o.2676lIN LOCATION 0463.

0010 FALSE OATA ERROR (BAD SOFTWARE
CHECKSUM
BUT DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON A WORD BY
WORD CHECK). THIS TYPE OF
ERROR MAY BE REPORTED AFTER
A PAFiITY ERROR IBAD CHECKSUM
ON TAPEI AND INDICATES THE
FOLLOWING: 1) -THE
PARITY
ERROR CAUSED THE PROGRAM TO
STOP TAPE PRIOR TO COMPLETmN
AND THEREBY CAUSED A SOFTWARE SUMCHECK ERROR; 2) - THE

2. HIGH BLOCK: DEPOSIT THE 1'8 COMPLEMENT
OF 1"+IE HIGH BLOCK NUMBER (LIMI1S: 0-26761
IN LOCATION 0462.

IN ADDITION THE FOLLOW1NG MODULE LOCAnON MAY BE CHANGED AS INDICATED TO
ACHIEVE THE OESIREORESULTS.

"REPORT"(.D546) MAY 8E CHANGED FROM O3OOTO
OXOO WHERE ANY CLEAR BITS IN STATUS 8 ARE

DATA THAT WAS TRANSFERRED

NOT REPORleD AS ERRORS.

WAG GOOD.

4.3.4 TD&ESERVICEDELAYCOUNTER

CONTENTS OF THE COMMAND REGISTER

5B:

CONTENTS OF THE COMMAND REGISTER

se:

so:

nn.

THE COUNTER PRESET IS 1.NITIALLY SET TO
TO CHANGE THIS VALUE USE ODT AND -cHANGE
MODULE LOCATION 0357 TO THE APPROPRIATE
2'S COMPLEMENT VALUE.

SE:

SF:
00:

4A DEVICE SETUP

0,6,:

ALL UNITS TO BE 'eXERCISED MUST BE SWITCHED
TO REMOTE AND WRITE ENABLED WITH TAPE IN
PLACE. UNIT SELECTION MUST BE MADE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH NORMAL T08-E SETUP PROCEDURES.

I PAGE REVISION

SA:

ILOADED)

A SINGLE PRECISION COUNTER IS USED TO CON·
TROL THE DELAY BETWEEN TD8-E SERVICE
CYCLES (REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3.1. THE ACTUAL
TIME OF THIS DELAY VARIES WITH THE COUNTER
PRESET VALUE AND THE MIX OF JOSS RUNNING
IN THE SYSTEM.

IPAGE 153

J

4.5 RUNNING

MAKE THE FOLLOWING CHANGES TO THE
MODULE PROGRAM FOR THE DESIRED RESULTS.

MODULE
LOCATION

Rev 0

IApprovaI Frank Purcell Dato 02/14/73

o

(READ)

BLOCK NUMBER AT WHICH 4 BLOCK
TRANSFEftSTAR'iS

BLOCK NUMBER CURRENTLY BEING PROCEsseD
BLOCK NUMBER FOR CURRENT TAPE
POSITION
BUFFE:R OESIGNATOR
11IIITIAL SOFTWARE WORD COUNT
(ALWAYS -1000)
BUFFER ADDRESS

DB:

GOOD OATA WORD

DC:

BAD DATA WORO

ftPUBLlCATIONDATE February 1973

r ,teI
All

SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES

IAuthor
.1 I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

Rev
Date

Frank P" r""

~.ITech Tip

(Cont~Number

Don Herbener

0

n2/1 07'

I
I

DEC/X8-TT-2

Cross Reference

*NOCHGJFX

1. TIMERA MODULE DESCRIPTION

WHERE "JFX" IS THE JOB NUMBER OF THE
MODULE WHICH HAS INDICATED NO CHANGE IN
ITS PASS COUNTER.

"TIMERA" IS A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH CARRIES OUT THE FOLLOWING FUNC·
TIONS THROUGH THE USE OF A REAL TIME

CLOCK.
NOTE
ELAPSED TIME IS PRESET TO 0 00 00
WHEN TlMERA IS SWITCHED FROM THE
KILLED TOTHE RUN STATE.

1. REPORTS ELAPSED RUNTIME AT APPROXIMATELY 15 MINUTE INTERVALS (AFTER THE
FIRST REPORT AT ELAPSED TIME 0 00 001.
2. REPORTS ANY INTERRUPT DRIVEN MODULE
WHICH IS IN THE RUN STATE BUT WHOSE PASS
COUNTER f..IAS NOT CHANGED WITHIN THE
LAST 5 TO 10 MINUTES. A REPORT OF THIS
TYPE INDICATES THAT THE SPECIFIED JOB IS
MAKING NO PROGRESS, AND THAT PR08ABL Y
THE DEVICE BEING eXERCISED BY THAT JOB
FAILED TO GENERATE A PROGRAM iNTERRUPT.

2. REQUIREMENTS

1. PROCESSORS: PDP-8, 811. 8IL. SlE, 81M AND
PDp·12

2. OPTIONS: REAL TIME CLOCKS TYPES:
DK8-EA, -EC,-EP

KW8I118/L] A, 8, C, 0, E, F
KW12·A

3. RANDOMIZE JOB SLOT ROTATION BY PERIODICALLY PLACING A RANDOM NUMBER IN THE
DEC/X8 MONITOR LOCATION
"ROTWRD"
(OO177). REFER TO THE "DEC/X8 USERS
GUIDE", PARAGRAPH 4.3.3 FOR MORE INFOR·
MATION ON "ROTWRO".

3. SPECIAL: NONE
3. RESTRICTIONS

,. "TIME RA" DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE "KJFX"
OR "AK" COMMANDS. IT MAY BE KILLED ONLY
BY A RESTART AT 03000.

4. IF SO INITIALIZED, "TIMERA" WILL HALT THE
EXERCISER AFTER "NN" HOURS OF ELAPSED
RUNTIME. WHEN OEC/X8 TIMES OUT, "DEC/X8
TIMEOUT" WILL 8E PRINTED AND THE EXER·
CISER WILL HALT.

2, A MAXIMUM OF 4096 CDECIMAU CLOCK TICKS
PER SECOND ARE RECOGNIZED PROPERLY BY
THE SOFTWARE.
4. OPERATING INFORMATION

THE ELAPSED TIME REPOAT IS OF THE FORM:

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

TlMERA· JFX FLO NET: 0 HH MM

THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.

WITH THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS:
"JFX"

TIMERA MODULE JOB NUMBER

4.2 BUILDING

"N"

TIMERA CURRENT PROGRAM FIELD

"0"

ELAPSED TIME DAY NUMBER 1()'6)

"HH"
"MM"

ELAPSED TIME HOURS IN DECIMAL
ELAPSED TIME MINUTES IN DECI·
MAL (00-59j

1. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: SHOULD BE PLACED IMMEDIATELY
AFTER ANY CRITICAL INTERRUPT MODULES.
3. JOB SLOTS; JF1 OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0130
4.3 INITIALIZING

THE NO CHANGE IN JOB REPORT IS ALWAYS PRE·
FACED BY AN ELAPSED TIME REPORT AND THEN:
CLOCKS

FAILURE TO INITIALIZE THIS MODULE WILL RESULTIN AN EXERCISER HANG.

ICLOCK PARAMETERS AND RESPONSES
A

NNNN

DKS-EA

100

0000

DKS-EC

100

0000

NNNN

DKB-EP

001

0000

0062

KW12-A

020

0000

0062

··----->A,B,C

130

0000

···-·-·>D.E.F

132

NNNN

KWSII[81L]

NNNN

D"" No. OF HRS, TO RUN AND THEN HLT. APPLICABLE TO ALL
CLOCKS.

Paqe 154

mDmDD!O IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

(!!J

I

16Bit

01

18Bit

01

36Bit

0I

Option or Designator
DEC/XB

I-lTech Tip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/XB SOFTWARE MODULES (Con:tNumbe' DEC/X8-TT-2

All

Processor Applicability'
IAuthor Don Herbener
Rev
0
J
I I I I I I I IApproval Frank Purcell Date 02/14/73 I

INITIALIZE THE MODULE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE TABLE BELOW. ALL INPUTS ARE ASSUMED TO

BE POSITIVE OR ABSOLUTE OCTAL VALUES. IF
THE INPUT FOR PARAMETER "8" IS GIVEN AS
NNNN, SPECIFY THE CLOCK COUNTER BUFFER
PREseT DESIRED. IF THE INPUT FOR PARAMETER

"c"

Cross Reference

4A DEVICE SETUP
NO SETUP IS REQUIRED UNLESS THE FREQUENCY
SOURCE IS EXTERNAL TO THE CLOCK OPTION.

4.5 RUNNING.;

IS GIVEN AS NNNN. SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF

CLOCK TICKS UNTERRUPTS) PER SECOND. IN THE
CASE OF THE KW8l1 [B/L) 0, E. AND F CLOCKS THE
USER MUST COMPUTE THE PROPER VALUES FO'R
PARAMETERS "8" AND "C',

1. CNTR: UPDATED BY EVERY CLOCK TICK.
2. SR10: NO EFFECT
~
3. SRl1: NO EFFECT
5. ERROR INFORMATION

IF THE EXERCISER KILL OPTION IS DESIRED, RESPOND TO PARAMETER "0" BY TYPING "1 NN"
WHERE "NN" DESIGNATES THE NUMBER OF
HOURS THE EXERCISER IS TO BE RUN (()()'27 IN
OCTAL ARE VALID!. IF THE KIL.L OPTION IS NOT
DESIRED, TYPE "0".

IPAGE 155

II PAGE REVISION

o

THE ONLY CLOCK ERROR DETECTED BY TIMERA
RESULTS IN A HALT AT RELATIVE LOCATION
1165. THIS HALT INDICATES THAT WHEN USING
EITHER THE DK8-EP OR KW12-A CLOCKS, THE
OVERFLGW STATUS BIT WAS CLEAR BUT A CLOCK
INTERRUPT OCCURRED. TO RECOVER, RESTART
AT·03OOO.

ftPUBLICATIONDATE

February 1973

,lTochTip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (contl lNumber DEC/X8-TT-2
I'toc:oaor Applic:abHity

All

IAu_

Don Herbener

I I I I I I I IApproval

Rev

I

0

.... TM8EMT MODULE DESCRIPTION
''TMSEMT'' IS A OEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE
WHICH EXERCISES A TMB-E DECMAGTAPE SYSTEM

WITH UP TO EIGHT TRANSPORTS. THE MAIN
CHARACTERISTICS OF THIS MODULE ARE:
1. RECORD LENGTH VARIES RANDOMLY FROM 30

Cross R " ' -

I

Frank purcellDa18 02/14/13

8. A ·'STAT ERR" WILL BE REPORTED WHEN ANY
DRIVE REACHES EOT. THIS "TYPE OF ERROR
SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AN EXPECTED AND
ACCEPTABLE EVENT PROVIDING THE ERROR
"CODE" IS 4000 (WRITE FUNCTION BEING PERFORMED).
2.. REQUIREMENTS

TO tOOOWOROSOCTAL.
2. FILE LENGTH VARIES RANDOM LV FROM t TO
200 RECORDS OCTAL. lEaF IS NOT WRiTTeN.)
3. THE

TAPE

OPERATIONS PERFORMED ARE

WRITE/READ·COMPARE/READ
FOR
EACH
"FILE"'. SPACE REVERSE IS useD TO MOVE
FROM THE END TO THE BEGINNING OF THE

FILE. REWIND IS
SENSED.

USED~ONLY

WHEN EOT IS

4. ALL OPERATIONS ARE DONE AT 800 BPI, NOR·

MAL GAP IN CORe DUMP MODE (9 TRACK
TREATED AS 7 TRACK). GAP AND DENSITY
MAY BE CHANGED BY THE USER AS INDICATED
LATER; HOWEVER. NO PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN

INCLUDED TO

OPERATE

IN

STANDARD 9

TRACK COMPATIaLE MODE.
S. ALL DRIVES mTHIN THE LIMITS OF THE LOWEST AND HIGHEST DRIVES SPECIFIED ARE
RANDQMLYUTtLIZED.

6. UNLIKE MANY OTHER DECMAGTAPE EXERCISERS, THIS MODULE STARTS AT THE CURRENT TAPE POSITION. TAPE IS FORCED TO BOT
ONLY W!4EN EOT IS SENSED.
7. ALL FUNCTIONS ARE ATTEMPTED IN A CONTINUOUS MODE OF OPERATION. THE CONDInON OF "TAPE UNIT READY" (TUR) IS NEVER
SENSED BY THE SOFTWARE.

1. PROCESSORS: PDP-B, 8/1, 8/L, 8/E, 81M AND
PDP-12.
2. OPTIONS: TM&E
DECMAGTAPE
CONTROL
WITH UP TO EIGHT 7 AND/OR 9 TRACK TRANSPORTS ITU100R EQUIVALENTJ.
3. SPECIAL: INDUSTRY
MAGNETIC TAPE.

CERTIFIED STANDARD

3. RESTRICTIONS
9 TRACK COMPATIBLE MODE MAY NOT BE USED.
ALL 9 TRACK TRANSPORTS WILL BE OPERATED IN
CORE DUMP MODE.

4. OPERAnNG lNFORMATION
4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFfeRS.

4.2 BUILDING

1. JpS TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: NON.cRITI'CAL.
3. JOB SL01S: JF1 OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARODEVICE CODES: 0700,0710,0720

4.3 INITIALIZING
AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER 15 PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW•

COD'
A

....ONS.

DEFINITION
LOWEST DRIVE

N

HIGHEST DRIVE

N

TYPE OF DATA

o FOR RANDOM

RECORD LENGTH

o FOR

1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT
RANDOM
1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

LiMns

PRESET

0.7

ANY DATA WORD

RANDOM

0038-1000

RANDOM

FILE LENGTH

o FOR R.l\,lYDOM
1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

0001·0200

RANDOM

BUFFER TO USE

o FOR RANDOftil
1 NNNN FOR CONSTANT

LEGAL DESIGNATOR

RANDOM

EaulPMENT

CORPORATION

Pag-& 156

mamaoma IRELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

Q9

I

16Bi.

0 I

lSBi.

0 I

36Bi.

Option or Designator

DEC/XB

0 I

8Ch Tip DEC/XB-TT-2
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont) i T
'IINumber
Processor Applicability
All

IAuthor

Don Herbener

I I I I I I I IApproval Frank
IN ADDITION BITS 10 AND 11 OF LOCATION KeMD
(0713) MAY BE CHANGED TO A LEGAL DENSITY
SELECTION EXCEPT 9-TRACK COMPATIBLE 800
BPI. ALSO Bn 3 Of LOCATION KFUNC (0330) MAY
BE CHANGED TO ALTER INTERRECORD GAP. BIT
ASSIGNMENTS FOR BOTH OF THESE WORDS ARE
THE SAME AS FOR THE TM8-E COMMAND AND

Rev 0

Purcell Date 02/14/73
5.1

CODE·

1000 REWIND
2000 READ
3000 READ-COMPARE
4000 WAITE
7000 SPACE REVERSE

FUNCTION REGISTERS RESPECTIVELY. ANY BITS

2001 FALSE DATA ERROR (BAD SOFTWARE
CHECKSUM
BUT
DATA
LOOKED GOOD ON WORD BY WORD
CHECK).

4.4 DEVice SETUP

4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPDATED AFTER A COMPLETE FILE
HAS BEEN WRITTEN. READ--COMPARED, READ
AND DATA CHECKED.
2. SR10: WHEN SET TO A 1, THE BUFFER CURRENTLY ASSIGNED IS RETAINED

3. SA11: WHEN SET TO A 1, THE DRIVE CURRENTLY IN USE IS RETAINED.
5. ERROR INFORMATION
ALL STATUS REGISTER INDICATED ERRORS ARE
REPORTED AS STATUS ERRORS. ALL DATA
ERRORS AS DATA ERRORS.

XOO3 TRANSFER INCOMPLETE (WORD
COUNT NON·ZERO BUT NO ERROR
BIT WAS SETI.
SA:

SB:
SC:

so:
SE:
SF:

5G:
SH:

51:

SJ:
SK:
Sl:

DA:
DB:
DC:

/PAGE 157

II PAGE REVISION

Cross Reference

ERROR SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

IN LOCATION REPORT (1035) MAY BE ZEROED TO
INHIBIT REPORTING PARTICULAR TYPES OF
ERRORS. BIT ASSIGNMENT IN THIS WORD IS THE
SAME AS IN THE MAIN STATUS REGISTER.

ALL DRIVES TO BE UTILIZED MUST BE ON LINE
WITH TAPE POSITIONED AT OR AFTER BOT. THE
WRITE PERMISS RING MUST BE IN PLACE.

I

I

FINAL CONTENTS OF MAIN STATUS REGISTER
CURRENT BUFFER DESIGNATOR
INITIAL WORD COUNT
FINAL WORD COUNT
INITIAL CURRENT ADDRESS
FINAL CURRENT ADDRESS
INITIAL COMMAND REGISTER
FINAL COMMAND REGISTER
INITIAL FUNCTION REGISTER
FINAL FUNCTION/STATUS REGISTER
FINAL DATA BUFFER (LPCC AFTER A
READ OR READ-COMPARE)
RECORD TALLY (THE LAST RECORD IN A
FI LE IS 7777. THIS WORD MAY BE useD
TO COMPARE REAQ-COMPARE ERRORS
WITH DATA ERRORS FOUND DURING
READ.)
BUFFER ADDRESS
GOOD DATA WORD
BAD DATA WORD

nPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/xa SOFTWARE MODULES
All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

r

(Cont) ITech Tip DEC/X8-TT-2

Don Herbener

IINumber

Rev

0

Approvel Frank Purceno... 02/14/73

I
1

Cross Reference

3. RESTRICTIONS

1. VCAD8E MODULE DESCRIPTION
"VCAOSE" IS A DEC!x8 SOFTWARE MODUL.E
WHICH EXERCISES THE VCSE DISPLAY CONTROL

NONE

WITH VR14 OR VR20 DISPLAY AND THE ADSEA

4. OPERATION INFORMATION

ADe WITH AMSEA MULTIPLEXOR AND AM8EC
PANEL.

4,1 SPECIALCQNSIDERATION$

THE MODULE SAMPLES 4 ANALOG CHANNELS !Q-3)
AND DISPLAYS THE RESULTS ON THE SCREEN IN
THE FORM OF A CROSS. THE SAMPLED DATA

4.2 BUILDING

CONTROLS THE CROSS AS FOLLOWS:

NONE

1. JOB TYPE:

BACKGROUND

X VALue OF CENTER OF CROSS

CHANNEL 0
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
CHANNEL 3

Y VALue OF CENTER OF CROSS

2. PRIORITY: MUST

LENGTH OF HORIZONTAL LINE
SEGMENT
LENGTH OF VERTICAL LINE
SEGMENT

3. JOB SLOTS: ANY

POINTS ARE INTENSIFIED ON THE SCREEN IN THE
FOLLOWING MANNER WITH EVERY FOURTH POSSIBLE POINT BEING INTENSIFIED:

HAVE l.OWER
THAN ALL INTERRUPT JOBS.
EXISTENT

JOB

PRIORITY

SLOT:

2

PAGES REQUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODES:
0050 FOR VCBE
0530 FOR ADSEA:AMBEA
4.3 INITIALIZING

.(11)

.m

.131

.to

.121.16).1101 ...

.... (9).(5).(11

THE MODULE MAY BE INITIALIZED TO RUN WITH
OR WITHOUT AN ADe ANO WITH A VR14 OR VR2Q,
AFTER THE INDICATED CODE LETTER IS PRINTED
RESPOND BY TYPING THE PARAMETER IN THE
MANNER SHOWN BELOW.

.(41
.(S)
.(121

CODE

DEFINITION

RESPONSE

THIS CONTINUES UNTIL ONE AXIS HAS INTENSIFIED ALL POINTS THEN COMPLETES THE UN·
FINISHED AXIS.

ISADSEA/AM8EA
PRESENT

0" VCSE ONLY
1 = VCSE WITH
AD8EA/AMBEA

WHEN THE POSITION AND LENGTH FOR A LINE IS
SUCH THAT THE SCREEN BOUNDARY IS PENETRATED, THE REMAINING POINTS WRAP AROUND TO
THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE SCREEN. IF THE LINE
LENGTH IS A MAXIMUM WHEN WRAP AROUND
OCCURS THE WRAP AROUND LINE LACKS ONE
DOT REACHING THE OTHER END OF THE LINE.

TYPE OF DISPLAY

0'" VR14
6" VR20

IN THE ABSENCE OF A ADBEA/AMSEA/AMBEC.
CHANNELS 0 AND 1 ARE ASSUMED TO BE 0000
WHILE CHANNELS 2 AND 3 ARE 77n. THIS PRODUCES A FULL SCALE CROSS IN THE CENTER OF
THE SCREEN.
WHEN A COLOR DISPLAY {VR201 IS USED THE
FIRST HALF OF THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ~OTS ON
THE SCREEN WILL BE DISPLAyeD IN RED AND
THE SECOND HALF IN GREEN. ALSO THOSE DISPLAYED IN GREEN WILL BE ON DISPLAY CHANNEL
1 WHILE THOSE IN RED ARE ON DISPLAY CHANNEL2.
2. REaUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSOR: PDP-8/E. 81M, 8/F
2. OPTIONS:

VCSE WITH VR14 OR VR20
ADSEA WITH AM8EA AND AM8EC

3. SPECIAL:

NONE

Pacj'l!"'!!l'!!'

PRESET

4.4 DEVICE SETUP
THE VR14 OR VR20 SHOULD BE POWERED UP AND
SHOULD HAVE "CHANNEL 1 & 2" AND "REMOTE"
SELECTEDON THE FRONT PANEL.
4.5 RUNNING
1. CNTR: UPDATED UPON EACH "CROSS" COMPLETION.
2. SR10: NO EFFECT
3. SRl1: NO EFFECT
6. ERROR INFORMATION
THE ONLY ERROR POSSIBLE IS IF THE VCBE OR
ADBEA IS GIVEN AN INSTRUCTION AND FAILS TO
COME BACK WITH A DONE flAG, IN SUCH INSTAN·
CES A SOFTWARE TIMER DETERMINES THAT THE
RESPECHRED DEVICE IS IN A "HANG" STATE
AND EXllS TO THE ERROR ROUTINE. ERROR
CODE 0000 INDICATES AN AD HANG WHILE 7777
INDICATES A VC HANG. "ERRSA" 15 MEANINGLESS
FOR VC HANG BUT INDICATES THE AM CHANNEL
+ 1 IN USE IF AN AD HANG.

mamaoma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit []

I

16Bit

0

I

18Bit

0

I

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFORMATION ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE
All
L...-

Processor Applicability

I I

I I

I

I

1. VTBE MODULE DESCRIPTION

36Bit

0

Option or Designator
DEC/X8

I

MODULESI~':,";!"

II-A,.."_th_O_'--,--Do_n_H_e_r_h_e_n_e_r___R_ev_ _O_-jJ

DEC/X8-TT-2

Cross Reference

I Approval Frank Pu:r:8.~-l~HD~RJl~(;Li'JE3D D~TA DISPLAYED

"VT8E" IS A DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULE WHICH
EXERCISES A VT8-E DECDlSPLAY IN 60TH ALPHA

AND GAAPHIC MODES OF OPERATION. IT ALSO
UTILIZES THE VT8-E LINE FREQUENCY CLOCK
FOR VARIOUS TIME CHECK PURPOSES. THE KEYBOARD AND PRINTER FUNCTIONS WHICH ARE
PART OF THE VTS-E ARE NOT EXERCISED BY THIS
MODULE.

1.1 VT8-E DISPLAY EXERCISING
"VTBE" UTILIZES THE ALPHA AND GRAPHIC CAPA·

BILITIES IN FOUR UNIQUE SOFTWARE MODES.
ANYONE OF WHICH MAY BE CHOSEN BY THE
USER. REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.3 FOR INITIA·
LlZING INFORMATION.
TIlE FOLLOWING SUBPARAGRAPHS LIST THE
CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH OF THESE MODES.

1. "AlPHA ONLY" MODE
A. UTILIZES THE VT8-E ALPHA MODE ONLY.

B. DISPLAYS 447 (101 CHARACTERS WHICH IS
EQUIVALENT TO 7 LlNES@64CHARACTERS
PER LINE. OR 14 LINES @ 32 CHARACTERS
PER LINE. IN BOTH CASES THE lAST CHARA·
CTER IN THE lAST LINE (7TH OR 14TH) IS
END OF SCREEN (EOSI.

IS IDENTICAL. THIS
PLANNED DATA
CHANGES ABOUT ONCE EVERY FIVE
SECONDS AND PROGRESSES THROUGH THE
FOLLOWING OCTAL SEQUENCE:

0001,0003, 0007, 0017,0037,0077.0177,0377,
0777,1777,3777,7777. ETC.
O. THE FIRST DATA PATTERN TO BE USED AT
RUN TIME DEPENDS ON THE PRIOR STATE
OF THE SOFTWARE MODULE.
3. "ALPHA/GRAPHIC" MODE

A. UTILIZES BOTH THE ALPHA ANO GRAPHIC
MODES OF THE VTB-E.
B. MAKES ONE PASS OF ALL CHARACTERS IN
THE --ALPHA ONLY" MODE. (1.1.11. THEN ONE
PASS OF DATA IN THE "GRAPHIC ONLY"
MODE 11.1.2J, THEN SWITCHES BACK TO
"ALPHA ONLY".
C. THE FIRST MODE AND CHARACTER OR
DATA USED AT RUN TIME DEPENDS ON THE
PRIOR STATE OF THE SOFTWARE MODULE.
4. "SPECIAL GRAPHIC" MODE

A. UTiliZES THE VT8-E GRAPHIC MODE ONLY.

B. DISPLAYS
C. ALL CHARACTERS BEING DISPLAYED AT A
GIVEN TIME HAVE THE SAME ASCII CODE.
HOWEVER, STARTING WITH THE FIRST
CHARACTER EACH GROUP OF FOUR CHARA·
CTERS APPEARS AS FOllOWS:
X(NORMAL INTENSITY) X(BLINK) X!BRIGHT)
X(CURSORI

ANY AREA OF MEMORY AS
SPECIFIED BY THE USER (REFER TO
CHANGES TO "'ABSADO"' AND --ABSFLD" IN
PARAGRAPH 4.31.

NOTE
THIS MODE MAY PROVE TO BE A VERY
INTERESTING EXPERIENCE FOR THE
USER.

THIS seauENcE IS REPEATED THROUGH
ALL 447 CHARACTERS.
1.2 USAGE OF THE \(T8-E LINE FREQUENCY CLOCK

O. EACH DISPLAY PERIOD lASTS FOR APPROX·
IMATELY FIVE SECONDS. THEN TIlE ASCII
CODE OF THE CHARACTER IS INCREMENTED
BY ONE. THE RANGE OF CHARACTERS DISPLAYED IS FROM 040 TO '37 (SEVEN BIT
ASCIIi.
E. THE FIRST CHARACTER TO BE USEO AT RUN
TIME DEPl:NDS ON THE PRIOR STATE OF
THE SOFTWARE MODULE.

2. "GRAPHIC ONLY" MODE
A. UTILIZES THE VT8-E GRAPHIC MODE ONLY.
B. DISPLAYS 28 liNES @ 16 WORDS PER liNE
OF PLANNED DATA. THE REMAINDER OF
THE DISPLAY· CONTAINS RANDOM DATA
WHICH liES OUTSIDE OF THE CURRENT
BUFFER AREA. NOTE THAT THE 3 LEAST
SIGNIFICANT BITS OF THE LAST WORD ON
EACH LINE ARE NEVER DISPLAYED. ALSO
THE lAST WORD ON TIlE 28TH LINE IS
ALWAYS 3000.

Page

159

THE FOLLOWING fUNCTIONS ARE CARRIED OUT
THROUGH THE USE OF THE VT8-E CLOCK.
1. REPORTS

ELAPSED RUNTIME AT APPROXI·
MATEL Y 15 MINUTE INTERVALS (AfTER THE
FIRST REPORT AT ELAPSED TIME 0 00 001.
THIS FUNCTION MAY BE DELETED (REF. PARA·
GRAPH 4.31.

2. REPORTS ANY INTERRUPT DRIVEN MODULE
WHICH IS IN THE RUN STATE BUT WHOSE PASS
COUNTER HAS NOT CHANGED WITHIN THE
LAST 5 TO 10 MINUTES. A REPORT OF THIS
TYPE INDICATES THAT THE SPECIFIED JOB IS
MAKING NO PROGReSS, AND THAT PROBABLY
THE DEVICE BEtNG eXERCtSeD IV THAT J08
FAILED TO GENERATE A PROGRAM INTER·
RUPT. THIS FUNCTION MAY BE DELETED IREF.
PARAGRAPH 4.31.
3, RANDOMIZE JOB SLOT ROTATION BY PERIODI·
CALLY PLACING A RANDOM NUMBER IN THE
DEC/X8 MONITOR
LOCATION ""AOTWRO"
(00177). REFER TO THE "DEC/XS USERS
GUIOE", PARAGRAPH 4.3.3 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON "ROTWRO"~

_ITechTip
Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (Cont)INumber DEC/X8-TT-2

Processor Applicability
All

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

rApproval",

so

4. IF
INITIALIZED, ''VTSE'' WILL HALT THE
EXERCISER AFTER 1 TO 23 HOURS OF ELAPSED
RUNTIME. THE HALT LOCATION IS MODULE
RELATIVE 0720.

THE ELAPSED TIME REPORT IS OF THE FORM:

Rev

."Date n?"

0
,,,

J
I

Cross Reference

4.3 INITIALIZING
USING THE ![IJFX <- J COMMAND, AFTER "VTSE"
IS PRINTED RESPOND BY TYPING THE DESIRED
CODE NUMBER TO SELECT THE DESIRED DISPLAY
SOFTWARE MODE.

VTBE·JFX FL.O NET: D HH MM
WITH THE FOLLOWING DEFINITIONS:

"JFX"

CODE

VTlIE MODULE JOB NUMBER
VTBE CURRENT PROGRAM FIELD
ELAPSED TIME DAY NUMBER (0-61

"HH"

DISPLAY SOFTWARE
MODE
ALPHA/GRAPHIC
ALPHA ONLY
GRAPHIC ONLY
SPECIAL GRAPHIC

REFERENCE

1.1.3 (PRESET VALUE)
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.4

ELAPSED TIME HOURS IN DECIMAL
10()'23)

"MM"

ELAPSED TIME MINUTES IN DECIMAL
(00-59)

THE NO CHANGE IN JOB REPORT IS ALWA VS PREFACEO BY AN ELAPSED TIME REPORT AND THEN:
-NO CHG JFX

WHERE "JFX" IS THE JOB NUMBER OF THE
MODULE WHICH HAS INDICATED NO CHANGE IN
ITS PASS COUNTER.

NOTE
ELAPSED TIME IS PRESET TO 0 00 00
WHEN VT8E IS SWITCHED FROM THE
KILLED TO THE RUN STATE.

IN ADDITION THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS MAY
BE CHANGED VIA f 0 AS INDICATED.

1. "PRETIC" (0317): 2'$ COMPLEMENT OF THE
NUMBER OF CLOCK TICKS PER SECOND. PRESET FOR 60(101 TICKS PER SECOND.
2. "TlMOUT" (0754): 1'$ COMPLEMENT OF THE
NUMBER OF HOURS (up TO 23) OF EXERCISER
RUNTIME DESIRED. PLACING 0000 IN .THIS
LOCATION RESULTS IN THE eXERCISER RUNNING FOREVER. PRESET TO RUN FOREVER.
3. "ABSADO" (1154): THE ABSOLUTE STARTING
ADDRESS FOR ''SPECIALGRAPHIC'' MODE. PRE·
SETTO 0000
4. "ABSFLD"

~.

111551: THE STARTING MEMORY
FIELD (BITS 6-8) FOR "SPECIAL GRAPHIC"
MODE. PRESET TO 0000.

REQUIREMENTS
1. PROCESSORS'
2

PDP-8lE. 8/F, 81M

OPTIONS: VT8-E
MONITOR

DECDISPLAY

WITH

VIDEO

5. "MAXCAR"' 111561: THE l'S COMPLEMENT OF
THE 7 BIT ASCII FOR THE MAXIMUM DISPLAY·
ABLE CHARACTER IN ALPHA MODE. PRESET
FOR MAXIMUM OF CODE 137.

3. SPECIAL: NONE
6. "SUFLEN" (11571: THE 2'S COMPLEMENT OF
3, RESTRICTIONS

THE KEYBOARD ANO PRINTER FUNCTIONS OF
THE VT8-E ARE Nor EXERCISED BY THIS MODULE,
AND INTERRUPTS FROM THESE DEVICES MAY
RESULT IN AN UNACKNOWLEDGED INTERRUPT
MONITOR HALT.
4. OPERATING INFORMATION

4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THIS MODULE REQUIRES EXTERNAL BUFFERS.
4.2 BUILDING

1. JOB TYPE: INTERRUPT DRIVEN
2. PRIORITY: SHOULD BE PLACED IMMEDIATELY
AFTER ANY CRITJCAL INTERRUPT MOOULES.
2. JOB SLOTS: JFl OR JF2 ONLY; 4 PAGES RE.
QUIRED.
4. STANDARD DEVICE CODE: 0050

THE NUMBER OF CHARACTER SLOTS TO BE
DISPLAYED IN ALPHA MODE. THE RANGE IS
FROM ·1 THROUGH -677. PRESET TO -677 FOR
4471101 CHARACTERS PLUS EOS. THE VALUE IN
THIS LOCATION CONTROLS THE AMOUNT OF
DMA LOAD CAUSED BY THE VTS-E IN ALPHA
MODE. THE ONLY EFFECT IN GRAPHIC MODe IS
TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF PLANNED DATA
WORDS.

7. TO DELETE THE ELAPSED TIME REPORTING
FUNCTION. CHANGE THE CONTENTS OF LOCA.
TlON "TIMEA" (0613) FROM 1141 TO 5217.

S. TO DELETE THE JOB DEAD CHECKING AND JOB
DEAD REPORTING FUNCTION, CHANGE THE
CONTENTS OF LOCATION "TlMea"(0443) FROM
4773 TO 5252.
4.4 DEVICE SETU~
NONE REaUIRED OTHER THAN NORMAL ONLINE
SETUP.

.. . l

J

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamBama1

12 Bit

GI I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

Option or Designator
DEC/XB

0 1 36 Bit 0.1
f-lTech Tip

Title SYNOPSIS OF INFO ON DEC/X8 SOFTWARE MODULES (con:r Numbe'
All

Processor Applicability

11J JJ I I

IAuthor

Don Herbener

IApproval Frank

4.5 RUNNING

NO EFFECT

5, ERROR INFORMATION

0610

NOTE THAT A HALT AT MODULE LOCATION 0720
INDICATES THAT DECfX8 HAS TIMeD OUT. THIS
HALT SHOULD OCCUR IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE
FIRST ELAPSED TIME REPORT AT NN HOURS
WHERE "NN" IS THE TIME OUT VALUE
HELPFUL HINTS
UNFORTUNATELY THERE IS NO PROVISION FOR
SELECTING A CONSTANT BUFFER OR AUTOMATI·

I PAGE

161

UPAGE REVISION

J

DEC/XB-TT-2

Cross Reference

o~L.14Jnl

MODULE LOCATION

ALL ERROR DETECTION IS VISUAL.

5.1

0

CALLY FREEZING THE CURRENT BUFFER SELECTION. HOWEVER, IF A DISPLAY FAILURE DOES
OCCUR. OR DOES CAUSE ANOTHER DEVICE TO
FAIL, IMMEDIATELY COMMAND t C AND USING t
o CHANGE THE FOLLOWING MODULE LOCATIONS.

1. CNTR: UPDATED ONCE PER MINUTE
2. SR10: NO EFFECT

3, SRll:

Purcell Date

Rev

..

0617

FROM

TO

4775
6002

7000
5223

THESE CHANGES WILL FREEZE THE CURRENT
BUFFER ASSIGNMENT AS LONG PS THE MOOULE
REMAINS IN THE RUN STATE.
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THESE LOCATIONS BE
RESTORED TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONTENTS PRIOR
TO SWITCHING FROM THE KILLED TO THE RUN
STATE.

RpUBLICATION DATE

And J

J 973

ITech Tip DEC/X8-TT-3

Title ORDERING DEC/X8 FROM THE PROGRAM LIBRARY

All

8·J

IAuthor Don Herbener
I I I I I I IApproval F. Purcell
Processor Applicability

INumber
Rev

0

Oate 04/11/73

I
I

Cross Reference

There seems to be some confusion in ordering DEC/X8 from the
Program Library.
I suggest field representatives do not
order "personal" copies from the Program Library but instead
order LibKit-X8-DIQAA and specify tapes only, and use DEC/X8

Tech Tip-2 for the module information. Revision B of the
monitor and all software modules are currently being mailed
to the field offices for reference ~ Below is a list of the
Libki t numbers and some DEC/X8 maindec numbers:
Papertape and Documents
DECTAPE and Documents

Linctape and Documents

Users Guide Only
File DECtape Only

File Linctape Only

COM PANY CONfIDENTIAL
Page

162

LIBKIT-X8-DIQAA
LIBKIT-X8-DIQBA
LIBKIT-XB-DIQCA
MAINDEC-XB-DIQAB
MAINDEC-XB-D1QAE
MAINDEC-XB-DDQAA

mDmDDma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit

QlI

0 I

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

I

RT.!

IAu1hor

DF32

0 I

I

ITech Tip DF32-TT-1
INumber

DF32, DF32D FALSE FALCOM ERRORS

Processor Applicability
All

16Bit

Option or Designator

W

Kochman

I I I I 1 IApproval w:

Cummins

Rev

0

Date 07/31172

I

Cross Reference

I

Falcom errors with an 8L and a DF32 or DF32D system may occur on
60 cycle systems due to the DF32, DF32D Disk Data Maindec DFLE or
later revisions a This is due to the time constant normally
changed for 50 cycle operation being too small. Location 1772
should be changed from 6 to approximately 15 to ensure proper
timing for falcom compare.
Title

IITech
Tip
Number. . DF32-TT-2

DF32 WRITE LOCK PROBLEMS

ASI,ISI

IProcess<>
I r l APPLlicablilityl

~

I Author Toolan/Kochman Rev 0 I
IApproval w. Cummins Date Q7/31/72 I

Cross Reference

Problem 1

Very intermittent data failures especially in environments with poor
electrical noise.
Print D BS-DF32-0-5.
Assume the write lock switches
are in the open position.
We then "have fairly long open circuit lines
to A6T and A6E, which pick up spikes and -if they are sufficiently bad cause
data errors.
Fix 1

I donlt know of any spare clamped loads, so I use a
15 K resistor to -15V giving a lmA current source,
via termi-points on the wiring side.

Problem 2
Same print.
Assume that fix 1 is not implemented.
Assume write lock
switch is closed.
Problem is that write lock sometimes fails to lock
out depending on resistor tolerance.
Reason is that the midair upside
down "and" gate of +10 V and 4.7 K gives approximatelY 2mA of write
lock current, the G285 takes ImA and'the R002/Rlll (on the skip logic)
another ImA.
Result is that depending on resistor tolerance the WIA
and WIS signals can be at an indeterminate level of say minus 1.5
volts.
This can cause intermittent failures of write lock and
information can be lost.
Fix 2

Which also takes into account the extra current
requirement of fix 1, is to replace the 4.7 K
r.esistors on the rear of the rotary swi teh by 2.2 K.

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAL
IPAGE 163

II PAGE REVISION

A

RPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

ITech Tip

Title

INumoo. DF32-TT- 3

DF32 - DS32 DISK DATA ERRORS
Processor Applicability

All laIlsLl

PROBLEM:

1 l 11

IAuthor G.

Rev

Chaisson

jApprova. W. CUmmins

0

Date 07'-3lD2

I
1

Cross Reference

Disk data errors will occur while running customer programs
and no disk errors will occur when running disk diagnostics
for extended periods of time.
(Disk data diagnostic runs
twenty passes OK.)

POSSIBLE
SOLUTION: It has been found that the above symptoms have occurred when
the TTA and TTB timing tracks have just been on the edge of
being marginal.
In some cases, looking at the timing tracks
with a scope will show either a high or low output amplitude
or an uneven output.
In the first case where the ampli~ude is incorrect, adjustment
of the read amplifier is indicated.
In the second case
where the uneven output is observed, it is a good idea to
switch to the spare timing tracks.

Title

DF32 HARDWARE INDICATORS OF NON-EXIS,!:ENT DISK
SELECTION
Author

All

Cross Reference

N. Kochman

Approval W. Cwomins

Date

1)

NEX status bit will be set whenever attampting any selection of
a non-existent disk. The programmer must differentiate whether
or not write lock is also causing this status bit to be set.

2)

NED FF will be set only if a transfer spirals onto a non-existent
disk.
It is normally set after reading the last word of the last
track of existent disks on the last word of a transfer, and under
this circumstance alone is designed to set TRC.
NED generates an
interrupt.

Page 164

mamDamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUALJ
1 12Sit Gill

0 I

18Si'

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

1

I I I I I

1

I.Author

OF32

0 I

I

Tech
TiPOF32-TT-5
Number

DF32 INSTRilCTION MANUAL ERROR

Title

~I

16Sit

Option or Designator

Bill Freeman

1Approval W. Cwmnins

Rev

Date

0

J

Cross Reference

07/31/721

"Disk operating Procedure for Timing Track Writer, DF32 u , Page 5-7, Instructions 15,
16 and 17 are in error and should read:
(15) Change the scope to alternate sweep and plug probe B into banana jack
9. This test point is the write disable delay which is initiated at the
beginning of the photocell signal and terminates at the center of the

photocell signal.

Title
All

X

(16)

The adjustment associated with Jack 9 is P3, located beside the jack.
With a screwdriver, adjust this delay time to 100 usee. and observe, on
the scope, the two traces of the photocell signal and the delay together.
If the signal from Jack 9 appears to initiate at the end of the
photocell signal, the photocell switch is in the wrong position.

(17)

After adjusting the P3 delay, and without changing the scope settings,
remove probe B from Jack 9 and plug it into Jack 8. This output is
the writer track enable delay and is initiated at the beginning of the
photocell signal. The delay associated with this delay is P2.

I

Tech Tip
OHM METER TESTING OF DISK HEADS IN RF/RSOB-DF32jNumbo, DF32-TT- 6
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

LAuthor

W. Freeman

LAppro••1 W. Cummins

Rev

Date

0

07/31/72

I

Cross Reference

1

It is advisable to have a track writer available before undertaking ohm meter testing
for defects in a disk head or cable. The current which can be produced through a
disk head by an ohm meter is sufficient to cause an alteration of data on the disk.
Even if the disk is not rotating, a glitch may be produced on the disk directly
beneath the head.

IPAGE

16.5

II PAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

Title

All

ITech Tip DF32-TT-

DF32 TROUBLESHOOTING

IAuthor D.
I I I I I I I IAppro••1 W.
Processor Applicability

INumber
Herbener

Rev

0

I
I

'l

Cross Reference

Da.. n7/3'[/72
Curmnins
There has been a problem in the field with men working on DF32 disks
and not having readily avai.lable to them a scope loop for checkln9 the
G285 and G286 matrix selectors. and often not having the G702 light
card for use with Diskless. It is possible for two tracks to be selected
at all t~es and for Diskless to run. Disk Data will run and may
indicate intermittent parity errors, random select errors .. or a failure
at one particular addressJ Multi Disk may also run. Disk Data and
Multi Disk will run because they both write one track and then read the
same track. Many times the failure is obscured and may lead a field
service engineer astray.

The following program has two important features. First, it will
monitor the switch register and select a track; by using an oscilloscope
the selectors can be checked to see that only one track is selected at
any ttme~ Second, the G284 disk writer can be monitored with a scope and
tb.e play back vol tage can be checked to see if one track is weaker than
the others, or if any track has irregularities in voltage.
The switch register bit assignments for disk and track selection are as
followss
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

[6
5
4
3

will
will
will
will

select track [6 or
select track 2
select track 4
select track 1[6

Bits 1 and 2 will select disks [6 thru 3
Bi ts 6 thru 8 will select which memory field will be

involved in the data transfer.
By varying the constants (AMT) and (ADR) the program can be used to

transfer any quantity of data to any area of core. Also, if the
instruction OOAR (66[63) is changed to IlMAW (66[65), the program will
write on the disk rather than read from it.
TO start the program, load address 74[6[6, set the switch register to [6[6[6[6,

and start.
DCEA~6611

DCMA~66[61
DEAL~6615
DFSC~6622

L'MAW~66[65
00AR~66[63

PAUSE

74[6[6
74[61
74[62
74[63
74[64
74[65
74[66
74[67
741[6
7411
7412
7413
Page 166

73[6[6
66ifl
6611
1237
3631
1236
3632
76if4
3235
1235
[6233
6615

* 74f1[6
BEG, CLA CLL
DCMA
DCEA
TADAMT
DCA I WC
TADADR
DCA I CA
LAS
DCA SW
TAD SW
AND K377[6
DEAL

REV. A.

7414 72[6[6
7415 1235
7416 751J1
7417 5224
742[6 72[6f1
7421 66[63
7422 5226
7423 1234
7424 66[63
7425 5226
7426 6622
7427 5226
743[6 52iffl
7431 775f1
7432 7751
7433 377f1
7434 4f1/1[6
7435 [6[6if[6
7436 7577
7437 7777

CLA
TAD SW
SPA
JMP .+5
CLA
OOAR
JMP WAIT
TAD K4[6[6[6
OOAR
JMP WAIT
WAIT, DFSC
JMP' .-1
JMP BEG
WC,775[6
CA,7751
K377[6,377f1
K4[6[6[6,4f1if/l
SW, /1/1[6/1
ADR,7577
AMT,7777

mamao!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

All

X

12Bit

G91

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I I I I I I

Option or Designator
DF32-TT-8

0 I
ITech Tip
INumber

DF32 DISK ON LINC-8
Processor APPlicabilityl

I

Lj-A,--U_tho_'-,-'D""--"C""r-"o"'w..=t"'h"'e=-r_ _ _ _
R_OV_-"o'--l1

IAppro.aIH:

Long

Hardware needed to add a cab onto a
All
3 1 2 3 24 -

trim should be black
center cl.ips 474-5354
Cab top spacer #74-5343
Fillers #74-5347
Flat clips #74-5344
10-32-5/8" screws

24 -

#~O

Data 09/14/72

DF32-TT-B
Cross Reference

I

LINe-a/

External lock washers

Cable Requirement:
LINC SIDE
ME34
MF34
ME35
MF35
PE02
PF02
PH04
PJ04
(See Note U)
PHOS
PJOS
ME30 (See Note #2)

DF32 Side

C09
CIO
Cll
C12
C13
Cl4
C15
Cl6
C17
CIS
Cl9

NOTE #1:

These four (4) cables go from these processor connectors
to the data terminal panel in a standard Line-8. However,
since the DF32 must use these signals and they are not
available any place else in the existing, logic, they must
be removed and replaced by the cables going to the DF32.
The four cables that were there should be taken back tc
the field office.
NOTE #2:

This is the cable required for the extended address bits
if extended memory is to be used with the disk. However,
if you will notice, this cable slot is already being used
for LINe addressing and we cannot pick up these signals
anywhere else.
In order to be able to use the disk, or any other 3 eye Ie
break device with extended memory, a modification must be
put in the machine. This change must be requested from
Maynard. When requested this info ask for the "Print Title
o Extended Memor #d-WL-7605427-0-0".
PAGE REVISION
A
PUBLICATION DATE
November 1972

DF32 DISK ON LINC-S

Title

All

P,..,.....,r Applk:ability

Ir.s I

I I I I

I

1

TechTiP

(Continued)

Num~

II-A:-U:..""".:....-:-.ll..~_.Cl:('y=,t:l-hb.e;"-__.:R:..,=--l!_--11
IApproval H. Lona
Date 09/14/72 L

DF32-TT-S
Cross

Reference

Notes of Interest:
Linc-B EeO's 24 and 25 must be installed in the system
before the disk will run correctly
Also make sure that
the R302 delay is disable break out, which ~s part of Eeo
#25, is set correctly at 750 ns.
&

It has also been on a few systems that there has been
excessive noise on the skip line in the DF32 logic. This
can be cleared up by replacing a .01 capacitor through
IOOr terminator to ground on Pin C14K.

Something to Check:
Common wiring error found on previous installations:
Delete:

PHI0U to PH12R
PHIOT to PDnK

Add:

PHIOU to PJO 7U enable Line
PHIOT to PE07R disable cycle select

PH12R to PH12U O-PC
PH12T to PD22K 5-11
PROBLEMS TO BE RUN TO INSURE RELIABILITY OF THE DF32 AND DS32
DISK'S ON A LINC-8.

a)
b)
c)

Diskless - MAINDEC-08-DSBA-D
Diskdata - MAINDEC-OS-D5CA-D
Multidisk- MAINDEC-08-DSDA-D

If these diagnostics will run in their entirety and the rest
of the Linc-8 still runs correctly you should be all set.

/rot

eQULPMENT

CORPORA TLClN

Rev. A.

",age 168

Option or Designator

DF32

Title

DF32
Cross Reference

Author

All

Approval

Date

When modified for use with electronic photocell (see DF32 Eeo
#~~~43 or D832 ECO #~~~~9) a different operating characteristic
may be encountered.
Symptom:

After releasing write pushbutton, the writer

Reason:

PI is incorrectly adjusted.

continues writing timing.
If clock pulses are

too far apart, timing will overlap the gap area

causing this symptom.
Correction:

Adjust PI until gap area can be adjusted properly.
The R401 clock in the TTW controls coarse PI
adjustment and may be out of adjustment if PI

cannot obtain proper results. Clock pulses should
be approximately .54 usee apart for 60 cycle and
.66 usee apart for 50 cycle operation.

For this reason, when writing timing, whether on a

disk with or without photocell, the gap area must
be examined after re~easinq the write button.
Title
All

DISK MOTOR BEARING FAULTS DF AND RF

Tech Tip
/ Nu~ DF32-TT-IO

Processor Applicability
IAuthor Car 1 Cline
Rev 0
( Cross Reference
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
IApproval W.E.Cummins Date Aug 721.
~hen a bearing wears in the DF-32 or the ~f08 1t trequently

I

will give intermittent errors, generally in the form of bit
drops.
It is then necessary to examine the data amplifier
output to confirm that a fault is in the motor.
A faulty motor will rotate in an uneven pattern because of
looseness between the shaft and bearings, and this can be seen
as a phase shift between the plus patterns on the data tracks
as compared with the TTA Timing Pulses. The inner data tracks
will have the greatest shift and therefore be the most to fail
and the most noticably out of phase.
On some motors only
vibration will cause this effect.
This problem may temporarily be co~rected by increasing the gain
of the data amplifier which in turn will increase the width
of the sliced output to be strobed.
The following diagram
illustrates this problem and the test points for placing
scope probes.
Using the subtests provided in the Disk Data Tests J write all
ones on all tracks.
Then use the track selection test also
provided in the Data Tests.
One of the following should be

O~~~~--Jr.P~A~G~E~R~E~V7.IS~I~O~N~l~---'r.P~U~B~L~IC~A~T~IO~N~D~A=T=E--J-u-1---19-7-2-------'

Title

All

I

Tech Tip
Number DF32-TT-ll

DF32 DISK ON LINC-8

II-A_Utho_'__D_._c_r_o_w_t_h_e_r_ _ _R_OV_ _O_-,1

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I IApproval

H.

Date

Long

Cross Reference

09/14/72l

Hardware needed to add a cab onto a LINC-8:

All trim should be black
3 - Center clips #74-5345
1
2
3
24
24

-

Cab top spacer #74-5343
Fillers #74-5347
Flat c ips #74-5344
10-32-5/8" screws
#10 External lock washers

Cable Requirement:
LINC SIDE

See Note #l
See Note #2

ME34
MF34
ME3S
MF3S
PE02
PF02
PH04
PJ04
PHOS
PJOS
ME30

DF32 SIDE
COg
CIO
CII
CI2
CI3
CI4
CIS
CI6
CI7
CIS
CI9

NOTE #1:

These four (4) cables go frOID these processor connectors
to the data terminal panel in a standard Line-B.
However,
since the DF32 must u-se these signals and they are not
available any place else in the existing logic, they must
be removed and replaced by the cables going to the DF32.
The four cables that were there should be taken back to
the field office.

NOTE #2:

This is the cable required for the extended address bits
if extended memory is to be used with the disk.
However,
if you will notice. this cable slot is already being used
for Linc addressing and we cannot ·pick up these signals
anywhere else.
In order to be able to use the disk. or any other 3 cycle
break device with extended memory, a modification must be
put in the machine.
This change must be requested from
Maynard.
When requested this information ask for the
"Print Title Linc-DF32 to Extended Memory Ifd-WL-760S427-0-0".

Notes of Interest:
Linc-8 EeO's 24 and 2S must be installed in the system before
the disk will run correctly.
Also make sure that the R302
delay is disable break out, which is part of ECO #25, is set
correctly at 750 ns.
OIGITAL

page

170

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

mamDDma IAELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

IX)

Title

DF32 DISK ON LINC-8

A~I

Processor Applicability

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

16Bit

0 I

ISBit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator

DF32

0 I

ITech Tip

INumber DF32-TT-ll

(Continued)

LrA_"_thor
_ _..:;D..:;......:;c;:.r.;..ow::.::.th;:.e:..;rO-_ _ _R_w_.....:;o_-j1
I

LApproval H. Long

Date 09/14/72

Cross Reference

I

It has also been noticed on a few systems that there has been
excessive noise on the skip line in the DF32 logic.
This can
be cleared up by placing a .01 capacitor through 100 r terminator to ground on pin CI4K.

Something to Check:
Common wiring error found on previous installations:
Delete:

PHIOU to PH12R
PHIOT to PD22K
Add:
PHIOU

t.o

PJ07U enable line.

PHIOT to PE07R disable cycle select
PHI2R to PHI2U O-PC
PHI2T to PD22K 5-11
P~OBLEMS

~O

BE RUN TO INSURE RELIABILITY OF THE DF32 AND DS32 DISK'S

ON A LINC-8.
a)
b)
~)

Discless - MAINDEC-OB-DSBA-D
Di.data - MAINOEC-08-DSCA-D
Multidisc- MAINDBC-08-DSDA-D

If these diagnostics will run in their entirety and the rest of the
Linc-8 still runs correctly you should be all set.

IPAGE 171

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

Oct. 1972

NOTES

Page 172

mamao!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL]

I
Title

12Bit

(jill

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I I I I I I

IAuthor

Turcotte/Herbener Rev

iApproval F. Purcell

DF32

0 I

DF32 • TTW ADJUSTMENT • CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

I

Tech Tip
Number

A

Do"11/02/72

I
I

DF32-TT-12
Cross Reference

The following Tech Tip is divided into five (5) Sections:
A.

Synopsis of DF32 ECO & TTW Problems and Corrections

B.

Set Up and Checkout of DF32 TTW

c.

Procedure to write timing on a DF32 with or without
photocell input.

D.

Electrical Adjustment Procedure for DF32

E.

Representative Scope Waveforms

The following procedures assume the timing track writer has
EeQ #43 installed. This applies to all DF32 TTW's.
This Tech Tip supersedes Old Tech Tip DF32-TT-3 and DF32-TT-9
or 8I Tech Tip Section 9 pages 13 through 16 and 8I Tech Tip
Section 9 page 20. Also DF32 ECO#0043.

~173

Ii PAGE REVISIDN

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

August 1974

Titte
All

X

DF32

&

TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (Con'

ITech Tip
tl Number DF32-TT·

IAuthor Turcotte/Herbener Rev A I
I I I I I I I IApproval F. Purcell Oato11/02/721
Processor Applicability

I.;;L

Cross Reference

SECTION A
DF32 TTW ERROR AND CORRECTION LIST

At least two types of DF32 TTW's cu~rently exist in the
field. The old type is the grey metal case and the new
type is the new brown leather case.
There is no logic
differences only packaging differences.
All neW TTW's are being checked out prior to being released
to the field.
However several older TTW's have been
returned to Maynard because of problems experienced after
installation of the ECO to modify the TTW to write in the
same manner as the RF08 TTW.
J

A.

One major problem is noise being induced on the lines
between the G284 modules, TTA normal/spare and TTB
normal/spare switches~ and the connector blocks for
timing' and data cables.
This problem was overcome by
,replacing the lines between those points with two
conductor shielded cable.
The cable is the same as
that used for the timing cable on the DFMA.

B.

On the old type TTW's, it was discovered that after
the 12 wire change had been completed, the technician
tied all lines together with cable ties or plastic
harness and the noise problem then exists.
After
the 12 wire change has been installed. the TTW must
be checked on the DFMA. The most common indication
of the noise problem is that no erase cycle occurs.
The lines between the G284 modules and the TTA normal/
spare switches must be separated from all others.
This must be done on a tr~al and error basis until
it is found that the noise problem is overcome.

C.

Another problem in the new type TTW is a ground loop.
The ground run between the data/timing connector block
and the logic connector blocks must be removed.
A
ground run from the data/timing connector blocks should
be made to one of the front panel holding screws on
the chassis.

The jumpers for the external R401 module should be installed
on the pin side of connector block Cl. This way, no R401
module will have to be modified.
See "Set-up and Checkout
Procedures" step 2.

Pag'e 174

mamaDmD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
1 12Bit Ga 1 16Bit 0 I

laBit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator
DF32

01

Title DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (Con'dTechTip DF32-TT-/2.

Processor Applicability

A~ 1 I I I I I I

IAuthor

-I Number

Turcotte/Herbener Rev

IAppro.aIF. Purcell

Date

A

I

Cross Reference

11/02/721

ECO ERROR AND CORRECTION LIST

Reference ECO DF32-00043
Error Page #1

Break-in point reads - #433 and

Futur~.

Correction:
#433 and Future
up to #432 ECO-006 must be installed

Error Page #1 reads
This ECO cannot be installed in units No. 0-433.
Shoud read:

Units 0-432 can be modified by installing
ECO #6 and ECO #43.

Error Page # 2
Step #4 of method to adjust stimulated photogap pulse.
Reads ~ continue two turns to ensure good margin.
Correction:

Two turns may offset the balance of the
guard bands and cause problems.

The correct set up:

is covered in the new procedures.

Error Pages #4 and #5 - Delete pages #4 and #5 due to the
fact that these procedures have been followed in the field~
step by step~ and have never worked correctly.
Part C of
this report has been proven and should be followed by
all technicians.
Error Page #7 reads

GND

C27P

C27L

Add

C27C

Add

should read:

GND

IPAGE

175

C27P

IIPAGEREVISION

A

DpUBLICATION DATE

August 1974

T" I

Ite

All

X

DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Processor Applicability

... JTech Tip
(Con 1 t1Number DF32-TT-

IAuthor Turcotte/Herbener

I I I I I I I IApproval F.

Purcell

Rev

A

Date 11/02/72

f

I

PDP-8I TECH TIP ERROR AND CORRECTION LIST

Reference DF32 Tech Tip #3 pages 3 and 4.
Error

_ These pages are identical to the procedures in
ECO DF32-00043.
Delete pages 3 and 4.

Correction:

Refer to Section C of this report.

Add-Delete Synopsis
DF32 ECO #43 Add-Delete List
Si~nal

Name

PCA
PCA
Delete photo
PCA
PCA
PCA
PCA
PCA
GND
GND
TTA
.01 JAF CAP
.01.5)lF CAP
In DF32 Add
In DS32 Add

Add-Delete

OS32

~

C12D-016J
Delete
AOSO-A12V
016J -022H
A12V-A30P
amplifier and platter tape in DFMA,
Add
C170-C17F
C280-C28F
CI7F-ci6N
C28F-C27N
C16N-D16J
C27'N-A30P
C28P-C28R
Cl7P-C17R
Cl7T-C16V
C28T-C27V
CI7U-C16P
C28U-C27P
C16P-CI6C
C27P-C27C
C17V-D22D
C28V-B21P
C16S-C16T
C27S-C27T
C17J-C17U
C28J-C28U
C16R-C16S
C27R-C27S
R302 module in C27 and R303

in C28
R303 in Cl7

ECO FOR TIMING TRACK WRITER
Bl IF to BIIC
BllF " BlIP
AlSN 11 Al SF
AlSU
" Al4T
AlSU
11
Al5N
AI3V
" Al5P
A14T
" AISu
AISU
" AISF
AIS1' " BlIP
BOSY 11 BllF
BOlU
" A1SN
80SP
" A1SP

Page 176

Delete

Add

Rev .. A.

t2.

Cross Reference

I

m
. . II~~--;:::;-r--:=-=:-;:=;-r-=-;:=;-t
(iii I
0 I
0 I
0 I
FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

16Bit

18Bit

Option or Designator
DF32

36Bit

Title DF32 7 TTW ADJUSTMENT. CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (con'tj=DF32-TT-I2.

IAu1hor

ProcoSIor Applicability

Turcotte/purcell Rev

A~ I I I I I I I IA~F.

Purcell

A

Datall/02/72

I
I

Croa Reference

SECTION B
Set-up and Checkout Procedures for DF32 TTW after
Electronic photocell ECO has been installed.

A.

The following may be accomplished without connecting
the DFMA timing cable.

1.
2.

Connect power cables to proper source.
Insert R401 module in connector "Cl lI or "DATA".

Connector should have jumpers F

H, L

R, T

U.

3.

Turn on power.

4.

Observe Jack 9 and adjust P3 for a 100
(Ref. Figure Itl).

S.

While observing Jack 9, adjust the pot on the
external R401 module until the pules are:

output

36 msec apart for 60 Hz
42 msec apart for 50 Hz
(Ref. Figure #2)

6.

Observe Jack 8, while depressing write 2, adjust
P2 for a 250 Usee output.
(Ref. Figure #3)

7.

Observe Jack 7, again while depressing write 2,
the output should resemble Figure #8, leading
edge to leading edge should be approximately

600 nsec
200

IPAGE

177

MeC

for 60 Hz. (675 for 50 Hz.) ~igure fa represents
per CM. Yf adjustment is necessarY, go to 7A.

·7A.

Set PI to MID Range (this is a 10 turn pot),
follow step 7 and observe the output 8:t
Jack 7.
Adjustment is made by turning the
pot on the internal R401 module.

78.

The following must be accomplished with the
DFMA timing cable inserted:
1.

Observe Jack 1, 2, 3, or 4.

2.

Set scope to 20 msee per CM.

3.

Press write 1 to on (light should be on).

4.

Depress write 2 and observe scope.
Display
should resemble Figure #9.
(This shows that
both the write and the erase cycles are
occurring).
If the display does not resemble
Figure #9 and the cycle is a continuous write.
an internal noise problem exists.
Refer to
(Synopsis of Error and Correction Lists).

II PAGE REVISION

A

DPUBLICATIONDATE

August 1974

Title

DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Alii IP,o""",,,
1'1 APPI'icablilityl
X

{Con'

JTech Tip

tlNumbe, DF32-TT-/,2.

(Author Turcotte/Herbener Rev

IApproval F.

Purcell

A

Oat. 11/02/72

~

I
I

Cross Reference

Set-up and Checkout Procedures for DF32 TTW after

Electronic photocell ECO has been installed.
A.

7B.

CONTINUED

continued
5,

If all of the above has been accomplished,
you may now proceed with the procedure for
writing timing.
Refer to "Procedure to
write timing on a DF32 with or without photocell input."

SECTION C
PROCEDURE FOR WRITING TIMING ON DF32 WITH OR WITHOUT
PHOTOCELL INPUT
1.

Power down the system.
Connect voltage leads from
the TTW to the terminal strip located on the left
side of the DF32 logic assembly.

2.

Remove timing cable from disk logic location 831 or
832 and insert in connector "C2 1t or "timing" on TrW.

3.

With Photocell - remove data cable from disk logic
location AS and insert in connector "Gl" Or "data"
on TTW.
Go to step 4.

4.

Apply power to system.
With channell observe Jack 9
and adjust P3 for 100 usee output.
Reference Figure 1.

Blue ::- -lSV,

A.
B.

Red = +IOV,

Black = GND

With Photocell - go to step 5.
Without photocell the pot on the R40l
apart for 60 hz and
Reference Figure 2,

while observing Jack 9, adjust
until the pulses are 36 msec
42 msec apart for 50 hz.
go to step 5.

5.

Press write 1 to on (light should be on).
While
depressing write 2, observe Jack 8 and adjust P2 for
250 usec output.
Reference Figure 3.
Release write 2.

6.

Observe TTA's (Timing Track) "at Jack 1.
Reference
Figure 4.
Using delayed sweep mode, ensure that the gap area
is 350 usee, as in Figure 5.
If not, adjust PI and
momentarily depress write 2.
Again, check for 350
usee gap.
Press write 1 to off (light should be off).
(Display
on scope will disappear.)

7.

Power system down.
Reinsert cables in proper slots
and disconnect VOltage leads from terminal strip.

Page 178

mamDlla I
I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
l2Bit

Ii)

I

l6Bit

0 I

l8Bit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator

DF32

0 I

,1Tech Tip
Title DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Processor Applicability

(Con't)INumber DF32-TT-".2.

1Author Turcotte/Herbener

A~ I I I I I I I IApproval

F. Purcell

Rev

A

Date 11/02(72

I

Cross Reference

I

PROCEDURE FOR WRITING TIMING ON DF32 WITH OR WITHOUT
PHOTOCELL INPUT (continued)
8.

Apply power to system.
With channell observe PCA
at A30P (DF32) 016J (D532).
With channel 2 observe
TTAI~ at A31P (DF32) C23P (D532).
Set scope to delayed
sweep and add mode.
A.

With photocell - display should be the same as
Figure 6.
Guarq band on right hand side must
be at least 50 usec.

B.

Without photocell - display will resemble Figure
6 or 7.

1.

Adjust the lower pot on the R302 module in
location C27 (DF32) C16 (D532) until the
pulse width is 200 usec.

2.

Adjust the pot on the R303 module in location
C28 (DF32) Cl7 (0532)" until the guard band
on the right hand side is SO usec.
The
display should be the same as Figure 6.

Disk timing is now correctly adjusted and ready for operation.
NOTE:

Figure 7 represents a misadjusted R302 and/or
R303 module.

Delayed Sweep Setting for "0"

Scope

Checking Gap Area
Time per div. - 5 msec
Delayed sweep time per div. - SO usee
"B" sweep mode - "B" starts after delay time
Horizontal ~isplay - delayed sweep
"A" triggering - line
Coupling - AC or DC
"A" sweep mode - auto trigger
Mode - channel 1
Checking Photocell in Gap area
Same as above with one exception:

mode - add

COMPANY COlRENlW.

IPAGE

179

II PAGE REVISION

A

nPUBLICATION DATE

August 1974

Tid. DF32
All
X

jTech Tip
TW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (Con' tjNumber
DF32-TT 12.
T:

&

............ Applicability

I I I I I I I

I

I Au_ Turcotte /lrerbener Rev
A
IApproval F. Purcell
Date 11/02/721

Cross Ref........

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR DF32

1.

Power the system ·up and insure the disk motor is

running.

Logic power should now be on.

2.

If good timing is on the disk you may proceed with
the following adjustments.
Otherwise follow "Procedure
for writing timing with or without photocell input."

3.

Put probes 1 and 2 on pins J and K of 830 in DF32
(e22 in D832). Set scope up as follOWS:
Time/Div - 5 msecs
"A" Trigger - Internal

Coupling - AC or DC
"A" sweep mode - Auto Trigger

Mode - Add
Sensitivity - 2 V/Div
Invert Channel "B"
Now adjust top pot on GOB3 in A32 (D23 in 0532) for
average peak-to-peak amplitude of 9.0 volts.
4.

With scope set up as in step 3~ look at pins P & R
of A31 in DF32 (C22 in 0532).
Adjust bottOm pot
of G083 in A32 (023 in DS32) for same signal
characteristics as in step 3.

S.

Set

sc~pe

up as follows:

Time/D~v

- 0.2 usee
"A" triggering - Internal
Coupling - AC or DC
"A" sweep mode - auto trigger
Mode - Alternate
Sensitivity - 2 V/Div
DO NOT INVERT CHANNEL liB"

With probe I look at the strobe pulse on pin V of B30
in DF32 (C22 in D532) and with probe 2 look at the
analog signal on pin J or K of 830 in DF32 (e22 in
0532).
Adjust bottom pot on R302 in A14 of DF32
such that the positive transition of the strobe pulse
on pin V occurs at the center or just a bit to the
right of center of the analog signal on pin J or K.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
On multi-disk systems both disks
should have the same gap area as this adjustment
affects both the DF32 and tpe DS32.

Page 180

mamIlla 1

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

[ill

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bi!

Title DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT • CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

All

X

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

(Con'

Option or Designator
DF32

0 I

Tech TiPDF32-TT-/2
d~'INumber

Turcotte/Herbener Rev

[Approval F. Purcell

I

I

A

Date 11/02/72

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR DF32

CrQSS, Reference

I

(continued)

6.

Using the disk data test, write all ones on all
tracks of the disk.
Now read back one track at a
time while looking at pins J and K of AIO in DF32
(C14 in OS32) with scope set up as in step 3.
Adjust the top pot of the G083 in AS in DF32 (C13
in 0532) such that lowest track is no lower than
8.0 volts average peak-to-peak amplitude and
highest track is no higher than 10.0 volts.

7.

Set up the scope as in step 5.
Look at pin of W533
in AIO (C14 in 0532) in$ert and adjust top pot ofR302 in A14
(Cl6 in D532) so that Dositive transition of th~ strobe pulse

;~~n~l°~~U~in~tJc~~t~~ O~h1~S;a1~s~~q~teO;t~~~~er of analog.
pulse for data and will vary according to track
amplitude.
It is imperative that the track selected
to set this adjustment must be of average amplitude
in relation to the other 16 tracks and must not be
either close to the highest or lowest measured
amplitudes.
8.

Disk data must now be run in entirety.

The timing

and data tracks may have to be fine tuned for
amplitude if there are any data failures.
A moderate

increase or decrease in amplitude (less than 1.0 volts)
should not require a repositioning of the strobe
5 ignal.

IPAGE

,J.81 'PAGE REVISION

A

• PUBLICATION DATE

August 1974

on

T;t1e DF32
All

& TTW ADJUSTMENT

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

x

(Cont) ITech T;p DF32-TT- I:;L
Number
Turcotte/Herbener Rev A
Cross Reference

& CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

IAuthor

I

rAppro.eI F • Purcell

Date 11/02/72

I

FIGURE 1

Tirne/Div

n

.~
... -..

"~I

'l

I

;
10····

I

.,ii

Page 182

...

,

L

20~sec

FIGURE 2

Tirne/Div

5 Msec

mamaama I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title DF32
All

&

12Bit

Iiill

16Bi'

TTW ADJUSTMENT

&

0 I

ISBi.

0 I

36Bi.

I

Optlo:Fo::OSignato'

0 I

CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (Con 0 t)iTN""h Tip DF32-TT.'11 umber

IAuthor Turcotte/Herbener Rev A I
I I I I I I I IApproval F. Purcell Data 11/02/72 I
Processor Applicability

X

FIGURE 3

Time/Div = 50

~sec

il--l-+-++--f..-f-t-t-t-"

l

"

FIGURE 4

Time/Div = 5

IPAGE 183

II PAGE REVISION

A

gPUBLICATION OATE

Ii

Cross Reference

M sec

l\Uqust 1q74

Title

DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

All

X

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

,

IAuthor

' INumber

Turcotte/Herbener Rev

[AppmvaIF. Purcell

1

--'--T

(cont)ITeCh TiPOF32-TT-

Ja ...

A

'"

I'

!;r;'

Cross Reference

11/02/721

Date

FIGURE 5

Time/Div
F"

I

100 j-Lsec.

"'jl

h~i,

b', ',n
'I' I

"-j

FIGURE 6

Time/Div

DIGITAL

Page 184

I:L..

EGUIPMENT

50 rsec.

CORPORATION

mamlDla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I 12Bit

ua I

!6Bit

0

0

I 1SBit

.

I 36Bit

TItle DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Processor Applicability
All I

I

I

I

X

I

I

IAuthor
I

.-

I

Option or Designator
DF32

0 I
ITech Tip

(Cent) INumber

Rev

Turcotte I'Herbener
~
Purcell
Date 11/02/72

IA-"val F.

I
I

DF32-TT-

i.t.

Cross Reference

FIGURE 7

Time/Div

.. ,--,--1

1,,-\
lJ-,... -f.-.1iE
. .;;1
. .....
;;;
.. ;;;
.. t-..-.. i".~II:;
...~,.,.._
.. -1
.. ~.........l;;;.....
=
...:f.-I
;;;I.-•.

IPAGE 185

UPAGE REVISION

A

lOO~sec

FIGURE 8

Time/Div.

In. ...

=

200 N sec

j

UPUBLICATION DATE

Auqust H74

Title DF32 & TTW ADJUSTMENT & CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
All

x

Processor Applicability

1Author

(Cant)

1~':~DF32-TT- IlL

Turcotte/Herbener Rev A

I I I I I I I rApprova' ~

Purcell

Date 11/02/72

I

Cross Reference

I

Figure 9
Time/Div

Page

186

20 Msec

mamaola I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

IKlI

16Bit

0 I

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

DF32

ITech Tip DF32-TT-13
Num~

I

F. Purcell

Option or Designator

0 I

Title RUNNING OF DISKLESS ON DF32 W/ELECTRONIC PHOTOCELL MODIFICATION (ECO DF32-00043)
Processor Applicability
Author
Ra
Turcotte
Rev

:~Is I I I I I I I IApproval

I

I

0

Date 12 08/72

Cross Reference

I

A. Running of Diskless on DF32 with Electronic Photo-Cell modification
(ECD DF32-00043).

1.
2.

When running diskless on a modified DF32 a PSM error typeout
will occur:
1043 4000
To eliminate this error, remove the R303 module in location
(C17 or DS32).

C28 of the DF32

The reason for this e.rror is that the output of the R303 remains
at ground level and therefore represents a true 'photo sync mark
to the logic.
B.

Running of Diskless on DF32 without Electronics Photo-cell.

1.

When running diskless on an unmodified DF32, it is possible to
get a PSM error typeout: 1043
4000

2.

This will occur if the photo-cell AMP assembly is facing the
reflective portion of the D;i..sk platter. This can be overcome
Apply power to the motor
and then remove power.
This will'reposition the reflective
portion of the platter in relation to the photo-cell amp.
by means of the disk motor AC switch.

Title

I

Tech Tip DF32-TT-14
Number

LOOSE ·TERMI-POINT CONNECTORS

Processor Applicability

::15 I I I I I I I
PROBLEl~:

IAuthor

Ken Latta

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

If-A-pprov--'-Iw-.-c-umnu.--·n-s--:-o-ate
--04-1LC-0-4j-,7-l3I

The termi -point connectors used to connect the unit select
switch and write 'lock switches to. the back plane tend to
lose their grip on the pin. When this happens contact may
be lost very intermittently. The loss of contact will
cause deselection of the disk.
If this occurs during a
write operation, there will be no error indications but bad
data and bad parity will be written.

To correct or prevent this problem, solder the termi-point
connectors to the logic pins. Wirewrapping is'not practical
due to the use of stranded wire.

I PAGE

187

II PAGE REVISION

B

DPUBLICATIDN DATe

May 1974

Title
Rev

Author

All

Approval

Date

Under no circumstances should DF-32 head springs be adjusted in the
fie·ld.
Head springs are factory adjusted and should never be
changed in the field.
If, for some reason, a head spring is out
of adjustment, the entire head assembly, including the mounting
block, should be replaced.
Plexiglass alignment disks, new head and

block assemblies, along with timing track writers and instructions,
are available in the Regional Offices.
If a head needs to be changed,
the job should be performed either by an experienced person or. in
the case of an inexperienced person, with assistance.

Title

OF.,

All

n.

n

11

Processor Applicability

'B 'B

rI Btl 8E ,

,

I

IAuthor W.

J

TechTi P
Numbe< DF32-TT16

Rev 0

Freeman

I

Cross Reference

,i-A-ppro-V--'.I::..:......:
w-='=
F=C-O-ate-,,-,,-"-,H-'-',

Ter-m1nation of ADD ACCP and we OVERFLOW is required when a DF32
is used with a DMOI.
The terminators are standard 100 ohm resistors
and should be added from Cl8P to ground and C165 to ground in the
DF32 logic.

All DF32 termination is ~emoved by TIeD DF32-00004 when the disk is
8/1.
If the disk is operated through a DMOI on an 8/1 I however,
the two terminators described above are required.

on an

Title

Cross Reference

Freeman

All

Date
Both the DF32 and eR03 were assigned the lOT instruction 663X.
The
DF32 uses this lOT for maintenance purposes.
We therefo're have a problem
when we have a system with both a DF32 and a eR03 interfaced.
Temporary solutions:
A)

Page

When system is on line:
1)
Remove Wt03 (C021, disk control)

mamDamo IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bi,

@

I

16Bi1

0 I

18Bi1

0 I

36Bi1

DF32

0 I

T"d
I eCONFLICTING lOT's, DF32 and eRo3 (con.t.)
All

Option or Designator

1Tech Tip

INumber

1 I. ~'~I.
__: AppIlicablilityl rt-:-A=-Uth~O:..rW!'..o.-'F!:-'r!Ce,-!e'lm!!!a~n!..-_ _ _--.:R::.ev.:...---.:o~-I1
IJ.(I

B)

IJ.(I.

b~.p

!Approval W.E.Cummins

Date

DF32-TT17

Cross

Reference

12 /61 13J

When performing maintenance on the disk (running disk maindecs):
1)
2)

Insert W!03 (C021, disk control)
Disconnect GROS from "8"~ bus (ABI3)

An ECO has been prepared for elimination of this problem; it is
ECO DF32-00008.

Title

t!::!a:;

DF32/85 Case Historv

"7' Applicab1ilityl

A"
18

181 18L 18E

I

II-A_U_t__
hor ,w,-,-,.F",rC!ei,!;eC!!m~a~n_ _ _ _R_ev__.J!...
~--ll
rApproval

W.E.Cummins Date

DF32-TT18
Cross Reference

12/6/731

The system in question is located in a high noise environment and. every
so often. while the customer was running his program~ he would lose one
character while doing a read from the disk.

Field Service made one call to the site~ but at the time J the customer's
machines were being worked on~ and the noise level was very low, and
consequently, everything that was tried worked correctly.
The problem was found through the efforts of Russell Chambers, of the
Alcoa Company.
Russ found that in the OMD8S (print D-BS-DBSS-O-I (PB8S),
the signal "Increment CA", pin M of the WD21, location IAlO was floating.
This is normal~ because this signal is not used in the DF32; however J due to the environment of the system location, every now and
then increment CA would change, due to noise and, thus. the customer
would lose one character while transferring from the disk.
What Russ
did to correct this was to clamp the signal at Pin U of the Rl13, located
in slot 109 (print location C,4).
Russ also painted out that the signal "Increment Me", on the W021,
location lA8, is also floating; but, up tu this point ~ has not given
him any trouble.

IPAGE

189

UPAGE REVISIDN

gPUBLICATIDN DATE

May 1974

Tit!
•

IT.... Tip
INumber DP32-TT19

DP32 LOGIC/PROGRAMMING PROBLEM

All

ProceaiorApplicability

I .IS1 ISL I•• I I I

IAU_ W• Preeman

IApprovaI

R..

0

W.E.CumBlins Date 12{11/73

J

CroosR"'-

1

When loading DF32 Extended Address with instruction 6615 the AC

should be unchanged.

If, however, the instruction coincides with the

Photo Sync Mark signal, AC b i t " will be set to a one by lOT 614,

which may result in the customer's program being upset.
Customers
should be advised of the existence of this prablell, for which there
is no solution at this time.

All

P - Applicability

J

It-Au_-_-,W::..:....-,p",r",e",.",m",an,,-_-::-_ _
Rav
_ _-"0--t

181srlSLI8EI I I IApprovaI

"or,

Croos Rofaranoe

.11,,..1

Date

Even though the platter surface appears to be absolutely clean,
wash it thoroughly with a mild soap, such as Ivory, and water.
Clean the head surfaces with the pressurized aerosol form of
MS200 magnetic tape head cleaner.

Tide
Author W. Freeman

All

R..

Croos Raferance

All DF32 motors should have 115 volts at the power input regardless
of other notations on the motor name plate.
I.f 230 volts is
involved, a step down transformer must be used between the supply and
the motor.
If the motor has four wires, plug in according to color code;
if the motor has six wires, splice the blue and white together and
the green and black together.
Plug the splice with the green wire to
the green tape and the splice with the 1?1ue wire to the blue tape.

Paqe

190

IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I

••DID I

12Blt

Ii)

I

16Bit

0 I

18Blt

0 I

38Blt

0 I

X

Processor Applicability

I I I I I J I

DF32 to DF32D

ITechTip

Tid. ECO DF32-00047 ERRORS
All

OpIion or c.oiaMtor

INu-

IAuthor
IAp.,...,val

R..

R. Tur"".......

D. StauPl'IAPPllicablilitvl

Alii
x

DMOI-TT-4

II-A_u_tho_'__________R_ev_ _ _-i1 Cross Reference

IApproval

H. Long

I

Da.. OS.17. 72

PDP-12's with DMOl's have exhibited a noise problem on the, cycle
select line.. The noise originates in the DMOI and is amplified
and shaped while passing through the DMOS; The following fix
was originated by Del Hollingsworth PDP-12 Engineering:
1.

2.

Add Rl07 module to C32 DMOI.

Install following wiring changes:
Si9:nal Name

~

!2..!!!!.

C13D

C13D

B15S

X

3 volt Clamp

B15S

BllT

X
X

Cycle select

3.

~

B15R

A19L

A19L

Al!fK

C13D

Cl3D

BllT

X

Cl3D

Cl3D

C32E

X

Cycle Select

Al9L

AIOR

X

C32D

A19L

X

~

X

Insure cable run from DMOl to OWOS is as short as possible.

/mt

Title

All

X

I~:~ DMOl-TT-5

M633 NEG. BUS DRIVERS USED WITH DMOl
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

fl-.A;-U_tho_'--;-::.P::.._S::.o::.u=-v:.:a=-_--::-~R.::ev~o~_ _ll
IApproval H, Lona

Oat. nq"nn,

The M633 uses a DEC 3639B transistor.

Cross Reference

I

It is overworked

when dr"iving a DMOI because the VCEO of 6 volts is ex-

ceeded by driving 1.SK to -15 volts. This will be
evident on RK08's, DF32D's. FPPl2's and the like being
interface through DMDl multiplexers.
.
Page 198

ECO M633-0DOD2 calls for changing the 3639B transistors
to DEC 6534B.
This transistor has a VCEO of 40.

mamaoma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

[2g

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

0 I

Processor Applicability

DMJl1

!

TachTi P
Number DMlH-TT-6

Title DMH ON DwBB/PDP-RE SYSTEMS
All

Option or Designator

I~A:..:.:..Uth_or:..:.:.._R_._w_~_'1_s_0_n_ _ _ _ _R_ev_O_ _ _1 Cross Reference

IBEI I I I I I IApproval

Date 3-20-74

I

Due to timing considerations, a DMOI or DM04 does not operate properly
on a PDP-8E. The symptoms are that location 7776 in field zero gets
incremented and locations in field 7 get altered.
The DMOI obtains ~he signal BRK REQUEST by a simple OR of the BRK REQ
signals from the break devices. However, the MPX flops set at TP3
(or TPl, see DMOI-TT-l) time to indicate which tlevice gets the break
being requested. Thus, if a break request comes between TP3 (or TPl)

and TP4, the K08E will take a break and the DMOI wonlt know which device
to give it to. The break will be a 3-cycle break with the we at 7776, the
CA increment inhibited, and the break somewhere in fie"ld 7. The
break originallY desired then takes place normally.
To prevent the problem, the BRK REQUEST signal can be formed by ORing
the output of the MPX flops. The following adds/deletes, will accomplish
this. It is only necessary to install the changes for the ports which
are to be used; i.e., for 2 devices, only 'the first 10 adds/deletes
need be installed.
This tech tip is not issued as a cure-all for compatibility problems
between the DM04/DMOl and the PDP-SEe It is issued as a quick fix in

the event that the customer did not receive the proper interface equipment
The Engineering Specs for the KOSE clearly state that a DM04/0MOl cannot
be used on a 8E syste~.

IPAGE

199

II PAGE REVISION

0

nPUBLICATION D~TE

Marc.h 1974

Title

DM,ll ON OWjl8/pOP8E SYSTEMS

p-, A~ity

An -"'E

I I I 1 11

(Cant.)

lAutlKw

R. Wilson

R..

ITech Tip
INu- DM'l-TT~
0
I c...... Ref.......

ll-:-A-pprow---:-al~==--Da-te-3_-.20-'_~74--11

ADD/DELETE SHEET
MAKf AlL DElETIONS fiRST
SI(;NAL N1\l(F.
"~K_=

.:

MPX

1

__"-

··
·

MPX

1

...

(ll
1

(1)

BRKREO

MPX

··
·
·

BRK

REQ

MPX

MPX

5

BRK RP.Q

MPX

Pa,8 200

6

914L

X

AI3?

B2lK

Lx

B16r.

H23L

ollK

B16L
Al3H

n13'
B23L

B22D

DlSK

"_OP

D'"

y

y

X

-=

~2?n

B17L

D1SK
D'"

(1)

A13R:

B22D

3

DIaL
B22E

B22t=;

t'23r.

BIeL

D23K

3M

R""

n29.

I"

X

, x·
x
x
y

"22~

X

""'.T

Bl'9L

RO,U

B"OJ

819L

X

R19L

D2BK

X

A13P

B22H

X

".0"

D""_

tY..

'~/fL
B"9.

822J

Lx.

B2,L

X

(1)

l\l3S

B22J

X

6

BJl9L
B2lL

B21L
S22t

Bjl9L

B21L

(1)

A13U

B22L

(1)

4

··
··

D081<

n,..qo

R23L

on
X

DOW

~

4

n

a14L

11

·

RVK ~""

I

'm PTN
O'OK

'''4T.

B17L

3

··
·

MPX

2

2

'''''' REQ.

l"'RO'1 PIN

'--"2.3."! ,

hK REO

·
·

I

•

-

Lx..
x

"

mamlOla

fFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
, l2Bit

I!J'

0'

l8Bit

0'

36Bit

Processor Applicability

1121 1 1 1 I I

IAuthor

Option or Designator

0 ,

DM04

\TechTip
\ Numbe, DM04-'i'T-l

DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS MDLTIPLEXERS (PDP-12)

Title

All

lSBit

I

I

Rev

"".-'7-.7---1",I

,j-:-A':":ppro':":Y-al-"--T.--O
-- ate

Title

ECO INCOMPATABILITY

All

Processor Applicability

iTech Tip

i Numbe,

I-IA:-U_thor_-:-________~R::..,~..:o~___JI

1121 I I I I 1 IApproyal

H. Loncr

Date 08 17 72

Cross Reference
OMn' _'1''1'_'

DM04-TT-

:t

Cross Reference

I

ECO DMI14-AI1I111. written for a standard DMlI'4. does not fit i f installed
on a DMl!'4 with ECO DMlI'4-AlI'lI'l!'9 implemented.

Corrections:
(l) H Al8E2 to AlI'lS2

BTS3

(del.ete)

BRK CLK SYNC H A18E2 to BlI'3T2

(add)

Additional and delete pairs to allow proper level phasing':
Al!'3T2
Al!'lT2
Al!'lT2
Al!'3T2
Title

SIGNAL GLITCHING

Tip
I\ Tech
Number

I
I I ,,1 I I 1 I ff-A~ppr....:.oY-al-u--T,.~-~--D-ate--00.-.-"7-.,,-11
Processor Applicability

All

(del)
(del)
(add)
(add)

BlI'3T2
Bl!'lT2
B'lT2
BlI'3T2

IAuthor

Rev

DM04-TT-3
Cross Reference

BRK CLK SYNC should not be passed along the I/O bus if a DMl!'4 is

used in the system.
as follows:

The last DM.II4 in the system should be modified
(del)
(del)
(add)

AlI'3T2
Al8E2
Al8E2

Note that this chanqe will require that the source I/O bus be

pluqged into -Aft row.

IPAGE 201

II PAGE REVISION

o

nPUBLICATION DATE

Auqust 1972

-- NOTES --

202

mamalla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title DHl/DM2

All

l2Bi'

I:J I

l6Bi.

0 I

lSBi'

0 I

36Bi'

IAuthor
lSI I I I I I I IApproval

A.

Newberg

"

Cummins

Option or Designator
DNI

0 I
ITech Tip

(DEC 1111,,2933) PHYSICAL DIFFBRB.CE$

Processor Applicability

I

INumber Dlfl-TT-l

Rev

0

Data 07/31172

I
I

Cross Reference

Som_ confusion has arisen from the fact that DH-1 rectifier packages
produced bg Solatron have their physical terminal configuration
to those manufactured by Motorola.
All
internal connections, color coding, and electrical characteristics
shifted 90 0 with respect
are identical

for both units.
RED

YELLOW
YELLOW

RED

-.

GREEN
GREEN

GREEN

From Engineering Newsletter of Feb.l0,1969
ITechTip
INumber DII1-TT-2

Title DM1/DII2 INTERCHANGABILI'rY

0
I
lSI I I I I I II-IA-ppro--va-,-I.:;"c:.•....::.:cu:.:m:.:m:.:i.!.n"-s--:-D-ata-o~6-/-n--'Lj""-7-2-11

Processor Applicability

All

IAuthor

A.

Newbe rt}

~8'V

Cross Reference

'rhere is one significClnt difference between the DJI-l and DII-2 rectifier which affects interchangabilitg.
'rhe inverse voltage rating
Eor the DH-l is 50 volts; i t is 100 volts for the Dlf-2.
All other
specifications are identical including a for.",ard voltage drop of
1 volt @ 10 amps.

A

DH-2 mag be installed

to replace a DII-l.

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
IpAGE

·203

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All

I

Tech
Tip DMl-'l''l'-3
Number

Dlf-l/DM-2 HEAT DISSIPA-rON
...

Processor Applicability

I sri I I I I I

I~A_Uthor
___
A_._N_e_W_b_e_r..:g~ _ _.:.R::,,-=-_o::...-~1
IApproval w. Cummins Date 07/31/72l

Cross Reference

It is imperative that prescribed procedure be followed in the
mountJng of the Solatron tgpe (with metal basel as opposed to
the all epoxy type) DM-l and DH-2 rectifiers. A simple metal
to metal mounting will not provide a reliable heat sink and
pre.ature failure
beat dissipation.

of

the rectifier mag occur because of reduced

A coating of DOW Corning nCompount #4" (silicon grease) sbould
be app11ed to the mounting surface/s before the rectifier block
is secured in place. This compound is stocked by the Field
Service stockroom in 2 oz.

tubes.

I t is suggested that checking new systems for the presence of the
compound mag help to reduce the incidence of rectifier failure.

Title

230 VOLT I

All

I

Tech Tip
Number DMI-TT-4

SO Hz to 115 VOLT 60 Hz CONVERSION

Processor Applicability

J R~ I I I I I

IAuthor
IApproval

C. Sweeney
W

"ummins

Rev

0

Oat. 07/31/72

I
I

Cross Reference

Conversion of the basic ar involves the changing of the power plug
and jumper connections in the 704 power supplg; these changes are
detailed on print 704-0-1 (jumpering for several other AC line
condi tions is also included).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Remove aover plate from transformer to expose rerminal strips.
Remove black jumper which ties terminal #8 to #13.
Add two jumpers to connect terminals #9 to #12 and #10 to #11.
Remove the white fan lead from terminal #9 (mag be
#8) and
connect i t to #12.
Remove the black fan lead from terminal #8 (may be on #9) and
connect i t to #11.
Make the following changes:
Remove lead from ~er.lnal
Reconnect i t to termin.alll

7)

20

19

1S

17

16

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

Replace the cover plate.

For information on Teletype

conversion see Tech Hanual l

Section

In addition to the changing of junpers in the power supplg,
two other concerns:
1)

2)

page

14

The AC power connector:
60 systems require a
SO systems require a

3..

there are

30A Hubbel Connector
20A Hubbe1 Connector.

Any thgrectors on the AC liner
240v systems require a 6RS2,SP9B9 thyrector, (DEC Part #112915)
110V systems require an SP4B.4 th,rect:orl (DEC Part 1111-9116) ..

204

IRELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I

• •111~
Titl.

!2Bit

IitU

0 I

!SBit

0 I

36Bit

lu ISL I 8 I I I I

LAuthor

DP01

0 I

I

TechTiP
Number

DP01A ON LINE DATA RELIABJ:LJ:TY
P _ r Applicability

All

!SBit

Option or Designator

Bill Freeman

jA_ _ W. Cummins

R..
Date

0

7-31-72

I

DP01 -'1''1'-1
Cross Reference

I

Some DP01A's say exhibit the problem of data being received,
shifted from its pcoper bit assignment.
This may be caused
by cross talk in the 70-5639 cable used to' connect the DP01 to
the data set.

The way to check this is to have the remote ter.m-

ina1 continually transmit sync characters. The following
program will display this character in the PDP-8 accumulator:

721111

6634
6651
761/1
52/12

CLA
STR/Set Terminal Ready
SRF/SKP REC FLG - 11
SKP CLA
JMP. -2

6612

RRB/READ REC Buffer

52/12

JMP. -4

The accumulator should display the sync characterJ 1f cross

talk is present, the character will shift randomly while
being displayed.
There are presently two ways to correct this problem; one is
to move the wires in the cable such that the receive clock
and transmit clock are not running close enough to each other
to cause Cross talk. There are several spare wires in the

cable that may be utilized for this purpose. The second
IIIElthod may be adding a capacitor to' A5D to' grO'und of the 637
portion of the DP01. Fer 2/11111 to' 241111 baud speeds the capacitor
may be 22/111 mpf, for higher speeds this size may change the
bit strobe time and a different size capacitor may be necessary.

IpAGE 205

II PAGE REVISION

0

I PUBLICATION DATE

K

July 1972

Tid.

ITech Tip DPOI -T'!'-2

DPOIA P"9grams

INumber

P_Appllcability

-IAu_

:~~ I I I I I I I IApproval

W. CUllllllins
W.

CUllllllins

I

Rev 0
Dote

7-31-72

Crooo Roforonco

I

There are six programs available for the DPOlA:
Two to be used on line with a modem cOD.nected to the DPOIA

1.
2.

Maindec 08-D8EB with device codell 30 tbru 37
Maindec OS-DSIIA with device codes 60 thru 67

Four for off-line use which do not require connection of a
modem
3.
4.
5.
6.

Maindec
MUndec
Maindec
Maindec

08-D9MA
08-D9NA
08-D9PA
08-D9QA

with
with
with
with

device
device
device
device

codes
codes
codes
codes

30
50
60
70

thru
thru
thru
thru

37
57
67
77

Operational procedures for all above MaindeC8 are identical
irrespective of the device coding.

Several qroups of selection codes have been made available for the
DPOIA to make it possible to avoid conflicts with other devices,
these maindecs have been prepared to cover this range of codes.
As an exallple. a DPOIA coded 60 thru 67 on a system with a DF32
Disk would result in a conflict of lOT's and a change of the DPOlA
codes to 30 tbru 37 would be recommended.

Page

206

mamaDla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

Gil I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator

DPOl

0 I
IT..hTip

Title

INum~

DPOl SETTING DELAYS

;:Is]

P,ocess,,, Applicability

I I I I I I

IAuthor

Rev

I

DP01-'l'T-3
CrO$S Reference

Ii-A:-ppro--va-:l-w-.-cumm--in-s--D-ate--7---3-1---72-l1

There are three adjustable delays in the DP01A whIch must be set for

proper operation.

These delays are associated with the receive loqic

and will be found on prints D-BS-637-0-1 and D-BS-637-0-3.
A delay of one mierosecond is associatem

W. Cummins

-<;i

DallE/UL

J

DP-8E-TT-I
Cross Reference

I

In the shuffle of ECO's and relaying out of the M839 module used in
the DP8E several I.C.'s may have different locations on the module
than noted on the prints.
Following is a list of the problems, ECO's
and print showing the problems.
~
M839

OOOIA

C.S. H is changed by replacing

READ/WRITE F/F from RS type
using E26 to CD type using E2.
When relay out occurred this F/F
became E15.

Idle mode did not function properly.
ECO added E26 to C input of T-GO
F/F.
Relay out used E31.
M839

0002

CS H adds CD type F/F to
synchronize clear to send ECO
calls out the use of E17 but relay
out used E2.

M839

0005

CS L to correct a race condition
a gate is added to SYNC 2 logic
E26 is called for but because it
is used in EeO OOOIA E31 must be
used in older boards.

M839

OOOIA

Add wire E2 pin 2 to E 3 Pin 6
ECO 0005, deletes all etch from

E3 pin 6, if E 3 pin 6 has a wire
plus etch move the wire such that
it runs from E2 to pin 2 to
Ell pin 14.

COMPANY CONFIIJ£NThU
IPAGE 215

II PAGE REVISION

@

nPUBLICATION DATE

.*
-

.&9<1 216

-

B

"

u

fC

JI)

..

DP-SE

III FlB.D SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
malBl· I
I
0 I
0 I
0 I
12Bit

Title

[iJ

18Bit

36Bit

DP-BE

ITech Tip

INumber DP-BE-TT-l

I. C. LOCATI ONS

Processor Applicabirrty

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

~E I I I I I I

II-,A,..u_thor_w...u.,.R_=.,.....,IlIJl._ _ _ _R_.......J.I!.---!1
IApproval W. Cummins Data 8/7/73 I

Cross Reference

• mu
"',...~,-jl.1....'-'-I'

SYNCHRONCUS
MODEM
E:

IPAGE

·217

nPAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

.

IN"'"E~FKE

M839-0-1

.'

Title

jTachTiP
Number DP8E-TT-2
Cross Roferance
R..

DP8E Jumpers

ProC8llOr Applicability

All 18e I 88J 8FFI

I

11

--'L
I Author w .'
IA_al W.E.Cummins Data --'ltl--1'Z

J

10~'

There seems to be some confusion in Jumpers listed in the DP8E prints
the following is a chart correcting known errors and makes the jumpering clearer.
Module

Jumpers

11839

Bi t /Charact er

86

87

878

88

89

C7

0

0

0

0

0

C8

0

Break Priority

Generate

Pl

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

I
0

I

0
0
0
0
0

Access Address

7600
7620
7640
7660
7700
7720

Device Code
640X/641X
642X/643X
644X/645X
646X/647X
650X/65lX
652X/653X
654X/655X
656X/657X

IPAGE

P2

P3

P4

P5

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0

A5

A6

A7

0
0
0
0

0
0

I
I

0
0

5
0
0
0
0

6
0
0

I
I
I
I

0
0

I

I
I

0
1

P6

P7

0
0
0

I

0
0
0

0
0

I

0
0
0
0
0
0

0

I

N5

N6

N7

I
I
I

I
I

()

I

I
I

I
I

7
0
I

0
1
0

1
0
0
0
0

0
0

I
I

0
I

0
I

0

COM PANY COIfIIIN11AI.

218

I PAGE REVISION

0

IPUBLICATION DATE

mamalla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bit [)

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator

0 I

DP8E

to

DS~2

ITech Tip

DP8E Jumpers

All 1_ IP~F: APP1'icabIilitvl
"el 8ml ,>I

INumberDP8E-TT-2

I~:::., '"

Rev •
W. E. Cummin!?at8 10/l7/73
0

I
I

Cross Reference

Character Recognition

o

o

2
4

I
I

Sync

£11

the j.umper should be in; for_sync equal 226:

bi t

To select

o

o

Jumpers

M866

Off

On
I
0
I

COIAGC
Transition ON
OFF
ON & OFF

0
I
I

HD
Full duplex

Duplex

0
I

Half Duplex

Modem Select

X
I
0
I

200 series
301
303

Level Conversion

CE (2jumpers)

EIA
Current
TTL
Clock Phase

Normal
Invertet

T (2 jumpers)

CT

E

0
0
I

0
I
I

I
0
0

N (2jumpers)
I

o

D
I
0
I

(6 jumpers)
0
I
0

Ii (2 jumpers)

o
I

The N,~ jumpers on the left (next to I.C.E21) are transmit elk.
The N,O jumpers on the right (next to I.C. El2) are receive Clk.
To run the diagnostic the transmit clock should be N the receive
Should be a

A

~O~1 PANY CONFlDEN1JAL

~9__~II~PA~G=E~R~E~V~IS~IO=N~~__~I~pu=B=L='CA~T~ION~DA~T~E~____________-J

I

Title
DP 8E Jumpers

All

Tech Tip
NumbeP P8E-TT-2

It-A:-U_thor
__--"'.J'i..LJ:
"""'-"....." -_ _ _ _R..:..,~L
~--ll

Processor Applicabmty

Ise.lsJ 8fl I I I

IApprova·W.E.Cummins

Break PFiority
(Detect)

PI
I
2
3
4
5
6

Modem Timing

P2

ICL

Modem
External
Internal

For diagnostic jumper F must

P4

PS

P6

0
0
0
0
I
I

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
I

L

0
0
I

0
I (output ell
(output elk
I
on cable
cab Ie pin 11)
pin 24)
Jumper ICL not be in.

be in,

Spare St at us Bits

(use with TTL
configuration only)

P3

0

Cross Reference

DoteI0/17/73-1

FF

JJ

Status
Status

Do not have jumper L and Jumper FF both inserted

o
T;tIe

In
Out

Processor Applicability

All

Paqe

I

Tech Tip
Number DS32-TT-l

DF32-DS32 DISK DATA ERRORS

I aII ad I I I I

220

IAuthor

r

Approva.

G

Chaisson

w:

Cummins

Rev
Date

0

7-31-72

J

I

Cross Reference
DF32-TT-4

mamaomD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

All

12Bit

Gill

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

368it

IAuthor W.
I B I I I I I I IApproval W.

Freeman

Cununins

DSJOO

0 I

I

MAINDECS AND THE DEC DATA SYSTEM 300

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech TiPDS300-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference

I

a

Date 12/0 B/72

1

The DEC DATA SYSTEM 300 is being sold without any means of
paper tape input; thus to run any Maindec's the PMK02B Field
Service cassette is required as input.
To connect the cassette remove the 240D baud KL8E from the
system and insert the cassette interface. Remove the BCO!V
cable from the VTOS and use the 7008519 cable which was
shipped with the VTOS
to connect the VT05 to the cassette.
{Reference cassette instructions.}
Switch the VT05 from
2400 baud to 110 baud.
(Remember before leaving site to
return the switch to 2400 baud.)

Run diagnostics according to existing procedures. The only
need to reinsert the KLBE supplied with the system is to run
the KLBE diagnostic, the VT05 diagnostic and customer software.
The DEC DATA SYSTEMS are delivered with a complete set of paper
tape diagnostics. If the diagnostics on your cassette are
incomplete or of the wrong revision, take the supplied paper tape
to a system with paper tape input and make the necessary corrections
to your cassette.

IPAGE

221

ilPAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

December 1972

Title

ITech Tip 00. 300-TT.2
INumber
It-,A:-U_th_O_'-,-B_ill_-'-co_nnc.c.e_rs_ _ _ _ _R-,""::-:-_o_---l1 ~nC8

DS-300 System Configuration Cba.nge

All

Processor Applicability

\8E \

\

\

I I I IApp,oval

B. Lawrence

Date 2/8/74

I LKOlll-TT-l

A new configuration for the DEC Data Syst"ems will be manufactured
starting January, 1974a

The processor will be mounted in a short

cabinet, facing forward, and a new desk design will be used.

The

purpose of this Tech Tip is to point out differences between the
new systems and the older systems, and to clarify some points of
confusion a

I.

Ini tializers
A.

Boards
All DDS 300 systems use the same G753 initializer board
which plugs into slots C and 0 of the omnibus.

Pressing

the "initialize" switch asserts omnibus signals STOPL(DS2)
and SWL(DV2), and releasing the switch negates the signals,
starting the MIS-E bootstrap loader.

See the schematic in

Fig. 1.
Ba

Switches
Early DDS 300 systems had the power and initialize switches
mounted in a power switch bracke"t (PIN 7409787) in the cabinet
below the desk tapa

The systems used a G753 switch and

cable assembly (7008 980), shown in Fig. 2. 'or

the RKOI disks, a

custom switch bezel assembly (PiN 7008948) contained the
disk control and indicator cable, and 'was mounted on the top
front of the short cabinet containing the disks.

IPAGE

222

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

Maxoch 1974

Option or Designator

DS300
Title

ITech Tip DS 300-TT- 2

00-300 System. Configuration Change

All

Processor Applicability
'8E'

LAuthor

INumber
Rev

Bill Conners

J , , , , LApproval B. Lawrence

0

Date 2/8/74

I
I

Cross Reference

The current systems deleted the switch bezel assy and RKOI
drives in favor of the RK05 disk drives, and moved the
power and initialize switches to a shallow control pan
(PiN 7409789) which was screwed to the underside of the

desk.

The G 753 switch and cable assy

(7008980) was used for

systems with DECtape, while a G754 switch ana cable assy
(Fig. 3) was used for systems without DECtape.

(7009136)

The new

systems will have a new panel logo across the top front of
the disk cabinet that will include the power and initialize
switches and cables.

The logo assembly (PIN 7009457) is

shown in Fig. 4.
C.

Cable Differences
The G753 cable assemblies have two extra wires in the harnesses
that

a~e

not included in the G754 or 7009457 assemblies.

The

wires connect to "51" of the H721 power supply, TB2-7 and -8,
to include a normally-closed thermal circuit breaker inside
the H721 in series with the power on-off

switch~

Should the

heat sink containing the series regulator transistors and the
thermal switch ever reach 9S 0 C, system power would be removed.
Th~

thermal circuit breaker will not be wired into the

power on-off circuit of the new systems with DECtape.
Should an H721 power supply on a new system overheat, it
will affect only the DECtape logic power.

page

223

All

I

TachTip

T~e

I BEl

II.

ProCMSOr Applicability

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor Bill Conners
IApproval B. Lawrence

--

Number OS 300-TT-2

DS-300 System Configuration Change

R.. 0

Data

2/B/74

I Cross Reference
I ~ig~;::~:i

VT05

A.

lOT's
The console ter.minal for the DDS 300 systems is normally a
VT05 operating at 150 send/2400 receive baud, full duplex,
64- character keyboard, device codes 03/04.

The optional

Foreground Background program which allows data entry from
additional VTOSs during main program execution assumes

additional VTOSs that are set up similarly, but with device
codes 30/31, 32/33, 34/35, 36/37, 40/41, 42/43, and 44/45,

in that order.
B.

The KLBJA

Present systems use a KL8EG interface (M8650YA),

the EIA input of the VT05 through a
and an H308 null modem.

connect~d

to

cable

25 foot BC9i-V

The EIA connection is-necessary because

the KL8EG will not support a baud rate faster than 110 baud on
its 20 rna output, due to a noise supression network.

The

network is used on the 20 ma lines for Teletype operation
to protect against high frequency noise, but it also limits
~e

operating speed of the interface.

New systems will be

operating with a newly designed KL8JA interface (M8655),

IPAGE 224

II PAGE REVISION

0

UPUBLICATION DATE

March 1974.

Option or DesignatOr
DS300
Tide

OS-300 System Configuration Change

All

Processor Applicability

I 8~ I I I I I

IAuthor

J

T.... TiP DS-300-TT-2
Numl:ar

Bill COnners

IApprovl1 B.

Lawr9n"9

Rev

I Cross Rofenmce
I ~gi;:~;:i

0

Data 2/8/74

connected through a pIN 7008360 Berg to Mate-N-Lok cable
and a 25 foot PIN 7008159 TTY extension cable to the. 20
ma input of the VTOS.

The noise suppression on the

KL8JA's 20 ma output is jumper selectable, allowing use
of the interfaces 20 ma output at any baud rate with
the jumper removed.

The VT05 will still operate at 150/2400 baud, remote
terminals can now be extended with 20ma connections to 1500
feet instead of the KISE' s maximum EIA cable length of 50
feet.

The K18JA also inserts from zero to four (Jumper-

selectable) filler characters after a line feed, allowing
printouts to be readable on the VT05 when diagnostics or

other operating systems such as 08-8 are run on a

Data

System.

Since the KL8JA can communicate with the VT05 through
either type of cable, while the n8E

~

use the EIA and

null modem, in emergency situations a KLBJA can be directly
substituted for a KL8EG in a Data System.

The necessary jumper

changes to the KL8JA are included in Fig. 5.
howeve~

The KL8JA,

is a more sophisticated, more expensive interface;

it is not intended to be and should never be used as a

permanent replacement for an existing KL8E, unless the
customer wants to pay the upgrade cost.

e.

XQ'boIords
TIle COS-300 lIOIlitor bas a 80ftware 1oIp~_ed llUIIIeric keyboard t'eature

tbat. after "Contro:,.. NI ' 1s tned by the operator, allows the JIODitor

p. 225

to interpret the letter keys M, J" It, L, U, I, 0, 7,8,9 as mabers 0, 1,

I

T.... Tip

Tide

All

Num~

Ds-300 System COnfiaurat:ion ·Chanqe

Processor Applicability

I8E I I I I I I

lAuthor

Bill COnnors

rAppfO¥al B.

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.

Lawrence

Rev

0

Data 2/8/74

DS 300-TT 2

I CroaR..........
I ~g~;::~:t

TypiDg "Control R" again returns the mOnitor

to IlOl'III&1 ke;yb08rd interpretatiOJ1.

A set ot: ten (10) light grey key oaps

are shipped with each DOO-300 VT05 to h1gbll.ght the keypa4.teature, &ad
are pressed onto the keyboard keys after the original. key caps have been
reJllOVed.

lWrE:

THE XE!BQA.Rl) IS NOT ELECTRICALLY MODD'IED!

O!lq the keyoaps are obaDged.
The new L1tOl-R mechanioal keyboard (PIN 54-10541-0-1)

0_

direotq

replace the ext.tins Rev E and Rev F va.rla.bJ.e oapa.eltanee kl!Jboards

(pIN 54-09945) 1UIl.es. the variable oapaoitance oursor ooatro1 (PIN 30-10166-0-1)
i. alao replaced with the .....,hanioal version (p/N 54-106l3-0-1).
Also, the light grey key caps for the variabl.e capacitance keyboards

(pIN 90-09148-0-74 for a set ot: ten) will not t:1t on the LltOlR mechanical
ke;yboards.
It an LKOl...R keyboard 1s used to replace a variable capacitance keyboard,

the optional set ot: light grey key caps for the LltOlR will have to be
ordered.

Reference future tech tip LKOlR-'l"l'-l for a discussion of the

two keyboards &ad a list ot·part numbers.
D.

The

*' x 20 X 3/8" nyl.on screws used as teet for the VT05 are too short

to reach the recessed threads in the new plastic base castings. 'Tbe
speeification for tbe acrew bas been ebaDged, and in the fUture it you

order screws usiDg the or1siDal part number (12-10582), you will receive
the new lolIger size

IPAGE

226

(t x

II PAGE REVISION

20 x

Q

3/4").
RpUBLICATION DATE

Mlrsb 1974

•. . I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mBmBDma r
Title

All

12 Bit

Gil

I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

I

Option or Designator

0 I

OS300

iTech Tip
DS-300 System Configuration Change
INumber DS-300 TT-2
Processor Applicability
IAuthor Bill Conners
Rev 0
~~~~~~~~
Approval
B. LawrenceDate 2/8/74
LK01R TT-l

18E

I I I I I I

I

I

I

L._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-"'.L:>
..... SIN L

RI>

••

&153

I

'n'·
LJ

FIG .1
tG753 Initialize Board layout and Schematic"
Page

227

Title

All

Ds 300-TT-2

Ds-300 System Configuration Change
Aumor Bill Conners
Approval B. Lawrence

Cross Reference
VT05-TTll
LKOIR-TT-l

Date

,ERe, CON1J6err>l'fj
Ttl rlt£ G'7S.3

PI

INrrlAI-IZe

8OItRD•

.m!i

PI-F
PI-D

(~~) PI-N

8

"1

6

1211074-2.
lIJITIAl-lz£ SWlrc.H1P,EtiR '(Itt.!.

FIG Z
...
PI

~

sERe

G753 switch and Cable Assembly (pIN 7008980)

(for Systems with Dectape)
$1

C.O"'NEC.rc~;

SWITCH..
1:2110fM

Tb 7"~ G'75".3

-;z

co'(£/t flJ."Ir

n/lT"U./z£ ~ltl>.

,;ZIl086-0/

PIli 1:210090-0
PIA/$~ 1:lIOOn-~/O~

S;/' S'Wlrc.H,
1~IIOg",,-,

P;'
H.A7"£-IJ-LOC

;;Z,Ali;~;
,,-ONr1XJL-.

;;'':v;;€ -+ •

.1

~LOCA7IN&

PIN

~/... 12.0'135"1-03
PINS,; /2.013'18-01

FIG.3

IPAGE 228

II PAGE REVISION

"'11(!~PLJ'fTe~

" ..07843

G754 SWitch and Cable Assembly {PIN 7009136)
(for Systems Without Dectape)

0

UPUBlICATION DATE

March 1974

mamaola I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

l2Bit

QI

l6Bit

0 I

laBit

0 I

36Bit

I

0 I

Option or Designator

DS300

ITech Tip

Title

A

INumber

DS-30Q System COnfiguration Change

II

IAuthor
I I IApproval

Processor Applicability

'SE'

,

,

,

Bill Conners
B. Lawrence

Rev

Date

DS-300 TT-2

J ~~~ ~~~-;=e

0

2/8/74

I

LK01R TT-l

--\1
-1 \

~\

,

'II

'"",

'"','"II

'g

=~~- -~ ~- "

t,

8

+

'HtrlllL.IZE,

MATE-JJ-LOC.
CPtJN£,C.rale.j
'THE
H'Iol PoIllU CNllT"~(j:-,.

,CI

p/" ,20 935"'-3
PINS." I::I.D737F-1

FIG.4

~Sfli/iTC.H~
~lfft Vj£",~

1i6"R~'EftI.

New Ds 300 Switch Assembly (PIN 7009457
, PAGE

229

II PAGE REVISION

0

oPUBLICATION DATE

March 1974

ITech Tip

OS-300 System configuration Change

Title

All

Processor Applicability

~E

IAuthor

MOO 4
MOOS
MD06
MDO?

MOO 8
"Transmit"

___

lH

.....4--

MD~

HOM

+-. -4----

MDoIc>

--to-

}-tDa7

~

DS-300-TT-2

Bill Conners

I I I I I I IApproval B.
B3'
R=IS0
Moo3

INumber

Lawrence

Arrows indicate depressed
switches: l---.:w-= on,
~ ¢ = off.
For the
example shown, device
codes are 03/04, speed
is 150 baud receive/2400
baud transmit.

B~

I1DOS

--+ Hj)a/"
"Receive"

=

JUMPERS (as normally shipped for DS-300)

R

Name

~

~

Off - xmit and ReV speeds are
the same.

WI/TTY
W2
W3/SWD
W4/SB
W5
NP
EVN
NBl
NB2
FlL

out(2)
in

Disable TTY filter
Must be in!
Enable status word
One stop bit
Must be out!
No parity
Odd parity(when NP-in)

(1)

in(l)
in(2)

out
out
out
out
out
in(l)

bits per character
Enable 4 filler characters
8

The "'SWD" and "FIL" jumpers should be
OUT for the KL8JA to emulate a KL8EG.

150

On

xmi t speed set by Bl, B2,
B3; RCB speed = 150.

!!.!

B2

!U

0
0
0
0
1

0
0
1
1
0
0

0
1
0
1
0

1

1

1

1

0
1

1

1

Baud Rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600

The "TTY" jumper should be IN arid the
nSB" jumPer OUT for 110 baudteletype
operatiori. -

K.Ie-JA Jumper Con-figuration

II PAGE REVISION

FIG 5
II PUBLICATION DATE

March 19 74

mamalla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

Kli

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

18E

I I I I I I

Option or Designator

DT01

0 I

iTech Tip DT_1 TT-1

DT01 - PDP-alE

Title

All

16Bit

j

INumber

0_--l1 PDC:=:/~eference

If-A_U_tho_,_B_i_1_1_F_r_e_e_m_a_n_ _ _ _R_ov__
IApproval W.E. Cummins Date

7-31-72

I TTl 002

When using a DTOI Bus switch on a PDP-BE, it is necessary to change
the WIJf3 to W123 as noted in PDP-alE TT 1002 and also change the
outputs of the W6411 in B6 from "" nsec, to 1 usee.. TO utilize 1 usee
outputs add wire on location B6 - E to F, L to M, and S to T.

Title

Processor Applicability

AUla

ITech Tip
INumber DT01-TT-2

INTERMITTENT BREAK FAILURE ON DT01AN

I I I I I I

IAuthor

Roney /Nunley

I Approval W. Cummins

Rev

I

Date 6/6/72

I

Cross Reference

Erratic Break Operation
The use of a 552 or TeOI with a DTOI-AN may c.ause erratic break

operation to one or both computers.
The reason is that~ unlike
the DMOI, DF32, and RF08, the break request signal is not clamped
at the source.
To cure the erratic operation, clamp the signal
C-SRK REQ in the DTOI to -3V.
Add B31J to 8265.
C.E. Roney/R. Nunley - October 1970

IPAGE

231

UPAGE REVISION

UPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

-- NOTES --

232

CPL

..BIIDlll
FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
.:III •
•
1
1 12Bit 001

16Bit

!!ll

1 Option or Designator
EDC Voltage Standar

18Bit

I!J 1 3& Bit !!l 1

Title Voltage Source and Voltage Measurements with the ITachTiPEOC_TT_l

INumber

EDC Voltaae Standard
Processor Applicability

~" I I I 1 1 1 I

1Author

George

Chaisson

1Approval Bill ,.,_ins

DatIl

Rev

0

I

Cross Raferance

06/01/72 1

The following procedure is written for the following models of the
EDC voltage standard: VS-llN, VB-llG, MV-lOOG and MV-lOsG.
1.0

As A Voltage Source
The EDC can provide an accurate voltage between 0 and + 11.111
volts. This is accomplished by selecting the appropriate
voltage from the decade switches and connecting via the output
binding post. Polarity is selected via the +0- selecting

switch. (on the 100 and ~OS models, a low level output is
polarity controlled via the +0- switch also.)

2.0

As A Voltage Measurinq Device
The EDC can be used to measure DC voltages with very high
accuracy. For voltages betWeen 0 and + 10 volts, the voltage
is connected directly. to the input binding post labeled
·UNKNOWN·. (For voltages between. 10 and 100 volts use 10:1
divider, DEC part Number 29-16810). Selection of the correct
polarity is accomplished with" the +0- switch: when the correct
polarity is selected the NULL meter will deflect and the decade
switches will control zeroing. (In the 105 model the meter
sensitivity selector must be in one of the voltage positions.)
Zero the meter by increasing the voltage yalue from the decade
switches. This will be the first step in making an accurate
measurement.

When the meter has deflected just beyond zero with the lowest
voltage step from the decade switches, reset this switch by
one count. Select a hiqher meter sensitivity by depressing the
sensitivity bat switch (model 105, sensitivity rotary switch.
The model 100 has three sensitivities, ~. bottom position of

~~b~~eS~!~~~ebes!~fc~~~ ~trlF~LL ~~~ya~~ ~~r::~:r~: ~!~~~.

The voltaqe measured is now the value read directly from the decade
switches. (If the 10:1 divider 29-16810 has been used, multiply
the value by 10.)
Non-Standard Controls: On some models· of the EDC there i8 a
meter zero switch and adjustment knob. The switch is located
at the lower left of the meter and the adjustment knob is at
the upper right of the meter. When the switch is down, zeroing
position, the zeroing knob will allow electrical zeroinq of the
measuring circuit. This switch must be in the up position for
measurinq. (It is recoJlllllen4ed that the instrument be zeroed before
measurements are made.)
Model 105 instruments have a selection switch (volts-mi11ivolts)
that must be in the volts position.
fPAGE

2.33

HPAGEREVISION

0

IPUBLICATIONDATE JuDe 1972

CPL
Title

VOLTAGE SOURCE AND VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH THEjTech Tip
EDC VOLTAGE STANDARD {Continued}
INum~ EDC-TT-1
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

IAuthor

Georae Chaisson

!ApprovalBill Cummins

Rev

0

Date 06/01/72

I

Cross Reference

I

For- PDP-II use - VS-IIN or MV-IOOG standards are used in the set-up
of AD01-D, AA11, AFC 11 and UDC 11 •

.....
'Oh'

·061"1'

.060\"

o o o o
Loc..k.

l'ooole ... ~"E.ft.L()"D
O~

L.oW

0

MotU,

0

~

Sl!..,,",-S,t,vllj

EDc..

1'."'1t 234

f

"I'O>l..t

mamaamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit

Iii]

16Bi'

0 I

ISBi'

0 I

36Bit

I I

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor

EDUSYSTEMS

0 I

ITech Tip EDUSYS-TT-l

INumber

EDUSYSTEM SR SETTINGS
Processor Applicability

All

I

Opt"," or Designator

W

Cummins

Rev

0

I

II-A-pprov-'-ID"':....;D"'U""ba=v"----oa-te-O-71:2-7"/~7--l21

Cross Reference

EDUSYSTEM MANUALS (as they exist as of this date) fail to give
the switch register settings to select the input device at
bootstrap time.
EDUSYSTEM: 5 & 10 manuals being rewritten - information to be

included.
20
will get errata sheet
25
has new manual and is now okay_
30& 40 has one addendum, will receive a second.

The new book, EduS¥stems Handbook, available in the fall, will
have this informat~on.
The settings to select the input device are:

5356
0600
5350

IPAGE 235

Paper Tape Reader
DECtape
Disk

UPAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATIONDATE

July 1972

The Problem:

Systems incorporating both powerfail and the hardware
bootstrap loader options inter-act when the system is
powered down and then up again, with the switch-switch
in the down position (ON).
l-l7i th the swi tch-swi tch in the down posi tioD (ON) memory
locations are altered by each option that tries to use
the bus to deposit their respective program8 into
memory. When the switch-switch is on and power comes
up it reactivates without being toggled. This could
cause the need for a momentary switch to insure return
to the off position.

Correction:

If service calls are frequent due to operators inability
to check switch positions; replace switch-switch with a
momentary switch.
Dec. Part U2-05375

I PAGE

236

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

March 1974

Option or Designator

EM12 to EP12
Title

TIMING CHANGE FOR

DM~l

EM12-TT-n

CONFIGURATIONS

Author

Cross Reference

H. LONG

Approval H. LONG

Single cycle data break devices together with a DM~l will not
operate correctly on a PDP-l2 (there is not enough setup time
for the field bits) •
Change break sync timing from CPTP TPSS to CPTP TP3;

ADD

RUN
H~9H2

-

Jl~Pl

Jl~Pl

-

J~4Kl

H~9H2

-

J~4Kl

X

J~4Pl

-

Jl~Pl

X

DEL
X
X

J21D2 - H34Kl
J2ID2 -

J~9El

K~4Kl

-

J~9Hl

K~4Kl

- L38Bl

X
X

X
X

L38Bl -

J~9Hl

X

-

J~6D2

X

K~4Kl

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
IPAGF 237

II PAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

jTech Tip

Title

INumber
0 I

IAuthor
Rev
I I I I I I I I~--~------~----~~
Approval H. Long
Date 08/17/72 I
Processor Applicability

All

The problem:

EP12-TT-l
Cross Reference

Solution portion of this ECO, and its associated

DEC-ECe-LOG Synopsis, would seem to indicate that an Ml12 module
must be deleted, "and an Ml13 and M617 added.

This is not the

intent of the ECO.
Logically, the M1l2 is deleted, and the M1l3-M6l7 combination
added to increase the drive on MXB MEM TP3 H. These modules are
already present in the MCl2 portion of the processor: we only
delete and add individual gates.
Display/Data Break Interaction
Processor Applicability

All

I

Tech Tip

Title

IAuthor

I I I I I I I IApproval

Number

Harold Long

I

Rev

Harold Long Date 9/26/72

EP12-TT-2
Cross Reference

I

PROBLEM:
ECO EP12-00033 allows an external break

instruction.

request to abort a display
This causes unreadable display at high data rates.

CORRECTION:
Implement a new instruction: Skip on display busy (0446). This will
allow the processor to delay initiating a DSC until the previous
instruction is complete. NEMONIC: DSB.

MAKE ALL DELETIONS FIRST WHEN INSTALLING
ADD

SIGNAL NAME

~

SKL I SENSE

MS!'4Kl

H32H2

X

INS N EQ 6H

MS!'4Ll

J4S!'H2

X

DSC BUSY H

MS!'4Ml

LS!'2Ul

X

+3V LS!'3Ul

MI!'4L2

MI!'4M2

X

::IE

+3V LI!'3Ul

MI!'4Ul

MI!'4Vl

X

c .:t

+3V LI!'3Ul

MI!'4M2

MI!'4Ul

X

+3V L0'3Ul

LI!'3U2

MI!'4n

X

>:z:

C
A.

PAGE REVISION

~

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

ImalaDla II

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Tide

12Bit

Gill

16Bit

0 I

Display/Data Break Interaction

All

_ r Applicability

1Au_

1121 1 I I I 1 IApproval

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

01

Option or Designator

EP12 to PPP12

IINumbar
Tech Tip

(Continued)

Harold Long

I

Rev

0

Harold Long Date 9/26/72

1

1

EPl2-TT-2

Cross R~

~:

This tech tip implements a new instruction which is not supported
by system software. Customers desiring to use this instruction
must define it in their symbol table: DSB=j!'446.

Thus, the following sequence would permit efficient use of display
instructions during data break.
DSC X
DSB I
JMP
-1
DSC I X

/DISPLAY 1/2 CHAR.
/SICIP ON DISPLAY NOT BUSY
/WAIT
/DISPLAY 1/2 CHAR

INS N EQG H
DSB /SKIP ON DISPLAY BUSY

DSC BUSY H

+3

SKL I SENSE L

p. 239

Title

P............ Applicability

All

ITech Tip

INumber FPP12-TT-1

FPP1Z PROBLEMS

hzl I I I I I
1.

O_-I'

II-Au_thor
___________R_8V_ _
IAIJIKOVOI

Cross RaI........

Date 09/14/72 I

H. Long

Th"e +5V to logic rack is not tied together at FPP.

Due to

age and other conditions affecting the pins on the Mate~in­
Lock connector at the H721 power supply, the +SV may be at
different levels on logic rows A thru J.
Connect the +5V
buses together with 114-18 wire at the rack H9"11 mounting
panel connections.

2.

The M401 clock modules is unstable in some cases. The
frequency changes by a large amount around the desired 5 MHZ
setting. Their variance may cause random and differnet FPP
errors that are virtually impossible to track down. Some of
these M401 vary as soon as power is applied, others may have
to run awhile.
To tell if an M401 is unstable put an "0" scope type 453 or
equivilent on the clock output~ With about 8-12 pulses
displayed look for a sudden shifting of the pulses in time~
If this doesn't help them replace the M401 and tag .it as
unstable frequency output.

3.

The FPP 12-00007 ECO contains a wiring error.
an add-delete page:
J'~GJI)

S~gna1

TO

SP12 XCT4 SHFT H AZ4D1

Add

On oage

of 60

Del

A22D1

X

AZZDZ

X

SHOULD BE
SP12 XCT4 SHFT H A24Dl

Pin A22Dl is not connected to A24D1 and i5 in the wire run SPll
ENABLE PROCESS L.

COM PINY CONFIDENI1AI.
IPAGE

240

II PAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATION DATE September 1972

l

mamaamDJ
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
l2Bit

~I

0 I

laBit

O~

asB;t

Option or Designator

G020 - G021

0 I

j TeehTiP G020-21 TTl1

SENSE lIMP REVISIONS
Processor Applicability

All

leBit

I

Num~

IAuthor

IBIlsLI J I 1 I IAppro.al

A. Newbury

Rev

W. Cummins Date

0

7-31-72

J

Cross Reference

J

BIlL sense amps now use a -4V slice level instead of -3V for increaed
noise immunity,
Either level works fine as long as they are not
intermixed.
When replacing a r,020 or G02l check for the proper level,
or when a ghosty symptom occurs in memory check for this mix up.
There
are a few different revisions of sense amps but the following few rules
should eliminate the confusion:
1)
2)
3)

Rev. D and earlier are .considered -3V slice level.
Rev. F and later are considered -4V slice level.
Rev. E can 'be either -3V or -4V and it is the only revision
that can be changed.
The resistors to change are listed
below:

-3V slice level
-4V slice level

R6

RS

R12

Rll

300
330

330
180

330
180

300
330

o'

o IT TI"
* Denotes components present only on G02l.

G020 uses G02l etch.

~...~~.-------.---.-----.--------(eyelet leading from
pin TIl
(eyelet connected to collector of Ql)

COMPANY COJIIIBIW.
IPAGE

241

II PAGE REVISION

'PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

I

Title
Cross Reference

All

Cummins
Rev. H sense amps should have a 30 guage ground strap as shown
above. This ground strap insures proper strobe margins and
noise immunity.
Randan 8I Memory Failures:
If you have inter:mittent memory problems or you do not have a wide
strobe margin, check for these things:
1. That -3V and -4V sense amps are not intermixed in an BK unit.

2. That Rev. H sense amps have the ground strap.
3. That G221 selectors have 2904 transistors.
If the 2904 transistors are Texas Instrument, check that the fall time is within
specification (10-90 nsee.).
4. That G624 load resistors are all the same value in any 8K unit,
and that for Ferroxcube stacks they are all 56 ohm. Previous
values have been 60, 70 or 52.5 ohms. 52.5 is not acceptable
under any conditions.

5. That memory current has been adjusted with a current prob"e and
strobe has a good window between checkerboard failures and strobe
adjustment. Measuring voltage does not insure proper current
values for memory.
6. That ECe SI-00022 is installed. Although this ECO was directed
to the field,. it has been instrumental in fixing problems in
several older machines. The SPEeD does not explain too clearly
the add/delete scheme. You will see that the first two deletes
are A30D2 to A34S2 and A30E2 to A34T2. The essence of the
problem is that those two leads carry the sense signal. and may
not be identical in length or routing and may trigger the
sense amps erroneously because of the noise or phase discrepancy;
the two deletes are to be replaced by one run on twisted pair.
The other deletes are similarly paired; each pair is to be
replaced by one run on twisted pair. The other deletes are
deletes are similarly paired: each pair is to be replaced by one
run of twisted pair.
7. If instruction test 1 will not run in field 1 of a system with
SK or more of memory. it may be a result of induced noise picked
up from the memory power supply lines by the memory,flip-flop
output lines. ECD 8I-00051 reroutes these runs to eliminate
~

Titl.

__this

~'·Qob~le~rn~.

__________________~__________~=-~~____________-,

ADJUSTMlrnT OF G084 in TU2G
Processor Applicability

::I~ I I I I I I I

IAuthor

ITech Tip
INumbor

Rev 0

G084-TT-l

Icp'iross Reference

rIA~~--O-'~.I~W--.-Cumm--~in-s--~D-me--~O~6~/~O~6~/=7~2ITU20-TT-4

-- NOTES --

243

-- NOTES --

244

momoamo lFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit

(i)

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

G221

0 I

I

TeohTiP
Number

DOUBLE SELECTION OF G221
Processor Applicability

All

I

Option or Designator

181 181 1 I

I

J1

LI-A:-U_th_O'...J-B..'-..IRRa=,LIlllO
mll"",-""-,,e.ll-n-::-:-_R_OV_-"~'---jJ

CH""'~<

jApproval

Date 11

17.

G221 TTn

Cross Reference

I

Failures of G~Zl's are hard ~o find barring .aS$ swap.
What happens is
that two or more outputs come on at the same time causing selection of
two addresses. This causes errors in address test but the failure is
not diagnosable. Swapping boards within system doesn't change the
problem.
A method to find the bad G221 is:
(for 81 corresponding
points may be used for BL).
1)

Remove M360 strobe board found slot 823...
Tape pin 52 of
board.
Gnd pin 52 of 823.
Reinstall M360.

2)

Remove G020/021 from slots A31 and A32.

Gnd pin U2 of A32.

* Note when load address and start are depressed a 7000 code
is decoded a$ nop.
This keeps computer in fetch and will·
cause PC & MA to increment sequentially.
3)

Sync scope negative channel A internal.
Put Channel A on
E2 of C38 (MAOO (I)).
Adjust. time base with adjustable
uncalibrate mode till you have 1 cycle covering 8 em.
on scope.

4)

With channel B scope outputs of G221 1 s on connector
board C36.
Starting with pin C2. This signal
should look like Figure 1. The signal on channel B
should be I cm Wide and should step I cm .by changing
channel B probe from C36 02 to E2, F2 to H2, J2 to K2,
L2 to M2, N2 to P2, R2 to S2~ T2 to U2. Signals are push-pull
pairs, one positive, the other neeative; i.e., C2 and D2,
H2 and

F2~

etc,

5)

Move channel A probe to D33 E2 and sync on MAD3 (1).
Readjust
time base for one cycle in 8 cm. Repeat step 4 seaping
pins C2 to U2 on connector D34.

6)

Move channel A pr.obe to C33 E2 and sync on MA06 (1).
Readjust
tIme base for one cycle in 8 cm. Repeat step 4 seoping pins
C2 to U2 on c.onnector C34.

7)

Move channel A probe to D38 E2 and sync on MA09 (1).
Readjust
ti .. e ba,ae for one cycle in 8 CII.
Repeat step 5 seoping pins
C2 to U2 on connector D36.

8)

Figure

is how set up shOUld look.

9)

Filure

is how some bad G221's look.

IPAGE

COIPANY~

245

Ii PAGE REVISION

Q

UPUBLICATIDNDATE

May 1974

Title

IAuthor

Processor Applicability
All lSI

ITech Tip
INumber

DOUBLE SELECTION OF G221 (cont.)

IBL I I I I I

FIGURE 1

Channel A
MAXX

(1)

,
'I'

Channel B
R/W Driver (G22l

G221

TT#1

Cross Reference

.
....

....

Signals will be either
positive or negative spikes
depending on point selected

FIGURE 2

Channel A
MAXX (1)

Channel B
R/W Driver
(G221 )

_I ~,
I

~

~

-I:

Bad diode i n matrix or bad G221

Bad (G221) extra
block of pulses

COMPANYCONRDDnU[
Page 246

fiamBD!a I

FIELD SERVICE ;ECHNICAL MANUAL

I~Il
Title

I

12B;,

0 I

GJ I

laB;t

GJ I

36B;'

I I J I I I I
I

IAuthor.

Option or Designator

0 I

I

G-231

;TeCh Tip

INHIBIT CURRENT JUMPERS
Processor Applicability

All

16B;'

I

Number

C•

A 1"1 e r

Rev 0

I

G-231-TT-l
Cross Reference

r-----~----------~I
Approval R'
nimh.,t Date 1/2 74

Under no circumstances should the jumper arrangement
for the current setting be changed.
They are factory set to give optimum performance
for the overall temperature range.
By changing
these jumpers you might improve margins at room
temperature but you degregate the total system
performance.

IPAGE 247

If PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION OATE

I

-- NOTES --

248

mamalma I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUALJ

. I
Title
All

l2Bit ~

I

l6Bit

0 I

l8Bit

0 I

3SBit

lSI I 8~ I I I I

G826

0 I
ITech Tip

G826 ADJUSTMENTS
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

INumber G826-TT-1

If-A,-U_th_O_'-,-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
R_''''_ _ _-jJ
IApproval W. CUmmins

Date 7-31-72

Cross Reference

I

Many GB26's are returned from the field as defective when" actually,
there is no defect, only misadjustment of ~.
The basic operational functions of the G826 are first, to detect the
AC power input going low and second~ to regulate the memory voltage
level.. The detection of power-in going low. due to either line failure
or the front panel power switch being set to the OFF position, is
accomplished by sampling for variations on the 5 volt bus. When the
5 volt bus drops below 4.75 volts, the condition is felt by an

operational amplifier Which generates ~ as a +3 volt leyel.
This level becomes the conditioning level which allows the next TP3 to
clear the RUN flip flop. At the same time, a turn off signal is
applied to the -30 volt memory supply. These two logical events occur
to disallow a random read without its associated write cycle. When
~ is at +.3 volts, the RUN flip flop will act as if the SINGLE
STEP switch were on and -30 volts will not come up.
The memory v61tage level is set by a pot which is in parallel with an
amplifier between the -6 volt and -30 volt supplies. In normal
operation, ~ is low (S volts). With a scope sampling at A02J2
(of the 81) or the negative probe of a meter on that point, with the
positive probe to groundpoW~duoi the he1ipot. in the center of the
module, clockWise until
just goes low Cif volts). then. a .tf;IW
degrees more.

With ~ low, memory voltage may now be adjusted: set up meter
connections as fo~.lows.
METER LEADS
NEGATIVE I POSITIVE

I
I

81
8L

B02V2
B2?v2

I
I

B02M2
B27M2

Adjust the Bourns pot on the edge of the module for a reading of +21 to
+22.5 volts ..
PDP 8L' s, logic serial #150 and later, have a power supply connector

card, G785 revision "0" or later, Which will make the ~
adjustment less critical. They have an extra detection circuit Which
is ORtad with the output of the differential amplifier at pin AJ2 which
stops the CP before the +5 volt line begins to drop.

COM PANY CONflDEN11Al.
IPAGE

249

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

Title

IINumber
Tech Tip

G826 ADJUSTMENTS (continued)
Processor Applicability'

All lSI

I 8rl I I I I

IAuthor

Rev

I

G826-TT-l
Cross Reference

1f-,A-ppro--""-'-w--ewnrn--i-nc--O-ate--7---3-1--7:-2:-l1

After these adjustments have been made, Maindec OB-DIAB, Memory
Power ON/OFF Test, should be run. The helipot is mechanically
sensitive; after adjustment, a spot of nail polish or paint should
be applied to the adjustment stem to secure it in the desired

position.

COMPANY CONRD£N1W.

mamaama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit (]

I

16Bit ~l 18Bit ~

I

36Bit

(]II

IAuthor Jeff Blundell
A:, , , , , , I IApproval Frank Purcell Date
CS

ECO

ETCH

G848 to GLC8

IITech
Tip
Number

G848 ECO HISTORY AND NOTES
Processor Applicability

CPL
Option or Designator

Rev

A

1111173

I
I

G848-TT-l
Cross Reference

TU56-TT-10

DESCRIPTION

1

A

B

Deleted a diode and transistor

2

B

c

Deletes many components and relayout

C

C

Adds plastic insulating caps over transistors
EOD1S must be done together, all modules in
drive be done together (no mixing old and new)

4
5

E

K

t

High priority MANDATORY change.
prerequisites.
7

H

8

J

ECO 725-008 goes with this.
AC2 and BC2.
M

4 and 5

Cuts etch between

New triple size board created ..
Retrofit to double size boards to make them

8A

compatible with the new triple size board.

VARIOUS INCOMPATIBILITIES

AND

RESTRICTIONS

1.

Etch B will not work with the new wiring harness unless
mate-n-loct pins 1 and 3 are jumpered.

2.

ECO's 4,5 and 6 must be installed in all TU56 everywhere, and
all spare boards modified. Modules without these ECOls must
not be mixed with any other revision except their own.

3.

The new triple height module created by ECO 8 must not be used
in the s~e transport with an old double height module, unles!
the old module has had ECO GS48-00SA (and the earlier ECO's)
installed.

4.

ECO #725-008 is a prerequisite for the new triple height board.

COMPANY CONflDEtmAL
'PAGE

2S1

II PAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE February

1973

ITochTip
INumber GLC8-TT-l

Title GLC-8 INPUT A"IPLIFIEll

All

Processor Applicability

I 81 1 1 1 1 I

IAuthor

Jim Lacey

Rev

I

II

jApproval Bill Freeman D8te12/05/73

Cr1III Raferant:e

I

GLC-8 Input Amplifier
If any of the below malfunctions occur with the ~211 module, it is
probably due to C4 and/or C5, "hich are 0.0047 mfd 1% capacitors
(10-09312), being out of tolerance.
~placing both of these
capacitors should cure the problem. However, if difficulty is
encountered when readjusting the A211, a 10 to 56 pf capacitor may
be added to the circuit as C3. This capacitor would be mounted
on the circuit board in the holes provided at the handle end of
the module.

Possible malfunctions include:
1.

Inabili ty to adjust the gain.

2.

Inability to adjust the line balance (this adjustment
interacts with the gain adjustment).

3.

Excessive noise.

COMPANY~
IPAGE 252

RPAGE REVISION

II

I PUBLICATION DATE

Jan. 1974

Option or Designator
H307

to H710

Insufficient Low End of Delay

Croa Rofent_

Author Al Shimer

CC54

A~wlHarold Long

Due to modification in an SMA 12/60 by Technicon, Corp., the
H307 Delay Box must be modified so that a 1.2 sec adjustment

can be achieved.
~;

Test result skipped and all results in

erro~

from that pOint on,

due to being out of sync with the analyzer •.
~;

H307

H307

10 yfd l5V

From
12/60

Change TO>"

F<'l~

Remove the 1.8R, and replace with one of the 3.31('8.

!!2!!;

Some components may have to be soldered to the siqnal lead
on input cable.

COMPANY CONfIDEN11Al.
IPAGE

253

II PAGE REVISION

0

I PUBLICATION DATE

s.pt....r, It72

Title

l

B710 POWER SUPPLIBS

TachTiP
Number

H710-'12'-1

It is possible for the +5VDC supp1g (R7l0-Dynage 700-167) to
go into an overvoltage or protective mode i f the outputs or
several H710 supp11es are paralleled.
The resultant supply
output in the overvoltage mode is approximately +lVDC.
'Phe
Bupplf} 111'111 come back up to correct voltage 1f i t is allo"ed
to cool.

flhe vendor (Dgnage) acknowledges that a problem ma9' exist
(depending upon the sgstem and its operat1onal env1ronment) ••
The vendor proposes that DEC perform the following temporary
change in tbe supply until the problem can be more eKp11citl~
defined and a final fix can be jmplemented. It 1s only
necessary to perform this change i f the supply demonstrates
the above sympto.s.
'lhe vendor also states that the supply is
not marginal.
Substitute an IN750(A) Zener (DBC Part #11-0214) for ZD3 Zener
(lN749) currently in use.
'Phe B710 is currently being used in 680I suste.s.
Title

Nodule

P.i~ure

ITachTip
INumbar H7l0-T'r-2

in H710

". Preeman
" • Cummi ns

R..,
Date

I

Cross. Reference

1

I f the module is

the cause of the fa.i:lure of an H.710 power
i t would be less s%pensive to replace the module than
the whole power suppl~.
The module 1s now available from the
Pield Service stock with a part number 29-17366.

suppl~,

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAl.
nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaama I
I
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

I

I

12 Bit

Iil I

16 Bit

[i]

18 Bit

[i]

I

36 Bit

[i]

H716

ITech Tip
i Numbe,

H716 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT

Processor Applicability

(!PL
Option or Designator

II-A_"_th_O_'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
R_ev_ _ _-l1

A~ L J I I I I I IApprovol

"

T.

Date noM",

I

H716-TT-1

Cross Reference

I

When replacing a ·Wanlass" type H716 Power Supply due to

faulty or erratic operation, specify that the replacement
supply is to be the n Armour n type.. These new supplies are
in stock and will be segreqated from the older wanlass
supplies. If the stockroom. is unable to provide an armour
supply, a substitute wanlass will be shipped.
Title

iTech Tip
H716 FUSES

. IAuthor Jim Cudmore
~II I I I I I I IApproval w. Cummins
Processor Applicability

WANLASS H716 -

jNumber
Rev

g

00,.12/12/73

I
I

H716-TT-2

Cross Reference

H719 POWER SUPPLrES

There is a problem with Wanlass C14BA (our H716,H719) Power

Supply. This unit is used in the MM8I, H9l6 and several other
applications. Specifically, the output lines +5 and -15 more than
likely contain slow blow fuses.. The output fuses on the +5 and
-15 should be reqular fuses. This ~s particularly cr~t~cai 1n
the +5 volt l~ne where the over voltage protection SCR may be
damaged.
This has occurred in several units in the field. The
other problem in this supply is that the pass transistors are
mounted in such a manner that replacing them is very difficult.
It is virtually impossible to make a reliable solder joint.
W2I.nlass's solution, which we should use in the field, is to
solder the back of the printed curcuit board where the transistor
leads pass through with a low temperature solder. They are using
Alpha #1 Indium Alloy Solder.. This has a much lower melting point
than the solder on the apposite side of the board and will allow

the pass transistor to be replaced without introducing a cold solder
joint on the other side of the board. It is imperative, however, that
the solder joint be made carefully and not too much heat applied.
All units currently being received from Wanlass are being checked'
for the proper fuses and good solder joints.

COMPANYCOnoow.
IPAGE

.255 HPAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

May 1974

Title
All
X

ITech Tip

INTERMITTENT OPERATION

IAuthor Bill
I I I I I I I IApproval W.
Processor Applicability

JNumber
Freeman

Cwnmins

Rev,

00to12/12/73

H716-TT-3

I

Cro5S Reference

I

H719-TTH

The H716 (MM8I typical) and H719 (DW08 typical) power supplies in
the field may have intermittent vibration and/or heat problems~
This problem can be remedied as follows:
1)

The two fuse holders on the printed circuit board have rivets
securing them to the board. Solder these rivets to the fuse

holder.
2)

The primary fuse holder located on the end of the chassis must
have the connector pin soldered to provide a good connection to
the base of the fuse holder.

3)

The power lugs supplying +5V, -15V, and ground have rivets
securing them to the circuit board. These rivets should be
soldered to the lugs~

4}

Two power transistors mounted on the chassis have leads extending

into the printed circuit board. These leads should be resoldered
so that the solder flows freely through the board and makes
a good connection to the transistor leads e
5)

The +5 volt adjustment pot may be intermittente If by adjusting
the pot and returning i t to its original posi tion, the voltage
output is corrected, exchange the power supply because the
problem will return. The wiper in the pot is exposed to the
environment and collects garbage causing intermittent operation.

COM PANY CONFIDDmAL
Page 256

mamaomo IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
H721

Title

001

12Bit

16Bit

®I

18Bit

IZlI

36Bit

ITech Tip
INumber

IAuthor ""h..,.., "un"ev
I I I I I IApproval W. Cummins Date

I all

H721

[8)1

HARDWARE

H721-TT-l

I
07/31/72 I

Processor Applicability
All

CPL
Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

0

When ordering an H721 to replace other types, it is also necessary to
order connectOrs to fit the H721 outputs.
They are:
12 pin Mate-N-Lock

12-09351-12

pins

12-09378

1 each
10 each

(JPL
AC INPUT/PASS-ALONG JUMPERS

Title

I J I J LJ

INu"!ber

I
II-:1A p p r o - v a l : - - - - - - - - f
I'
H. LOIl!L
Date 08/17/72 I

Processor Applicability

AII
X

ITech Tip

IAuthor

H721-TT-2

Rev

Cross R8ference

The 110 VAC 4A available on TB2-3 and 4, 5, and 6 are auto tap-.out-·
puts and they should not be used to' supply power to grounded devices.·

If the input for the H721 is 220 VAC, TB 2-3 (110 VACl output is
taken from the ~sourcen side of the AC input and may be 220V above
a real earth qround. Refer to ECO tH721-00004 for correction.

Title' BAD FAN

;11

J

I

J

I~:~
a
I

BEARINGS IN H721 POWER SUPPLY

IAuthor Jeff
L L I I IApproval "

Processor Applicability

Blundell
p,

Rev

Date

H721-TT-,3
Cross Reference

1201721

Pamotor 4500C fans with date codes of 11/70 or 12/70 are likely
to contain bad bearings.
Any fans with these date codes that fail in the field will be
replaced free of charge (material only) by Pamotor, who will
supply DEC with enough to cover the respective H72l shipments.
When the new fans arrive they will be put in the Field Service
stockroom for issue on an exchange basis, and they will be
shipped with captive nuts to get away from the difficulties
experienced when trying to replace the present loose nuts.

COMPANY COtIIDDmAI.
PAGE REVISION

B

PUBLICATION DATE

".r.,/t

1973

Title
All
x

ITech Tip
INumber H721-TT-4
Cross Reference
Rev a

H721 ADJUSTING POTS

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

J

Je~f Blundell

IApproval,... Purcell

Date 03/08/731

The present drawing set: doeg not show the phgsical layout
of the regulator board potentiometers, although the board
itself is clearly labelled.
AS an aid to those who need to adjust them the following
drawing may be of use.

RI04 +10 Adjust"
R204 -15 Adjust*
R309 + 5 Crowbar Adjust ....
R308 + 5 Current Limit Adjust ....
R3Q3

I-

5 Adjust:

AN

Glgptol Sealed
GlyptOl sealed, do not touch, should be
set up with factory- H721 Tester
TOP VIEW

Paqe

258

mDmDDma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12 Bit

Ii]

I

fXJ I

16 Bit

18 Bit

fXJ I

36 Bit

0 I

IAuthor

All

Is III 115 I I I I

H721

I

Tech Tip
Number H721-TT-S

Title POWER SUPPLY FAILURE DUE TO HEAT
Processor Applicability

CPL
Option or Designator

Dennis Sullivan

Rev

n

!Approval Jeff BlundellDa•• " " "

I
I

Cross Reference

Fan failure or air flow restriction in the H721 Power Supply can cause
excessive overheating, leading to power supply failure.

The thermostat (51) incorporated in the H721 may be utilized to protect

aqainst thermo damage.

If an older model power controller is available,

for example the 841-B.P.C., the thermostat (51) can be connected in

series with the "cons Pwr Switch" as shown below.

The power controller

should be dedicated to the thermostat so another device or personnel

cannot override the thermostat therefore, damaging the power supply in
an overheating situation.
Other methods for using the thermostat may be implemented if the user
does not exceed the thermostat ratings, ~.,.,hich are:
Single-Pole, Single-Throw
30 Volts DC 6 Amps
120 V.A.C. 6 Amps
250 V.A.C.
3 Amps

Opens @ 2030 F~5°

Closes@ 167" F±5°

Sl
TB2-7&S
H721 PS

Cons

Pwr
switch
S41 B.P.C.

(PAGE 259

II PAGE REVISION

0

"PUBLICATION DATE

July

74

-- NOTES --

260

mamlOla I
I
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

IiJ I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Replacement of Transistors Ql", Q2", Q3"
H724/H724A Power Supply
Processor Applicability
Author Jim Parker

I 8~ I I I I I

I

IApproval W.E. Cummins Date

I

Option or Designator

H724
H762

0 I

I

Tech Tip
Number

I

Rev n
7-31-72

to

H724 TT-?
Cross Reference

I

If the 2N3055 transistors being installed are manufactured by RCA
or solitron this problem will not be experienced.
If the transistors to he installed are manufactured by Motorola and marked
DEC3055 or 2N3055 longer screws will be needed to "fit the nut which
holds the screw through the transistors with the collector connection
tag. This is due to these transistors having a thicker base plate.
The replacement screw is a 6/32 X 3/4" and two per transistor are
needed.

I

Tech Tip

Title

H724

(A) UL

rnformation

Processor Applicability

All

I8E I I I I I I

Number

I~A=Uth=or~K~e,"n!!....lQ£U~i:!n!!:n,-_-=-_ _R_ev_~_-l1
I Approval B. Cummins

Date

H724 TT-2
Cross Reference

I

The PDP-BE power supplies are UL approved. Field conversion of
power supplies from 115 VAC to 23, VAC (H724 to H724A) would
nullify UL approved.
It is therefore recommended that Field
conversion be avoided. Also, any field modifications to H724(A),
unless accomplished by following a Field Effect ECO could nullify
the UL approved.

COM PANY CONRDENTW.
IPAGE

261

II PAGE REVISION

A

DpUBLICATIDN DATE

March ln3

Title

Processor Applicability

All

ITech Tip
INumb.

HOT +SV PUSE HOLDER - Melted Fa.as

IAuthor

I. I I I I I I IApprovs'

Al Deluca

Rev

0

Jeff "undellPS" 03/15/73

Large (i.e. expanded omnibus)
than 16 AMPS at +5 volts

I

H724-TT-3
Cross Reference

I

BE's that are drawing more

may show a tendency to melt

their +SV fuses due to the heat build up within the fuse
holder.
A better grade of fuseholder, physically interchangeable,
bit with silver coated berylium sprint contacts and a grey
termally conductive plastic body, is being phased in to
production now, and is available from Field Service Stockroom
under DEC Part Number 12-11348.
is no intention at this time of calling for a mass

~here

field retrofit, so this tech tip may be the only field
waring you will receive about this' problem.

/mt
iTech Tip
Titl.

H762 POWER SUPPLY GROUNDING
Processor Applicability

All 114'
II

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor Don
IApproval Don

INumber H762-TT-1

9f

Herbener

Rev

Herbener

Date 9/23/74

This Tech Tip is issued for cross X'eference purposes only.

COMPANY CONFIDENT;~
Pag'e

262

I

Cross Reference

IPDP14/30-TT-1

ma!BDma I
I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

IXJ I

16 Bit

IKJ I

18 Bit

IKJ I

36 Bit

A~I I I l I I I I

IAuthor

Lou Nay

I

fiJ I

H8113
(Connector Block)

I~':!~~

Title 288 PIN CONNECTOR BLOCK - PjN 1205348 (Hardware)
Processor Applicability

CPL
Option or Designator

Rev

J

11

Date 02/05/73

H8113-TT-l
Cross Reference

I

Caution should be experienced when replacinq pins in these blocks
as they are supplied to us by two (2) different vendors - Sylvania

and Cinch - and require different replacement

pins~

The vendors and replacement pin part numbers are listed below:

t

~

ITEM

Part #

Sylvania

OUtside Contact

1205348-03

H805S/set

Catalog:

Sylvania

Inside Contact

1205348-04

HB05S/set

Cinch

Outside Contact

1205348-05

H805C/set

Cinch

Inside Contact

1205348-06

HB05C/set

/mt

COM PANY CONFIDBfI1AL
IPAGE

263

II PAGE REVISION

0

UPUBLICATION DATE February 1973

-- NOTES --

264

I

I

~DmDDmD FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 12Bit [ill 1 16Bi, 01 lSBi, 01 36Bi' 0 1
Title

All

IBE IBM IsJ

J I

I

IAuthor

Mike Parry

1A_oval

W

 la~t I/O de-"ice on the bus in the sIc+: corr.es~onding to th-; cable
which inputs the IOP pulses to the r/o device.

IPAGE'l67 II PAGE REVISION

0

8PUBLICATION DATE

May 1974

~Tn...

P DP - 85

All 1
185

Tip
Ii Tech
Number

I/O T erml.na
• ti on

IPro.....,
1'1 AOPllicablilitvl II-.A_"_Iho_'~w".,--,-F.::r-=e.::em=an::...._ _ _ _R_f!N_-"O_-II
IApproval

Because PDP-8S bus or.iver?
:·.err"'i'-;:J.~ticn

is reqHired~

B. Cummins

a~~Jsr f~om

Diedes (D604)

Date

r/O-TT-2
~

Cross Reference

11/15/731

those in the PDP-8,
J

di~f~rent

which do not load the I/O ':':'>l~<.
from the pulses. 'l'he
to the pulse lin~ ""rh"i(",p

r~T.i70r:-; u~e 'Use:;j to :cmovr, ;:.(",~.';"tive overshoot
'::'5.oc~:·~-,: 3\2 in:::;tallec:; \.,j : .. J ,--;11:- <..-..,ry::~e cc-nr.s::-!:<:'!d

:~~~~_~ ~~s{)~e;:ma~~~j-~~

:'\~'

L:

t.~_:~. '~':h:'~h~-~~U~~~ta~:~ ~~(. ,_:::tl~'.]_:.y I/O
terminator is required on

d""'·.ri-C2 ii'. the S.l::.;t,

t-1--,t:-:

:,J'"1.r' Bus In lin8~

pop-a I

Title

All

I

Tech Tip
Number r/O-TT-3

I/O Termination

,p,ocesso,,, AOP,licab,ility,

II-.A_"_Iho_'_w-'.;......F....r..:e..:e_m"a_n_ _ _ _ _R_OV_ _O_-II

IApproval

IRT

lIT.

C"mmin~

Date 11 /1 ,/11

Cross Reference

I

TGI1rd.!1:::!..t~on i.s :ceq'U.i~~d on pray..:· ·.i.med l/0 cc ble~ longe= than 20 J , and may
dasi.::a~::~ or, :::'l\c~ter cables"
.~o s~ci~1. terlll::":lati~n !::.Qcule exists [or
ncga::':iv,;; b;,;;,s lOP 1,. 2 and 4~ ::ITS 1. an,j j ~nd IirI'l'IALIZE' shotlld be

ro

tenni!'Hlte(! vith 22m ohm shunt r;2··;:;.Etors to gJ'ound~ A G717 termination
modu1.p- p!:'ovides positive bus ter;,:inaticn ef -:..JI Ohr.l !:hunt .t''3:sistors to
grour~ on the same signal lines; it should b~ insprted at the end of the

bus on cab1e #1..

If both bu::;e3 are

pres~nt

.in a system, they are electric-

al.l.y i!ldependent and must be sepa':ately ter:.. .tinated lt
EFFECTS OF TERHTNATION

~

NOT
TERMINATED
POSITIVE
GOI:~G

I

ground

PUL,SES
-3.

NEGATIVE.
GOING
PULSES ,ground

i-'

page

268

v

RAND RC
TERMINI.TED

~

JL

vi-

LS-

DIODE
TERMINATED

N/A

-V-

OVER
TEaMINATED

A
--0'-

I

momoo!a1

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12 Bit

lID I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

0

I

MULTIPLE DRIVE SELECTION
Processor Applicability

la laliasl I I J

~mLTIPLE

I

Option or Designator

I/O Termination

ITech Tip

rtle
All

I

INumber

If-.A,...u_th_o_r-,w!!..,-,F:..lr,-!e~e~m!!"a,!!n,-_ _ _~R..:ev=--.oO'---lJ
jAppravol

w.

Cummins

00to11/15/73

I/O-TT-4
Cross Reference

I

DEVICE SELECTION

A cownon problem associated with I/O devices is multiple selection; an
Io'r is issued to select one device and another, with a differect rOT, is
also selected. This is often the result of a ffiisadjus-tme~nt" -of'---iop-'-'-4~whiC1i-­
allows it to occur, at the peripheral device, coin.cident "\lith the MB
changing to the next instruction. The problem can be examined with a
scope using the fol1owir,g program I

7JlJlJl
7JlJll
7JlJl2

6777
S2JlJl
S2JlJl

Sync on lOP 4 and look at pin ED on any WlD3 device selector module at the
end. of the bus. The' time difference .between lOP 4 and the spike (which is
the ME chanqing) should 1:::'3 lOa nscc.
1-= ".h<:! t:i)t12 i~c; sl:D':"·~'~': t}~;::m this,
check to see 'that all lOP delays are properly set, then shorten rop 4 a
maxirr.um of 200 nsec. (within a range of 800 to 1000 nsec.) until the time
difference between lOP 4 and the spike is 100 nsec.

With lOP 4" adjusted for the nOl-mal. 1 usee, with respect to lOP 2, the
microinstruction 6766 (TCOl, clear and load status A) may produce a. select
c::-ror
The register is clearc::d,b'..lt net lOQJ.~d,so that transport 8 (=21) is
selected. Reduction of the lOP 4 delay, as described above, will resolve
this problem also.
IO

IPAGE 29q

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION OATE

May 1974

-- NOTES --

270

mum.l.l
I
Title

RELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

Kli

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

ISE I I I I I

I

IAudxw Bill
IApproval W.

a.::;

Designator

0 I
ITochTip

ECO IN ERROR - M835-0003
Procasoor Applicability

All

1SBit

I

!CASE

TT-1

INumbar

Moroney
Cummins

R.. 0

Date 7-31-72

I

Cross Reference

I

ECO M83S-00003 is in error.

to correct.

A new ECO #M835-0004 has been generated
The following sketches are correct.
Remove Jumper

Cut etch

Side 2
Add
Jumper

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTION
TAKEN

[ijECO 11\835- oO'j
DMCN_ _ _ __
TECH TIP_ _ __
OBSOLETE _ _ __

o

o

ntle

ITech Tip
INumber

M8350 POSITIVE I/O BUi> INT~lWACE

IAuthor Ralph Boehm
I BEl I I I I I IApproval w. Cummins
Processor Applicability

All

Rev 0

Date

7-31-72

I
I

KA8E TT-2
Cross Reference

For customer peripherals that need more than 8~1 fI)t)Is~AL
rop' s, it is necessary that ~~d kEh~!.'crnt'2.j

separation between
be accomplished.

W

.

~
Without the ECO it is possible the rop will st
~. 3 mB35
at the next TP2. This can cause the KA to res~ timing
and send the machine off into random locationso

ACTION

TAKEN

- GQ,2...
i

TECH'YiIP

n OBSOLETE
Title

Tech Tip
Number

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

All

I

COLD SOLDER ON M8 3 5

18EI 1.1 I

I

I

Weimer/Toolan

IApprovalFrank Purcell Date

I
07/31172 I

Rev

0

KA8E-TT-3
Cross Reference

The ground side of capacitor C16 on the M835 module may be
found to be cold soldered. This is due to the unusually
small pad on side two. Although this problem does not

affect the normal operation of the module, it is advisable
to inspect the connection, and if necessary, resolder from
th.e component side of the module ~

COMPANY~
Page 272

"
I: .

momBDmD I FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
r

Title

12Bit

Ull

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

KDSE

0 I

Halting During An Interrupt of a Break
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

ITech Tip ROSE
INumber

II-,A_"_th_o_,_ _Re_n_Q_u_i_n_n_ _ _ _R_IN__O_-I1

I sEi I I I I I IApproval

w.

Cummins

Date 7-31-72

TT-U

Cross Reference

I

This Tech Tip is written to aid the Field Service Representative when
operating the PDP-Be and should not be interpreted as a malfunction.

A,

INTERRUPT FLAGS
There are certain things which, although illegal, one may do
with a PDP-S/SI/BI, but not with the PDP-Be.
On the PDP-8/81/8L
Time; therefore, a
the interrupt on.
users have already

flags were cleared before Interrupt Strobe
flag could safely be cleared after turning
(This is normally not done because most
restored the AC.)

Sample TTY service:

/
/

/ SERVICE
/
/ I,ON

•/

KCC

/ JMP EXIT
The PDP-8e clears flags at Interrupt Strobe Time due to the
faster I/O cycles.
As a result, the above routine would
interrupt from location "*" with a cleared (i.e. No.)flag.
This would confuse the best Interrupt Scan Routines.
The solution is to follow the rules and clear the flag before
the ION command.
This holds true for all options (not just the TT.Y).
B,

HALTING DURING A BREAK
Under certain conditions, it is possible to FETClI_a HALT
instruction and have a break request in the ~cyc~
(diagnostics are the best example).
With a Break Request~ the ePMA, MAJOR STATE, and Instruction
Register are disabled at TP4.
The CP MA and EMA in the PDP-8e are updated at TP4 and the
machine always stops in TSI.
Therefore, under the above
conditions the machine stops with the Break MA indicated.
The result is one does not know at what address the machine
halted.

~3

II PAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE

ITech Tip

Halting During An Interrupt of a Break (conttNumber ICD8E-TT-l

Title

IAuthor

Processor Applicability
All I 8EI

B.

I

I

I

J

I

IAppMENT

CORF'ORATlON

momoama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I 12 Bit IXJT

.t.

r I

lilityl lAuthor

1'1

IProcesso AppIlicab

IApproval

IBL

~

KT12 VS OTHER OPTIONS

Processor Applicability

112 1 1 1 1 1 1

All

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

to

!(V81

i

Tech Tip
Numbe, KPBL-TT-l

Art Newbery

Rev

I

0

Frank PurcellDate 07/31/72

I~~

I

Rev

H;

I

INumber

(lOT CONFLICTS)

LAuthor

KP8L

0 I

G785/MC8L / KP8L COMPATIBILITY

1

All

0 I

16 Bit

Option or Designator

1f-,AC:-ppr-O-vJi.'-"1U:H"'a.lr"O-1.L.dC;Lll.og.n-,.--D-.-t.-8-1-7-1-7-2-~1

Cross Reference
MCBL-TT 1

KTl2-TT-l

Cross Reference

'The lOT for DECtape TeOI conflicts with PDP-12 I s KF12.
The PDP-12
will probably never have a TC01 option.
There is, however, an rOT
conflict with some of the "8" diagnostics the PDP-12 user.
The following is a list of conflicting diagnostics and their location
to be changed to on NOP (7000).
LOC

OLD

NEW

DF32 Diskless

MAINDEC-08 - DS BC

1351

6762

7000

Time Share
Hardware Exerciser

MAINDEC -T 8- D8BB

2632

6771

7000

MAINDEC-8I-D2AC

3116

6762

7000

LEB/LP08 Line
Printer Test

Title

SCOPE ERASE RETURN PROBLEM

Processor Applicability

All

1

IAuthor

Al Shimer

Rev

ITech Tip
INumber

KV8-TT-l

n

Cross Reference

I

81 1 1 1 1 1 rrA-~--al~~~w~s~taL=-at-t-D-ate---l-L74~l

VT01-TT-l

COMPANY~
IPAGE

291

Ii PAGE REVISION

o

nPUBLICATION DATE

JUly 1972

Title

I~ech Tip

611 Scopes

Number

IAuthor R.
I I 1 IApproval w.

Processor Applicability

All
.1
8's
1

11

Rev 0

Nunley

cummins

Date

7-31-72

I
I

Kl78I-TT-l
Cross Reference

Some older Tektronix 611 scopes have a potentially disastrous
flaw.
The leads on the secondary of the high voltage transformer
do not have sufficient insulation to withstand long usage and
will break down and short the cathode voltage (leads 8 & 9) to
ground. To cure, unsolder leads 8 & 9 from the ceramic strip,
cover those leads with a heavier teflon spaghetti then res older
to the same spots on the ceramic strip.

Title

!

TechTiP
Number KVSI-'1''r-2

KVSI Problems

Processor App1icability

All I.I I I I I I I

a I
Ir.A~~---'I~w~~r,~----~~-t-·----~~1

IAUthor

Rev

R;Nunleg

Cross Reference

An error in rhe Add/Delete lists for ECG's 8I-",21 and ",36
has resulted in the introdu~tion of peculiar problems into the
Some KV8I's have left ,the plant improperly wired.

KVSI.

The error:
Corre~tion:

ADD Dl,E2
ADD E{19Vl

to °E;f9L2
to E,9L2

jittery presentation on a VT,l mag be the resalt of a faulty
ground between the VT,l and the BI.
It is probab~e that the
situation can be improved or corre~ted bg plugging the VT,l into
the 8I power supply or in any DEC option.
A

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAL
IPAGE

292

UPAGE REVISION

0

flpUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

ma.mD I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bi.

I!J I

16Bi.

0 I

0 I

lSBi.

36Bi.

0 I

A"[/.:2.J

KW12A

Tech Tip KW12A-TT-001
Number

o_--I1

(I-A_U_th_Or_~_,-______R_fN_ _

I I I I I IAppro.al#~

Two recent ECQ's,

Option or Designator

I

TESTING KW12 ECO' S
Processor Applicability

I

EM12-0001~,

0 ... 9/14/72

Cross Reference

I

II

EM12-00020, involving the KW12

provide solution to program sensitive hardware glitches.
the case of the KW12, the fix should be tested wi th the
following equipment:
1.
2.
3.

In

An Oscilloscope -- Tektronix Type 454
A Signsl generator 1 KHz to 300 KHz
A simple program
CLA

TAD K~l~~
CLEN

/CONSTANT + (OI~~)
/ENABLE CHAN 1 INPUT

CLA

TAD K6~~~
CLLR
CLCA
JMp - .-1

/CONSTANT = (6~~~)
/SET RATE = CHAN 1 8 INPUT
/READ COUNTER TO AC
/LOOP

K~l~~. ~1~~
K6~~~. 6~~~

The following procedure should be used to test the KW12 ECQ's

1.

Turn the PDP-12 off (turn the power fail option off alsol.

2.

Turn the PDP-12 on and I

before touching any console keys
attach a scope probe to D24, pin Rl.

Wi th the sweep rate set to 0.2 usee/di v and the vertical
range set to 2 v/div, the fOITowing pulse train should
-

be observed

111111

Hit

3•
4.

Start the test program.
Attach the signal generator to channel 1 input of the KW12
and set sine wave output to at least 3v pp with a rate of

5..

Turn the channe~ one slope knob to both the + and - settings.
Counting should be observed in the AC. If counting fails with
the slope selector in that slope position, the front panel ECO
was incorrectly installed or the precision power supply is

1 KHz

fali1ty.

COM PANY CONFIDBfl1AL
[PAGE793

II PAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

Title

TESTING KW12 ECO'S continued

All

Date

6.

7.

8.
Title

With the slope control set to + or -, increase the frequency
of the signal generator slowly to 120 lOIz. Tha AC should
continue to change very rapidly. This test should be
allowed to run for five minutes with the signal generator
set to 120 KHZ.
I f the AC stops changing at any time, except when switching
ranges on the signal generator, and can't be restarted by
adjusting the KW12 th~eshold control, (without touching
the console switches), either ECO's were not correctly
installed or the M7l9 in slot F20 or the M503 in slot F23
is faulty
The M719's and the M503's should be interchanged and the
test repeated.

WIRING ERRORS
Rev

All
Date

9/14/72

Problems encountered on the KW12 installation of PDP-12's
prior to memory section 194 may in part be caused by
incorrect wirinq from slot F25 to the clock control. Below
is a list of the wiring runs for a Rev. F memory frame.
If the wire panel is a Rev. E or earlier, verify all clock
wiring with this list.

!!!!!!.
CLEA F25Al
CLBA F25Bl
CLEC F25Cl
GND 25
CLEC F25Dl
CLEB F25El
GND 25
CLEB F25Hl
CLEC F25Jl
CLEC F25Kl
CLEA F25Ll
CLEB F25Ml
CLEC F25Nl
GND 25
GND 25

FROM
F25Al
F25Bl
F25Cl
F25C2
F25Dl
F25El
F25Fl
F25Hl
F25Jl
F25Kl
F25Ll
F2SMl
F25Nl
F2SRl
F25Tl

COMPANY COIIDIIAL
Page 294

'1'0

F23H2
F23Hl
F24Dl
F25Tl
F24El
F23K2
F25Tl
F23Kl
F24H2
F14Hl
F23J2
F23L2
F24J2
F2SFl
E25Tl

mamaamD I FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12Bit

00 I

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

0 I

Processor Applicability

V.;<

KW12A

ITech TiPKW12A_T'l'_3
INumber

DIFFERENT WAYS OF USING AND PROGRAMMING KW12A

Title

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

If-A_U_tho_r_ _ _-,-______R_&V___O--/1

I I I I I I IApproval J.!. ot'ffJ, 0

Date 9/14/72

Cross Reference

I

Different ways of using and programming the KW12A are shown up glitches
and errors in the clock circuitry. The problems are noted as follows:
1. When running at the higher clock rates and short overflow intervals
such as at every 20-60 usee, the pulse that occurs when reaching

the desired count and causing counter overflow shifts in time.
This is caused by a glitch on the clear line of CLR count F/F
which is too narrow to clear the flop but is wide enough to
cause the "0" side output to have a spiked output which is seen
by the counter as a valid count, which causes overflow too soon.
This seriously affects the AIP-12.

2.

When operating in mode 3 when an event occurs the counter is
tranfserred to the buffer and- the counter is cleared. If counter
bit 99 were set prior to clearing, it generates a false overflow.
The overflow F/F detects this as a valid complete counter full
overflow. This could mess up customer programs badly.

3.

The positive and negative sync inputs cause the opposite slope
to be synchronized on. The threshold polarity is correct as marked
but does not cover the full range
defined input signal voltages.

0'

These problems are corrected by ECO
Title

ECO

All

EM12-~~55

ITech Tip KW12-TT-4
INumber

PROBLEMS

Processor Applicability

I/o;> I I I I I I

IAuthor
IApproval;V. ~

Rev

°

Date 9/13/72

I

Cross Reference

1

__

After installing ECD EM12-0055, the following software will not operate
correctly:

1.
2.
3.
4.

KW12-A Maindec l2-D8CC will not run.
KW12-A onlinctapes up to and including DEC l2-D7AG-UO will not run
The clock demo on linctapes up to and including DEC-12-UXZC-uo will
not run.
CLK A CNT ~~ to set the overflow flag
CUstomer software using'
will be affeeted.

May not operate correctly:
1. Customers software that uses the Schmidtt trigger inputs.
Will operate correctly:

1.
2.

KW12-A Maindec l2-D8CD.
Linctapes DEC 12-D7AH-UO or higher

COMPANY CONFIDEN11Al.
IPAGr 295

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

-- NOTES --

296

mBmBDma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

IJ I

12B;,

16B;,

@

I

ISB;'

[B

I

A~ I I I I I I I

LA30

I

36B;, ~

ITech Tip

Off-Line Testing of the LA30
Processor Applicability

CPL
Opt;"" or Designator

INumbe< LA30 TT-# 1

IAuthorCloutier/walker
I Approval W. Cummins

Rev

I
I

0

Date 07/31172

Cross Reference

To ckeck out LA30 off-line (locally) you have to place a jumper
from AlSR2 to ground. This jumper is located on the M7112
module which qualifies key board in to work. Also, let i t be
known that the first slot to the left of the wire frame is slot

A and BDS respectively.

Title

All

X.

1

ITech Tip
iNumber LA30-TT-Z

LA30 HEAD INSTALLATION

I

Processor Applicability
I
/

I I

I I

LAuthor
Rev

0

I

II."A""'==Dv:;-al"T----=D-ate~8.:.::/2~/7--=2----J1

Cross Reference

On the initial start-up of an LA30 head I some solenoids may not
print immediately. Th~s condition comes about when the head has
been 5i tting idle for a long period of time. In most cases the
solenoid will free itself during normal printing but if i t doesn't
it may have to be freed by hand. To free the solenoid by hand,
proceed as follows:
l.

Turn off the LA 30 power

~.

With paper and ribbon in position and the platten closed, insert
the end of a paper dlip through the hole in the rear of the
solenoid and push gently against the solenoid spring.

3.

Remove paper clip.

4.

Check to make sure solenoid wire is not sticking in the ribbon.

5.

Turn on LA30 power and print.

6.

Once the solenoid starts printing run the head continuously for
a minimum of two passes of the LA30 diagnostic.

NOTE:

The longer the head is run there is less chance of this
happening again.

COM PANY IDIIIIN11AL
/PAGE

297

II PAGE REVISION

o

DPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamlllD I

J

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12Bit

Kli

16Bit

ID I

I

18Bit (]

36Bit

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

~II I I I I I I

LAJO

ID I

I

TOChTiP
Number LA30-TT-4

DECW'ri tel' Ribbons - Recall

Title

CPL
Option or Designator

Bryan Dungey

IApproval Ed Dorr

J

0

R..

Cross R _

Oate 09-05-72 I

We have discovered that one shipment of DECW'riter ribbons,
which were over inked, were put into stock sometime
around the first of the year. The ribbons can be identified by the lot .35 which is printed on each ribbon carton.

j

Titi.

A:

These ribbons will smudge badly and should be recalled from
all field stock areas. Maynard and Westfield Stockrooms
nave already been curoed.
TochTiP
LA30-TT-5
~~d ON SOME BASIC BE MAINDECS BECAUSE OF NO
Number
Cross Reference
Procaaor Applicobility
I Au_ Darvl Rickards Rev 0

J

I I I I I I I

l A _ I J. Blundell

As there is no bell on

Dote

09/20/72

pass on some of the Basicr~A ~&dJJ~1.I
qive a .p.~ for pass when running' ~f(mndecs.

9 changes

'-.,..J

Wime 1:tfMo~' ~Arom ~2_7 to _32_
ObU
Ii 10eatiod l7E' iMl'l _2_' to .32_
location __13 from *2*7 to *32*

Instruction Test 1
Instruction Test. 2

@

~

Random DCA

sasic JMP-JMS
EAE Inst. Test 2

I

tSY IDaI J:"alIl:'1RW. nOA~atiOn of a

r-1Pb!pJl~ iocation 3~8T f.aa *2*7 to ,32,

L-/CIlUlJt Mation 2175 from ,,/17 to '32'

(N.B. this change will Q.oasot.'EliIice a minute)

-

Title

All

Approvll F

X

Purcel

PROBLEM CAUSE. Right margin switch (N/O contTAKfilQ"ting i~t'J
M1l3 pins Hl and Jl at Al7.
/;

)(5-:: .(

CUre.

Add a jumper Al7' H1tto A17

u~j.fl}J:..F1}P U 07~

There will shortly be aD-.2CO to iDak

,....,
Titl. KEYBOARD SHORTS CAOSED BY PAPERCLIPS,

All
X

Processor Applicability

I

I

I I I I I

I PAGE 299

lAuthor

HPAGE REVISION

B

3.

TECH TIP_ _ _ __

~c~"""'-""""'~:S2R

Davis/Barnett

I Approval W Cm"m; ns

•

h¥ftj f@tIOIlC.

Rev
Date

0

I

1112 0 172 I

nPUBLICATION DATE

LASO lfAL7

Cross Reference

LXO I-TT-l

Janu!lfy

1973 {

Title

APPARENT LINE FEED PROBLEMS IN 50 Cycle Land
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

\T""hTip LA30-TT-8
INumber

IAuthor

Klaus WUnderlich Rev

IApproval

w. Cummins

I

0

Cross Reference

Date 01/23/73 I

Same LAJOfs in the Munich area have been found to be wired
for 220 volts 60 cycles, resultinq in a hot power supply,
and low unregulated D. C. output voltages. We have seen this
to cause line feed problems.

There is a jumper from the 2mfd resonating capacitor to the
transformer that selects the correct circuit to match the power
frequency.
Capacitor to Tag 9 - 50 cycles/second
Capacitor to Tag 10- 60 cycles/second.
Title
All
X

ITech Tip
INumber

CARRIAGE RETURN TIME Olf SERIAL LA30

ProcessorApplieability

I. Author

I I I I I I I IApproval
The carriage

Rev

Carl Cline
Ii.

I
I

0

Date 02/26/73

Cummins

re~ulJr~I\ff:~1Al.tA£tIOO.
300 ms
all percentage of

However it appears that o~
G936 accelerat~~~achl~
due to the charmJ'ltWleranc

~~ceptable time.

LA30-T'r-9
Cross Reference

or less.
the

This is

iPe
nents on the
G936. and will ,...,ult
nd character
following a ca~~.~~t~u~r~n~.______________
An ECO will

be~~oJtiptQ

resolve this problem. In the
may be added followinq

mean time addi . . .~_~l1-£haracter.
aeRo
U~~
Title

LACK OF FUSING

ITech Tip
INumber

ON THE LINE FEED CIRCUITS

Rev

0

Date 02/26/'3

I
I

LAJO-TT-10

Cross Reference

This problem causes the line feed resistors to smoke on the
which can damage the board aa well as be embarrassing to the
customer. ECO 8 was generated to correct this.problem,
however, the value specified (2~ amps) is too large so a l~,amp
slow blow should be used.

COM PANY CONFIDDITIAL
Page 300

CPL

momoomD I FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL j
I
Title

12 Bit []

I

16 Bit

rID I

18 Bit

rID I

36 Bit

LA30

Gil I
ITech Tip

LINE FEED PROBLEM
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

INumbe, LA30-TT-ll

IAuthor

Cummins

I

Rev 0

Carl Cline

:" I I I I I I I IApproval w.

Date n?/?, n,

Cross Reference

I

iBUPrfJJtM~a4(tff()Ns.ing

The LA30 line feed problem
one or more line feeds and as a resul t .pi'J'~-int "t'he previous
line. ECO #:71 was generate~d kits aI:il.feltt-"lable from the
Field Service Stockroom.
ECO L fl3 0 071

I.2SJ

o
o

MCN_ _ _ __
TECH TIP_ _ _ __

n OBSOLETE
Title

Alii

I ecn Ip
I Number

SENSITIVE PAPER OUT SWITCH

IPr0ces50
I 'IA""llicab1ilitvl

X

IJ-A_u_th_O_'__c_a_r_l_c_l_l_n_e____R_ev__o_-l'

IApproval

N.

Cummins

Date

~A30-'1'T-12

Cross Reference

021161731

This problem causes the machine to either think it is out of
paper when it isn't or that it has paper when is doesn't. The
only adjustment provided is the clearance hole of the microswitch, it therefore becomes necessary if the hole is not
great enough to foreeably bend the actuating arm.

COMPANYCONRDaOUl
IPAGE

301

II PAGE REVISION

o

IPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Title

Axlll

ITech Tip LA30- ....-13
INumber

SUrING LBP'1' AND R%GH'I.' JlARGZN

-,'-I',App/,icob,ifity, IAu-

Carl CUn.

lA_a' If.

Cummins

R..

0

Date 02/26/73

I

Cross Reference

I

When the left-band .arg1n 1. properlg set, tbe r1ght hand
.arg1n w111 be set automatlcally. To adjust the marg1ns.
proceed as follows:
1.

z.

Observe location of sw1tch (left band), to see i f the
lever on th. switcb w111 h1t the carriage at the correct
attitude. and aeeD.te the switch 1n the center oL the
45· angle. Se. attacbed sketch for correct sett1ng.

Prepare a length of paper from the LA30 paper supply
by drawing ln a reference 11ne 1n pencl1 or 1nk 0.0750

+ 0.010 inches ln from the left hand sprocket bole
a.nter 11ne.
(Pigure 5-7)
3.

4.

Using thi. paper, the .argin in the printer w111 be
set correctl, when the left edge of the character -Bprinted 1n the ~irst position after a carriage retarn
coincides with the center or the refezence 11ne.
~he posltion of the first character is adjusted bg
loosening the .~1n.d set screw OD the drive pulleg

and then rotating the drive pulley on the shaft extension to correct the error found in step 3.

Retighten

set screw to at le•• t 14 inches/pounds before testlng.
5.

I~ the aboye conditions cannot be met, 1t 1s probable
that the left-hand .argin switch is damaged, worD, or
i.properly _ount.d. Readjust or replace the switch
and rep.at steps 2 and 3.

6.

CAurrOR,

Check to see i f .et Bcrew on timing belt
pu11e9 is stripped or loose. rhis also
caus •• sial1ar problems as Step 4. I~ so
retighten or replace.

CC,mt

COMPANY CONFIIBOAI.
Page 302

mamaDmD TF'ELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

l2Bit []

I

CIJ I

l6Bit

l8Bit

GJ I

36Bit

I

I

I

I

I

TAUthor

I

\ Tech Tip
INum~

Rev 0

I

Dat.,

I

Carl Cline

I Approval

LA3D

GJ I

SETTING LEFT AND RIGHT MARGIN (Continued)

Processor Applicability

CPL

Option or Designator

SWITCH TOO HIGH

Sf/ITCH TOO LOW

Carriage Runs into
Switch

Carriage will not
activate Switch

LA30-TT-13

Cross Reference

SWITCH RIGHT
Contact will be made

1

<')

<')

-I

I

<')

I

<')

1

1

<')

<')

1

1

<')
I
I
<')

<')

I

<')

1

1

<')

<')

1

1

<')

Figu~

IPAGE

303

II PAGE REVISIDN

5-7 Checking Left Margin

o

nPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

T ·ItIe

A~

r

r

SETT NG LEFT AND R I GHT MAR G N

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

ITech
Tip LA30-T!l'-13
INumber

(e ont~.nue
.
d)

Carl Cline

Rev

0

Figure 5-9 Stepping Motor Removal

COMPANY COIfIOoow.
Page 304

J

IrA-ppr-o-v-a'-w-.-c-u-m-m-1-n-s--O-'-'·-O-2"";'-;2-7-''-;7-3-;1

Cross Reference

mamaoma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
1 12Bit 01
Title

16Bit

129 1 18Bit 129 1 36Bit 1291

IAutho< c.

A~ I I I I I I I IApproval

LA30

ITech Tip

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Processo. Applicability

Option or Designator

INumbu LA3D TT-14

Rev

Clin"

w. E.

Cununins Date

0

5/31/73

I
J

Cross Reference

G936

The G936 clock accelerator does not meet the 300 rns carriage return
spec required by the LA30.

correction:

Add three potentiometers to adjust high speed
ramp, low speed ramp and high speed running rate.
(ECa G936-00002)

Following is the adjustment procedure required for setting these three
pots.
1.

Place the modified G936 on an extender board.

2.

Stall the print head by switching motor circuit breaker "OFF"
while unit is running.

3.

Place the scope probe on 52 of G936 module.

4.

Release warning switch then adjust R4 (SK middle pot) for 550
usee between pulses.

Depress head warning
switch (second micro switch from left) and adjust R7 (lOOK bottom
pot) to result in 3.0 milsec between pulses.

u
5.

~

SWitch main frame power off.

Adjust R15 (5K Top pot) fully clock-

wise.

Turn on motor breaker then switch main frame power on.
Trigger sweep on G936 82 then place second probe on C2 + (2.2uf CAP)
on G936: while unit is printing adjust R15 for a negative going
ramp of 55.0 milsee.

6.

check time of PRINT INH L on M7710 (Al2-S2) to be less than 300 milsec.

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTION
TAKEN

129 [CO tiq IG '- Q 62
DMCN,----o TECH T1P,_ _ __

o OBSOLETE _ _ __

IPAGE 305

II PAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATION DATE

ITech Tip
INumber

Title LA30 11 Fam11y interconnections

All

-

Applicability

11:~ j I I I J I
1.

LAu_
jApproval

John Alston

B.

Dimbat

Date

JI

91
6/1/73

LA30-TT-15
Cross Refannco

Current. Mode (20 mal
BC05-F

cab1e 17008360

Mate-n-Loek

DLll

+XMIT
-RET
+REC

AA
KK
K

-RET

Qs'
I
I

(White)
(BLK)
(Green)

2' 2

I 7 17 I
I 3' 31

(Red)

eLl

(White)

(Black)
(Green)

(Red)

3
5
2

REC +
RET XMIT +
RET -

BCOS-F

KLll ("7800)
DIlll (".73)
DHl.l (m973)

+XMIT

-RET
+REC

-RET

Cl
Dl
Jl
III

(White)
(Black)
(Green)
(Red)

7
3

(Black)

REC

REC +
RET XIlIT +

RET-

5 XMIT

~__I-______.:.(Wh_i_te.:.)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ :
_

~

+}

(Green)
~

_ _ _ _ _ _I!(Red!!!ll..)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 7 REC +

XMJT

BC04-R

,OJll. - H3l7 A

Pa!Je 30,

:

Dist. Panel

COMPANYCO~Ul

IA 30

mamBOla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 12 Bit 18'l1

16 Bit (]

1 18 Bit IB.T

36 Bit

ll"

2.

J I I I I I I

LA '0

1Tech Tip
iNumber

LA30 11 Familv Interconnectiens
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

®l

Title
All

I

II-A:-U_th_O_r...::.J:.._..:A::l:..st:::o:::.n~_____R_ev--2!1::""_--l1

1Approval

1

Date 6/1/73

B. Dimbat

IA30-TT-lS
Cross Reference

EIA Level

H308 or H312 May

be substituted

so' Max
'\not supplied

I
I
(ErA)

I (TTY)

I

I

I
7008614
PIO Jf313A

I

'8
.

H313A

DLII

oell
DMII

OJll

BOOS-C (supplied)
BOOI-R (Supplied~
BCOI-R (Rupplied)
BCOS-D (Not Supplied)

/
-

307

II PAGE REVISION

1

EIA to TTY

Level converters

COM PANY CONfIDENTIAL
IPAGE

BCOS-F
5 upplied with LA30

I

I PUBLICATION DATE

Title

LA30-TT#16

Cross Roforonce

All

Data

X

Appendix I
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING LINE FEED SOLENOID

SUMMARY:

Find a range of values within which the line feed

solenoid operates properly (diagnostic test passes).
Use the center of the range for the final adjustment.
DE~ILED

PROCEDURE

1.

On line feed solenoid, loosen adapter locknut.
LA30 manual, figure A-1.)

(Index #79 in

2.

With solenoid in rest position, rotate the solenoid ar.mature
(Car as viewed from top) until the tooth of the pawl contacts

the ratchet tooth.
armature.

Mark a reference line on the solenoid and

3.

Back the armature off (CW) 3/4 turn and lock it in place with
the locknut.

4.

Run part 2 of the line feed quality test in the exerciser
test* and note if it passes the test. If it does (see note
at end of section). If it does not pass the test, then do
the following:
a.
b.

Loosen locknut
Back armature (CW) 1/8 of a turn

c.

Run diagnostic test

If it does operate properly this is the lower l~it of your
range: if not, keep testing at increments of 1/8 until you
find the first place where it operates properly. (Note this
as your lower limit.)
5.

Having found your lower limit, at increments of 1/8 CW, apply
the diagnostic test until it stops operating properly (this
is the upper range of acceptance).

(Page 12 intentionally left blank)
IPAGE 308

nPAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

March 1974

mamaDma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
,I
Title

12 Bit

£II

I I
6.

IDJ

18 Bit

IiJ I

36 Bit

fX)

LINE FEED ADJUSTMENT

LA30

Processor Applicability

A:

16 Bit

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor"
IApproval

Option or Designator

I

LA30
!TechTiP
Number

E.rl

. Sarasin

I
'" ,'" ' I

Rev.
Oate

Crms Reference

Finally, adjust armature at the halfway distance between
operating limits that were found.

NOTE:

Turn armature back ccw at increments of 1/8th turns and do the
diagnostic test until i t is not operating properly (this
is your lower limit now). Go to step 5
and continue.

*Note: Maindec 08 DHLIA-B" Decwriter (LA30) control-exerciser test.
For an 11 system toggle in program given in Appendix III.
The diagnostic for the 11 system is being updated to include
the new test.
In a PDP-IS system use :MAINDEC-lS-DZJ..AA-B. LA.30 diagnostic
as follows:

I.

Set ACS 03 and 05 = 1
Set ACS 15 = I if 300 baud
Set ACS 16 = I if LA30P

2.

Start program at 202. When the line feed quality test
begins; raise ACS 02 to lock onto this section; and
proceed with your adjustments. (The 1FQ test is preceded
by 80 column margin and carriage return tests. Either
of these may be aborted by typing "Control Gil).

IPAGE 309

UPAGE REVISION

0

"PUBLICATION OATE

Title

Rev

Author

All

Approval

Cross Reference

Cate

TECH. TIP
LA30 Line Feed (L/F) adjusOment.

NOTE:

'rhis adjustment is for LA30 I s using one or two part paper.

First: Follow the procedure outlined in Appendix I for adjusting
the L/F solenoid.

Second: If the L/F still does not operate correctly, follow the
procedure outlined in Appendix II.
~:

If the L/F still does not operate correctly. change the
L/F solenoid assembly, i.e. DEC Part Number$:
12-11026
12-10473
12-10495
90-09061
12-10496
12-10342
90-06563
Note:

Before putting the parts together check that part number
12-10473 (spring) fits over part number 90-09061 (nut)
loosely_
(At least .010" clearance.)
Part number
90-09225 (mylar washer) is not part of the assembly_
It has been taken out by ECO #71.

IPAGE

310

nPAGE REVISION

'0

UPUBLICATIQN CATE

March 1974

Option or Designator

LA30
Title

LA30 TH16
Cross Reference

~A
__
u~
__
or___VL.~rdekian

All

Approval J.

aras in

Appendix II

PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE ELECTRIChL PORTION OF THE LIF SYSTEM.

Examine the signal on the terminals of the G38l module while
local line feed switch is depressed.

specification

G381-TBI

~

....

1-=

~+lOV

~

~_ _ _...

12 to 18 msec.

-lSV

---------------

+SV

G381-TB4

-ISV

------------

~

-SSV

These waveforms indicate that the line feed solenoid is
receiving the proper electrical signal.

IPAGE

311

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

March 1974

Title

Rev

All

Cross Reference

Date

Appendix III
Toggle in the following program for an II/OS, 11/20 and 11/45.
(This will serve as a test for line feed until the 11 diagnostic
is updated).
Location

012700
000030
012701
177564
010102
005722
005003
105711
100376
012712
000015
010005
006205
006205
006205
060500
010004
005304
100404
010405
005305
100773
000775
105711
100376
012712
000012
105711
100376
012712
000134
005203
022703
000040

0
2
4
6
10
12
14
16
20
22
24
26
30
32
34
36
40
42
44
46
50
52
54
56
60
62
64
66
70
72
74
76
100
102
IPAGE

312

Data

"PAGE REVISION

RpUBLlCATlDN DATE

mamaomo
Title

All

X

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bi' ~

1 16Bi'IO 1 laBi' 10 I

I

10 1

36Bi'

Option or DesiWlator
LA30

ITech Tip
LA30 LINE

FEED ADJUSTMENT

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

IAuthor

iNumber
V. Erdek i an

j.l

I

a:!.:r~aS~i:::'n-O-a'-.":':1::2/-2...!O/:"'7......J
3 1

TT#16

Cross Reference

II-:A:='ppro:::':"-va-:-J2-J=-=.c!::s

001735
000747

104

106
TO

Rev

run program:

a.

Load Address 0

b.

Start

The program will stay in a loop, until you halt.

Title

All

X

ITech Tip

LA-30 Special Tools

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

INumber LA30 TT #17

IAuthor
1ApprovaJ

Chris Ball

0 I
1-29-741

-Rev

Jerry Sara sin

Oa'.

Cross Reference '

When attempting repair or adjustment, a special tool is needed. Lack of a
bristol wrench will prevent any adjustment of the left hand margin or
installation of the carriage stepping motor. The following bristol wrench
has proven adequate. or a complete set can be ordered under the DEC
part number.

DEC NUMBER
29-16131

page 313

BRISTOL NUMBER
DA-096

Title

lTech Tip
Number LA30-TT-4I.8

LA30 Voltage & Hertz Conversion Chart

Processor Applicability

A~ I I I I I I I

II-A_Utho
__
, --,J:..,e_rr...:y~sa_r_a_s_in_ _ _ _R~ev~_O__1 Cross Reference
IAPproval Chris Ball

Date 1-29-74

1

LA30 VOLTAGE & HERTZ CONVERSION CHART
(CHANGES TO H735 POWER SUPPLY PER PRINT SET
LA30 CONFIGURATIONS

PRIMARY TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
INPUT VOLTAGE

JUMPERS

LINE CONN •

.:t1S.± 1Hz

115V
240V
115V
240V

60Hz
60Hz
50Hz
50Hz

4-7, 5-2
2-7
4-S, 5-1
I-S

PA-CA-EA
PB-CB-EB
PC-CC-EC
PC-CD-ED

4.5
4,5
4,5
4,5

SECONDARY TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
OUT PUT CONN,

roMPERS

·12-15-1B
14-15-16
11-15-19
13-15-17
CAP. (2MF-660V)
CAP. (2MF-660V)

10

P.QWER SUPPLY
wL:RATINGS
15-16.6 VDC
SA. 60Hz
10-11.5 VDC
SA. 60Hz
15-16.6 VDC
BA. 50 Hz
10-11.5 VDC
SA. 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz

PA-CA-EA
PB-CB-EB

PC-CC-EC
PD-CD-ED
PA-CA- EA- PB-CB- EB
PC-CC-EC-PD-CD-ED

NOTE: For input voltages 200VAC and above replace SAMP Circuit
breaker (12-10191-1 with 2.5 AMP circuit breaker
(12-10191-2) •

IPAGE 314

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

January IS) 4

mllDDID I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

r

Title

12 Bit

IiU J

16 Bit

IiU I

18 Bit

IiU I

36 Bit

tv, L
,PIOC8SSO,,AppI,icab,ili
'
Autho. Jerry Sara sin
IApproval Chris Ball

IiU I

Option o. Designator

LA30

ITech Tip
INumber !.A30 TT *·19

Conversion of !.A30 Parallel to !.A30 Serial

A~,

I

Rev 0

Data

1-29-74

I
I

Cross Reference

CONVERSION OF !.A30 PARALLEL TO !.A30 SERIAL·
PARTS REQUIRED:
PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

74-9541
54-9914-2
M7389
M7731
MS98
M973
BCOSF-IS
12-2116-1
90-07129

Serial Bezel
Serial Switch Ass I y
Module
Module
Module
Module
Cable
Light
Clip

PROCEDURE :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Remove Parallel Keyboard Bezel and Switch Ass'y from machine.
Remove Switch Assembly from Keyboard Bezel.
Pre-Assemble Senal Switch Ass"y to Serial Bezel using same
hardware used on Parallel Switch Ass'y.
Install Serial Keyboard Bezel and Switch Ass'y onto base, using same hardware
used on Parallel AsEl/.
Remove G8004 Module from Logic (Slot 1\,0'8).
Insert M7389 Module into Slot A/B-20.
Insert M7731 Module into Slot A/R-19.
Insert MS 98 Module into Slot A-18 •
Insert M973 Module into Slot B-18.
Insert one end of BCOSF-IS Cable into M973 Module.

NOTE:

The above procedure assumes that the parallel IA30 has the latest

revISion which is as follows:
1.
2.
3.

New style Logic Hinge (90 degree bend on hinge that fastens to control box)
(12-10908) •
New style Rear Door accomodate new logic hinge (74-9491).
ECO *75 is installed in machine and logic to K rev •

.. LA30PA-PB-PD to LA30CA-CB-CC-CD.

page 315

ITech Tip

Conversion of LA30P to IA30E

Title

Processor Applicability

INumber

LI-A_u_th_or-,:J..,e"'IT..:y.,-s_a"'r_a,.,si_n_ _ _ _R_OV:--;;-::O:-;;.,.-j1

A~ I I I I I I I IApproval

Chris Ball

Date

1-29-74

LA30 TT 4120
Cross Reference

I

CONVERSION OF LA30 P TO LA30E*
PARTS REQUIRED:
PART NUMBER
74-9541
54-9914-2
M73S9
M7731
MS94 (REV "B")
M970
BCOIR-25

DESCRIPTION

Serial Bezel
Switch ASs'y
Module
Module
Module
Module
Cable

mY.
I

PROCEDURE:

1.
2.
3.
4.
S.
6.
7.
S.
9.
10.

Remove parallel keyboard bezel and switch ass·y.
Remove switch ass'y from keyboard bezel.
Pre-assemble s·erial switch ass'y to serial bezel using same hardware
used on parallel switch ass'y.
Install serial keyboard bezel and switch ass'y to base.
Remove GB004 module from logic (A,0'8).
Insert M7369 into slot A/B/-20.
Insert M7731 into slot A/B-19.
Insert MS 94 into slot A-IS.
Insert M970 into slot B-18.
Insert one end of BCOIR-25 into M970 module.

NOTE;

1.
2.

3.

The above procedure aSsume that the parallel IA30 has the foHowing parts.

New logic hinge (12-10908).
New style door (74-9491).
EGO #75 installed in unit.

*LA30PA-PB-PC-PC to LA30EA-EB-EC-ED.

IPAGE

316

nPAGE REVISION

UPUBLICATION DATE january ll!H

mamaD!a I

r

Title

~II

Option or Designator

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

6U j

16 Bit []

I

18 Bit []

I

36 Bit

[J

Conversion of LA30 Serial to LA30 Parallel
Processor Applicability

IAuthor Jerry Sarasin

I I I I I I I IApproval

vnn s !>all

LA30

ITech TiR

Rev
Date

Number LA30 TT 4121
Cross Reference

0

1-29-74

I

I

CONVERSION OF LA30 SERIAL TO LA30 PARALLEL*
PARTS REOUIRED:
PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

74-9542
54-9914-1
G8004
12-2116-J
90-07129

Parallel Bezel
Parallel Switch Ass'y
Module
Light
Clip

PROCEDURE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove serial keyboard bezel and switch ass'y from unit using the same
hardware used on the serial ass·y.
Remove sWitch ass'y from keyboard bezel.
Pre-assemble parallel swtich ass'y to parallel keyboard.
Install parallel keyboard bezel and switch asffy onto base.
Remove M7389. M7731. M598, M973, and BC05F-15 cable from unit.
Install G8004 module into Slot A.08.
The above procedure assumes that the serial unit has LCO *75
installed and the logic is up to K revision.

*LA30CA-CB-CC-CD to LA30PA-PB-PCOPd.

pagoe 317

Conversion of LA30C to LA30E

Title

Processor Applicability

:11

ITech Tip LA30 TT

Number

I~A_u1hor
_ _-:Je==lT_y,-s=ar~a~s_ln
_ _ _ _R,.."..,..,.O=__I

I I I I I I I IApproval Chris Ball

Date

1-29-74

I

41<

CONVERSION OF LA30C TO LA30E*
PARTS REO UIRED:
PART NUMBER
M594 (REV "B")
M970
BCOIR-25
NOTE:

DESCRIPTION
Module
Module
Cable

The above parts constitute an option called DFllA.

PROCEDURE:

I.
2.
3.

Remove M598, M973, and BC05Fl5 cable from unit.
Insert M594, M910, and BCOIR-2S Into slots A-18, B-18. respectively.
Attach BCOIR-25 to M970 Module.

*LA30CA-CB-CC-CD to LA30EA-EB-EC-ED.

IPAGE

318

II PAGE REVISION

22

Cross R-"'"

• PUBLICATION DATE january 1914

mY..
I

maMallD I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12 Bit [)

I

16 Bit

[]I

I

18 Bit

C!9 I

36 Bit

X

Processor Applicability

IAuthor Jerry Sarasin

I I I I I I I IApproval Chri

SUBJ:

5

Ball

Option or Designator
LA30

C!91

Title Instructions for Installing Dura Head on LA30 Decwriters
All

I

Rev

I~:=!t!~LA.3Q TT #23
a

Date 1/3 I!? 4

I

Cross Reference

1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING DURA HEAD ON
LA30 DECWRITERS

1.

On slot AS (head cable connector M963), unsolder the 3
black wires. These wires connect to ground lugs on power
supply.

2.

Two wires will be crimped together on the power supply end.
These may, or may not both go to slot AS. One may go to
the chassis, insure that the wire from the chassis physically remains
·connected.
(Clip extra black wire if needed.) Remove the 3 ~
~ the power supply to module slot AS.

3.

Install green wire from module AS, (any of the pins that
a black wire was disconnected from will do), and run to
the power supply +lOV lug. Use the double spade lug
included if necessary.

4.

On older LA30s, insure there is still enough clearance to
close module logic rack without interfering with +10 lugs.

5.

Install new head in the same manner as old head. Use
1/2 inch screws and washers included. The new head is
a different thickness.

6.

Adjust the head gap to .012", USing feeler stock. The new
head has a lip on both the top and bottom. Use caution to
insure feeler stock is not on the lips. (see diagram 2)

I PAGE

319

II PAGE REVISION

DEC 12-(74N)-1l89_N374

0

II PUBLICATION DATE

jan 74

-- NOTES --

320

!lamDIlD I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

All

12Bit

[j

I

laBit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bn

0 I

IAu1hor

181 I I I I I I IApproval
1)

Option or Designator
LAB 8

to Le8E

ITech Tip

LAB 8 INSTALLATION IIOTES

Proc:ossor Applicability

I

INumber LAB 8-TT-l

W.

Cummina

0

Rev

A. Newbery
Data

7-31-72

I
I

Croos Referonc:e

The Lab 8 systems are checked out nin-house" with the standard
grid input intensity (Z) signal. If the customer has supplied
his own scope, it may be a type which required a cathode input

siqnal. The Lab-8 AID logic can be modified to provide a cathode
signal as follows:
Delete A22F to A2lN
2)

ADD A22F to A2lR

If you are runninq a test during which you expect to see a

character or pattern on the screen, and only a raster is visible,
it may be that the intensity control has been advanced too far.
Best practice is to reduce brightness to minimum, then bring it
up to the desired viewing level.

3)

If the left diaqnal (switch setting 1000 octal) generated by
Maindec 8I-D6AA has curled ends, a lack. of termination iss
indicated. TWo 33K OHM terminators (which are listed on the
expernal component list) may be missing, install as fOllows:
e2SE to e2SE (e2SE is -10)
B2SK to B2SE (B25E is -10)

4)

Title

All

It should be noted that there are two errors concerning the
VC81 in the "Small computer Handbook". Voltage at terminal BS2
on the A607 module varies from 0 to +2, not 0 to -10. The
reference voltage is -8, not -2.

ITech Tip

LAB S/E SOFTWARE PROBLEMS

IAu_

I'roc:otsocw Applicability

18EI I I I I I
PROBLEM.

INumber

George Chaisson

IApprovalw. CUmmins

Rev,

Data 7-31-72

LAB S/E TT-l

I
I

Recently software for the Lab-BE has been released
from the Program Library and shipped to all customers.
Two pieces of software in the software package have

problems.
SOLUTION:

1.

The Basic Averager DEC-LB-0603-PB needs a one
word patch.

2.

The Time Interval .Hhtogram DEC-LB-U42B-PB has a
checksum in the paper tape. This tape ·must be
replaced.

Location 7203 from 6530 to 6531.

IPAGE 321

nPAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

JUly 1972

ITech Tip
M83'1lS3&z9 lOT SELECTION JUMPERS

Title
AXil,

,ProclTl!)

. . To El3 pin 11 (KBD)

....

MD!l6

....

To Ell'l pin 9

To El3 pin 12 (KBD)

"0
",I

[!ll
~ I

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAl.
IPAGE

322

II PAGE REVISION

A

IPUBLICATION DATE

(PRNTR)

October 1972

mamallD I

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12BI.

@

I

lGBi.

0 I

18Bi'

0 I

3GBi,

Steve Lamote

IAwoval

n'

LINC

0 I

ITech Tip

I Numbe< LINC

Title LINC 8 CLAMP LOAD'S LOCATION AND USE

IAuthor

Option or Designator

Rev

"",.". Da.. n

I
" , ,,, I
A

8-TT-1

Cross Reference

A list of the unused clamp loads within the nonnal (basic) Line-a
system has never been compiled in the past.
First, a word about the clamp load and it l s uses.

There are

basically 3 types of clamp loads; 2 rna, 5 rna, and 10 rna, with
flip-flops, singleshots and special purpose modules differing
in load and drive capability.

The clamp, when driven to ground acts as a load, of it's given
value, thus removing that value of driving capability from the
circuit. Although, when the clamp is driven to -3 volts, i t

acts as a supply; the amount of supply per clamp is given in
chart form later.
Each circui..t in tm Linc-8 needs 1 rna of input drive, and has an
output capability of 18 rna, except for flip-flops and singleshots
which have 17 rna's of qutput.
Adding a clamp will inprove fall time and the -3 volt drive,
but at a cost of the ground driving and noise immunity
capabili ty of the output circuit.

In conclusion: before adding a clamp load, take into account:
1.

What logic level is needed on the output to be clamped?

2.

How many circuits are already being driven by the output
circuit?

3.

If the output is ground, as a logical one, how much noise
is tolerable to achieve the added drive.

COIPANY CONFIDENT':;'
I PAGE 323

II PAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

January 1973

ITachTip

Title
All

LINC-S CLAMP LOAD' S LOCATION AND USE
p..,....... AppiioabHity
\ AuthM STEVE LAMOTTE

I L I I I N I C \ Is I

MODULE

~Number
R..

A

-'

\ A _ I DICK EDWARDS DateOl/23/73

PINS WITH
CLAMP LOADS

LOAD AT
GROUND

Bl,4

B. M. S

1,

B115

J, P, V

1, rna

rna

7.8

ma

7.8 rna

F

9 rna

7

S111

J, P, V

5 rna

3.5 rna

1,

rna

7.8 rna

1.4 rna

D-+V

5 rna

3.5 rna

D, E

1, ma

7.8 rna

H, F

D"'V

W"S
WS,1

COMPANY~
Page

324

ma

2 ma

JUn

I

DRIVE
SUPPLIED AT
-3 VOLTS

BI7l

w,,2

LINC-S-TT-fl
Cross Reference

mDMDamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL]
.I
Title

12Bit

00 I

16Bi'

01

lSBi'

01

01

LINC 8

iTech Tip
Number LINe 8-TT-1

LINC 8 CLAMP LOAD'S LOCATION AND USE

Rev A
IAuthor Steve Lamotte
1
1
I I I I I I 1Approval DicK Ed..",..d§ DatonllH/n 1

Processor Applicability

All

36Bi'

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

UNUSED CLAMP LOADS
MODULE
LOC.

TYPE
MODULE

PIN

APPLICABLE
ONLY IF OPTION

PA24

S111

P

PA27

S111

J

PA27

SIll

P

PA27

S111

V

PA3{1

5111

V

PA36

W5{11

D

PB23

S111

V

PB29

5111

J

PB32

S111

J

PB32

S111

P

pe28

5111

P

PD24

5111

P

PD2?

5111

V

PE27

SIll

J

182

PEl?

5111

P

182

z:

PEl?

5111

V

182

a..

PE2{1

5111

J

182

PE2{1

5111

P

182
182

>C

:E
c::::I
~

PE2{1

5111

V

PE26

5111

J

182

PE26

5111

P

182

PE2?

5111

P

182

IPAGE

325

II PAGE REVISION

A

IPUBLICATION DATE lllz:mll:¥ J9:Zl

LINC-8-TT-Ill

LOCATION AND USE
Au_STEVE LAMOTTE

Rev

Cross Reference

APPftWabICK EDWARDS

MODULE
LOC.

TYPE
MODULE

PIN

APPLICABLE
ONLY IF OPTION

PE34

5111

J

182

PE34

5111

P

182

PE3S

SIll

P

182
KRill

PFII8

WSll1

D

PF29

SIll

P

182

PF2'

SIll

V

182

PF3l-

5111

J

182

PF34

5111

J

182

PF34

SIll

P

182

V

PHII7

WII1I2

MA39

WilliS

N

MA39

WilliS

V

MElli

SIll

V

ME16

5111

P
V

~

188

ME16

5111

>-

=a..

ME37

WilliS

T

oC

ME37

WilliS

V

MFll1

5111

V

183

c::t

MFII9

Bl114

M

188

MFII9

B1114

5

188

MF19

WSII1

D

MBII8

R3113

H

MBII8

R3113

F

•

c.a

~

Page 326

momoamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
.I
Title

AII

12Bi'

IX]

I

1GBi'

0 I

l8Bi'

0 I

3GBi'

J I I I I I I

LINC

0 I

INumber

Tech TiPLINC 8-TT-l

LINC 8 LOADS LOCATION AND USE
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

IAuthor

~~P'U'A T.;lmnt-_t!.A

Rev

IApproval

Dick

01123173

E~wardS Date

MODULE
LOC.

.TYPE
MODULE

MHll

R3.f63

F

MHll

R3j/3

H

MH19

SIll

P

MH19

5111

V

MJ18

5111

P

MJ23

5111

J

PIN

I

A

Cross Reference

I

APPLICABLE
ONLY IF OPTION

MJ23

5111

P

MJ27

5111

J

MJ27

5111

V

LA28

Wj/j/S

LA28

Wj/18S

T
~

LA34

Wj/j/S

N

LA34

WIJj/S

V

LDj/2

BllS

J

LDj/2

BllS

P

LDj/2

B1l5

V

LEj/3

B1l5

J

183

LEj/3

B115

V

183

V

~

COMPANY CONRDOOIAI.
IPAGE

327

IIPAGEREVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE January 1973

All

IITechT;p
Number

" t he Li nc- 8
Incorrect Ca bi e L"J.S t"~ngs 1n

T I"t' e

~2

Processor Applicability

ILsl I I I I

Problem:

IAuthor

Rev

0

I

--l,

LINC - 8 -"TT- 2
Cross Reference

,r,A:-ppr-O-VO-:-':-H-"-L-0-N-:-G---o-a"-8---17-_-'7-Z

Incorrect cable listings in the LINC-8

Since the Line -8 was first introduced there has been a problem with
the cable listings.
The prints of the PDP-8 section give standard
PDP-8 cable connections, which for the Linc-8 are totally useless.
The PDP-8 section is the only part in error.
Solution:
Attached is a complete list of the cables of the Linc-8
their slot positions, part numbers, length and type of cable,
This list complements the list in the Maintenance Manual Vol 2
on page 72 and 73 (print 'O-IC-LINC 8-0-5 and '0-IC-LINC-8-0-6 I/O
cables) both these prints and these attached sheets should be
consulted before coming to the conclusion that a cable is missing
or a wiring error has been found.
Length-

Not'es

Type of Cable

Slot Positions

#I
'1

W034-W035
W034-W034

ff!

W034-W034

MA37 - peOl
MA38 - POOL
PEOI
ME36

5211
70"

-

30"

W034-W034

W034-W034
W031-W031

W031-W031
W034-W034
W034-W034
W033-W033

MF36
MA36
MD40
ME40
MF40
MH38
MJ39
MJ40
LH39
LH40
LJ 39
LJ40
MH39
MH40
MJ37
MJ38
LJ38
LH38
LA02
LAD 3
LA31

PFOl
- LAOl
- LOOl
LEOl
- LFOI
- LH03
- LJOZ
LJOI
PH02

50"

1011
10"
10"
10"

10"

P,art Number

74-5559
74-05554-10
74-05554-5

74-05554-8
74-05554-1

74-05554-1

10"
1011

10"

PHol

10"

PJ02
PJOl
- LH02
- LHOI
LJ04
- LJ03
- PJ03
PH03
PAOl
- PBOl
0836
INDol- PC38
IND02-PB38

10"
10"
12"
12"

74-05554-1
74-05552-2

12"
12"
1211
1211
52"

52"
80"

74-05552-2
74-05554-10
74-05554-10
74-055-3-5

80"

COM PANY CONRDDflIAI.
Page 328

Page -6-

mamalla I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

LINC 8 DIAGNOSTICS
Processor Applicability

All

I

[XJ

!2Bit

IL81

I I I I I

!6Bit

0 I

IBBit

0 I

36Bit

I

Option or Designator

LINC

0 I
ITech Tip

INumber LINC 8-TT-3

IAuthor

I
I

Steve LaMotte
Rev"
IApproval Dick Edwards Data 01/25/73

Cross Reference

Recently there has been a rash of outaqes and problem reports

on the line 8. The cammon complaint beinq that all diaqnostics
run but customer software fails. After closer examination, we
find that not all linc diaqnostics have been run, only sudsy.
The sudsy tape contains numerous other diaqnostics which are
necessary to test the line section. Amonq these are St. Louis
(BLK ,5"), INSTST, MTPTST, etc., which are listed and controlled
by quide while runninq under Proqofop.
/mt

Title
All

LINC 8 MEMORY CURRENT DISTORTION
Proeessor Applicability

I L81 a I I

I

I

I

IAuthor

Steve LaMotte

IITech
Tip
Number LINC
R.. (I

IApproval Dick Edwards Data 01/25/73

I
I

8-TT-4

Cross Reference

Due to different enqineerinq specifications between the T2,Sl and
T2,71 pulse transformers, cards in the memory control (G2,8, G2,9
and G6(13) must not be intermixed.
Mixinq of these transformers will cause a definite increase in the
current waterfall effect. This chanqe occurs because the T2,71 is
faster than the T2,51.

/lilt

COMPANYCIIIIIOYl
IPAGE 329

UPAGE REVISION

fI

I PUBLICATION DATE

January, 1973

Title
All

jL8

I

Tech Tip
Number LINC 8-TT-S

REWIRING OF MEMORY PANEL
Processor Applicability
IAuthor
I I I I I I IApproval

Steve Lamotte

Burt Bevers

Rev

g

Date 02/08173

I
I

Cross Reference

This wiring scheme reduces noise on the sense amp power
on slice voltage levels. It also removes t.he difference
in voltage levels between the odd and even sense amp input

lines MA2SE - MB25E. These lines have been noted to have
as much as .5 volts difference in voltage.
After installation of this tech tip, you may notice changes
in the read/write and inhibit current waveshapes.
A few pin connections have been changed to facilitate shorter
wire runs. All wires are to be laid as to avoid the R/W and

inhibit current windings, (yellow/black twisted pairs), found
in -the Me and MD memory racks. Most changes will be to run
wiring along the MO-ME wire lay from the MC-MD wire lay or from
diaqonal crossinq of the inhibit winding area. After wiring
chanqe is incorporated, most wires will (1) vertically run
between MD and ME racks and (2) horizontally along module 30
row (MA30, MB30, Me30 and MD30).
A future Line ECO will add a diode between "Memory Start"
.circuitry and "Read el}" circuitry. 'J'his change removes
unnecessary loading from the "Memory Start" logic and cable
noise from the "Read (1)" logic. This reduction of noise on

"Read" causes less waterfall effect on the "Read" current
waveshape.
Thus when this Tech Tip and future ECO is installed, a change in
currect waveshape can be anticipated as follows:*
Readtwrite Current

BEFORE

AFTER

(1)

Reduced waterfall effect on Read Current

(2)

Less ringing - but more distinct overshoot.

COMPANY CONfIDENTIAl.
Page 330

mamaala l

J

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

112Bit
Title

00'

01

18Bit

01

36Bit

0 I

I

ILSI I J J J I

IAuthor

LINC-S

Tech Tip

REWIRING OF MEMORY PANEL (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

Option or Designator

Number LINe 8-TT- 5

Steve Lamotte

Rev,

J

,I-A-W-OY-'-I-B:;"u;;"r:;"t-B-e-y,e-r-s-D:-.-te-O-2-1L'-O~S-/-7-3--j1,

Cross Reference

INHIBIT CURRENT

It Jl
BEFORE

(1)

a.
b.

*

AFTER

Much sharper waveshape

NOTE:

With less rounding of leading edge and
level upper limit instead of slope.
These wave shapes will not be so distince a change

in most systems (show ideal condition).

Make all deletions first when installing:

(Continued on next page) .•.

COM PANY C8JIIIIBfJIAL
IPAGE 331

UPAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

T I

it e

All

ITech Tip
INumber LINC 8-TT-S

REWIRING OF MEMORY PANEL (Continued)

Processor Applicability

1 Author

ILsi I I I I I IApproval

~

B.

T.om.,r..,
Beyers

Rev
Date

Write
Read

I

COMPONENTS

SIGNAL NAME

Write

T Cross Referenc:e

n

02/08/73

(B)

MC16T

MClSD

x

(B)

MC16T

MDlSD

x

MC16J

MCISE

x

(B)

x

Read

(B)

MC16J

MD1SE

MA

(1)

MD094

MD084

MA

(1)

MD084

MB3SR

X

MA

(1)

MD094

MC16E

X

MA 11 (0)

MD1ST

MD34F

X

MAll

MD1ST

MC37V

X

strobe

MD20N

MB2SL

x

Tl

MC20R

MA34v

Tl

MC20R

MD30D

x

Slice

MA2SH

MB2SH

x

Slice Return

MA25M

MB2SM

x

+lOV

MA25A

MH13P

x

+lOV

MB25A

MJ13H

X

-15V

MA25B

MH13T

x

-15V

MB25B

MJ13K

x

+lOV

MB25D

MH13A

x

+lOV

MH13P

MH13R

x

X

-15V

MJ13K

MJ13L

X

X

(0)

COMPANYCIIIIiRUl
Page 332

DIGITAL

x

EGUIF'MENT

CORI"OF'lATION

X

mamBOla l

AELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

l2Bit

I2iIJ

l6Bit

0 I

l8Bit

OJ

36Bit

Processor Applicability

IL81 I I I I I

IAuthor

Bevers

LINC 8

iTochTip

Steve Lamotte

1A~val Burt

Option or Designator

0 J

REWIRING OF MEMORY PANEL (Continued)

All

I

Rev

i Number

LINC 8-TT-S

I

Cross Reference

0

Date 02/08/731

MAKE DELETIONS FIRST WHEN INSTALLING

~

SIGNAL NAME

~

COMPONENTS

ADD DEL

+lOV

MA29A

MH13P

X

+lOV

MB29A

MJ13H

X

-lSV

MA29B

MH13T

X

-15V

MB29B

MJ13K

X

+lOV

MB30D

MH13A

X

COMPANY~
I

II

PAGE
'
. 333
" PAGE REVISION

0

DPUBLICATION DATE

rthrnnTY ) 973

Title

All

I

REIIl:RING OF MEMORY PANEL (Cont.inued)
- . Applicability

IAu_

L8 I I I I I I IApproval

St.eve Lamot.t.e
B

Bev......

Tech Tip
Number Line 8-'1"1'-5
Cross Refers...,

I

Rev 0

Date n U n .

1

MAKE ALL DELETIONS FIRST WIlEN INSTALLING

12..X!!!

MD12D

MD09D

Avoid,

wind

'!:

X

Read (B)

MD12E

MD09E

Avoid R/W wind

X

X

MB (0)

MC2lH

MC23D

Avoid Inhibit

X

X

MD09S

MC33R

Avoid Inhibit.

X

X

X

X
X

MA

(1)

COMPONENTS

~DEL

FROM PIN

Write (B)

SIGNAL NAME

R/W

MA 7 (1)

MC15V

MC3SR

Avoid Inhibit.

MAS (1)

MClSS

MD31R

Avoid Inhibit.

X

Writ.e. (B)

MC16T

MD1SD

4.7

resistor

X

Write (B)

MCISD

AD1SD

wire

Read (B)

MCISE

MD1SE

wire

MC16J

MCISE

4.7

MA3 (1)

MD094

MB3SR

X

(1)

MB3SR

MC36E

X

MA 11 (0)

MDIST

MC3TV

X

MA 11 (0)

MC37V

MD34F

X

strobe

MD20N

MB30L

X

TI

MC20R

MA34V

X

TI

MA34V

MD30D

X

Slice

MA31H

MB3lH

X

Slice Return

MA3lM

MB3lM

X

Read (B)

MA

eOIPANY CIIIIDIAL
Page 334

OII3ITAL

EGUIPMENT

X
X

resistor

CORF'OFIATION

X

--11-0 I

~UWuus;l

Titi.
All

FlaD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I 12Bit lill

18Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

38Bit

Processor Applicability

MJ

IADe-

MF

Steve Lamotte

ME

LINC S

ITechTip
INumber LINC 8-TT-5

lA_lB. Beyers

MR

Option or Deoi~

0 I

REWIRING OF MEMORY PANEL (COntinued)

ILSI I I I I I

I

Row

Date

MD

/

0

I

Cross Reference

02.0S.73I

Me

MB

MA
I

5
Io

R/W

..
III
0

:0:

10

p.o

J/I

INHIBIT

"~

~

"\ ~

:0:

""

~

36

~()

Wirinq layout should follow this rouqh drawinq

COMPANY~
§ 2 3 5 UPAGE.REVISION

IPUBLICATIONDATE February 1973

Title

LINC TAPE MAINTENANCE - UNIT SWITCH
Processor Applicability
Author Steve Lamotte

All

ir,s

I I I I I I

I

IApproval

B. Beyers

Date

ITech Tip
INumber LINC S-TT-6
Rev

J

0

02.0S.73

Cross Rat.......

I

This switch is useful in the maintenance of the Linc Tape.
As it can easily accommodate the testing of tape unit 1,
with normal Line diagnostios.
1.

PARTS
Descri2tion

Quantity

DPDT Switch

1

12-04816

1

12-04648

Pin Cannon Plug

DEC Part NUmber

feet

Connector cable
CANNON PLUG:

19-07706

DPDT SWITCH:

Plug JUmpers E-F
H-J
SWitch JUmpers
1-4
2-5

Plug

-

Cable

SWitch

A
B

GRN
WIlT

6
3

C

BLK

D

RED

1
2

K Open Pin
Note:

Insure plug hood is on cable correctly before soldering
cable to Plug Terminals.

COMPANY CIJIfIm~
Pa9'e 336

momooma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
.
Title

I

g I

12Bit

lSBit

0 I

36Bit

LINC

0 I

!

TechTiP
Number LINC S-TT-7

LINC 8- CLAMP LOAD LISTING
Processor Applicability

All

0 I

16Bit

OPtion or Designator

IAuthor

Steve Lamott
Rev 0
---l
~--~~~~~------~

ILSI I I I I I IApproval

Beyers

Date

02.08.73

Cross Reference

I

A listing of the unused clamp loads within the normal (basic)
Linc-8, has never been compiled in the past.
First, a word about the clamp load and its uses.

There are

basically 3 types of clamp loads - 2ma, Sma and 10 rna with
singleshots and flip-flops being of a special type.
The clamp, when driven to ground acts as a load of its given
value, thus removing that value of driving c~pability from the
circuit. Although when the clamp is driven to -3 volts, it acts

as a supply - 2 rna will supply 1.4 rna,S rna will supply 3.5ma
and 10 rna will supply 7.8 rna at -3 volts.
Each circuit in the Linc-8 needs I (one) rna as an input from
, to -3 volts, and has an 18 rna output driving capability, except
flip-flops and single shots which have 17 rna s output.
I

In conclusion, adding a clamp will improve fall t~e and -3 volts
driving capability, but at a cost of the ground driving and noise
immuni ty capability of the output cireui t. So before adding a
clamp load, take into account 1.

What logic level is (active) needed on the output
to be clamped.

2.

How manY circuits are already being driven by the output
circuit.

3.

If the output is ground (as a logical one), how much
is to be labeled
to achieve the added drive.
!MODULE TYPE
S
R )3
B 4

B
W

~,

l'.l~A;/C4I\MP
.P.V
H.
H

.

J,P,V

BLl.

F

WQ02
W

D thru V
ru
D.E

w,u

LOAD.
GND
SMA
QMA
LQMA
9MA
MA
LOMA

DRIVE SUPPLY
at -3 Volts
• SMA

..8Ml\
.8MA

MA
.8MA

COM PANY CONFIIIENTW.
IPAGE

337

" PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

LINC-8 CLAMP LOAD LISTING

Title

AU

Processor Applicability

IL81 I

I

I

I I

Module

Module

~

~

LAuthor

(Continued)
S

LaMotte

Rev

LINe 8-TT-7

11

Cross Reference

I

Ir.A:-ppro--"-:I":B":~--=B':';e'-y=-e=-rs:"::"--D-.t-.-O-2-/-0~8:"'/-?-3-l1

Pin

PA24

Sill

P

PA2?

S111

J

PA2?

S111

P

PA2?

Sill

V

*Comrnents

-----------------------------------------------PA3Q

S111

V

PA36

W501

D

PBZ3

S111

V

PB29

Sill

J

PB32

S111

J

PB32

S111

p

pe28

S111

P

PD24

S111

P

PD2?

S111

V

PEl?

S111

J

182

PEl?

S111

P

182

PEl?

S111

V

182

PE20

Sill

J

182

PE20

S111

P

182

PE20

S111

V

182

PE26

S111

J

182

------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------page

ITech Tip
INumber

338COM PANYCONRDOOIAL

mamaamD IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

12Bit

Qg

168i1

0I

18Bi1

OJ

36Bi1

IAuthor

ITech Tip

~Number LINC a-TT-7

Steve Lamotte

tR I I I I I I IApproval

R

R.

LINC

01

LINC 8 CLAMP LOAD LISTING (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All

I

Option or Designator

Module

Module

~

~

Pin

PE26

SIll

P

182

FE27

SIll

P

182

PE34

SIll

J

182

PE34

Slll

P

182

J

Rev 0

Date

Cross Reference

OVOR/?,I

*Cornments

PE3S

Slll

P

182

PF08

W501

D

KROl

PF29

SIll

P

182

PF29

sIll

v

182

PF31

5111

J

182

PF34

SIll

J

182

PF34

Slll

P

182

PH07

WOO2

v

Line Interface

PJ21

SIll

V

FPP12

-----------------------------------------------MA39

WOOS

N

MA39

WOOS

V

MEIO

SIll

V

All Pins N
to V

188

COMPANY CONFIDENDAL
IPAGE

339

II PAGE REVISION

0

UPUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Title

LINC 8 CLAMP LOAD LISTING (Continued)

IAuthor
ILSI I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

All

MODULE

~

1~::!~Line

I

Rev
Steve Lamotte
0
Dote
B. Beyers
02/08/'-3\

MODULE
~

~.

!:!!L

ME16

SIll

P

ME16

SIll

V

ME3?

WOOS

T

ME3?

WOOS

U

ME3?

WOOS

V

MFOI

S111

V

183

MF09

BI04

M

1S8

MF09

BI04

S

IS8

MF19

WSOI

D

MHOS

R303

H

Line Tape

MHOS

R303

F

Line Tape

MHll

R303

H

Line Tape

MHll

R303

F

Line Tape

S111

P

Line Tape

MH19

S111

V

Line Tape

MJIS

SIll

P

Line Tape

MJ23

S111

J

Line Tape

MJ23

S111

P

Line Tape

MJ2?

S111

J

Line Tape

MJ2?

S111

V

Line Tape

LA2S

WOOS

T

LA2S

WOOS

U

LA2S

WOOS

V

MH19

COMPANY CONRDENTIAL
Page 340

8-TT-7

Cross Reference

DIGITAL

EQUiPMENT

CORPORATION

· . 110 I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mama

I 12Bit 11£11

1.6Bil

01

laBil

01

36Bit

IAuthor

All

ITech Tip
INumber

All

Steve Lamotte

Rev

0

I

LINC 8-TT-7

Cross Reference

MODULE

COMMENTS·

~

PIN

LA34

WOOS

N

LA34

WOO5

V

LOO2

B11S

J

LD02

B115

P

LOO2

B115

V

LE03

B115

J

183

LE03

B115

V

183

OB18

W501

E

Data

OB19

RIll

P

Panel 1 Sec.

DB19

Rlll

V

Clock

LINC-B

AID NOISE &

Pr0<:8SS0r Applicability

L-8

LINC S

ILsi I I I I I Ir,A:-"pprov--.I:-=B-=.::.cB:..:e:....=v'er=s==:D-.ta-O-2-:/-(08"-1/-~7-i31
MOOULE
LOCATION

Title

Option or Designator

0 1

Tide LINC 8 CLAMP LOAD LISTING (Continued)
Processor Applicability

I

I I .1
I I I 1

Al.l Pins N to V

I~ech Tip
Number

L I Nc-B-TT-B

Roy

1

.CrossRere-

5/2/74

I

COUPL I NG

IAuthor

s.

laMot te

IApprovalLarry Lewis

Data

Terminal

linc-8 AID channels 10-17 have a tendency to crosstalk thru, and/or
pick up noise from, the AID power system.
By adding bypass capacitors
to the + and - 5 vdc power regulator outputs, in the data terminal
panel, most of the problem can be elfminated.
~
Comeonent

~

~

~

!.ELl

6.B

DB31 V (+)

DB3IC{-)

+ 5vdc

10-05306

(- )

DB30C (+)

- 5vd.c

m i crof 35vdc

6.8 mlcrof 35vdc

DB31U

COIPANY_
IPAGE

341

UPAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE

May 1974

-- NOTES --

342

mamBDID I

AELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12 Bit ~

I

16 Bit

®I

18 Bit

IiU I

36 Bit

Option or Designator

IXI I

I

Title KEYBOARD SHORTS CAUSED BY PAPERCLIPS, ETC.

AXil I IProcesso
,'I APPIlicabl/'"77)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
Paqe 346

LKOI

'"

mamalma I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Ti.le

12Bi'

!!II

16Bi.

I!J 1 18Bi•

~

I

I

36Bit ~l

CPL
Option or Designator

LK01

ITech Tip

LK01 KEYBOARDS

I~uthor
A~I I I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

JNumber

Al Mathews
Lou Nay

t\---Da..

I
10-24-73 I

Rev

16

LK01-TT-3
Cross Reference

Some intermittent keyboard problems which affect only one or two keys are
caused by small metal fragments (apparently manufacturing debris) which
become embedded in the dielectric coatinq which covers the cireui t etch
on the keyboard.

When the key is depressed, the metal plate on the under-

side of the key pushes the conductive fragments through the dielectric,
contacting the keypads of the etch associated with that key causing D.C.
coupling and noise where only A.C. coupling is desired.
The solution of course is to remove the particles but keep in mind that
well embedd'ed particles are difficult to remove.

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAL
JPAGE 347

DPAGE

REVISION

"

DPUBLICATION DATE OCTOBER

1973

-- NOTES --

348

mamaD!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12Bit

iii I

0 I

18Bit

01

36Bit

Ol

ISEI I I I I I

Option or Designator
LKOI-R

ITe.h Tip LK01R
INumber TT-1

NUMERIC KEYPADS
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

I

I~A_Uth_or_...:J",O",hn=.:.w",o",e",l",b",e::::r.::n_~R_"_..:o~---l1
IApprOVal B. Lawrence

Date 8/13/74

Cross Reference

1 DS300-TT-2

The light grey key caps for the mechanical keyboard, LKOIR, have been

assigned the following part number:
9JH1957/1-B/I
NOTE:

(Set of 10)

These are not interchangeable with the ones used on the LKOI
Keyboard

IPAGE

349

(PIN 9/1-/19148-/1-74).

nPAGE REVISION

UPUBLICATION DATE

AU9ust

1974

-- NOTES --

350

mamaa!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

Qg

I

1.6Bit ~

I

18Bit ~

I

36Bit

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

Bi 11 Freeman

I I I I I I I IApproval Bill

LPOl

ITech Tip
INumbar LPOl-TT-l
Rev

0

Cwmnins Date June 1

The AS13 module used in the 231~ and 241~
by Data Products have spare qates used on
are prone to pick up noise. Pins 5 and 6
I.C.'s should be tied to ground. (Module

CPL
Option or Designator

00 I

NOISE PROBLEM ON DATA PRODUCTS LINE PRINTER

All

X

12Bit

I

I

Cross Reference

_I

line printers manufactured
the transducer amp which
on the Zl~l, Z2~1 and Z3~l
Pin 2 or 6~).

/mt

e

..

,~

11

II
II

~

!d

b: IU

11

II

if
"
l!

H H

LL
if

~Hl
.... 91
~, 6

H

"1u!

II

ZIOI,Z20I,Z301

ur
.. b

n

0

COl PANY CONfIDENTIAl.
IPAGE 351

RPAGEREVISION

0

HPUBLICATIONDATE JUne 1972

T;'1e

ITech Tip

LPOI/LP02 HAMMER BANK MAGNETS

INumber LPOl-TT-2
Rev

Date

I

0

Cross Reference

I

6/6/72

When replacing hammers be extremely careful - do not exert stress on
the per.manent magnets either side of the hammer being replaced because
these magnets may break away from the base plate.
If a magnet breaks off it can be reinstalled with a
Two Part epoxy compound using the following steps:
1.

~

amount of

Thoroughly clean the broken magnet and its base plate position

after removing adjacent hammers.
2.

Check the magnet's polarity by inserting between adjacent magnets.
If it is repelled turn the magnet aver and note the attitude in

which it must be inserted.
3.

Apply a small amount of two part epoxy to the mating surfaces,
removing excess. Join magnet to base plate. Check for squeeze

out of epoxy and wipe away excess. Shim the magnet with cardboard
to maintain hannner clearance on either side and let dry overnight.
4.

Replace the hammers and check for clearance between hammers and
epoxied maqnet. Complete reassembly and test.

{!'fL
T;,le

2310 ;ATA PRODUCT LINE PRINTER - BACK PANEL INFO.ITNOCh T;p LPOl-TT-3
Processor AppUcabmty

All

X

IAu~r

I I I I I I I IApproval

'II

D. Oldham

H. Lena

Rev 0

Date 6/6/72

umber

I

Cross Ref....nce

I

Extreme care should be taken when tightening down the screws that hold
the plastic panel on the card cage on Data Products printers. Tightening down on these screws too hard can crack the bussed runs in back of
the wiring panel, and they are impossible to repair.
one of the most pronounced symptoms is a fluctuating +12V line to
individual modules, the most susceptible being the AHIO, hammer driver
module, where the 2 ohm resistor and driver transistor are destroyed
when the +12V is lost.
BCD LPOl-jljljljl9 checks for a complete loss of the +22 or +12V line to
protect the hammer driver modules, but will never detect +12V loss to
and individual module.

COMPANY CONFIDDfJIAI.
Page 352

mamaa!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12 Bit

Ii]

I

16 Bit

IiU I

18 Bit

[iI

I

36 Bit

X

CPL

Option or Designator
LPOl

I
ITech
Tip
Number LPOI-TT-4

Qj)

Tide

All

I

DATA PRODUCTS SEMI-CONDUCTOR CREF
Processor Applicability
lj..:..:A.::.Uth=-0<~.D4'..!!O!!:LD~HAM:!!!!l,-_ _ _ _ _R__ev
_____--I1

I I I I I I I

lA_oval u

,m"

Date ""

77

Cross Reference

I

This is a list of replacement
Line Printer.

semiconductors and resistors for Data Products

DATA P', PIN

DEC PIN

DESCRIPTION

MFG. NAME'S & PIN'S

800~18-001

15-09523
29-16826
19-05577
19-05578
19-05579
19-05576
19-05575
19-05580
13-00202
19-09004
19-1J5585
29-17394
29-17781
15-\11742

Transistor DPC2~2/2~2A
Transistor DPC201C

MOTOROLA It 2N4233

RCA # 2N3054
800019-001
8\T0020-001
800021-001
800022 -001
8000 23-001
800024-001
800026-001
800030-470
800080-001
89'0081-001
81111088-001
81'0088-0111
8000 89 -0111
8~~~93-~~1

8~9~95-~!l1

1l-~4861

8~0132-'~1

15-93121
15-,187,
29-16780
29-16830

8~~133-0'1

8fl,186-991

I.C. ,
r.LJ
I.C. ,
I.C. ,

7420
7430
7440
7410
I.e., 7400
I.e. I 7450
Resistor 1 47 If4w 5%
I.e. , 7402
I.e. , 7476

Transistor. 2N3253
Transistor" 2N3253
Transistor, 2NZ9{14
Diode, IN4154
Diode~ IN4\ljl2
Transistor, DPC295A
Transistor, 2N2894

I.C"

OP AMP 1M711CN

Diode, Z 5.6V IN5232

8'9192-~01
8'9195-~91

29-17875
29-17909
29-16894
29-16831
29-17785
29-16781
29-16781
29-16782
29-17509
29-17934
29-16829

~195·9IH

29-17996

OPAMP, 1M709CN

811,187-9,1
809188-9~1

899188-9'1
899188-991
89i!'199-991
81f919'-9I1I
899191-991
899192-991

Resistor I' 1 1 w 1%
Resistor,. 2 1 w 1%

80021,-1119
809219-2_5

IPAGE

353

Diode, Z 9.1V IN757A
Diode, Z 9.1V IN757A
Diode, Z 9.1V IN757A
SCR, lRIAC 2N4213
SCR, TRIAC 2N1595
Transistor 2NIS97
2N683
SCR.
2N683
SCR,
OPAMP, 1M707 CN

MOTOROLA
Sprague SN7420N
Sprague SN7430N
Sprague SN7440N
Sprague SN7410N
Sprague SN7400N
Sprague SN7450N

--- -- ----------

Sprague SN7402N
Sprague SN7476N
Motorola 2N3253
Motorola 2N3253
Motorola 2N2994
I.T.T. IN4154
I.T.T. IN4~92
Motorola 2N2369
Motorola 2N2894
Nat! t Semicond.
LM711 CN
Motorola IN5232
C.D.C. IN7S7A
C.D.C IN757A
C.D.C. 1:z:
cC
a..

i

\

IVf~~
1,

c::::»

.1

I

\

::IE

,I

,i
!

"0.

362

V;

01

I

c.:t

Page

3A

V
I

i,
I

.f

I

Multiple

Er ror is time between
po sitive upswing of
wa veform. Adjust hammer
t2 1 (25) so hanuner H
an d hammer #21 (25) occur
at same time.

mBmBama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12 Bit

lID I

Title

Lrc~Vlfn~~d~ER

All

Processor Applicability

X

I I

I

I

I

I

I

[liJ I

16 Bit

18 Bit

00 I

36 Bit ~

Option or Designator

LP01

I

I~:'."~~~ LP01-TT-

FLIGHT TIME ADJUSTMENT

IAuthor

R. Rasmussen

IApproval

W. Cummins Date 07/31/721

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

10) After hammer #21 (25) has been adjusted, change scopes setting
back to ADD channel B inverted. Now adjust hanuner 22 (26) per
Figure - 2A. Adjusting out error pulse. Continue by adjusting
hammers 23 (27) through 40, then change interface card for
zones 1, 2 and 3.

11) Now adjust hammer 1141 (49) to coincide with hammer U

and 21 (25).

12) Adjust hammer 1142 (SO) through 60 (72) as hammers 2-20 (24) and
22 - 40(26-4a) were adjusted.
13) Change zones to I, 2,

3~

and 4.

14) Adjust hammer 61(73) to coincide with hammers 1, 21, 41, (1, 25,
49) •
15) Now adjust hammers 1162(74) through aO(96) as hammer 2-20(2-24),
22-40(26-4a), and 42-60(50-72) were adjusted.
16) For LP02 I S continue adjusting hammers in zones 5 & 6 in the same
manner.
(That is; hammers 97 through 120, and 121 through 132).
This should provide a faster (3-4 times) and much more accurate
setup for the hanuners.

r I
It

All

e.

ELIMINATION OF AUTOMATIC PERFORATION STEPOVER
Processor Applicability

';( J a l 8 j
How

III I I I

IAuthor

H. F i tek

!Approval W

Cummins

Rev

IITech
Tip
Number
A

Date 07/31/72

I

LPOI-TT.

I

to prevent automatic perforation stepover.

2310 printer (80 Col.)

Vendor Serial Numbers
041, 153, 159, 165, 080, 093, 124, 133,
158, 159, 160, 167, 168, 175, 178, 179,
188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 197,
203 and up through #555.
serial 1556 &
perforation stepover.
1. Remove wire between A9-32 and A4-25
2. Remove wire between A9-10 and A4-20
3. Add w~l:e between A4-20 and A4-28.

134, 144, 156, 157,
180, 182, 186, 187,
198, 199, 200, 201,
up ~ have auto

For all other serial numbers, remove wire between A9-32 and
A4-25.

IPAGE 363

II PAGE REVISION

C

nPUBLICATION DATF

10

Cross Reference

.Tulv 1974

Tide

All

J

DATA PRODUCTS C.I.B.

Process<>
, ' , AppI,icab1ilityl

I I

ITech Tip
INumber

(AZ=19 Substitution)

If-A_u_"""'
___R:.;..:.....;s:;;h;:.;e:..;l:..;l:..;e"y_ _ _ _R_ev-'o=--_-j1

IApprov.1

w.

Cummins

Date 07/31/72

LPOI-TT-ll
Cross Reference

I

A customer information bulletin from Data Products is as follows:
Change Description:
The AZ-19~ Hammer Interlock, circuit board assembly (PIN 212500) is
being replaced by an AZ-167 (PIN 215565).
The reason for this change
is to improve voltage loss detection.
The AZ-167 will perform the
function of the AZ-19 and voltage monitor circuit (PIN 214278-2).

The paper guide/ribbon guide assembly (reference 2410.Manual Fig. 3-4)
is being eliminated.
This change will simplify mechanical alignment
and make the units less susceptible to operator abuse.
The change
also reduces "smudging" by minimizing unwanted contact between paper
and ribbon.
Effectivity:
The AZ-167 will be incorporated at SIN 2525 scheduled for October
delivery.
The AZ-167 can be used in~erchangeably with the AZ-19 in
all units.
The AZ-19 cannot be used in units above SIN 2525.
This
change will also be implemented in the Model 2310 in the near future.
The paper guide/ribbon guide will not be used after SIN 2492.
Title

All

'f-'

INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC PERFORATION STEPOVER

IAuthor w.
I I , I I I IAppro••1 w.
Processor Applicability

Cwmnins
cummins

Rev

ITech Tip
INumber
0

Oat. 07/31/72

I
I

LPOI-TT-12

Cross Reference

All Data Product Line Printers (2310-80 column) delivered to DEC
that are above Data Product serial number 556 DO NOT HAVE autoIf you have any customers
who desire this feature, the following change must be made:

matic perforation stepover installed.

Add a wire from 9-27 to 4-25 on the logic cage.
Title

All

ITech Tip

LPOI 96-Character Drum

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

iNumber LPOl-TT-13

J. Lacey

Rev

0

I

li I I 1 1 I I I II-:-,Appr-O-V.I:--'W'-'-.=cummc::.::::.....in-s-=0-at·-----==----11

Cross Reference

The LPOI normally has a 64-character print drum, but as an option
a 96-character print drum is available. Unfortunately there is
.very little information in the Data Products Corporation Technical
Manual regarding this option, which has caused some concern. The
following provides additional information.

1.
PAGE

364

Nonprintab1e Code Detector

(Figure 6-7)
Pin 31 on the input is grounded thus making 140 through

177 legal.

mamOlla I
I
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bi' [)

16Bi'

I

[J

lSBi'

[jj

I

36Bi'

Processor Applicability

2)

CPL
Option or Designator

LPOl

KJ I

ITech Tip

LPOl 96 CHARACTER DRUM (Continued)

I I I I I I

INumber LPOl-TT-13

II-.A_U_th_OI'
__
J_._La_c_e..:y'-_ _ _ _R_ev_ _
O_-If
w. Cummins Date 07/31172 I

Cross Reference

IApproval

Character Code Wheel (Figure 5-23)
In paragraph 5-55 step 3, substitute "N and On in the
place of "=a n •
ITech Tip

Title

PROBLEMS ATTRIBUTED TO THE STATIC ELIMINATOR

All
X

I

I

Processor Applicability

\

IAuthor

D. Oldham

Rev

LPOl-TT-14

INumber
0

I

Cross Reference

I I I I I I II-A-ppro-V-.I-H-'.-Lo-n-Og-'-'---O-ate-s/-15-I-n.....j1

Most static eliminator problems are caused by dirt, and can
be corrected usin9 the following procedure.
NOTE:

1)

Item numbers in brackets refer to drawing below.

Clean the bar or wand itself by brushing the dust off the
wires and associated holes in the bar.

Wipe the entire

bar with an Ispropyl Alcohol dampered cloth removinq all
dull residue from the plastic.
2.

Remove the cable end from the transformer (item 4) and
polish with fine sandpaper.

3.

Clean the spring loaded pin in the center of the transformer connector (item #3).

4.

Carefully disassemble the cable connection at the wand,

removing

a)

the cable

b)

the threaded rod adapter with the spring loaded pin
contacts and be careful the plastic is soft and deforms easily ..

Now clean and pollsh the contacting surfaces (items

and 2).
5.

Reassemble and test printer operation.
If the same
symptoms exist after performing the above procedure,
check the eliminator bar. Using a medium length, flat
bladed, plastic handled screwdriver ..
a)

With power on ground the shank of the screwdriver to

the paper guide cage.

COM PANY CONFIDENHAL
\PAGE 365

HPAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

May 1974

Title

~~?BL~S~fTRIBUTED TO THE STATIC ELIMINATOR

IAuthor D ..
I I I I I I IApproval H.
Processor Applicability

b)

Advance a corner
the spring point
should be an ARC
than 1/8 n and no

Oldham
Long

Rev

ITech Tip
INum~r

LPOI-TT-14

J

Cross Reference

0

Date 8/15/72

I

of the screwdriver blade towards
in each orifice of the bar. There
of between 1/8· and 1/4·. No less
more than 5/16 n ..

Repeat this for each hole and point in the bar ..
If any hole fails this test replace the bar.
If no ARC is present anywhere along the bar, do the
following.
1.

Check primary power to the eliminator transformer.
If OK, go the the next step ..

2.

Replace static eliminator assembly (the assembly
includes the bar) ..

Part Numbers for the above are;
115 Volts 50/60 Hz
LPOI
LPOI
'LPOI
LP02

Bar •••••••••••• 29-17943
Transformer •••• 29-17944
Assembly ••••••• 29-17520
Bar •••••••••••• 29-19364
LP02 Transformer •••• 29-17944
'LP02 Assembly ••••••• 29-19407

Other Vols 50/60 Hz
29-17943
Note 1
Note 1
29-19364
Note 1
Note 1

*Ass'embly contains bar, cable, transformer and hardware.
Note 1:

PAGE

366

Specify voltage 'at time of order (i .. e. 23."V).

. maama I
ma
r

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Title

IjiJ

I

[Jj

ISBit

I

ISBit

10 I

36Bit

[Jj

~~~~~I:::,,~~TRIBUTED TO THE STATIC ELIMINATE R

Title

A~I

12Bit

Processor Applicability

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor
IApproval

D. Oldham

H. Long

I
I

LPOI

ITech
Tip LPOl-TT-14
Number
Rev

0

Date 8/15/72

I
I

Cross Reference

LPOl-TT-15

Data Products Line Printer Ribbon

All

Option or Designator

Author

R.K. Stannard

Approval

w.

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 10.13. 72

The end of a Line Printer ribbons life is often caused
by stretching and skew problems, which eventually cause
it to tear or maybe get jammed in the drum.
As most printers call for routine cleaning of the drum

area on a weekly (maybe monthly) basis, it is a good idea
to reverse the ribbon rolls (top to bottom) at this time
to even out any stretchinq that has taken place and siqnii'icantly improve ribbon life.

IPAGE 367

II PAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE May 1974

Title

ITech Tip

LPOI/LP02 ZONE CONTROL PROBLEM

IAuthor J. Byeyer/O,
~II I I I I I I I IApproval W. Cummins
Processor Applicability

[!\lumber LPOI-TT-16

Oldhalllev!6
Date 02/16/73

I
I

Cross Reference

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION:

Zone control logic resets to zone one somewhere in the middle of
printed a line.
The problem may be very intermittent and may only occur when printing
sliding alpha-pattern on full lines. A bad print line will be
completely blank in one or more right hand zones, and the characters
fron those zones will be printed over good characters in the left
hand zones on the same line. Changing logic cards will not affect
this problem at all.
PROBLEM CAUSE.

A cracked hanmer return spring generating noise on the +65 volt power
supply.
TROUBLESHOOTING:

1)

Visually examine all of the hammer modules.
cannot bE seen, do the following:

If the cracked spring

2)

The bad hammer module will be in the last zone printed before ··the
zone control reset failure.
Example: If the bad hammer is in
zone 2, zones 1 and 2 will be over-printed, and zones 3 and 4 on
an LPOl will be blank. On an LP02, zones 3 and 4 may contain
characters from zones 5 and 6 (5 and 6 will be blank).

3)

Remove power from the printed and locate the +65 volt leads to
the odd hammers.
(Nqte! The +65 volt supply takeS abQllt three
minutes to bleed off. Meter the lead on the hammer bank for no

voltage.)
4)

Pull the +65 volt lead to the odd hammers of the zone identified
in step 2 and carefully insulate the lead from frame ground.

5)

Apply power to the printer and see if the sliding alpha-print
pattern still fails.
(Note: The odd hammers will not fire in
the zone where you pulled the +65 volt lead.)

6)

If the zone control still fails, the bad hammer is one of the even
hammers of the zone. If the print line is normal, except for not
printing the odd hammers of one zone, the bad hammer is one of the
odd hammers of the zone.

7)

Remove power from the printer and after checking the +65 volt
lead for no voltage, reinsert the lead that yay pulled in Step 4.

PAGE 368

rPl
Option or Designator

LPOI
Titl.

LPOl/LP02 ZONE CONTROL PROBLEM

(Continued)

ITech Tip
INumber

LPOl/TT-16

IAu"""'J. Breyer/D.Oldham Row 0 I
I I I I I I I IA""""",I W. CWmnins Dale 02/16/7~
Processor Applicability

A:

8)

Pull a lead for the lowest numbered hanmter in the bad zone,
from either the odd or the even hammer bank as indicated by

9)

Apply power to the printer and see if the slidinq alphapattern still fails.
(Note: The disconnected hammer will not
fire in any case.)

Step 6.

Carefully insulate the lead from frame ground.

10) If the print line is normal, except for one blank, column, you
have found the bad hammer module. Replace it. (Data Products
Part Number 208504-1, DEC Part Number 29-16783.)
11) If the zone control still fails, remove power from the printer
and repeat steps B throuqh 10 for each odd or even hammer in
the bad hammer is located and replaced.
WARNING:

The +65 volts for the hammers also qoes to the A3 card caqe.
Careless troubleshootinq can lead to disaster!
Title

ITech Tip

DRUM GA'!'B LIGH'r BULB FAILURE

Procossor Applicability

INumberLPOl-TT-l7

II-Au_"""'
__A_l_S_h_i_'"_e_r_ _ _ _ _R_W_O_ _--l1

~I II I I I I IA"""""" Harold

LonG'

Date 02/26/73

Nben drum gate light bulb burns outs the
go readg.

~jn.

Cross Reference

I

prlntsr will not

It opens the +12V that starts the 10 second delag.

If desired, a 1-2K resistor across the light sDcket will
allow the logic level to get through when ehe bulb 1s open and

will not

IPAGE' 369

a~rect

normal operation with a good bulb.

BPAGE REVISION B

'PUBLICATION DATE August 1974

Title

Rev

All

Cross Reference

Date 9(11/73

LP02

The upper paper out switch on the Data Products 2310 and 2410
printers may appear to be sensitive, causing the printer to go
NOT READY intermittently.

Data Products makes the following recommendations:
1. Paper weight (single part) must be 15 lbs. minimum.

2. Make sure the mercury capsule switch is mounted such that its
contacts are in a horizontal plane.

I

Tech Tip
Number LPOI-TT-19

Title
DRUM 'SSEMBLY

Processor Applicability

A:

I I I I I I I

II-A_ut_h_or_r,,",R-JBOJo.ue'-!hurn' --____' _R_ev_...!o'----

Date

0

6/6/72

J

Cross Reference

1 LPOI-TT-4
CPL

iTech Tip

Title

INumber

MARK IV HAMMER DESIGN CHANGE

~II I .1

Processor Applicability

1

IlL

IAuthor

D. Oldham

Rev

0

I

1 Ii-A-ppra--v.-:I-=H..:......:::.Lo:::n::g='---:cO-.te--:6'"'1"'6-:/;;.72::--i1

LP02-TT-4

Cross Reference
LPOI-TT-5

COMPANY CONfIDENTIAL
IPAGE

371

II PAGE REVISION

0

"PUBLICATION DATE

June 13. 1972

T~

ITech Tip
, INumber

LP02 CHANGES
Processor Applicability

II-A_u_""'_r__R_,_S_h_e_l_le-'y=-_ _ _R_ev_ _
O_--I,

~ I I I I I I I IApproval
1}

w. Cummins

LP02-TT-5
Cross Reference

I

Date 06128/72

The AZ-19, Hammer Inter1ock, circuit board assembly

(PIN 212500) is being replaced by an AZ-167 (P/N 215565),
The reason for this change is to improve voltage loss
detection. The AZ-167 will perform the function of the
AZ-i9 and voltage monitor circuit (PIN 214278-2l.

The AZ-167 will be incorporated at SIN 2525 scheduled
for October '71 delivery_ The AZ-167 can be used interchangeably with the AZ-19 in all units. The AZ-19 cannot
be used in Wlits above SiN 2525. This change. will also
be implemented in the Model 2310' in the near future.

2)

The paper guide/ribbon guide assembly (reference 2410
Manual Fig. 3-4) is being eliminated. This change will
simplify mechanical alignment and make the units less
susceptible to operator abuse. The change also reduces
"smudging II' by minimizing unwanted contact between paper
and ribbon.
The paper guide/ribbon guide will not be used after SIN 2492.

ITech Tip

Title

REMOVAL OF STEPOVER FUNCTION OF 2410 MODEL

AU

I

IAuthor
I I I I I I IApproval

Henry Fitek

Processor Applicability

'W,

Cununins

INumber

Rev

LP02-TT-6

I
I

0

Date 07/31/72

Cross Referepce

2410 MODEL

Remove wire between A26-22 and AlS-57
Add a wire between AlS-S7 and A15-S4

l
"I I .1 I I I I IApproval

All

Title

IITech
Tip
Number

LPOl INFORMATION

Title

Processor APPlicabilityt-:,A:-U_"'_or_:-.......
J ._....
LL=aca=v_ _ _ _ _
R_ev_ _lL0-l'

NOISE PROBLEM

"r,·

Date n7/" 17?

ITech Tip
INumber

ON DATA PRODUCTS LINE PRINTER

I

Rev 0
D... n7l>1

Page 372

I

COIPANY COJfIIJEN11AI.

,~.

1

LP02-TT-7
Cross ReferepC8

LPOI-TT-6

LP02-TT-8
Cross Referel1Ce

LPOI-TT-l

_ I F I E L D SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

®I

12Bit

168i' ~

LPOl/LP02 PRINT QUALITY

All

I I I I I I I IApproval

Ti,le

Processor Applicability

><1

1 1 I I

I

IAuthor

I IApproval

J. Lacey

w.

Rev

Cummins

CummiM

ITech Tip

Rev

I sl 9 I d

Ul1S1

I Author

I IApproval

0

Oato 07/31172

Cross ~eference

:1

I

LPOl-TT-8

lITech
Tip
Nuwmer

R. Rasmussen

W. Cummins

I Cross Reference
I LPOI-TT-7

lNumber LP02-TT-IO

J. Lacev

w_

0

Date 08/08/72

I

0

Rev

LP02-TT-11
Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72J LPOl-TT-9

FORM-FEED OVER-SHOOT

Processor Applicability

Designator

LP02

36Bi'RlI

LPOl/LP02 HAMMER FLIGHT TIME ADJUSTMENT

An

All

I Author

Processor Applicability

Or

INumber LP02-TT-9

IAuthor

I, I I I I I I IApproval

Title

Title

IXII

LPOl/LP02 HAMMER/HAMMER DRIVER FAILURE

A.II

><

18Bi'

Option

ITech Tip

Title

Processor Applicability

I

CPL

I

RObert Shelley

IITech
Tip
Numhor

LP02-TT-l2

0

Cross Reference

Rev

J

Frank porcellO.,. 02/08/73

I

When the LP02 is sent
£orm-feed~the

a line-feed immediately followed by a
paper will advance one line too far into the

new page.
This is caused by a design error in the Data Products 241-0
printer. This can be corrected by a change to the AG23 module
\
slot 23 of card cage A3. See Fig. 6-9 gate z6C of Oata Prod. 2410 manual.
Cut the etch from Z6 pin 11 (signal FFFP*), then tie Z6 pin 11
to Z6 pin
(Signal LSF2)

1,.

/mt

COM PANY CONfIDEN1W.
IPAGE 373

DPAGE REV1SION

B

RpuBLICATlON DATE

1\.ugust 1974

Title

All

Kochman

On 50 cycle systems the ribbon motor may stop intermittently
towards the end of the ribbon. The Data Products ECC to fix
this is to change R309 from S.6K to 6.8K 1% 3W on the AZlS
module.
This applies to the DP2410 printers.
ITooh Tip

Title INTERMITTANT DATA LOSS

INum~ LP02-TT-14

All, ,processor
I IAPPIlicablilitv, IAuthor Jerrv Sarasin
K
IAppov.1 Chris Ball Date

Rev 0
2174

I

C..,.. Roference

I .LPOI-TT-20

This Tech Tip issued for cross reference purposes only.
ITooh Tip

Title Oata Line Pull-Up Res i s tors
INum~ LP02-TT-15
Processor Applicability
LAUthorTonv.Mongillo
Rev
'CrossRafarance
Ir'A~ppo---V-.~I~~~~ww~-D-.-m--------~1 LP01-TT-21

I

AI! I I I I I I I

If an LPOl or LP02 is moved from an 8 system to an 11 system or vice/versa,
it should be noted that different pull-up resistors are used with the 8 and 11
controllers. These resistors are located in the printer on the interface
board (LP01-A3P25 card·; LP02--A3P14 card). The Interface board is located at the
end of the 110 cable.
The 8 should have 100 ohm pull-up resistors on the 7 data
lines and data strobe line on the interface card. The 11 should have no pull-up
resistors on the interface card.

r--------,

,

PDP

8

PDP 11

I

----tI-);

:
L~~~~~~c~ _ J

~~I

7 Data Line Pairs
I

X

Processor Applicability

I I , , , , ,

IAuthor

I

Data Line Pairs

Data Strobe Pair

Data Strobe p, [r
ITooh Tip

Title Hammer Current .Monitor Check
All

~

INum~ LP02-TT16

Tony Mongi 110

IApprova!rerrv

Rev 0

Sarasin Dam Rn7/7,

I

CrossRafarance

I LP01-TT-22

The Hammer Current Monitor that was installed in all LPOl l s and LP02 1 s by EtO
ILP01-A0016 and LP02-A0008 respectively or by Data Products a~ Manufacture
should be checked at installation and at every schedUled P.M. to ensure that
it is functioning properly.
The procedure for checking this monitor is given in the D.P. Manual and in the
instructions for installing the EtO kit. The procedure requires a 150 ohm 10
watt resistor and a 500 ohm, 10 watt resistor.
If they are not readily
available. they are stocked in Maynard.
Page

374

150 ohm
500 ohm

10 w
10 w

29-15928
13-00331

momoama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I

12 B;t

[iJ

I

16 B;,

IX]

I

18 B;'

IX]

I

36 B;,

X

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

Rav Al varez

I I I I I I I IApproval .Dale

Staupe

LP02

\Tech Tip
jNurnbe, LP02-TT-17

T;tl. DRUM MOTOR BELTS AND PULLEYS (LP!Jl vs LPj12)
All

I

IX]

rPT.

Option or Designator

Rev

0

Oat. 9/13/74

I
I

Cross Reference

This Tech Tip is to help Field Personnel order the right pulley and belt
for a 64 character or 96 character. LPOl and LP02 line printer.

Through

investigation we have found that our stock rooms have not been carrying
the right pulleys for the 96 character LP02 line printer and have been
shipping the standard 64 character pulley instead. We have outlined two
tables for this use, table 1 is for the LPOl and table 2 is for the LP02,
also included is a drawing designating the corresponding items.
Item:
Item
Item
Item

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

drum
drum
drum
drum

motor pulley
pulley
motor
motor belt

The stockrooms have been notified and this should eliminate any future
problems.

A

I

PAGE

375

I PAGE REVISION

DEC J2-U4N)-1189-N374

II PUBLICATION OATE

Sept. 1974

ITech TipLP02
Title DRUM MOTOR R"T.'l'~ ",rn
PrOCl!$sor Applicability

~II I I I I I I j

,d'

PTIT,T.RV"

~ Author

Rav Alvarez

!Frequency

Rev

I
I

0

IApproval Dale staupe!Jli Date 9/13/74
TABLE 1

Drum
Type

lNumbe.

".,

ope Motor pIN
(DEC Part NO.)

TT-17

to LPDJ9;

.-

Cross Reference

(LPOl)
OPC Pulley P/N
(DEC Part No.)

Pulley
Des..

No. of
Teeth

c
800 180-001
60 Hz

64 Char

(29-15019)

60 Hz

96 Char

800 180-001
(29-15019 )

212712-4
(29-17489)
212712-2
(29-19534

A

22

B

22

215603-1
(29-19531)
215603-4
(29-19528)

A

16

B

24

(29-15022)

64 Char

Drum Motor Belt P/N 800 299-001

96 Char

Drum Motor Belt P/N 800 299-002 (29-19312)

TABLE 2

Drum

Frequency

Type

DPC Motor P/N
(DEC PIN)
c
800 514-001

","""U-'
(29-18230)

Pulley
Des.

22

B

22

800514-001

(~~~~~~~3)

A

20

(29-16800)

216767-1
29-20015

B

30

60 Hz

64 Cha"

Drum Motor Belt P/N 800 299-005 (29-18208)

"D'~

96 Char

Drum Motor Belt PIN 800 299-006 (29-19130)

"D"

Title LPD8/LINOTRON 505TC ERROR ISOLATION

I~ech Tip
Number

Rev 0
IAuthor Rick Huse
Is's I I I I I I IApproval George ChaisscDitte 4-4-74
Processor Applicability

All

This Tech Tip is issued for Cr05S Reference Purposes.

jPAGE 376

No. of
Teeth

A

(29-16800 )
96 Chat

DPC Pulley P/N
(DEC pIN)
216859-2
(29-18211)

60 Hz

64 Cha

(LP02)

I
I

LP08-~T-l

Cross Reference

LPDll-TT-1

mamaD!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

r

12Bi. [)

I

0 I

16Bi.

0 I

ISBi.

3GBi.

r

I

Option or Designator

LP08

I
ITech Tip

INumber

Title LP08 INTERFACE, INCOMPLETE +3V RUN

All I

IP'OCOSSO, ,lAPP,Iicab,ilitv,

><

II-A_U_th_O_'_-"R"'o-'!CN!'-u"-"=-le"-'""-_ _ _ _R_OV_-"o_-I1

IApproval

w.

Cummi ns

I

Date

LP08-'1''l'-1
Cross Reference

with some LP08 interfaces, i t has been found that the
follow1 ng instructions mag fail ~
LCF

(6662)

clear line printer character flag.

LLC (6664) load line printer print buffer and
the micro-programmed combination
of the above.
LPC (6666) clear flag,

then load print buffer.

This si tuation occurs because the +3v shown on print LP-8-P .... Ol
positive interface (or LP08-N-Ol negative interface) connected
to B05 pins K2 and £2 does not exist in the wiring.
To correct this problem, add a wire from BOS K2 to B06 Al.
Some LP08'.s had a wire during production but it mag be to the
wrong pin, make sure it is as started above.

This correction should be made to all positive and negative
LP08 interfaces.

bus

A formal

ECO to correct this will be issued.

(ECO #LPOB-?,,24)

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTION
TAKEN

EJECO<'PO& -

C!2 L /

o MCNI_ _ _ __
o

TECH TIP"_ _ _ __

o OBSOLEJE _ _ __

COM PANY CONFIDOOIAJ.
IPAGE 377

II PAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

Ji\lluary 1973

l

Title

I

Tech Tip LPOB-TT-2
Number

LP,0B VFU PROBLEMS

All

Processor Applicability

I ~~

I

I

1

1 1

IAuthor

AL SHIMER

IApproval

HAROLD LONG Dat.l/12/731

I

Rev,

Cross Reference

1.
Some intermittent problems on LP~8 printers with the VFU option have
been caused by a missing pull up resistor. The VFU requires 9 pull up
resistors on connector module loco A14, in printer logi~.
The missing
100
resistor is from PTS. 11 to 122.
2.
VFU diagnostic (Maindec
November 28.

3.
An MCN for LP,08 test
with VFU.

Title

~8-DILPD)

was released to the program library

(Maindec ,0B-DILPS) has been issued for printers

!:2L

FROM

.0.035

7775

7774

.0734

.035.0

.0367

.075.0

Il177

Illlill

.0767

xxxx

,Ill77

~

SERIAL PRINTER INTERRUPT CONTROL
Processor Applicability

J 1 _I

IAuthor

1 1 1 IApproval

HAROLD LONG

/Tech Tip
Number
Rev

n

BILL CUMMINS Date 02/16/73

.

·r

LPJlB- TT-3
Cross Reference

I

Setting interrupt enable is standard with serial printer interfaces; the
rationale behind this convention is that serial processor devices (i.e.,
console TTY's) do not have interrupt enable/disable control and hence
would interrupt on any flag. Therefore, assigning the printer as console
output only reuqires redefining either its lot or inserting a simple
software patch.
Initialize from the processor causes the interrupt enable flip-flop
(M205 in A07) to set (Print 7606290-0-02) on power up.
In order to run
a program, such as focal, with the interrupts on, the line printer must be
on line and ready.
It would be desirable to clear the interrupt enable
flip-flop with initialize to be able to run programs with interrupts
without making patches to the software.
The following changes will clear the interrupt enable flip-flop:
RUN

ADD

+ 3V

A07pl to A07L2

+ 3V

A07Ul to Ao7pl

+ 3V

A07Pl to A07L2

INIT L

Ao5Kl to A07T2

INIT L

A05Kl to Ao7pl

X

+ 3V

A07Ul to Ao7T2

X

page 378

DELETE

X
X
X
X

mamaama I
I
T·'
Ite

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

[J

I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

I

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator

LP 12

IT8ChTiPLP_12'-TT_l
Number

HAMMERS FIRE ON POWER UP OR POWER DOWN

IAuthor
Rev
0 I
1121 I I I I It-IA:-ppro-V-'=-'H-.-LO-n-g------::O-ate-g--1-7---7-Z--II
Processor Applicability

All

Cross Reference

This is caused by incorrect sequencing. Interlock Relay (K2)
contacts don't make and break cleanly and more important;
simultaneously.
Periodic cleaning and adjustment or replacment of K2 will
eliminate this problem.
Rememberl
Adjust tIle relay so that the
contacts make and break simultaneously.
This can be accomplished
by visually checking or dual ohmeter readings.
Title

All

X

ITech Tip
INumber

ANALEX 4000 GARBAGE AND PAPER RUNAWAY

Processor Applicability

IAuthor

I 1 J I I I I IApprov.'

BENOIT DIONNE

A. SHIMER

Rev

Date 9/27/73

I

LP12-TT-2
Cross Reference

I

PROBLEM DESCRIPTION - Analex 4000 Line Printer aborts printing after "end
Half Line Pulse" signal, then keeps on normally, one line being garbaged.
Printer may also go into paper runaway.
PROBLEM ANALYSIS - Shuttle photocells are an integral part of input biasing
circuit for photocell amplifiers (Data LSS Schematic). Photocell resistances
will vary between units, and are also affected by ambient light. Conditions
could be such that because of mechanical instability in shuttle linkage;
they will output noise after turning on, resetting "shuttle complete flipf1.op" which will then enable "end half line pulse n •
ACTION TAKEN - Lowering input impedance of Data LSS photocell amplifier to
a predictable value by adding a 12K resistor between base and ground of
input uransistor. This mod was tried when unit was at fault and succesfully
solved problem.
NOTE
(i.e. ,

Same solution could be applied to other photocell circuitry
Feed, Code Wheel), should they become erratic.

<:r:;'

::r.

,.4-----j'---+----ic{)
I

I
I

I
I
I

I

I
I

i
I

.,
I

Title

ITech Tip
INumber LP12-TT-l

HIGH FAILURE RATE OF' ANALEX 4000 P. s.
Processor Applicability

, If-A_"_th_O_'_-"S-,-o_L"'aM=o"'t"'t"'e'-_ _ _
R_ev.-:O'-_-l'

AI~ I 9 1101 I I I I IApp,oval Lou

Date

Nay

4/17/74

I

Cross Reference

The Analex 4000 Lineprinter, has demonstrated a high failure
rate of power supplies. This is an expensive failure, since
the power pack cost over $3,200.
It has been noted that the incorporation of a super muffin fan
greatly improves the reliability of the power pack. The fan
should be placed so the air flow is down, across the transformer.
The dimensions of the muffin fan are so close to those of
the printer frame that no screws are necessary.
(l)

Fan, Muffin Super-Pt #12-05033

(2)

Wiring connection is to terminal
strip TBI.

scre~,'S

land 2 of terminal

Top of

Power
Rack

Front

mamaama IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
I
Title

~I

00 I

12 Bit

1~ Bit ~

Centronic Printer Model 101

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

I

18 Bit ~

~

B. Lawrence

I

LSOI

ITech Tip LSOI-TT-l

- Part #" Confusion

IAuthor

INumber
Rev

0

I

II-A:-P-pr-O-V~.I:'-'-'B:;.'-D':'imb=a-'-t--O=-'-"-6-/-'8-/-'-7-3--i,

Two different parts with the same DEC part

Subject:

I 36 Bit

CPL

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

*.

Centronic printers model 101 with serial numbers 2105 or lower are 6 level ASCII code

printers.

Printers with serial numbers 2.106 and higher are 8 level ASCII code printers.

The 6 level and 8 level ASCII logic 'eards are carri~d under the same 29 part number.
The way the printers are now. 8 level ASCII cards cannot be used in the 6 level ASCII
printers. The 6 level ASCII cards can be used in 8 level ASCII printers. The
addition of 2 jumper wires in the 6 level ASCII printers will 'allow them to use
8 Level ASCII Logic cards.
This way, modules can be interchanged and modules can be
intermixed. The jumpers are as follows:
J7

.n

pin 5 to .:)"6 pin L
pin 6 tn J~ pin E

(['58)
(OS7)

These jumpers can be put Wlderneath the bottom of the Component Board Assy. Connector
Board.
The Centronic part numbers for 6 level ASCII modules are as follows I
Electronic Card #l
Electronic Card #2

-

63001030
63001033

The Centronic part numbers for 8 level ASCII modules are as follows:
Electronic Card -In
Electronic Card #2

-

63002302-2
63002303-2

The Dec part numbers are as follows:

Electronic Card #1
Electronic Card #2

IPAGE

381

-

29-19567
29-19568

"PAGE REVISION

A

"PUBLICATION OATE

A"... I, 1974

Tide

:J

ITechTip
INum~

CENTRONICS PRINTER CLEANING PROCEDURE

IAuthor
I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

J nh n IV n 1 bern
D

ilL

•

R..,

Data 2/6/74

I
I

LSOI-TT-2
Cross Rafennco

The timing fence on the Centronics 101 and lOlA printers can be
destroyed by cleaning it with a solvent.
The correct procedure"
which is not mentioned in the 101 or lOlA manuals, is to use a dry,
clean cloth or mild soap solution, if necessary.

Title

ITochTip

CENTRONICS PllINTER P."t.

INu""'"

PROCEDURE

IAuthor Bud Lawrence
I I I I I I IApproval Dale Staup.

Rev 0

Processor Applicability

Datil 4/24/74

I
I

LSOI-TT-3

Cross Ref.......

The following P.M. is issued as a Tech Tip to speed the time in-which
i t will reach the Field.
The majority of it is written by CENTRONICS.
Frequency;

Quarterly - 3 months or 23.2 million characters
Semi-Annual· 6 month!il or 48.4 mi""~~ NO.

Tools required'

Nut Drivers 5.5 mm - - - - - - -

6

mm

~Om:m
Hex Keys

29-19896

-------

29-19887

:::::::

~~:i48Rg

1.. mm
2.0 mm

-----------

3132 in, - - - - - -

<._i-_'19896
9B9S

~
'}

-19A98

Smm ------ 29-19897
Spanner for solenoid locknut - - 29-19890
Jewlers Eye Loop - - - - - - - 29-20065
Open End Wrenches 511.8mnf'" 29-19891
5.5 II: 7 mm 29-19892
6 x 7 mm-

~~:i §:§~

Set 01 Decima. Feeler Gauges--

29-13515

29-21016

Test Equipment'

CentroniCS Mini·ell:erciser - - - -

Manuals Required:

Centronics 101 or 10lA Technical Manual

Lubricant Recommended'

Grease. Lubriplale 110 or NLGI..3
3 in 1 011,
Spray lubricant cleaner.

Cleenin" Material:

Two soil clean clolhs, medium bristle
Cleaning brush, lreon cleaning solution

Time Required:

Quarowr!)"

SemI-Annual

~OTE:

IPAGE 382
DEC 12'174N)-1l90-N314

2

1/2 hours (epproximately)
hOUrs (approximately)

DO NOT USE PREON ON TIMING PENCE!

mlllUIa l
I
Title

JilBi'

GJ I

0 I

16Bi'

IBBi'

0 I

36Bit

l Author Bud

Processor Applicability

I 11 1 11

rOT.

@J

LSOl

i;'Number
"och Tip

CENTRONICS PRINTER P.M. PROCEDURES

A~'_l

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
I

R.. 0

Lawrence

lApprova, Dale StauJ)e

Date 4/24/74

LSOI-TT-3

Cross Reference

QUARTERLY P.M. (101, lOlA)
Note
Never

apply

eny

Iubrk:ants

to

CHECK

either tile lorward

APPROPRIATE BOX

clulCh.urf.~a.

t

'0' ,

J"

.B .r
i' § I'
~

Perform steps lA to lH to verify

pml!er operation
Cenlronics mml-exerClser
Into 1/0 connector orrunudia ""sf,ic
Press ONIOFF sWItch.
Insert

Press SELECT switch
AllOW several forms 01 data to be
punted

"

Deselect the prmterby pressmg the
SELECT switch agam.
Press TO? OF FORM SWitch to
venfy operation. Raise reader
brae!.:e! HH-57 tooheck papa/tape

-,"'G---------;~=l:'=;t:='."':'n~::~ =~Ih:o:~~~on by re-

!

moving all but one form from Ihe
printer. Press line feed button unW
PAPER OUT Indicator turns on
(lOlA Only). On 101 Printers. rotate
paper feed knob HF·99unlll PAPER
OUT Indicator turns on
Select the printer. Prlntmg should
occur
only when FOAMS
OVERRIDE Switch IS pressed Turn
power ofl.
A·3 & A 4

Lower the
assemblies

left and

right cOlier

RemOlle front COlIer (4 screws).
HD-33, HD·34, HE·32

Examine damper stoppe's for loose
pads Or' wear

HE-52

Clean jlmmg fence With clean s01l
cloth IUse mild delargenl only If
needed). CAUTION: 00 NOT USE
ANY ORGANIC SOLVENT

SECT. 5.2.13.3

Check gap alignment between fiber
optic head "'''0 liming fence. En·
sure Ihat uniform gap 01 0.012 to
0020 In e~lsts. Adjust If necessary.

HF-99 &

Pull paper feed knob 10 disengage
form feed mechanism Rotate knob
In both dusctions to ensurs thaI pm
feed meChanism moves freely In
bolh forward and rellerse dlrec-

FIG. 8·8 (a,b)

- l-t-

I

I
I

°101 or IOTA Technical Manual- Drawmgs HA through HL are found in section 8 of thai manual.

IPAGE 383

II PAGE REVISION

DEC 12·r74Nj·118g.NJ74

0

I PUBLICATION DATE

April 74

CPL

ITech Tip
Title

CENTRONICS PRINTER O_M

AIXI I

lilitvl

IP'O

19

Remstall and allgnlront cover with
Sld<'l covers
Repeat steps lA thru lH to venfy
correct printer operailon. DUring
~tep 10 sel the head adlustlnQ knob
HA·32 for good pont quality

i

i

mamaoma I

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12 Bit

(XJ

CFNnONICS PRINTER

AXil,

,proce
,ssorlAPPjliC8bjilitvj

I

16 Bit

[X)

I

18 Bit

IX)

I

36 Bit

Option or Designator

00 I
IT_Tip

InllFl1~,

I Number LSOl-TT -4

IAuthor 'R I .6.W~H:::l\lrl::
IApproval ~, LAWRENCE

Rev ()
Date 2/5/74

I
I

Cross Reference

Model lOI/lOlA Wiring Harness Change.
Reference:

Centronics FCB #106/107 for

the printer Model lOI/lOlA.

To increase the current-carrying capacity of the ± 12 volt and +5
volt return line in the Model lOI/lOlA printers, the wires to
Pin 1 and Pin 8 of J12 are to be interchanged. Wire W64 should be
connected to Pin 1 when you complete the switch. Pin 1 on the
connector board is the heavier run.
J12 is the connector which plugs into the rear of the connector
board #63002332 on the 101/101A printer.
This change updates wiring diagram #63002333 from Revision B to C
and Interconnection Diagram #63002330 from Revision A to B.
This keeps the mother board from lifting etches when a short occurs.

JPAGE 387

II PAGE REVISION

0

jlpUBLICATIONDATE

APRIL

1974

Title

Centronics Printer Intermediate Shaft

ITechTip
INumber

0
I
th
Rev
TA
~u~o~r~B~.~L~aw~re=n~c=e~______~~__-4
A~ I I I I I I I IApprova' B. Lawrence Date 2/6/74 I

PrOce5$or Applicability

LS01- TT-S
Cross Reference

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT W/PULLEY, MODEL lOl/lOlA

The Tech Tip is divided into two parts:
(1) details for the preventive
maintenance procedure as applied to the intermediate shaft w/pulley (.H.B-80),
as \.,ell as, (2) the removal/replacement of this shaft.

PART 1
A.

Preventive Maintenance of Intermediate shaft Assembly
MATERIAL REQUIRED

1.
2.
3.
B.

TIME REQUIRED:

C.

PREPARATION

D.

Remove all external accesory covers, necessary screws and
washers including screws to cover assembly, base (Figure
4-2, Section 8).

2.

~move entire cavity assembly 63001105-1 at back of
printer.

3.

Remove power: driver board assembly 63002242 at front of
printer.

4.

Tilt machine backwards, 90 degrees from site position,
to expose underneath portion of printer.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OF

1.

388

.. - Hr.

1.

NOTE:

Paqe

Technical manual
Screwdriver, flat blade (medium)
3-in-l oil (or equiv.)

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT

That preventive maintenance af this assembly is applied
on a quarterly basis and must be maintained to ensure
proper operating function.
Apply 3-in-one oil (or"equiv.) to felt washers (HB-26)
located on shaft in front of bushings (HB-7).

r!omDDmo IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
1
Title

12BI•

@j

16BI.

I?9I

18BI.

1?9/

3GBI. ~

~" I I I I I I

IAuthor

I r

LSOl

Number

Rev

B. Lawrence

Approval B. Lawrence

I

I~ech Tip

Centronics Printer Intermediate Shaft
Processor Applicability

CPL
Option or Designator

Date

0

2/6/74

/

LSOl-':I'T-5

Cross Reference

/

PART 2 - Removal/Replacement of Shaft (HB-80)
A.

MATERIALS REQUIRED

1. Technical manual
2. 10 millimeter wrench (open-end)
3. Screwdrher, flat blade (medium)
4. 5/54-1nch allen-wrench
5. 3-1n-1 oil (or equiv.)
5. Loctlte (or equiv.)

8.
C.

TIME REQUIRED:
PREPARATION
1.

D.

E.

1 HR.

Perform steps 1 through 4 as found in Part it Para. C.

PRINTER PARTS REMOVAL
1.

Remove intermediate pulley (HB-30) by removing nut (H8-l8) and washer
(H8-29). Slide belt (HB-4B) off the pulley prior to removal.

2.

Loosen pulley (HB-22) on intermediate shaft (HB-80) by loosening
two set-screws (H8-23). Slide off pulley belt (HB-48).

3.

Pullout pinned pulley and shaft (HB-BO) toward front of printer.
This step will free pulley (HB-22) and felt washers (HB-24, 26).

INSTALLATION OF INTERMEDIATE SHAFT W/PUlLEY (REF:

Fig. 8-6 (HE».

Perform the following steps prior to instaliing pinned pulley ar:d shaft
(HB-BO) .

1.

[PAGE 389

Check that shaft bushings (HE-7) are secure in printer machine support.

II PAGE REVISION

0

IlpUBLlCATIONOATE APRIL

1974

Title

ITech Tip
INumber

Centronics Printer Intermediate Shaft
Processor Applicability

~I I 1.1 I I I
2.

I

IAuthor

B. Lawrence

jAwov.1 B. Lawrence

Rev

Dat81/6/74

0

T
I

LSOI-TT-5
Cross Reference

Secure loose bushings by using loctite (or equiv.) on outside surfaces
that contact base frame of printer. Clean surrounding support holes
prior to installation. Avoid loctite touching inside surfaces of
bushings where shaft rotates. Clean interior shaft hole of bushing.

F.

3.

Lubricate inside surfaces of bushings and shaft with 3-in-1 oil (or
equiv.) (Refer to Figure 1)

4.

Add a few drops of oil (3·in·1) (or equiv.) to felt washers (JB-24. 26)
of shaft prior to installation.

5.

Ensure that at least one set-screw (HB-23) of pulley (HB-22) is installed in groove of shaft prior to tightening.

RE -ASS EMBL Y

1.

Reverse para. C, steps 1 through 3 but note the following:

When reversing step 1 to install pulley (HB-30). make sure pulley
belt (HB-48) is placed over the hole when pulley shaft (HB-27) is
inserted so that it can slide over spur gear of pulley (HB-30).
POItfrS TO CHECK
...

G.

1.

Ensure that r.i2in moter pulley (HB-91) is in direct alignment with
intenned1Ci.te shcft pulley (HB-22) by adjusting, if ne::essary,
motor and bracket U-!B-9) parallel to front paper pan (HB-89) by

sighting straight jown on the top of two slotted~head screws
(H3-12) of the motor" mounting bracket (HB-9) and align these
screws parallel with the front of the paper pan.
2.

With forwJrd and re",'erse pul1ey belts (HB-48, 49) and main motor

pulley be1t (HB-48) in place, adjust eccentric on interMediate
pulley (l1B.30) shaft when main mater is running. The adjusting
screw is located on shaft {HB-27} toward back of printer when shaft
and pullc~! (H8-30} is inserted oroperly for forward clutch pulley
drive. Test is based upon smooth running perfonnance of gearing
with minirr:um no_~s..~. 1tlhen satisfactory conditicns are mp.t, lock
up nut (HB-28) and lock washer (HB-29) with 10 millimeter open-end
wrench While at the same time holding correct adjusting screw
pJsit ion \"lith scre\,,'dr"iver.
3.
Page 390

Adjl!st belt tensions. if required.
Section 5, page 5-14).

(Refer to technical manual

mBmBO!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12 Bit [)

I

16 Bit

[!J

I

18 Bit

[!J

I

36 Bit (]

IAuthor
~I I I I I I I I IApproval

LS01

I

Tech Tip
Number

B. Lawrence

B. Lawrence!

CPL

Option or Designator

I

Centronics Printer Damper Spring
Processor Applicability

I

Rev

Date

I
I

0

2/6/74

Cross Reference

The spring (H-31) on the damper assembly has been changed.

However, the old spring has not been obsoleted and is completely
interchangeable with the new type spring.

The old type spring is ilL" shaped, and the new type spring is
"u" shaped.
525661001.

The Centronic part number for both springs is the same:
The DEC part number is:

29-19583.

This part number will

get you an "L" shaped spring.

Title

ITech Tip

centronics Printer - Video Amplifier

IAuthor J. R. Krieslck - PH.
A~ I. I L I I I I IApproval Bud Lawrence ,:. Date
Processor Applicability

1.

iNumber
Rev

0

12/28/73

I
I

LSOI-TT-7
Cross Referenc&

Adjust or caectk adjustment of timing fence and fiber optics bundle according

to the procedure in Centronics Technical Manual, or LSOI-TT-3, step #4.
2.

Checking input to Video amplifler (Ref'erence Schematic of the Video
AmpH fier ) ..

A..

Place scope probe at the junction of RI, base of Ql, &.Ild the photo cell.
i.

Set up scope channel 1, A.C.; 20 lIN/eM at 1 MS/CM using a lOx probe.

11. An input signal of approximately .5 to .6 VPP will be observed by
manually moving the video amp .. assembly along the timing fence ..

IPAGE

391

II PAGE REVISION

Q

I PUBLICATION DATE APRIL

1974

cpr.

Title

iTech Tip

INumber

ceatron1cs Printer - Video Ampl.lf'1er
Processor Applicability

1I

All I .1
3.

I

I I

IAuthor
IApproval

J .. R~ (2"lesick _ PH Rev

B. Lawrence

0

Date

I
1

I

~f11_TT_7

Cross Reference

Output of the Video Amp. (Reference schematic of Video Amp.)
A.

Place scope probe at the junction of R6, R1, and the collector of Q3,
or at Pll pin 6.
i.

set up scope channell, A.C., .2V/CM at .5 MS/CM using X10 probe.

i i .. Manually or under progr8Pl control IlLOVe the video amp along tbe tim1ng

fence.

A good video amp will produce a sawtooth output si.inal with

an amplitude of apprOXimately 4 volts ..

Title

centronics Line Feed Delay Prob16lIl

IITech
Tip
Number LSOI-TT-8

IAuthor Bill J(ochm&n
Rev
0
I
,--A_I~_L-I-,I'--...ll_.l.-I_L-I_I'--.J.-I_.LI,A_pprov'--_al----'B'"'.~La="""r."'n"'c::;.~__D_8_'o_ 2/b/74 I
Processor Applicability

Cross Reference

Many line feed problems can be correc'te(l uy increasing the LF delay from 15ms

to 18 ma.

Adjust R54 on Electronic Cord #1, sc::ope ME 17, one shot.

applies to the Centl"'ooics Model )..Ol/l0lA.

PAGE 392

This tech tip

mDIID!a I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

12 Bit

[XJ

I

16 Bit

00 I

18 Bit

00 I

(XJ

Option or Designator

I

T'rech Tip

INumber lS'll-TT-Q

CHANGF R-38 ON POWER DR rVER BOARD

IAuthor R. I tlWRI=Nl"f=
X I I I I I 1 I lApproval R. LAWRENCE

All

36 Bit

CPl

J

Processor Applicability

Rev
Date

I
I

()

2/6/7lJ

Cross Reference

STARTING AT ARTWORK REVISION Cq* ON POWER DRIVER BOARD f6,~02242, THE
VALUE OF RESISTOR R38 IS BEING CHANGED AS FOLLOWS:
FRO~:

TO:

18n OHMS, 2"1, 10%
lJ7fl OHMS, 2'4, 10% DFC 1113-00321-00

THIS lNCREASE IN THE VALUE OF R38 WILL REDUCE THE POWER DISSIPATION
OF ()2/.

INumber

LSO'l TT-10

B __

Cross Reference

Tech Tip

Title

ON/OFF AUTOMATIC MOTOR CONTROL

IAuthor Dale Staupe
~ I I I I J I I IApp.oval B. Lawrence
Processor Applicability

Rev

J

Oat. 4/29/;~

Centronics Corporation has come out with an option for their Models
lOl/lOlA printers which shuts off the AC Voltage to the main drive motor

during standby operation, 6 to 10 seconds after printinq data or a paper
movement command. The main drive motor is turned on immediately upon
receiving characters to be printed or a paper movement command
This
option saves wear on mechanical parts and reduces standby noise. With
the addition of this option t the life of the printer is considerably
longer as well as the mean time between failures. This option is highly
recommended for all machines. The branch should sell the option to the
customer for SI50,(this is the installed price)whether the machine is on
contract or not. If the cust~mer doesn't want to buy the option, it would
benefit the branch to install this option at OF-CIS cost, $50. P.ither way,
the life of the printer is increased and the number of service calls
should decrease. The branch can order the option from Maynard, stockroom
17. Installation time is approximately 2 hours.
a

The part numbers are as follows:
DEC PART NO.
29-21015

VENDOR PART NO.
63-0U13 0-01

Instructions for installing the above option are contained in r1AINTENANCE
AND FIELD CHANGE BULLETIN FOR CENTRONICS,

IPAGE 393

II PAGE REVISION

B'

~EC-FS-HPTRA-A-D.

II PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1 y

1974

CPL
Title

ITech Tip

CLUTCH ROTORS
Processor Applicability

INumber LSOl-TT-ll

IAuthor

A~ I I I I I I I IApproval

Dave Bentley

Rev ~

Date 7/1/74

I
I

Cross Reference

THERE HAS BEEN SOME CONFLICT ON CLUTCH ROTORS
ORDERING AND INSTALLATION. PLEASE NOTE THAT ON MODEL
101 PRINTERS THERE ARE TWO DIFFERENT PART NUMBERS

~

1) FORWARD CLUTCH ROTOR CENj~'~096001 DEC# 29-20746
2)' REVERSE CLUTCH ROTOR CEN#525890001 DEC# 29-20749
THESE CLUTCH ROTORS SHOULD NOT BE INTERCHANGED
BECAUSE IF THEY ARE THEY WEAR MUCH FASTER.
TO CORRECTLY INSTALL CLUTCH ROTORS FIRST CHECK
OUT ITS LINING. THE FORWARD CLUTCH ROTORS LINING IS
MUCH LIGHTER IN COLOR, WHILE THE REVERSE CLUTCH IS
DARKER. ALSO NOTE THAT THEY ARE MADE OF DIFFERENT MATERIAL.
THIS IS THE ONLY DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE TWO.
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN REPLACING ROTORS TO
PREVENT EXCESS WEAR AND FREQUENT REPLACEMENT.

~
All

X

FIELD CHANGE BULLETINS FROM CENTRONICS
Processor Applicability

It 1 J 1 1 I

IAuthor Jerrv
IApproval Dale

Sarasin

Staupe

I~-

INumber LSOl-TT-12

Rev n
Date 7/1/74

I

Cross Reference

I

MAINTENANCE AND FIELD CHANGE BULLETIN FOR CENTRONICS MODEL 10l/IOlA PRINTERS
is a DEC publication, DEC-FS-HPTRA-A-D, which consolidates Field Change
BUlletins that have been issued by Centronics Corporation and is available
through Technical Publicat~ons Stockroom PKl, 'laynard, MaSSe

IPAGE

394

DEC 12-(74N)-1190-NJ74

mamaa!a l
I
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

[J

I

16Bit

O!II

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

IAuthor LEN

I I I I I I IApproval

MALAND

Option or Designator

LS08

0 I

I

Tech Tip
Num~

CENTRONICS PRINTER INTERRUPT CONTROL
Processor Applicability

I

Rev

0

BILL CUMMINS Date 04/19/73

I
I

LSOB-TT-l
Cross Reference

Setting interrupt enable is standard with serial printer interfaces; the
rationale behind this convention is that serial processor devices (i.e.,

console TTY's) do not have interrupt enable/disable control and hence
would interrupt on any flag.
Therefore, aSSigning the printer a? console
output only reuqires redefining either its lot or inserting a simple

software patch.
Initialize from the processor causes the interrupt enable flip-flop
(M205 in A07) to set (print 7606290-0-02) on power up.
In order to run
a program, such as focal, with the interrupts on, the line printer must be
on line and ready.
It would be desirable to clear the interrupt enable
flip-flop with initialize to be able to run programs with interrupts
without making patches to the software.
The following changes will clear the interrupt enable flip-flop:
ADD

~

DELETE

x

+ 3V

A07Pl to A07L 1

+ 3V

A07Ul to A07Pl

+ 3V

A07Pl to A07L 1

INIT L

AOSKl to A07T2

INIT L

A05Kl to A07Pl

x

+ 3V

A07Ul to A07T2

x

x
x
x

COMPANYCONRDDOUl
IPAGf 395

II PAGE REVISION

A

II PUBLICATION DATE

April 19_7_3_ _-.J

mDmDDma IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAll
I l2Bi'

Q

I l6Bi'

0

I lSBi'

0

I 36Bi'

0

LSSE

Tech Tip
Number LSSE-TT-l

M8342 and M8329 lOT SELECTION JUMPERS

AIXI I

I

I

Title

rlAPPIlicablilitvl
Iprocesso
I

Option or Designator

II-A..:u:.th:.:.or-,._L.....B..
DLw!.!l..'Reedat " at pin I of MEl8
(7404) is grounded.

3.

The carriage drive mechanism definitely needs lubing. as the
sleeve (bearings) wears out quickly.
There are felt washers
on the gear and pulley drives.

4.

Format loop problems stopping one line or more early.
If it
seems photo diodes are too sensitive, tape part of them off.

COM PANY CONFIDENDAL
IpAGf 397

II PAGE REVISION °

HpUBLICATIDNDATE

August, 1973

-- NOTES --

398

momODma IAELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I
, 12 Bit
Title

~I

Iil'

16 Bit

iii'

18 Bit ~,

36 Bit

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

M8650·

I I I

ITech Tip LT33-TT-1

INumber

SWeeney/Quinn

,Approval"

D.

~

-~~
6

S

KK

BLK

2

EE

5

4

3

Rev
Date

7,

I

B

T~'Y

RED
,---WHT/ORA
BLK

ORA
BLK
BLU
GRN
WH'l'

Cross Reference

""

ALT
COLOR
CODE

MATE-&-LOCII:

BLK
WH'l'
BLK
RED

LT33

®,

CONVERTING ASR-33 TO PDP-B/E

t1 I1

CPL

Option or Designator

~BLU

WHT/GRAY
-WHT/'iEL

TERM# 4
RDR RLY +
TERM# 7
RDR RLY TERM# 3
TERM# 6

I

@]JMPR.

I A,W,W I

-30V
SHIELD

PIN#

"I

8
7

6
5
4

W076D

3
2
1
MATE-&-LOCl<

* If the Teletype control Medule 1s an Me65. the .pllt luq. ar. to
be eonnecte<': to the 'M'Y •• tollows.
SPLIT LUG#4

IV
#7

itS
1t6
#2

RDR RLY TERM 1t3
TERM #4
TERM 1t7
RDR RI.Y +
TERM *6

The above chart has been designed to reduce the amount of time you would
normally spend~cross-referencing several different sets of prints.
It is
highly recommended that, before applying power to the reconfigured system,
you double-check all wiring for correctness. Failure to do so could result
in damage to the Teletype Control Module and/or the Teletype.

IPAGE

399

II PAGE REVISION

C

I PUBLICATION DATE August

1974

i

Tech Tip

Title

CONVERTING ASR-33 TO PDP SE

IAuthor
__
~" I I I I I I I IApproval
Processor Applicability

~

Number

{coni

'n, .

c:,

Rev

B

I

~~~llmL-__~~~

F.Purcell

Date 7/31/73

I

LT33-TT-l

Cross Reference

Converting the ASR-33 to the PDP-8/E
Occasionally a customer may request to have an older ASR-33 configured such
that it can be used on any 8/E type system.
CAUTION:
Prior to performing any rewiring. be certain that the teletype
in question has in fact been modified for use on DEC's PDP-8
family of computers. (Reference the field service technical manual,
LT33-TT-3)

Title ASR CONVERSION 280V,

115V, 60Hz
un e

Cross Reference

inn

All
X

l} Disconnect and remove the step down
transformer from the teletype base.

POWi:..P--C.ORQ

2)
Remove the AC supply lead from the terminal
strip inside the teletype".

r

3)
Connect the new AC power cord to those same
terminals, white to C, black to #1 and green
to a chassis screw.

~

'~

4)
If the motor is rated for other than
desired Hz rating, it must be replaced with
~ IC·t'T APPRQX --'\r---~
one rated for the proper cycle operation.
(Not necessary if motor is already 50/60 Hz).
TRP>-.N<>;:''FORN-.I<...R...
5, Change the fuse to correspond to the motor
M0,"N\ING~ IAIIRINC::.
being used ..
5) Proper operating speed is determined by the ratio of the belt
driving gear and its pinion gear: these must be replaced in
this conversion.

The parts required for conversion can be specified as follows:
Part

Vendor Part#:
60Hz

Belt driving gear
Pinion gear
Motor
AC power cord
Plug 220V

181420
181411
181870
182510

50Hz

181855
181851
182267

DEC Part"
60Hz

50Hz

29-11417 29-11431
29-11412 29-11428
29-11432 29-11448
29-16755

MDL 2.25 320246
29-19119 i~:~r~~g
Installation charges are based on time and material; there is no
fixed charge for this conversion. Price for parts is approximately $100.

Fuse

IPAGE

400

I

DEC 12·!/4NI·1190N3I4

CPL

mamaama I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title

[1l

12 Bit

I

16 lIit ~

I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

PRICING POLICY FOR TELETYPE CONVERSIONS
Processor Applicability

lAuthor Walter MacKenz ie

>< I I I I I I I IApproval

W. Cununins

Date

I

Option or Des;gnator

LT33

I&l I

ITech Tip
_lNumber LT33 TT--3
Cross Reference
Rev
0
7-31-72

I
I

The following policies and prices have been established as of June

1969 for modifying customer owned Teletypes for use with DEC
computers.
TELETYPE MODEL

CONVERSION
KIT ONLY (A)

DEC CONVERSION Parts and Labor (B)

KSR-33

$100.00

$200.00

ASR-33

$125.00

$300.00

KSR-35

$125.00

ASR-35

NOT AVAILABLE

$300.00
$1000.00

conversion Kits - Do It Yourself

Each convers·ion kit, as listed above in column A, will include all

necessary parts and installation instructions.
Conversions Done By DEC Personnel
Conversion prices, as listed in column B above I are based upon the
assumption that the customer owned Teletype presented to DEC for

conversion is in good operating order. Labor and/or parts required
to restore a unit to good working condition will be billable at DEC·s
then prevailing rates.
Field Service mileage rates shall also apply in addition to the
installation charges listed above.
DEC will provide a 30 day warranty of the conversion only.
The conversion kit for the ASR-35 shall remain proprietart in nature.
This is based upon the fact that DEC has made extensive engineering
investments in creating this modification and customers should expect
to reimburse us for that effort.

COM PANY CONRIIfTIAL
lPAGE

401

DpAGE REVISION

0

"PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

CPL
IT""" Tip
INumber LT33 TTi 4

ASR 33 MODIFICATION FOR FANFOLD TAPE

Title

XI

processor Applicability

J

I

I

I

I

I

IAuthor

Rev

0

I

II-=·A~P:":pr:":O:":V-al-W-.-C-U-mm-i-n-s--D-.-te--7---3-1---7-2-1I

Cross Reference

At times. the ASR 33 punch will not accept fanfold tape. To correct this, install the
1.85705 tape guide MOD Kit. These kits are available in the Field Service Stockroom and
are priced at $9.45.

Title

Author

A"

X

Approval

Rev

w.

Cummins

Date

eASR 3S/81/M707 FAILURES

Erratic failure of the M707 Teletype transmitter module has been a problem when an ASR
35 is connected to an 81; the M707 output transistor (Q3) (65J4) is blown and the ASR 35
runs open. This will occur following rotation of the mode switch through the KT, T
positions. Excessive transients were suspected and several ECO's have been suggested
and implem~nted.
I.

A D664 diode connected in parallel with the 470 ohm resistor from the base of Q3 to
5V on the M707 (cathode to +5V).

2.

On the W076 connector card, pin F. change the 750 ohm resistor to lK, add 3 D671
diodes, pin H (cathode) to -l5V, pin H to -5V (cathode), and pin M to ground
(cathode) .

3.

Use of thy rectors or arc suppressors across the selector magnetic terminals.

The specific problem has now been recognized as a circuit peculiarity in the ASR 35 which
was overlooked in the design of the H707. The mode switch on the ASR 35 applies a short
circuit fo -15V at pin AV2 of the M707 (JI2H2) as it is rotated between the KT and T
positions. Current limiting circuitry was not provided for the 6534 and the excessive
current destroys it.
Engineering first suggested that a 100 ohm resistor be inserted in series with the emitter
circuit of the 6534 on the M707 and this was done on about 10 machines. It was discovered
with further research that the normal 20 mao marking current for the ASR 35 had been
reduced to II rna. by this modification. Because teletype operation becomes marginal at
lOrna., i t became obv j ous that th is was unacceptab 1e.
A final solution has been determined and will become an EeOI
1.
2.

Cut the etch between the 6534 collector and pin AV2 on the H707 and insert a 120 ohm
1/4w resistor in series.
On the W076 change resistor R3 (which is connected between pins B and F) from either
750 or 1000 ohms to 820 ohms 1/2W.

Page 402

COM PANY CONFlllB01Al.

•• . I

mamaDma I
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

I!Q

I

16 Bit

Ila I

18 Bit

(!)

I

36 Bit

~I

i' i' I

A

rcabTty

Option or Designator

LT33

/Tech Tip
~Number LT33 TT# 6

SECURING TELETYPE CABLE TO LOGIC FRAME

I B~proclesso;

I

Rev 0
J
r~:-~-th-:-V-'I--w-_-c-wmn--i-n-s--D-a-t'-7-_-3-1-_-7-2--i1

I

Cross Reference

The cable from the teletype is dressed under- the 81 cabinet~ through the large opening
and into logic frame slot JJ2.
If the teletype happened to be positioned at the maximum
distance which the cable would allow (assuming the logic frame in the normally closed
position) or if the cable were to be looped around a caster and an attempt made to pull
the logic frame forward, the horizontal stress could easily damage either the block or
the W076A connector card.
It is necessary that the cable be dressed through the cable
clamp at the lower rear corner of the logic frame where the power cables are secured to
eliminate this possibility. A second clamp may be desirable at the bottom of the 81
cabinet to assure that sufficient slack exists Irrespective of teletype position.

Title

All

I

ASR 33 READER SYNCHRONIZATION

l Author Whi te/Arsenaul t
18~ ad I I I I IApproval w_ Cummins Date
Processor Applicability

Rev

TIIOh Tip LT33 TTl?
Number
0
Cross Reference

7-31-72

I
I

When ASR 33 Part II Program 3 fa i I s rough! yonce per camp 1ete pass, the fa i I ure always
occurs in the random stall section of test as a result of the reader fetching an extra
character.
This problem is a synchronizing problem which exists in M706 modules of Revision J or
earli~r.
It will be fixed in future revisions via an [CO to the M706. Boards of
revision J or earlier can be made to work properly by the addition of a 470 PF capacitor
from Pi n BN2 of the M706 to ground.

COMPANY CONfIDflO1AL
IPAGE 403

UPAGE REVISION

A

DPUBLICATION DATE

May 1974

CPL
Title

ITech Tip
INumber LT 3 3 -TT-8

TELETYPE READER POWER SUPPLY

AU

Processor Applicability

'ii I I I I I I

IAuthor

Rev

Bill Harrigan

IApproval w.

Cununins

Dat.

01

7-31-72

Cross Reference

I

A poor electrical connection between the 200 MFD capacitor and the
circuit board etch has resulte~ in failures of the Teletype reader
power supply. The symptoms will be either a blown 3 amp fuse or

a defective rectifier, the latter resolved only by replacement of
the power supply.
The poor connection is caused by the stripping a,,,ay of etch by the

teeth on the star washer used to secure the capacitor to the board.
A standard washer should be installed between the star washer and
the circuit board to elimina~e this problem.
Title

I

Tech Tip

TELETYPE PRINTS

Num~

Processor Applicability

IAuthor Walter !'1acKenzie

A~ I I I I I I I IApproval

W. Cummins

Rev

11

Date 12/12/73

J

LT33-TT-~

Cross Reference

I

A well documented set of prints explaining our modification to
teletypes is now available in drafting.
You can order these prints
under the following numbers:
Revision

~
7505038-0-"
7505039-0-0
7505040-0-1
75050417505042-!)-1
7505043-0-0

'--1

Description
~,SR

33 120V 60HZ

ASR 33 340V SO/60HZ

KSR
KSR
KSR
KSR

33
33
35
35

240V SO/60HZ
120V 60HZ
240V SO/60HZ
120V 60H?,

COMPANY mRBfI1AL
Page 6
Page 404

mamBala I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

12 Bit

IXJ I

16 Bit

IiU I

18 Bit

IiU I

36 Bit

Iii]

Title DIFFERENCES BETlIEEN NEW 3300 SERIES TELETYPE AND
OLD 33 TS, TO, TBP
Processor Applicability

A~ I I I I I I I

I
I

CPL
Option or Designator

I

LT33

ITech Tip
/Number LT33-TT-IO

If-A_U_tho_r_-""
Rau.-V.£jA"'l.xv-""'ar'eSOZh.-_ _ _
R_ev_.l!m_---II
IAPP'"oVOI Dick Russell 00te6/25/74
I

Cross Reference

As of September 1973 DEC has been shipping the new style 3300
teletype
There are some noted differences between these two
and apparently some confusion has existed in the field. This
tip will help clear up the differences between the two models

series

models,
techand also
help to update documentation that will follow in the near future.
a

1)

Internal Differences:

The reader power pack on the 3300 "mounts within the main teletype case
(in the call control unit area) rather than in the teletype base (stand).
This elimates the mounting I unmounting, and repacking of the power pack
previously required.

2) The 3300 series punch mechanism is always equipped for automatic
operation (DC2 and DC4 control) but automatic operation is inhibited
See teletype manual for

by a pair of clips installed at teletype.

details ..
3) The 3300 printer mechanism is equipped with mechanism to provide
the CR LF function when CR is received but this feature is inhibited by
a clip installed at telettype. See teletype manual for details.. This
feature did not exist on DEC purc~ased 33 series units ..
4)
The answerback mechanism (and any other stunt box feature requiring
disab1ing) is disabled (when specified by the DEC construction drawings)
by means of an inhibit clip on the 3300. 0n 33 series units the
answerback mechanism was disabled by removing the stunt box pawl
associated with it. The 3300 clip can.also be used on 33 series units.

5) The 3300 keyboard is equipped to generate even character parity
but can be arranged to generate eighth-bi t-marking code by swapping
quick connect tabs.
A 33 series unit either did or did not have a
parity keyboard and changing a parity keyboard to non-parity operation
required disassembly and modification of contact bars On the keyboard.
NOTE A:
33 series units evolved over the years and details of parts
replacement and subtleties of operation varied even for the same model
number. Do not construe the above list of differences as implying
that all DEC purchased 33 series·machines of a particular model number
were the same over their entire Ii fetime.
~·!OTE

B: A complete programming and operating description of all DEC
supplied'33 Teletypes (after the PDP-6 and classic LINK) is contained
in DEC specification A-SP-LT33-jJ-14 "LT33 Programming Specification"
available from reproduction.

IPAGE

405

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION OATE

June 1974

CPL
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN NEW 3300 SERIES TELETYPE AND ITech Tip
Title OLD 33 TS, TU, TBP (Cant.)
JNumber LT33-TT-10
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Author 'Q~
Rev m

A~

1)

I I I II I I

I

I

IAPproval Dick Russell

Date 6/25/74

I

Keyboard Differences:

The keyboard key which generates 136 8 will be labelled
It is presently labelled ,"t".

",.11.

e

2) The keyboard key which generates 137 will be labelled "_"
(underscore) .
It is presently labelled :..,:.
3J The printer mechanism will print "J\" when it receives 136 8 "
It presently prints '''f''.
4)

The printer mechanism will print
It presently prints ~".

(underscore) when i t receives

137 8 •

5) The printer mechanism will print "~', "2 n, and ''I\n when i t receives
174 8 , 175 8 , and 1768 respectively. Presently it prints nothing when
receiving these codes. NB: 174~ was formerly ACK, 175 8 , was formerly
ALT MODE, and 176 8 was formerly SCI.
6)
The keyboard will have a key labelled ESC which will generate the
code ~338. There will be no key labelled ALT MODE and no way to generate
the codes 175 8 or 176 8 from the keyboard.

7) The keyboard key which generates 1778 will be labelled DELETE.
It is presently labelled RUB OUT.
8)
These changes are already reflected on the pocket reference card
for 8's and II's.

9) All machines except the LT33-D type machines will generate even
parity from the keyboard. At present some other LT33 units have
the 8th (parity) bit always "1". It is planned that eventually all
machines will generate even parity from the keyboard.
The ALT" MODE/ESC change should not affect any properly written program.
That is, DEC has in the past shipped model 33 Teletypes which have had
either ALT MODE keys (175 1 ESCl keys (176 ) or ESC 2 keys (,33).
In
addition, non-DEC termina~s'are variously d§signed to use 175 8r ~338
as ALT MODE/ESC and if not in a "lower case" mode should also 8 accept
175 8 and 176 8 •
(On lower case machines 175 is "i" and 176 8 is ".v').
In addition, ALT MODE/ESC should not be "ecHoed II -by the program unless
it is intended to perform some particular function for some particular
terminal (e.g. on some model 37 Teletypes the sequence "r:SC 3" shifts
the machine into red ribbon mode).
It is recommended that user programs which use If-II as a command operator
(e.g., to direct a data transfer to one file from another) should be
modified to accept "=" for this function as well as ''':: since the left
arrow will become underscore (" _") •
It is believed that the symbols 'i" and orA" are sufficiently similar
that no program change involving them is needed.
IPAGE

406

Imamaama I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

.I

12Bit

!XlI

16Bit

IX)

I

18Bit ~

I

368it

g I

Title DIFFERENCES BETWEEN NEW 3300 SERIES TELETYPE A~m
OLD 33 TS TU TBP (Cont.)
All

X

IAuthor Rav

Processor Applicability

AlvarA'7.

I I I I I I I IApproval Dick

I

Rev

Option or Designator

LT33

i

Tach Tip
Number

a

Russell Date 6/25/74

I

to LT35

I

T."'''_'I''I'_lO
Cross Reference

I

Unrelated to the above described changes, the following programming
practices are recommended in dealing with teletypewriter-like devices
to ensure compatibility with the largest number of terminals ..

1. A program unwilling to deal with lower case input should translate
codes 1408 to 173 8 to the corresponding upper case codes 100g thru 133 8 2.

The eighth bit of each character (the 2008 bit) should be ignored

when received in general purpose programs..

This bit is commonly even

parity or a "I" but in some terminals can be odd parity or

a"'l'~

3. The eighth bit of each character (the 2008 ~it) should be transmitted as even parity. This will not confuse 33's or 35's and is
necessary on some other terminals.

4. Control characters should not be echoed when some particular action
is expected from the teleprinter (e,g. control back slash, "PS" causes
the cursor to he returned to the upper left hand corner of the screen
on the VTpJ5 and VTi66).
In order to verify that software is not sensi ti ve to the eighth bit
("parity bit") from Teletype it is useful to modify selected Teletypes
so that keyboard characters always have their 9th bit spacing ("f)")
instead of the more usual marking ("I") 8th bit. The simple procedure
is detailed on the attached sket.ch.
Machines which are modified should be prominently marked "Modified:
Keyboard 8th bit zero.
II

Diagnostics such as PDP8E Teletype and KLSE Asynchronous Data Control
Tests, are compatible except with one noted difference. On transmit
from CPU to TTY, a 7-hole rub out will appear as
an up arrow. This
is due to new 3300 series printers having one less function lever
(slot 5) if customer sO desires full compatibility he may order function
'lever t180-793 and have it installed at per eall rates.
To make 8th Bit
Alway Spacing (" 1")
Slip A Piece Of ~ 18
AWG Sleeving OVer
_rA
",
H V
RL
The Short Contact
Wire. The Wire Will
Not Seat Between The
:--=_=1:'.
Insulating Tabs
When Sleeved.
Reversed Thru
r'·'J"c=::-.-~..
K::,. f'2:..
~.
Plastic)
~"~it::t=.:':-~
'U \I::J
\I::J
Right Side View Of
Keyboard Can tact
Block (Non-Parity
Keyboards),

"+"

"'!'l

t

(II ;~ [\ ~I r~ '76/dN'~",
)1, ., ~ "E '"
Jpl

~~~;~~ie Letter'G~::::o;i~;~-~~ ;~E ~~ ",01:~=~±"±. ~f':d:±:=:'i'9

'L

G3!
N:>WD

to) - () 2 ZZ() 0:>3 wi
/C'

ll"nJU

1¥~)1Vl

instf~ ~~l~rlns

'

is not necessary to bring down an operatinq system to insta1L~~
ECO; it should be installed when any M220 is worked on or suspected

to be a problem ..
Ti~.

Alii

M220 MODULES IN 680-1 and DL8I

l ,IAPP11ic:abIilityl

I P,oceuo

8 II

IiNumber
Tech Tip

I

II-A_U_tho_,__w,,-,-.-,C:::UMm=:::i:,:n:,:s:......_ _ _R_",,_..::.._""
IApproval w.. Cummins Date
1

M220-TT-2
Cross Reference

PDP-8I

The M220 modules used in a 680-1 must be revision "B" or later. The
"Bit revision adds an interrupt and changes a gate used as a wlocal AND"
for TT-Line Shift. Therefore. revision "A W cannot be used in a DL8I.

COM PANYCONflllEfffilU
IpAGE 409

II PAGE REVISION

0

BpUBLICATIONDATE

July 1972

I

Tech Tip
Number

Title RINGING ON M302 OUTPUT

All

Processor Applicability

8'sl

1 1 1 1 1 1

IAuthor

Sweeney/MacLeod

IAPPI'o•• I F . Purcell

Rev

0

Date 11/20/72

I
I

M302-TT~1

Cross Reference

The M302 revision K and L will have multiple transitions on the trailing
edge of the output, when the input trigger signal remains law longer
than the delay time-out.
(When a pulse trigger signal is used, this
problem does not occur.)
This particular problem showed up in the'IROS Magtape Interface. The
signal RAMP H was causing inconsistant tape motion.
Replacement of
the M302 at location Ala of the TROS with a new M3020 will correct
this deficiency.
If an M3020 is not available, an M302 with a revision
earlier than K may be substituted.

COM PANY CONRDENTIAL
I PAGE -no

II PAGE REVISION

npUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

IFIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL I

!lOml!D I
Title

~I,

l2Bi.

[ill

l6Bi.

00 I

l8Bi.

0 I

M307 JUMPER CONFIGURATION
Processor Applicability
IAuthor Newbury/Meyer
,

36Bit

~I

CPL
Option or DesignatOr

M307

I

TechTiP
Number M307 TTl 1
0
Cross Rof1nnca

I

Rev

~~--~~~~--~

'11 , ,

IApproval W. CUmmins

Da.. 7-31-721

Revision A of the M307 requires jumpers to determine the range.
Revision B replaces the external connections with a switch. Below
is a table of equivalent jumper connections and switch posltionl
Equivalent Jmp Connections

Switch
Position

5
4
3
2
1

81
02
02
02
02
02

for 1081
to 01
to B1
to Hl
to F1
to HI

82 for IOS2
M2 to U2

M2
M2
M2
M2

~

5 50 50g...Sm sec50 m sec

to V2
to 82
to R2
to P2

59-sec
50lJA"ec
5m sec
50m sec
- sOOrn sec

On the revision B board no provision is made for the add! tion of
external capacitance. On revision A hoards external capacitance
From M2 to N2 for I082.
The positive lead should be pin 02 to IOS1 and N2 to 1082. Internal
Pot connection for IOS1 are pins C2 to Al and for 1052 pins PI
to Vl. These connections are true for both revisions.

may be added from Pin D2 to J1 for 10sl.

Title

I~"

I

TechTi P
Number M307-TT-2

M3 0 7 INSTABILITY

I 1_',Appl,icab,ility,

II-A:-U_thor_-:-_____--::-_ROV
_ _O_-II
IA _ _ IH• Long

I Jl

Date Au" 1972

COIPANYCONRDDnUl
, PAGE

411

" PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

I

Cross Rof1nnca
TU56-TT-7

-- NOTES --

412

Option or Designator

M405

M405-TT-1
Author

Cross Rafarence

UAN'rONIO

Approval DICK EDWARDS

Date 11/20/72

'l'he M405A Crysta1 c10ck has been known to produce a mu1tip1e pu1se
output when operating in the 5-10 and 19-20 KHZ ranges. If
you experience this problem, replace M40SA with M405B, which
incorporates ECO M405-01. This RCO isolates the analO9' circuitry
ground from the tank cireui try ground, and both widens and
shortens the tank ground path to reduce inductance, thereby
el.iminating the prob1em.
If an M40SB is not available you may install the ECO yourself
Looking at the etch side of the M405A (Handle uPl.
cu"t . the etch between the bottom left shield screw and as. Solder
a. piece of insulated wire from Pin 7 of EI to the ground side of

as foll.<>"181
Rl..

The accompanying sketch illustrates the ground path and the
alt.eration po.ints.

IPAGE

413

" PAGE REVISION

/I

IPUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

ITech Tip
.lNumber M4%5-TT-2

Title SELECTION lJr ':OMPONENTS FOR USE IHTH CRYSTALS
All

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

I I 11 1 1 I

X

Ralph Boehm

Rev

J

0

IApprovathuck Sweeney 00'''9/18/74

Cross Reference

I

On the M40S and R40S Module there may be a need to know what inductor
and capacitor to use with a crystal to obtain a certain frequency. The
following table may be of some use to determine the correct values.
Crystal
Frequency (F)

Inductor (L)
Value & PiN

Approx Value
Of Capacitor (C)

5 to 10 KHz
10 to 25 KHz
25 to 40 KHz
40 to 100 KHz
100 to 250 KHz
250 to 500 KHz
.5 to 1MHz
1 to 2.5'MHz
2.5 to 10 MHz

470 nth 16-00638
220 roh 16-00637
100 roh 16-00632
4.7 mh 16-00639
1000 ph 16-00636
220 ph 16-00634
47 ph 16-00626
10 ph 16-00624
3.3 llh 16-00620

2000 to 400 JIllf
1100 to 200 ppf
400 to 150 llllf
2500 to 500 )lpf
2000 to 400 ppf
1800 to 450 !lllf
2500 to 400 ppf
2500 to 400 !lllf
1300 to 75 ll)lf

*

1

Capacitorvalues can be determined by the formula C =4iF2L '

e.g. Crystal frequency
3. 3 ph inductor.
C -

40X (2.

~8X10' ).

X3.

=

2.88 MHZ - The table above says to use a

3X1~ =

913ppf

Use the closest available size mica capacitor available such as
pIN 10-2344 (1000 )l}lf)
If closer tolerance is needed, then use a trimmer capacitor that may
be purchased locally.

IPAGE

414

DEC 12-(74N}-1l90.NJ74

mamaa!a I
I
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit ~

I

0 I

16Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I

I

MHO to
M848

I~ech Tip M410-TT-l
Number

IAuthor
IApproval

Processor Applicability

I

Option or Designator

0 I

M4lO REED CLOCK

All laII

I

[ [

Bill Freeman

0

Rev

Bill Cummins Date

7-31-72

I

Cross Reference

I

A problem has been encountered with the reed in the M410 reed clock.

The error indication may be that the DCOBA clock interrupts stop,
causing the user program to hang up. The problem may be that the
bracket is not properly supporting the reed. The solution is to put
double sided tape on the bracket so that it holds the bracket to the
top of the reed and the reed is seated properly in its holder. It
may be necessary to elongate the mounting hole on the support bracket
to permit a firm bond between the bracket, the tape and the reed.

ITech Tip
. JNumber

SPEED SELECTION OF M453 CLOCK

Title

All

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

I aJ

[

I

I

I

[

Bill Freeman

IApproval W. C1l1I1II\ins

Rev

0

Date 7/31/72

I
I

M453-TT-l

Cross Reference

When using an M453 variable speed clock in place of an M452 clock in
a DC02A, the following jumpers are used to determine the frequency
of the clock output.
Baud rate

Frequency
200 hz - lK hz

IK hz - 5K hz
5K hz - 25 K hz
25 K hz - 125 K hz
IQ5K hz - 625K hz
Greater than

25 baud
125
625
3125 15625 -

- 125
625

3125
15625
78125

Pins Used On Clock
baud

JI-RI
JI-Pl
JI-NI
JI-MI
JI-LI

greater than

625K hz

78125

JI- KI

If an M453 is to be installed instead of an M452 also add SI to Ul and

VI to +5 on each clock.

COM PANY CONfIDBfTW.
[PAGE

415

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All

ITech Tip
INumber M848-TT-l
Rev 0
Cross Reference

POWER FAIL OPTION (MS4S)
Processor Appficability'
ISMlsE

1 1 1 1I

IAuthor

I

Raloh Boehm

IAppro••l w• Cummins

O.t.

07/31/721

Due to the difference in power supplies between the BE and the
8M, the M848 module must be brought up to Revision "K" to work
correctly.. Revision "J" installs split lugs on the M848, for
use in an 8/M remove the jumper in these split lugsa For use
in an SIE install a jumper.
"8!M jumper out - S!E jumper in"

COMPANY.-mAI.
PAGE REVISIOIII

PUBLICATIOIII DATE

_I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

11uit
Title

All

rn 1 188it

01

188it

01

388it

01

18EI I I I I I

M868

ITachTip

TD8E Beetape Option

ProcossorApplicabUity

I
-Number

IAu-

D

Alva.re

Rev

G

TTfl

I

fApprovaiprankPurcell Date 2/1/741

An unexplainable intermittent data errors occur
when transferring successive blocks of data from
one tape unit to another or to another peripheral.
This change should only be implemented if symtoms
appear and are not due to other likely causes.
SOLUTION:
Tie floating inputs pin 416 on nand gate E40 to output
pin 2 on and gate Gate E38

'PAGE 417

I PAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

Title
All

I

Tech Tip
Number IIB310-'1''1'-1

IIB310 IIANUPAC'l'URINC DEFEC'r

,"
Processor Applicabiljty
IAuthor
I8RI I I I I I IAppro••1

Peter Jones

~ .. __ ' " .

Ii

I

Rev 0

Date

"""8

Cross Reference

711

CS Rev. 1', Etch Rev. P have been known to have a
lIIanu£actaring defect with the et:ch on Side 112 between E53

IIB310's

pin 1113 and B2B pin 112 near C12.
'1'his i . the Direct Clear
Signal for the Skip Flip-Flop.
The failure sgmptolD is a
halt at: location 0153 of' Instruction '1'est
HAINDBC-B/B

'1.

D,AB (Os/loln).
I .. '
Title

I

Tech Tip
Number MS330-THl

WIRE PLACEMENT ERROR. ECQ MS330-003

Pro......, Applicability
II-A_U_thor_..I. e"'....-I.u=.=_____Rev..:.:.._.L_-lI
All I sJ sJ SFI I I I IApproval,
Date
I
D

Cross Ref....

"017

Some M8330 boards have been seen to fail in heavily loaded systems
although they exhibit no p;roblems when tested in a smaller system
or the XOR tester used by production and the repair depot.
The failures are caused by the wire added by ECO#3 (EAE clock)
interfering with the crystal oscillator if it passes near the
capacitors in the oscillator circuit.
Next call check this run and
change it if necessary.

L
Run wire horizontally to ElS, then vertically up to the feedthrough
that is row used.

IPAGE

US

I PAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATION DATE

March 1973

nce

mama. I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I

Gill

12Bit

1&Bi1

0 I

18Bit

0 I

3&Bit

0 I

All

Processor Applicability
I R"I RU I R.. I

I

I

I Author

DOn Herbener

IApprov.I",.~n"

I

Option or Designator

M83S0
to MI8E

1~:~M83S0-TT-l

ADJUSTMENT OF MS3S0 POSITIVE I/O MODULE

Title

I

Rev

0

I

Cross Reference

"",." .. 11 Date 01123/73 I

Many M8350 modules being returned as defective are just out

of adjustment.

To ad~ust

the module put in the following

proqram where XX is a non-existant device code.

7/1/6/6 - 6XX7
7/1/11 - 52/1/1
7/1/12 - 52/6/1
Now look at IOP 1 with probe 1 and IOP 2 with probe 2 at the
moat: distant interface logic. The width of IOP 1 should be
adjusted between 6/1/6 and 8/1/1 nanoseconds and the separation
should be adjusted between 2/1/1 and 4/1' nanoseconds. The specification for total time from the start of IOP 1 to the start
of IOP 2 should be between 8/1/1 nanoseconds and 1 microsecond.
Title

All

iTechTip

DATA BREAK PRIORITY JUMPERS
Processor Applicability

ISE ISM ISF I

I

I

I

iNumber MS360-TT-l

I Author R

Shelley

IApproval

Blundell

J:

Rev

Date 4-1-74

I

Cross Reference

I

KDSE-TT-2

iTechTlp
Title

WIRING ERROR IIC8I

All

Processor Applicability

h?:; I g:.1

I

I

I

INumber
II-Au_tho_r_......
R._N
....
un.....
cw"-_ _ _R_ov_..Jo"--I1

I

IApproval ... Cummins

Date 7/31/72

IfC8I-T'l'-1

cross Reference

I

There is possibly a wiring error in some BI logic serial numbers
1400 to 2500.
The effects are so random in failure rate and
symptoms that situations mag arise where either software errors
or hardware intermittence may be blame4w
An occasslonal illegal
skip on a non-skip IO~, intermittent going to the wrong field,
bad data from or wrong location addressed in MH8I, are among the
symptoms.
~he error will not show up using Naindecs.
The error
is RHF is tied to +3V ll6} which is clamp voltage for HA bits 6
through 8 to the MM.
To check for the error being present look for a jumper between
B15Vl and B06Bl.
If that jumper is there, remove it.

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
I PAGE 4H

II PAGE REVISION

o

I PUBLICATION DATE

Janllary 1973

Title

I

Tech Tip
Number

MISE Manual
Processor Applicability

All

I "FI.EI I I I I

O_-I1

I~A_U1ho_r__W_._F_r_ee_m_._n_ _ _ _R_ev_ _
IApproval

w.

Cummins

Date

MIBE-TT-l
Cross Reference

06/21/721

The preliminary MI8E Manual, Page 3, explains the encoding
scheme oE options.
The discussion for the TD8E is in error.
The data should be:
1312
4312

4312
6773

Title

MI8E RESTRICTION FOR TYPESET BOOTSTRAP

All

Processor Applicabifity

ITech Tip
INumber MI8E-TT-2

l~A:-U1ho_r--:-_F..:,r_e_d.....::J.:e.:w.:e.::1.::1_ _~R::""~..:o~-I1

I.E 1.1 I I I I IApproval

Fred Miller

Cross Reference

Date 02/27/73l

The MISE is a 32 word ROM, used typically to load a bootstrap
into core memory by duplicating the actions or the console
switches (S.R., load address, deposit, etc.)
It was not designed to load less than 32 words into core, and
so the short bootstrap such as the typesetting rim loader have
to be lengthened to 32 words by filling unused locations with
zeros.
This can raise a problem when you
program to dump data contained in
the
by using the SPI switch to run the
of the data.)
by the 1I00tstrap and you load

wish to use a binarg dump
the area loaded with zeros
dump program the easl,} way
ROM (and so zeroing out part

The correct procedure to avoid this problem is to load address
777p (for Typesetting RIM) and start manually i f RIM is in
core, or, i f not, then toggle RIM in manually and then start.
PDPB Engineering has been made aware of the problem and will
decide whether i t is economicalJ.g worth while to add jumpers
to the board to allow loading of shorter blocks than 32 words.

1m.

COMPANY~
PAGE REVISION

A

PUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Option or Designator

MI8E to
MMREJ

T;,te

o

IES
Rev

All

AppKWm J ff Blu dellO~ 3 Ma
Customers purchasing an uncoded MI8E with
it to bootstrap a system device should be
bootstrap logic's first action upon being
ground the power OK H line on the omnibus

the intention of encoding
made aware that the M847
started is to pulse to
(Pin BV2).

Some intelligent mechanical devices such as the RKOS may see this
as an indication that A.C. poWer is about to qo away, and begin a
power down sequence, resulting in a "Not Ready· condition for
several seconds.

During this time, the bootstrap has finished loading core, and
has started the loader running. The loader will typically hang on
a flaq, because the device was not ready.
The stmplest way around this is to precede the bootstrap ,program
with a long I~ loop, to allow the effects of the pseudo power
OK ·not OK to go away, or better still, look at the devices
status register to see when it becomes ready.
(This is the way
in which the recently released MIB-EJ RKOS bootstrap works).
1J

page 421

enMP.,.' .......11

Title

ITech Tip
INumber

MMBEJ MODULE INTERCHANGEABILITY

All

Processor Applicability

18E

IAuthor

I 8J I I I I IApproval

Bruce Tarpley

Rev

g

Frank BurcellDat. 12/1/72

J

MM8EJ-TT-l
Cross Reference

I

There are two combinations of boards which have been shipped to date.
Up until September 15. 1972 Glll Rev. D•• G646 Rev. B., and G233 Rev.
E were shipped. Everything up to serial 1230 falls into this group_
The serial number is stamped in ink on each memory board.

since 9/15/72, GIll Rev. F., G646 Rev. e. , and G233 Rev. F have been
shipped. This is the correct and most up-to-date combination.
Any problem encountered with an MM8EJ with a serial number below 230
should be treated by removing the entire memory and returning it for
repair. The Glll and G646 may be retrofitted. but the G223 should be
scrapped.

Any MM8EJ with serial number greater than 230 has modules which are
totally interchangeable and may be replaced singularly if necessary.
If a 0 or E Rev GIll must be retrofitted to an F Rev in the field, the
following procedure must be followed:
Use a G233 which has both a 14.7K and 34.8K resistor in it.
(R96 and R97)

With a
the +5
the +5
be put

Digital Voltmeter, measure the voltage on pin HAl, V~y and
volts. Vxv must be between -3.65 and -3.70 with respe6t to
volt measurement. To change Vxy , a parallel resistor should
across R65.

Below is a list of useful resistor values which may be used for R65.
Valve

Pin #

2.37K
2.49K
2.61K
2.74K

13-10632 ~ watt, 1%
13-00424 !s watt, 1%
13-03303 ~ watt, 1%
13-04868 ~ watt, 1%

To change from 2.37K to 2.74K gives a voltage change in Vxy of
approximately 130 mv. If R65 is made larger, Vxy becomes smaller.

COM PANY CONFIDENTIAL
I PAGE

422

II PAGE

REVISION

II PUBLICATION OATE

December 1972

mamaama I

I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
Title
All

l2Bit

01

l6Bit

01

l8Bi.

0 I

36Bit

1141 I

I

I

I

IAuthor Larry Goelz
I 1Approval G. Chaisson

MM14A

0 I
iTech Tip

I Number

POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT FOR MM14A
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

S

Date 01/24173

MM14A-TT-l

I

Cross Reference

1

If the power supply in the MM14A requires replacing, it is important
that the components mounted around the convenience outlet be removed ..
These components are not a part of the H716 '(armour) power supply.
The components to be removed are:

1.

One transformer - FX25

44'16 p.fd

2.

One capacitor

-

3.

One resistor

- 22K

4.

Two diodes

-

416164

It is suggested that the old supply be removed when the replacement
is on hand.

Title
All

ITech Tip
INumber

M741C REVISION FOR OPERATION WITH MM14A

IAuthor

Processor Applicability

I 14 I I I I

I

1Approval

MM14A-TT-2
Cross Reference

J

Rev "

hi

G. Chaisson Date 7/30/73

1

The M741 must be a revision "0" in order to operate the MM14A properly
If a Revision "D: is not available perform the following steps to
convent a M741 Rev. "C': to Rev. "0':.
Reference:
Figure 1 and 2
Parts List: Table 1
1)
2)

Remove IC E14~ DEC 7400, from the M741
Cut the etch from the following pins
"Ref. Fig.
a)
E14 Pins 3, 11 and 12
b)
E14 pin 2 to E16 pin 11 *
c)
BPI to E14 Pin 4 and E17 pin 3

3)

Install a DEC 7410 into E14

4)

Connect the following pins Ref.
a)
b)

c)

to fig.

1

& 2"

1

E14 Pin 12 to E8 Pin 5
E14 Pin 2 to E8 Pin 3
E14 Pin 3 to Pin BPI

COM PANY CONF1DEN1lAL

IpAGE 423

I PAGE REVISION

A

I PUBLICATION DATE

'lay H74

Title

T ON WITH MM14A
Author

All

Approvat

aisson

Date

d)

Pin BPI to lK resistor other end to +5 volt side of

e)
f)

E14
El7
E17
E17

R33

g)

h)

pin
pin
pin
pin

10 to E14 pin 11
10 to E13 pin 1
8 to E17 pin 9
8 to E16 pin 11

* E14 pin 1 and pin 2 are

j umpered leave jumper in stalled.

Part List
lK
DEC

~

WATT

13-~~36S

7410

19·-~5576

Table 1

......

Du
."

"lot

."
Fiqure 1

Page

424

~

B

0

mamaa!D I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I
r

IXlI

12Bit

16B;'

0 I

1BBit

0 I

36B;,

I

Option or Designator

ol

~M14" tn 'lISE

I
\ Tech TIp
Itelnstallation of ~1M14A. in PDP14 without lJL14 Option INumber M1I114A-TT-3

AU

Processor Applicability
IAuthor Freo Silva
1141 I I I I I IApproval Don Herbener
!l.!M14_~

When installing an

Rev 0

Date 16 May74

I
I

Cross Reference

(BeO 14-i')054)in a PDP-14 ,dthout DL14 wiring,

make the following wiring additions in olace of those listed in that F.CO.
NO't'F.: ALL WIRING CHAlqt';ES ARF. J1..DDITIONS ..
~.Q!H.'I:tQ~,s.

signal Nallie

From pi.n

TO Pin

Mcm GO mem

S9l2Ll

Ini-Lialize L

B.02pl
D.02N1

1I.J'l"lL2
B18Rl
B23Pl

HD T pulse
EEM H

B.02el

1118V2

IRll (1) H
Mem done L
LD MB L
pel ~H:l (1) H
PCl ):11 (1) H

S¢2Bl
S¢2Kl
O.'J2Jl

D2352
11.2382
B24Jl
c19E2
c19H2

pel 02 (1)
PCl "'3

H

(1) H

PCl. ¢4 (1) H

PCl 1'5 (l) H
PCl ~6 (1) H
PCl ji!7 ll) H
PCl .08 (1) H
pcl 0'9 (1) H
PCl 1.0 (1) H
PCl 11 {l} H
tlB 00 (1) H
MB ~1 (1) H
ME 132 {lJ H
ME 102 (1) H
MB 04 (1) H
}olB ;15 {I} it

Me .06 (1) H
HR ~7

(1)

H

Me ~B (l) H
Me JZ9 (1) H
ME 1.0 (1) H
MEll (1) H
MBS 00 L
ME:;; ¢1 L
)oms 02 L
MeS 03L
MES 04 L
MBS .05 L
MES 06 L
MES .07 L
MBS .08 L
MBS 0'9 L
MBS 10 L
MSS 11 L
Enable Mem L
GOD 1
OND 2

liND'
GND4
<>IDS
cND6

IPAGE

425

II PAGE REVISION

Dj1I:!l>l

D02H1
DP2Rl
D02Fl
D%2Vl
00'201
0¢2ul
002El
0¢2Ml
0)il2Al
n.02Ll
013281
c02Ll
C¢2K2
C02L2
C.02Kl
C.02Rl
C.02D2
CJJ2Sl
c.02E2
c.02F1
c.02s1
c0'2F2
C02AI
c02M2
C02Jl
C.0'2Ml
C~2J2

C02pl
CJiJ2El
C.02Nl
C¢2Dl
c!1i2H2
C02Cl
c02Hl
c.02B2
S02Ul

A0'2'1'1
S.02C2
BJ1l"2Tl
C.02C2
C.02Tl
n0'2c2

A

Bj1III<2

R.04f'2
A¢4R2
JI.P'4S2
B0'4D2
sji!4E2
n¢4N2
B.iil4Pl
s.0:l-s1
B.04Rl
Cl8E2
C18H2
c18K2
cl8M2
Cl8P2
clfls2
018E2
D18H2
0181<;2
DISM2
n18p2
01852
A0'4El
A04Jl
B0'4Hl
B0'4Fl
A0'4RI
J\04.'"
B.""OI
B.04E1
B04NI
B9!4Ml
A.04Fl
A.04Kl
O.04c2
1'.17'1'1
fl17C2
B17Tl
C17C2

C17'l'1
D17C2

II PUBLICATIDN DATE

"av

1974

Title PDP-l2 MEMORY BUS TERMINATION
AIIX;

Processor Applicability

1 1 1 1 I 11

ITech Tip

Number MMBI-TI-l

If-A:-"_"'_or-LHLWL"'Om"''''--,a_ _ _ _ _ _R_ev_.....:.._-!1
JApprova'H

Lon.

Date 6/2/72

Cross Reference

I

Dwg. A-MU-MMBI-A specifies that a G7l7 terminator is to be used at the physical
end of the memory bus. The PDP-l2 memory bus drivers are severely loaded by
a G717 and memory problems may occur. Instead, use a M9~6 terminator in
A32 or D32 as necessary. NOTE: The M906 requires a +5 volt supply; jumper +5V
to A32A2 or D32A2 as necessary.

Title

I~:c!~~ MM8I-TT-2

Noise In MMBI

I~--~~~~----~~~
Author
R. Nunley
Rev B
I
I I I I IApproval w. Camm.'n.' Date 7/31(72 I

Processor Applicability

AXI I !

Cross Reference

We are getting complaints of erratic operation of MM's on systems 12K
and up.
The symptoms are inability to run EAE maindecs in field 2 and
up or occasional jumping to wrong field for data or instructions, or
inability to manual load or examine in field 2 and up, etc.
The problem is noise pick-up in the ~M due to proximity of roem done
and mem start, and between EA bit signal lines, and in some cases,
poor termination.
The following is a summary of cures for the problem:
Buffer mem start and TP2.

EC081-Il'JlJl54
ECO

8I-~~~85

Install in all with MM.

Delay TP3 by 50 nanosec to allow adder more set-up
time.
Install in all with MC.
Buffers EA bits and increases drive capability.
Install
~n all with MM where noisey EA bits are observed.

BCO 8I-%J1107
ECO.M1Jl8I-~YJ,015

-

Inhibits mem done from a nonexistent field in MM8IA
or MM8IC. Install in all MM8IA or MM8IC.
ECOMM8IA-.0.0,016
corrects ECOMM8IA-,0.0.0IS.
(Last line should read BOSEl
to B06El - add, instead of BO 6Bl to BO 6El - add.)

ECOMM8I-.0.0~12

-

Terminates mem start and TP2 in last MM.
last MM.

Install in

The Cure for inductive pick up between mem start and mem done is to
reroute and separate the ,two by maintaining the current pin connections
but reroute mem start across the itA" row and mem done across the liD"
row, instead of both running ar:ross the "B" row.
The same, type thing
could be done for the EA lines if inductive noise is observed on them
in the MM.
PAGf 426
PAGE REVISION
A
PUBLICATION DATE February 1973

I

/I

/I

Option or Designator

mamaDla
Title

Mr481

MMBI

4/k-8/K Conversion
Autbo~ T _ ~,.

Processor Applicability

AI!

I

i

Tech Tip

Number ~8I-TT-3

\nF

Rev :a.

I

I I I I I I I II-:'A-ppr-O~yaL..1-:w:-'-.lllc:Wurnrn~i-ns--Da-t.-;2;-;/-;-6/~7-::-3----11

Cross Reference

An t-1M8I-A is the rt"1 logic with only 4K installed.
ECO MMSI-OfJ013 prevents the generation of memory done from the non-existent field in an
HMBI-A. The MMBI is wired initially as an r1.~8I-B (aR).
To make it
operate properly as an r'l~81 (4K), wirinq should be done after BCO
fl1M8I-00013 has been installed.
DELETE:

BOBEl to B06Bl -

DELETE:

R06Sl to B06Bl - ADD: B08El to B06Bl

ADD: B06Sl to B06Bl

To revert
to BK:

These wiring changes are shown in the ECO drawing but not in the ADD/
DELETE list.

PAGE REVISION
DEC 12·(741'1)-1189·1'1374

PUBLICATION DATE

Title.

ITech Tip
INumber J\R

Navigation menu